SPACE GASS 12 Manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual
Table of Contents
Introduction
Introduction
How to use this manual
Legal notice
Hardware requirements
Product support
Hardware locks and insurance
New features
1
2
6
10
11
12
13
Installation and Configuration
27
Installation and configuration

Installing SPACE GASS
Configuring SPACE GASS
Folders and files
Text formatting
General configuration
Graphics scale calibration
Graphics colors
General colors
Problem size limits
Renderer configuration
Customizing toolbars
Customizing property panels
The SPACE GASS utility tool
27
28
29
30
33
35
39
40
42
43
44
48
52
55
Getting Started
59
Getting started
Starting SPACE GASS
Command line options
The main SPACE GASS window
The status line
Using the mouse
Dialogue boxes
59
60
61
64
66
69
70
iii

Data entry
Managing job files
Starting a new job
Opening a job
Merging jobs
Saving a job
Deleting a job
Cleaning up a job
Running a macro
Running a script
Job status
Shortcuts
72
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
84
86
90
91
Input Methods
95
Input methods
95
Linking to Other Programs
97
Linking to other programs

CIMSteel/2 Step, IFC Step and Revit links
Import links
Export links
Special Revit Structure links
DXF links
Importing DXF files
Exporting DXF files
97
100
104
108
111
114
115
116
Modelling the Structure
121
Modelling the structure

Coordinate systems
Sign conventions
Ill-conditioning and instabilities
121
122
128
134
Project Data
137
Project data
137
iv
Table of Contents
Units
Job details and attachments
Node data
Member data
Plate data
Node restraint data
Section property data
Standard section libraries
Shape builder
Flipping a section
Column and beam Tee sections
Angle sections
Material property data
Master-slave constraint data
Member offset data
Node load data
Prescribed node displacement data
Member concentrated load data
Member distributed force data
Member distributed torsion data
Thermal load data
Member prestress data
Plate pressure data
Self weight data
Combination load case data
Load case title data
Lumped mass data
Spectral load data
Spectral curve editor
Importing a spectral curve
Area load data
Sea load data
Moving load data
138
140
142
144
151
158
162
166
167
175
176
177
179
181
189
191
192
194
196
199
201
203
205
207
209
212
213
216
219
221
223
226
227
Text File Input
229
Text file input

Text file format
Initiator
Headings text
Nodes text
229
230
231
232
233

Members text
Plates text
Node restraints text
Section properties text
Material properties text
Master-slave constraints text
Member offset text
Node loads text
Prescribed node displacements text
Member concentrated loads text
Member distributed forces text
Member distributed torsions text
Thermal loads text
Member prestress loads text
Plate pressure loads text
Self weight text
Combination load cases text
Load case titles text
Lumped masses text
Spectral loads text
Steel member design text
Terminator
Text file errors
Text file example
234
236
237
238
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
259
260
265
Structure Wizard
269
Structure wizard
269
Portal Frame Builder
273
Portal frame builder

Portal frame geometry
Portal frame extra data
Portal frame sections and materials
Portal frame loads
Portal frame load cases
Portal frame design
Portal frame assumptions
273
275
279
282
283
288
289
291
vi
Table of Contents
Datasheet Input
293
Datasheet input
Using datasheets
293
294
Graphical Input
301
Graphical overview
The renderer
The traditional graphics window
Selection methods
Select all
Attachment and alignment methods
Grid
Snap
Ortho
Attach
Plane
Coordinates
Using the keyboard to position points
Infotips
Property panels
Multiple viewports
Node properties
Member properties
Plate properties
Node restraints
Section properties
Material properties
Master-slave constraints
Member offsets
Copy node properties
Copy member properties
Copy plate properties
Draw
Move
Rotate
Copy
Mirror
Delete
301
303
329
338
340
341
345
348
350
351
354
356
358
360
361
366
368
371
375
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
390
392
393
396
397
vii

Stretch
Scale
Generate arc
Generate bends
Subdivide
Mesh
Connect
Intersect
Extend
Remove intermediate nodes
Remove crossed member nodes
Move intermediate nodes
Align members
Generate taper/haunch
Reverse member direction
Reverse plate direction
Align plate axes
Renumber
Connectivity check
Node loads
Prescribed node displacements
Member concentrated loads
Member distributed forces
Member distributed torsions
Thermal loads
Member prestress loads
Plate pressure loads
Self weight
Combination load cases
Load case titles
Lumped masses
Static load to mass conversion
Spectral loads
Area loads
Sea Loads
Moving loads
Varying plate pressure loads
Copy node loads
Copy member loads
Copy plate loads
Managing load cases
View nodes / members / plates
viii
398
399
400
401
403
405
408
409
411
412
413
414
415
417
420
421
423
424
427
428
430
432
434
437
440
443
445
447
448
452
453
455
457
458
463
472
485
490
491
492
493
495
Table of Contents
View node / member / plate properties
View global origin
View local axes
View member origins
View labelling and annotation
Load case titles viewer
View results in local XY or XZ plane
View diagrams
View plate contours
View envelope
View dynamic mode shapes
View buckling mode shapes
View steel member design groups
View steel member top flanges
View steel member flange restraints
View steel member design results
Query frame
Query analysis results
Query steel member design results
Redraw
Zoom
Pan
Scales
Find
Filters
Views
Viewpoint
View manager
Notes
Measurements and dimensions
Gridlines
Textures
Transparency
Repeat last command
496
497
498
499
500
502
504
505
506
509
510
512
513
514
515
516
518
519
521
522
523
525
526
528
532
535
537
540
541
544
547
549
551
554
Analysis
555
Analysis
Static analysis
Displacements, actions and reactions
P-D effect
555
556
558
560
ix

P-d effect
Tension-only and compression-only effects
Cable members
Non-linear analysis procedure
Static analysis buckling
The wavefront optimizer
The wavefront analysis method
A quick frontwidth calculation method
The wavefront method in more detail
Running a static analysis
Static analysis results
Dynamic frequency analysis
Modelling considerations
Running a dynamic frequency analysis
Dynamic frequency analysis results
Dynamic response analysis
Running a dynamic response analysis
Dynamic response procedure
Dynamic response analysis results
Buckling analysis
Buckling effective lengths
Special buckling considerations
Running a buckling analysis
Buckling analysis results
Analysis warnings and errors
561
562
564
567
569
570
576
577
578
579
588
589
590
591
598
599
601
605
606
609
611
613
616
622
624
Steel Member Design
629
Steel member design

Steel member input methods
Auto-create steel members
Steel member input form
Steel member input datasheet
Copy steel member properties
Steel member design data
Steel member design sign conventions
Member groups
Flange restraints
Column and beam Tees
Running a steel member design
Updating analysis member sizes
629
631
632
637
640
641
642
653
654
660
668
669
678
Table of Contents
Serviceability check
The steel member design/check process
Design groups and intermediate stations
Design segments
Section check
Member check
Critical flange
Effective flange restraints
Twist factor
Load height factor
Lateral rotation factor
End moment ratios and other factors
Eccentric effects for compression members
Eccentric effects for tension members
The code check
Steel member design results
Steel member design/check assumptions
BS5950-1:2000 code specific items
Hong Kong CP2011 code specific items
AISC 360-10 code specific items
Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:2005 code specific items
AS/NZS 4600:2005 code specific items
Steel member design/check errors
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
689
690
692
694
695
696
697
698
700
706
712
715
721
726
731
Steel Connection Design
735
Steel connection design

Creating and editing connections
The connection manager
Design considerations
Connection reports
Connection preferences
735
737
752
759
761
763
Concrete Column Design
765
Concrete column design

Running a concrete column design
Concrete column configuration
Concrete column design results
Concrete column assumptions and notes
765
766
774
776
777
xi

Output
779
Output
Page setup
View text report
Print preview
Print text report
Print graphics
The status report
779
784
787
788
791
792
793
Standard Libraries
795
Standard libraries
The library editor
795
797
Importing and exporting
800
Importing old libraries

Section libraries
Material libraries
Bolt libraries
Plate libraries
Weld libraries
Reinforcing bar libraries
Spectral curve libraries
Vehicle libraries
801
802
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
Portal Frame Analysis
811
Portal frame analysis

Geometry and loads
Method of input
Analysis procedure
Analysis results
Graphical output
Analysis input report
Static analysis report (itemised)
Static analysis report (enveloped)
Bill of materials report
811
813
818
820
821
822
827
843
867
882
xii
Table of Contents
Dynamic frequency analysis report
Dynamic response analysis report
Buckling analysis report
883
884
886
Portal Frame Member Design
889
Portal frame member design

Member design results
Steel member design report
889
894
896
Portal Frame Connection Design
897
Portal frame connection design

Connection design results
897
899
Cable Analysis
921
Cable analysis
Method of input
Analysis procedure
Analysis results
921
923
924
925
Converting Old Jobs
935
Converting old jobs
935
Bibliography
937
Bibliography
937
Index
941
xiii
Introduction
Introduction
SPACE GASS 12
60th Edition, July 2014
SPACE GASS is a general purpose structural analysis and design program for 2D
and 3D frames, trusses, grillages, beams and plates. It includes a full complement
of features that make it suitable for any job from small beams, trusses and portal
frames to large high rise buildings, towers and bridges.
To see the new features recently added, refer to New features.
Its emphasis on graphics means that you easily see the status of your model at all
times. In fact, the extensive range of graphical editing tools allow you to input your
model or make changes entirely within the graphical editor. Of course, if you
prefer to work with datasheets or other methods of input then they are available
too.
A structure wizard automatically generates the initial data for many typical
structures which you can then manipulate to create the exact model you want.
State of the art solvers for linear and non-linear static analysis, dynamic analysis
and buckling analysis are available. Steel and concrete design modules for various
international codes of practice are also available.
Graphical and text reports can be generated for any parts of the structural model.
Comprehensive filters that can be defined graphically allow you to customize your
graphical views and output reports to include just want you want to see.
Although SPACE GASS is a comprehensive program with many advanced
features, its logical menu structure, toolbars and graphical emphasis makes it easy
to learn and use, even for first time users. If you have questions or need help then
you will probably find the answers in this manual.
How to use this manual

Illustrated as follows is an example of each of the three outline styles used in this
manual. These styles are designed to draw your attention to information in one of
three ways: as a hint, an important note or general note.
Hints are non-essential, but useful, pieces of information which will improve your
understanding of the program. Hints sometimes identify a special way of doing
something and are typically quite specific.
Important notes should be carefully read and understood. They outline information
that is vital to the effective use of the software.
Notes identify articles of information which are meant as an aside to aid your
understanding of SPACE GASS. Some notes are quite general in nature and do not
give reference to a specific procedure. Notes may also serve to draw your attention
to specific interpretation.
HINTS
This is an example of the SPACE GASS HINTS
style and icon.
IMPORTANT NOTES
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
This is an example of the SPACE GASS important note style and icon.
NOTES
This is an example of the SPACE GASS NOTES style and icon.

Following is a brief overview of each section in the manual.
Chapter 1 "Installation and Configuration"
Deals with the installation and configuration of SPACE GASS. Once the software
is installed and running correctly, you should not have to refer to this chapter again.
Introduction
Chapter 2 "Getting Started"
If you are new to frame analysis programs or Windows programs in general, then
you should read this chapter before attempting to run a job. It provides very good
basic information that you will need to know about the operation of SPACE GASS.
Chapter 3 "Input Methods"
Explains the four main methods of inputting and editing your model.
Chapter 4 "Linking to Other Programs"
Describes how data can be transferred between SPACE GASS and other structural
analysis, CAD and building management programs.
Chapter 5 "Modelling the Structure"
Discusses the basics of how you can model a structure with SPACE GASS and
includes information on nodes, members, restraints, coordinate systems, sign
conventions, etc.
Chapter 6 "Project Data"
Gives a detailed description of each type of data that can be used in the frame
analysis part of the model. Data for steel and concrete design is not included (see
later chapters). This chapter deals only with the data itself, and leaves the
discussion of the numerous methods that you can use to input the data to later
chapters.
Chapter 7 "Text File Input"
Describes the format of standard SPACE GASS text files. This is one of the five
methods of data entry. You can type your data into a standard text file and then
import it into SPACE GASS. Standard text files can also be used as an alternative
for permanent storage of data.
Chapter 8 "Structure Wizard"
Another method of input involves selecting from a number of standard structures,
answering a few simple questions about the structure selected, and then having the
structure wizard generate all of the frame data for you. Any of the other data entry
methods can be used to modify the data after it has been generated using this
method.
Chapter 9 "Portal Frame Builder"
Described in detail the portal frame builder and how it can be used to generate the
complete model of a portal frame building including the full structure, loads
(including wind loads) and design data.

Chapter 10 "Datasheet Input"
Is a modified form of spreadsheet input which allows you to input or edit any parts
of the frame data or steel design data. Along with graphical input, this is probably
one of the most useful and versatile methods of data entry.
Chapter 11 "Graphical Input"
Covers all of the graphics facilities, including those in the renderer. This includes
graphical structure input, graphical load input, graphical steel design input,
connection drawing detail, graphical output of loading, displacement, bending
moment, shear force, stress, axial force and animated mode shape diagrams. Full
descriptions are also given for the many commands associated with drawing,
moving, copying, rotating, mirroring, erasing, zooming, panning, scaling,
coordinate systems, changing the viewpoint, labelling, querying diagrams, viewing
the rendered model, hidden line removal, renumbering, etc.
Chapter 12 "Analysis"
The static, dynamic and buckling analysis modules, together with their options and
control parameters are fully described here.
Chapter 13 "Steel Member Design"
Details the use of the steel member design module. Please pay particular attention
to the assumptions listed near the end.
Chapter 14 "Steel Connection Design"
Details the use of the steel connection design module.
Chapter 15 "Concrete Column Design"
Details the use of the reinforced concrete column design module. Please pay
particular attention to the assumptions listed near the end.
Chapter 16 "Output"
Describes the types of output reports and graphics hardcopies that can be obtained
and the options that are available for sorting, formatting, enveloping, positioning
on the page, etc.
Chapter 17 "Standard Libraries"
SPACE GASS is supplied with a number of standard section, material, bolt, plate
and weld libraries. This chapter provides a complete guide on how you can
customise any of these libraries, or create your own section libraries.
Introduction
Appendix A "Portal Frame Analysis"
Presents a detailed report on the analysis of a typical steel portal frame. Full
discussions regarding the input data and the decisions involved in producing it are
included, together with complete printouts of the analysis input and output reports.
Appendix B "Portal Frame Member Design"
Presents a detailed report on the member design for the steel portal frame analysed
in appendix B. It includes a discussion on how the steel members are being
modelled, together with complete printouts of the member design input and output
reports.
Appendix C "Portal Frame Connection Design"
Presents a detailed report on the connection design for the steel portal frame
analysed in appendix B. It includes a discussion on how the steel connections are
being modelled, together with complete printouts of the connection design input
and output reports.
Appendix D "Cable Analysis"
Presents a worked example demonstrating the input and analysis of a 30m tall,
guyed mast. The catenary cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a
nominal guy member, this is then compared to the result obtained from SPACE
GASS.
Appendix E "Converting Old Jobs"
Explains how you can convert data files that were produced with SPACE GASS
v1, v2 or v3 for loading into the latest version. Note that data files produced with
SPACE GASS 4 or later are automatically converted into the latest format when
they are opened.
Appendix F "Bibliography"
A list of references.
Legal notice
End User License Agreement
Notice to Licensee:
This End User License Agreement (the "Agreement") is a legal agreement between
you and I.T.S. Integrated Technical Software Pty Ltd (ACN 086 605 567) ("ITS"),
a registered company under the Corporations Law of the State of Victoria,
Australia. BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. If you do not agree to all
the terms and conditions of this Agreement or if you do not have the authority to
agree to all the terms and conditions of this Agreement on behalf of the licensee
then you MUST NOT USE THE PRODUCT. Provided the Product has not been
used and is not a loan, student or evaluation version, you may return it to your
place of purchase for a full refund.
1. Definitions. For the purposes of this Agreement, the following terms shall have
the following meanings:
1.1 "Product" shall mean and include the SPACE GASS software,
updates, CDs, computer disks, Security Devices, help files, reference
manual or other instructions, technical support or any other software, items
or information of any kind provided by ITS or obtained from the
www.spacegass.com web site.
1.2 "Software" shall mean all software included in the Product.
1.3 "Security Devices" shall mean and include hardware or software that
limits the number of users that may operate the Software simultaneously,
or imposes an Expiry Date beyond which the Software cannot be used, or
prevents certain parts of the Software from being used.
1.4 "Expiry Date" shall mean the date imposed by any Security Devices
beyond which the Software cannot be used.
1.5 "ITS" includes its employees, agents and suppliers.
2. License. The Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright
treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Product is
licensed, not sold.
Introduction
2.1 Grant of License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
Agreement, ITS grants to you a non-exclusive license to use the Product
during the term of this Agreement.
2.2 User Limit. The Software may be installed on an unlimited number of
computers, however the maximum number of users operating it
simultaneously may not exceed the user limit imposed by the Security
Devices.
2.3 Reference Manual. You may make such copies of the reference
manual as are reasonably necessary for your use of the Product by the
permitted number of simultaneous users, but you may not make copies of
the reference manual for any other purpose without the prior written
consent of ITS.
3. Ownership; Proprietary Rights. ITS shall at all times be the owner of and have
all rights to the Product, and all intellectual property associated therewith,
including but not limited to patents, copyrights, trade names and marks, domain
names, and trade secrets related thereto. The Product is protected by copyright laws
and international treaty provisions. Nothing herein shall cause or imply a sale,
license or transfer of any intellectual property rights of ITS to you or to any third
party, except as expressly set forth herein. You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the
Software. You may not attempt to reverse engineer, duplicate or bypass any
Security Devices.
4. Disclaimers. ITS makes no warranties or representations as to the Product to
you or to any other party. To the extent permitted by applicable law, all implied
warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose, are hereby disclaimed.
5. Limitation of Liability. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, in
no event shall ITS be liable for any punitive, exemplary, consequential, indirect,
incidental, or special damages arising from or related to the use of the Product by
any party, including without limitation damages arising from loss of data, loss of
revenue or profits or failure to realize savings or other benefits, even if ITS has
been advised of or should be aware of the possibility of such damages. In the event
of any defect in the Product ITS may, at its option;
i.
ii.
iii.
replace the Product or supply its equivalent;

repair the Product;
pay for the cost of replacing the Product or of acquiring its equivalent; or

iv.
pay for the cost of having the error in the Product rectified.
To the extent that the Product involves providing a service, in the event of any
error or defect in the provision of that service ITS may, at its option;
i.
ii.
supply the service again; or

pay for the cost of having the service supplied again.
Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
liability, the above limitation may not apply to you.
6. Indemnification. You, at your sole expense, will defend, indemnify and hold
ITS harmless from and with respect to any loss or damage (including reasonable
attorneys fees and costs) incurred in connection with, any suit or proceeding
brought by a third party against ITS insofar as such suit or proceeding shall be
based upon (i) any claim arising out of or relating to your use of the Product except
where such claim alleges that the Software infringes or constitutes wrongful use of
any copyright, trade secret, patent or trade mark of any third party; or (ii) any claim
arising out of or relating to any act or omission by you. You will pay any damages
and costs assessed against ITS (or paid or payable by ITS pursuant to a settlement
agreement) in connection with such a suit or proceeding.
7. Changes to the Product. ITS may change the Product from time to time without
notice to you and shall not be under any obligation to provide you with any
notification of such change.
8. Non-Transferability. You may not rent, lease, sub-license, lend or transfer the
Product to another person or legal entity without the prior written consent of ITS.
9. Term and Termination. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the
date that you install or use the Product and shall continue (unless earlier terminated
as provided herein) until the Expiry Date, or in perpetuity if no Expiry Date is
imposed. Without prejudice to any other rights, ITS may terminate this Agreement
at any time if you fail to comply with its terms and conditions.
Upon termination of this Agreement for any reason whatsoever, you shall cease all
use of the Product and remove all copies of the Software from your computers.
10. General.
10.1 Assignment. You may not assign or transfer this Agreement or any of
your rights, duties or obligations hereunder and this Agreement may not be
Introduction
involuntarily assigned or assigned by operation of law, without the prior
written consent of ITS, which consent may be granted or withheld by ITS
in its sole discretion.
10.2 Severability. Each provision of this Agreement is intended to be
severable. If any covenant, condition or other provision contained in this
Agreement is held to be invalid or illegal by any court of competent
jurisdiction, such provision shall be deemed severable from the remainder
of the Agreement and shall in no way affect, impair or invalidate any other
covenant, condition or other provision contained in this Agreement. If such
covenant, condition or other provision shall be deemed invalid due to its
scope or breadth, such covenant, condition or other provision shall be
deemed valid to the extent of the scope or breadth permitted by law.
10.3 Governing Law. You agree that the use of the Product by you shall
be governed by the laws of the State of Victoria and the Commonwealth of
Australia, and you consent to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
that State and the Commonwealth.
10.4 Attorneys Fees. If any legal action is brought arising out of or
relating to this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to receive
its reasonable attorneys fees and court costs in addition to any other relief
it may be entitled.
10.5 Entire Agreement. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive
statement of the agreement of the parties hereto with respect to the subject
matter hereof, and supercedes all prior and concurrent agreements,
promises, proposals, representations and warranties, oral or written, with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
Hardware requirements
Windows XP/Vista/7/8 (Windows 7 or 8 preferred).

32-bit or 64-bit Windows operating system (64-bit preferred).
Intel or AMD CPU (Intel multi-core preferred).
Any graphics card with at least 2Gb RAM (NVIDIA preferred).
Note that SPACE GASS 12 supports hardware acceleration with NVIDIA and ATI
graphics cards and will perform best with those brands. For other graphics cards,
operations such as zooming, panning, rotating and scaling in the renderer will run
considerably slower. It is expected that future versions of SPACE GASS 12 will
support hardware acceleration in all modern graphics cards.
10
Introduction
Product support
Product support includes:
Notification of any program modifications or enhancements as they become

available.
Update facility for those users wishing to upgrade to the latest version.
Replacement of any software which is found to be defective through no fault of
the user or which does not conform to the general published function of the
software.
Telephone, facsimile and email support by I.T.S. or an authorised dealer.
Comprehensive Internet web site providing latest information, drivers, updates,
libraries, etc. for all registered SPACE GASS users.
I.T.S. reserves the right to charge for telephone, facsimile or email support.
11
Hardware locks and insurance

SPACE GASS is sometimes supplied with a hardware lock that must be inserted
into the parallel or USB port before the software will run. If the hardware lock is
faulty or becomes damaged or destroyed, it can be replaced for a nominal fee
provided that a remnant of the lock showing a valid serial number can be produced
proving that it is a genuine SPACE GASS hardware lock.
The hardware lock cannot be replaced for a nominal fee if it is lost or stolen and,
for this reason, it is recommended that the user insure the software package and
hardware lock for the full current market value of the software.
12
Introduction
New features
The key new features added in SPACE GASS since v10 are as follows. Note that
minor new features, enhancements and bug fixes are not listed here.
Version 12.00
This is a major upgrade containing many new features and substantial
performance improvements, especially in the analysis solvers and graphics
engine. It also makes the renderer the main interface for the program.
Introduced a new "Paradise" solver for the static, buckling and dynamic
frequency analysis modules. It is a sparse matrix solver that fully utilizes the
parallel processing capabilities of modern multi-core CPUs. The new solver is
usually between 10 and 100 times faster than SPACE GASS 11. The most
dramatic speed savings occur with jobs that have a large matrix frontwidth and
lots of load cases.
The renderer graphics now fully utilizes the parallel processors on the graphics
card rather than doing the graphics calculations on the main CPU. This means
that deflection diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear force diagrams, etc.
can be scaled up and down smoothly regardless of the size of the job, even in
fully rendered 3D mode.
The renderer has been given a major overhaul with a new user interface that now
has almost all of the functionality of the traditional SPACE GASS window. This
means that you can do everything in the renderer without constantly having to
switch back to the traditional SPACE GASS window. The new functionality in
the renderer includes:
New user interface that can be configured with different skins and user
defined layouts.
Substantial performance increases and no annoying delays or pauses.
Opening and saving of jobs.
Generating reports.
Structure wizards.
Datasheets.
Node, member and plate drawing and editing tools.
Loading input and editing tools.
Filtering.
Scaling.
13
Static, buckling and dynamic analysis.

Steel and concrete design.
Display of all analysis result diagrams such as deflections, moments,
contours, etc.
Ability to show fully rendered deflections rather than just wireframe.
Animated mode shapes.
Version 11.09
Released an all new Steel Connection Design module for AS4100 that complies
with the latest ASI design guides.
Released a new Steel Member Design module for AS4600 that works with the
cold formed sections from manufacturer including Lysaght, Stramit, Duragal and
others. Supported sections include Cees, Zeds, angles, tophats, channels, back-toback Cees, CHSs, SHSs and RHSs. New cold formed section libraries for
Lysaght, Stramit and Duragal have also been included.
The Portal frame builder now automatically creates all of the main connections in
the building. They can then be used in the steel connection design module.
Allow a steel member design to be performed via a script file with the user being
able to control the design groups, sections properties and load cases considered.
Allow exporting of steel member design/check summaries to a text file or MSExcel/Access/Word file.
Version 11.08
Various new script commands have been added that allow you to have more
control over importing/exporting and analysis. You can also pause the script to
see what stage it is up to at any point.
Version 11.05
Released a Portal Frame Builder module for the modelling of portal frame
buildings in SPACE GASS. It generates the full structural model plus dead loads,
live loads, wind loads and steel member design data. The module supports gable
(symmetrical and asymmetrical) and monoslope roofs, overhangs, knee braces,
haunches, fly bracing, uneven frame spacings, openings, roof/wall bracing and
end wall props. Wind loads are generated in accordance with AS/NZS
1170.2:2011 for all regions in Australia and New Zealand.
14
Introduction
Version 11.01
Released a Sea Load module for the calculation of wave, current, marine growth
and buoyancy loads on submerged structures in marine and offshore
environments.
Version 11.00
This is a major new version that includes a new 3D renderer with full editing
capabilities. Of course you can still edit your model in the traditional SPACE
GASS window, however the editing tools in the renderer are generally more
advanced and offer additional features over the traditional editing tools.
Some of the load input tools, design data tools and analysis results diagrams are
not yet available in the renderer, however they will be added soon.
Member force and moment envelope reports can now be limited to the maximum
and minimum values taken from just one end of the members rather than from
both ends.
The analysis engine has also had a major make-over with finite and large
displacement theory added, plus options for secant or tangent matrix solutions,
residual or full loading, and residual convergence criteria. An "Auto" optimizer
setting has also been added that senses the most efficient optimization method
before the main analysis calculations begin. It removes the necessity for you to
manually use trial and error methods to find the best optimization setting.
The standard libraries have been completely re-designed allowing non-standard
and built-up sections to be saved. A new shape builder, moving loads generator
with animated moving loads, and area loads generator have also been added.
Other major new features include on-screen notes, job attachments, dimensions,
load combinations grid, load case titles viewer, measure tool, textures, gridlines,
view selector, customizable toolbars and multiple undo/redo steps.
The major new features of SPACE GASS 11 are listed in more detail below:
A new renderer with full editing capabilities.
A new shape builder with shape dragging, snapping, stacking, alignment

and copy/paste. Shapes can now be specified as voids to easily model holes
in your sections. New standard shapes have also been added for polygons,
15

polytubes, triangles, Cees, Zeds, tophats and schifflerized angles. Line
shapes that allow you to specify a line thickness and a series of points have
also been added. You can even show the dimensions of your sections
graphically in the new shape builder.
16
On-screen notes that can be positioned anywhere on or near your model or

attached to nodes, members or plates.
Dimensions that can be added to your model or to individual members or

plates.
A measure tool that lets you determine the actual length, component
lengths and angles between any two points.
An attachment tool that you can use to attach external documents,

spreadsheets, drawings or any other files to your SPACE GASS job and
embed them into the job file.
Important new drawing aids now let you align with other existing points or
objects, snap to key intermediate positions along members, attach to
existing objects, or align with existing members or global axes. You can
even lock onto a node or member by briefly hovering over it and then
begin drawing at some offset away from it. When aligned with an axis,
member or point, you can also just type in the desired distance away your
point should be.
A new combination load cases grid showing primary and combination load
cases across the top and combination load cases down the side. You simply
type multiplying factors into any cells to quickly build up your
combination load cases in a very visual way. Rows for new combination
load cases can be added as desired.
Customizable toolbars.
A view selector showing the current viewpoint. It can also be dragged

around or clicked to change the orientation of the model.
Unlimited undo/redo steps.
More detailed infotips when hovering over a node, member or plate.
Introduction
New libraries in XML format that now hold non-standard and built-up
sections, directly editable via the shape builder and/or library editor.
Categories have also been added for Common, Special, Legacy and
Obsolete classifications.
A new moving loads generator incorporating animated views of the

vehicles travelling over your model. Horizontal loads and moments can
now be added to vehicles. Travel paths can now be drawn graphically, as
can a loading area outside of which wheels are treated as inactive even if
they are still within the ends of their travel path. A new vehicle editor has
also been added, and vehicles are now incorporated into the standard
libraries.
A load case manager now lets you copy, renumber or delete multiple load
cases rather than one at a time.
buttons throughout SPACE GASS that allow to select from load

cases, sections or materials that already exist in the job, plus a load case
titles viewer that can be left open all the time if you need to see which load
cases are which.
A new area loads generator with options for two-way and one-way loads.
Load directions include X, Y, Z, "Normal to area" and "Vector". Loading
areas can be actual or projected, and more than four members per polygon
can now be handled.
A new renumbering tool that offers renumbering in three directions

simultaneously.
A taper/haunch tool that now subdivides automatically if required.
A new find tool with additional modes for finding duplicated nodes,
invalid plates, members duplicated in steel member groups, members with
free ends and plates with free vertices.
New move, rotate, copy, mirror, stretch and scale tools that allow you to
select nodes, members or plates. They also provide a graphical preview of
the final result before the changes are made.
17
18
Textures such as "brickwork", "steel" and "concrete" that can be added to

members or plates and shown graphically.
Gridlines that can be defined and shown graphically in two directions at

any spacings and then used as snap and reference points when drawing
objects or locating points.
A tool for converting static loads such as dead loads and live loads into
masses for use in a dynamic analysis.
A new curve editor for spectral curves that has extra capabilities for
importing, exporting, labelling and an equation data generation tool.
A view manager that lets you save the current view into a list of saved
views and then recall them as desired.
Moveable property panels that list all of the sections and materials used in
your model. You can even click on a section or material in the panel to
select all the members or plates in your model that use that item.
A member alignment tool that lets you align or stack members via their
center, top, bottom, left or right sides.
An option for showing member origins graphically. This quickly lets you
see which way each member is running.
Generation of bends of any radius at member intersections. A very useful

tool for pipework analysis.
A tool for reversing the direction of members. Options for adjusting

member fixities, offsets and loads are included.
Various tools for extending members along their length, moving

intermediate nodes, removing intermediate nodes and removing crossed
member nodes.
A new steel member design module for the Hong Kong code HK CP2011
has been released.
Introduction
Version 10.8
Steel member design modules for the AISC 360-10 LRFD and ASD
standards have been released.
SPACE GASS now uses the Titan license manager softlock system instead
of hardware locks, although hardware locks can still be supplied if
requested. TitanLM suppports stand-alone or network installations, and lets
users borrow licenses from the network for use off-site.
Versions 10.6 to 10.7

A new plate element has been added in v10.7. Plate elements can be
quadrilateral or triangular with bending, shear and membrane stiffness.
SPACE GASS can now import and export data in CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) and
IFC Step file formats. This allows it to communicate directly with many
other programs such as Tekla Structures/XSteel, ProSteel, Microstation,
Frameworks Plus, AutoCAD, Revit Structure, StruCAD, etc.
A new built-in graphics rendering module has been added in v10.7 that
allows you to generate realistic rendered models of your job that show the
complete geometry of all members and plates. This replaces the old
internal 3D viewer and the external VRML viewer. It is expected that this
module will gradually be given full input, editing and viewing
functionality until it completely replaces the existing graphics system in
SPACE GASS.
Nodes can now be moved, rotated or deleted directly in v10.7.
Rotated and/or flipped members can now be located using the find
command or filtered in v10.7.
In v10.7 graphical envelopes can now be limited to minimums and

maximums, just minimums, just maximums or just absolute maximums.
The minimum and maximum intermediate values are now shown on

displacement, bending moment, shear force, axial force, torsion and stress
diagrams in v10.6.
A new connectivity tool has been added that allows you to check what is
connected to any given node, member or plate.
19

Versions 10.1 to 10.5
An interface to Autodesks Revit Structure program has been added in
v10.51b.
20
The dynamic response analysis module now supports AS1170.4-2007 and

NZS1170.5-2004
Dynamic zoom, pan, viewpoint and diagram scale changing have been
added in v10.50. Your current operation stays active and none of your
node, member or plate selections are lost while you are using these tools.
Refer to shortcuts for more information.
SPACE GASS can be run minimized, normal or maximized (the default

mode) depending on the -min, -nml or -max command line options. It can
also be controlled by the SHOW line in a script file. These changes were
made in v10.50a.
The concrete material properties in the standard metric library have been
updated in v10.50a. The new values are based on AS3600-2001 clauses
6.1.5, 6.1.6 and Commentary Table C6.1.2.
Importing/exporting MS-Excel, MS-Word or MS-Access data can now be

done in script mode in v10.50.
"D" restraints are no longer supported in v10.50. Restraints are now just
"F", "R" or "S".
The structure wizard no longer generates general restraints and is less

restraining in general in v10.50.
Importing of SDNF version 3 files is now supported in v10.50.
A new steel member design module for the Hong Kong code HK CP2005
has been added in v10.41.
A new steel member design module for the British code BS5950:2000 has
been added in v10.41.
When exporting to DXF, the frame data can now be put into sectionspecific layers rather than having the entire frame in one layer.
Introduction
A new steel member design module for the LiteSteel beam range of
sections from Smorgon Steel has been added in v10.40. These are designed
to AS4600.
The tool that updates analysis section property data based on the results of
a steel member design has been enhanced considerably so that it allows the
update-analysis-design procedure to be iterated automatically.
A new dynamic frequency analysis solver has been added in v10.30. It

allows you to create combinations of mass load cases and to combine
lumped mass load cases with self weight load cases. The new solver uses
the wavefront optimizer and, as a result, the computers memory
requirement is vastly reduced.
An option for SPACE GASS to check for program updates via the SPACE
GASS website has been added.
The moving load generator is now able to generate combination load cases
that combine the moving loads with other static loads.
Moving load travel path coordinates, when used in conjunction with travel
path node numbers, are now treated as offsets from the path defined by the
node numbers.
The number of moving load wheels per vehicle has been increased to 200.
Custom libraries are now stored in a separate file to the standard libraries.
They can also be stored in a different folder to the standard libraries.
Your company logo can now be scaled to an exact height that you specify
and can optionally be included on every page or just the first page. JPG
images formats are also now supported.
Saving of loads after graphical editing, importing of text files and report
generation have all been sped up dramatically.
Zooming via the mousewheel is now centered on the mouse position.
Selection of the local XY and/or XZ planes for the display of moments,

shears and stresses can now be made direct from the side toolbar rather
than via a filter.
21
New members being drawn graphically can now be optionally given the
default attributes or those of the previously accessed member.
An option for allowing duplicate members to be drawn has been added.

Finding and filtering duplicate members has also been added to the
cleanup, find and filter functions.
Deleting members with zero length has been added to the cleanup function.
Filters defined in terms of analysis members now also affect steel design
reports.
Options for suppressing automatic re-scaling of load and analysis results

diagrams have been added.
An option for selecting steel members and connections graphically and

then viewing or editing them in a datasheet has been added.
The default bolt, plate, weld, rebar, spectral and vehicle library names can
now be specified in the configuration.
The lowest buckling load factor is now displayed at the end of a buckling
analysis.
The end offset distance for members exported to a DXF drawing file can
now be specified.
The data generated by the structure wizard is now adjusted according to the
vertical axis setting.
The default gravity direction in the self-weight datasheet is now adjusted

according to the vertical axis setting.
Auto-created steel members are now terminated at pin-ended members.
Version 10.00
A facility for generating moving loads has been added.
22
Other jobs can be opened and merged with the current job.
Introduction
Steel member design input data can now be generated automatically for the
entire model.
A facility for connecting members that cross over each other has been
added.
Print previews can be produced.
Your company logo can be included in text and graphical reports.
The analysis and design output has been combined into a single report.
Text reports can be exported to PDF, HTML and TXT files.
Graphical output can be exported to PDF, HTML and BMP files.
All symbols are now shown correctly in reports.
A new page setup form gives you full control over the output device,
margins, page layout and formatting.
You can specify and configure separate graphics and text printers.
USB network locks are supported.
If the program is terminated abnormally, any network licences that were

active are recovered immediately and automatically.
Mouse wheel zooming, panning and viewpoint changing is supported.
Keyboard zooming, panning and viewpoint changing is supported.
Keyboard scrolling through filters, views and load cases is supported.
Temporary job files are now stored on the local workstation for extra speed
and much reduced network traffic.
Filters, views, etc. in the current job can be retained when data is imported
from a text file.
23
24
In order to detect the cause of frame buckling, the nodes at which the
maximum translations and rotations occur are listed in buckling reports.
Tension/Compression-only effects can be made to revert to "no reversal"

mode after a specified number of iterations.
Unrestrained degrees of freedom are now automatically stabilised during

the analysis. This prevents many instabilities due to incorrect modelling.
Cable members no longer require uniformly distributed loads to be applied

to them.
Nodes connected only to cable members no longer have to be restrained

rotationally.
Error messages can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Export files include all input data and are no longer affected by filters or
report selections.
You can print or obtain print previews direct from the datasheets.
SPACE GASS can now import and export data directly with MS-Excel,
MS-Access and MS-Word.
Options for springs and compression-only members have been added to the
structure wizard beam and grillage structures.
Compression effective lengths in the steel member design input data can be
fully controlled separately for each axis.
The automatic reduction of the minor axis compression effective length

due to flange restraints is now optional.
Steel members can be nominated as "braced " for either or both axes in
order to limit the compression effective lengths to their actual lengths.
Double angles are shown as such in the graphical section property legend.
Steel members that have been offset can now be designed.
Introduction
Everything attached to and associated with a member is deleted when the

member is deleted. This includes attributes, offsets, loads and design input
data.
The steel design input data member lists are automatically adjusted when
members are deleted, subdivided or otherwise edited graphically.
Steel members and connections are now sorted numerically if input or

edited graphically.
Abandoned unnamed jobs can now be recovered automatically.
Undo for all design input data is supported.
Undo for node, member and plate renumbering is supported.
Cleanup for all design input data is supported.
The area loader supports subdivided members.
Single angle sections can be designed as concentrically connected.
The properties of a node can be copied to a graphical selection of other

nodes.
The properties of a member can be copied to a graphical selection of other

members.
The design input data for a steel member can be copied to a graphical
selection of other steel members.
Loads can be copied from a node to a graphical selection of other nodes.
Loads can be copied from a member to a graphical selection of other

members.
You can press the space bar to repeat the last graphics command.
An external macro such as another program, batch file or MSExcel/Access macro can be run from within SPACE GASS.
25
26
SPACE GASS can be controlled externally from another program or batch

file using a script file.
A backup copy of the job is made just before each save.
Full 3D geometry displays can be saved in VRML files for later viewing.
Buttons have been added to the library editor for adding, deleting and
editing.
A large number of minor improvements, bug fixes and adjustments have

been incorporated.

Installation and configuration
Installation and configuration of SPACE GASS is a simple two-stage process that
is explained in the following sections.
27
Installing SPACE GASS

The installation procedure involves downloading and installing SPACE GASS on
your computer and then registering it for the modules you are licensed to use. The
registration procedure also involves linking SPACE GASS to your specific Titan
softlock or hardware lock. For detailed instructions, refer to
www.spacegass.com/install.
28
Configuring SPACE GASS

You can run SPACE GASS by double-clicking the SPACE GASS icon which has
been created.
When you first start SPACE GASS, or if you make any changes to your system,
you will be prompted for some configuration information.
After the initial configuration, you can change any of the configuration settings by
selecting them from the Config menu. The eight configuration forms are detailed in
this chapter.
All configurable data is stored in a number of files called SG.INI, SGSettings.GS
and various XML files. They are all stored in the LocalAppData folder (eg.
c:\Users\Fred\AppData\Local\SPACE GASS\12).
Note that you can quickly reset SPACE GASS back
to its default configuration settings by running the SPACE GASS Utility Tool (via
the Start button => All Programs => SPACE GASS 12 => Tools => SPACE
GASS Utility) and clicking the "Reset Client Configuration" button or the "Reset
All" button. For more information, refer to The SPACE GASS utility tool.
29
Folders and files

Select "Folders and files" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the folder locations for the SPACE GASS program
itself and for the various types of data files.
30

Main program folder
Contains the SPACE GASS program itself.
Main data folder
Contains the main job data files.
Standard libraries folder
Contains the standard section, material, bolt, plate, weld, spectral curve, reinforcing
bar and vehicle libraries supplied with SPACE GASS. This normally matches the
main program folder, however it can be different if you wish to have the standard
libraries in a separate folder. Note that all standard libraries are contained in a file
called sglibstandard.mdb which cannot be modified.
Custom libraries folder
Contains the custom section, material, bolt, plate, weld, spectral curve, reinforcing
bar and vehicle libraries that you create. These can be in the same folder as the
standard libraries or in another location. Note that all custom libraries are contained
in a file called sglibcustom.mdb which can be modified via the library editor or the
shape builder.
If you wish to have the SPACE GASS program
folder write protected then you must change the custom library folder to a different
location.
Text data folder
Contains import/export text data files and print text files.
Backup data folder
Contains import/export backup job data files.
Archive data folder
Contains import/export archive data files.
CAD data folder
Contains import/export CAD data files.
Temporary data folder
Contains temporary files that are created and deleted by SPACE GASS as it
operates.
31

Documents folder
Contains MS-Access, MS-Excel and MS-Word document files.
Text editor program
The name of the SPACE GASS text editor. This can be the standard Windows
NOTEPAD or any other text editor that runs in Windows.
Calculator program
The name of the SPACE GASS calculator. This can be the standard Windows
calculator or any other calculator that runs in Windows.
Default library names
The names of the default libraries.
Note that any folders that do not exist are automatically created as you go.
Copy the Job to the Backup Data Folder Before Saving
If this box is selected, whenever a job is saved, a copy of the previously saved
version of the job is copied to the backup data folder and renamed with an
extension of BAK.
32
Text formatting
Select "Text formatting" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the report and graphics text formats and fonts.
Report text format

The report text format which is initially selected when you create a new job. Note
that this setting does not change the current job. The report text format for the
current job can only be changed from the report form (selected from the Output
menu).
Graphics text format
The graphics text format which is initially selected when you create a new job.
Note that this setting does not change the current job. The graphics text format for
the current job can only be changed from the Labelling and Annotation form
(selected from the View menu).
Report font
The font for text reports. This must not be a proportional font otherwise the
columns of numbers in reports will not line up properly. The two-column output
toggle switches between one-column and two-column output in the report.
33
Screen graphics font

The font for screen graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
After setting the screen graphics font size, if the
text on the SPACE GASS graphics screen looks too big or too small, it may be
because the screen graphics correction factors have not been set correctly. Refer to
"Graphics scale calibration" in "Graphics scale calibration" later in this chapter.
Printer graphics font
The font for printer graphics text. This can be any proportional or fixed font.
34
General configuration
Select "General configuration" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the general purpose configuration items in SPACE
GASS.
35

Sound on alert
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when it
wants to alert you to something.
Sound on error
This allows you to suppress or enable the sound that the program makes when an
error occurs.
Diagram shading
Loading, bending moment, shear force, stress and axial force diagrams are shaded
if this item is checked.
Shading is normally turned off as it makes multiple superimposed diagrams hard to
read.
Check disk space
If this item is checked, SPACE GASS performs a disk space check to ensure that
there is enough free space for a static or dynamic analysis to proceed to
completion. If the disk space check has been disabled and there is not enough space
for the analysis data, the program may abort with an error message. Although this
is not a desirable occurrence, it will not result in loss of data.
Vertical axis
The graphics vertical axis which is initially selected when you create a new job.
Note that this setting does not change the current job. The graphics vertical axis for
the current job can only be changed from the Viewpoint form (selected from the
View menu).
Changing this setting only affects the graphics display. It doesnt affect the local
axis definitions, the steel design top flange definitions, or the analysis and design
modules in any way.
Aperture size
The size of the aperture circle which appears when nodes and/or members can be
selected graphically.
Crosshair size
The size of the crosshair which appears when snap or ortho modes are on.
Curve resolution
All curved lines drawn with SPACE GASS are actually a series of short straight
lines. In most cases it is very difficult to differentiate between a true curve and a
36

series of ten straight line segments placed around the curve. SPACE GASS allows
you to specify how many straight line segments per member are used to
approximate curved lines in displacement, bending moment, shear force or axial
force diagrams.
Use previous attributes when drawing new members
If this item is checked, any new members that you draw will have the same
attributes as the member that was previously drawn or edited graphically. If
unchecked, newly drawn members will have the default attributes.
Allow duplicates when drawing new members
Check this item if you wish to be able to draw multiple members between the same
two nodes. For example, you may wish to have two members that share the same
end nodes but which are offset away from each other by some distance. This may
be applicable for double angle members that have a gap between them.
If you have drawn duplicate members and wish to locate them, you can do so by
using the Find tool and selecting "Duplicated" in the member type field. You can
also use a similar procedure to create a filter that isolates any duplicated members.
Re-scale load diagrams after load editing
If this item is checked, load diagrams will be re-scaled automatically whenever any
distributed member loads are changed.
Re-scale result diagrams after analysis
If this item is checked, the analysis diagrams will be re-scaled automatically
whenever an analysis is completed.
Draw positive bending moments on tension/compression side
The convention for drawing bending moment diagrams varies from country to
country. SPACE GASS can be configured to draw bending moments on either the
tension or compression side of a member.
Shorten members in DXF files
When exporting to a DXF file, you can allow the members to be drawn full length
or you can have them shortened at each end by a proportion of the member depth.
For example, a member with a depth of 500mm could be drawn 250mm shorter at
each end by using a depth factor of 0.5.
Dashed lines
Dashed (broken) lines are used to differentiate between load cases and between
diagram types. All lines are drawn continuous if dashed lines are not allowed.
37
DXF layer names

Layer names are only applicable if you have the CAD interface module. These are
the layers into which the drawing will be placed when you transfer it into your
CAD program.
It is recommended that you make each layer name different so that it is easy to
distinguish between centrelines, text, members, hidden lines, attributes, bolts,
plates and cut-off lines. It is also recommended that you set the hidden line layer in
your CAD software to dashed or dotted lines.
Automatically check for program updates
SPACE GASS can automatically check its website to see if a newer version is
available. If so, a notification message is displayed and you have the option of
downloading and installing the update.
38
Graphics scale calibration

Select "Graphics scale calibration" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to calibrate your monitor so that graphics is properly sized
and proportioned.
Some monitors exaggerate the horizontal and/or vertical scales so that the SPACE
GASS graphical output appears stretched or compressed in either or both
directions. SPACE GASS allows you to apply correction factors which allow for
these exaggerations and adjust the graphical output so that it is correctly sized and
proportioned.
You should simply measure the width and height of the two lines on the screen
with a ruler, and SPACE GASS calculates the correction factors for you.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Ensure that you measure between the arrow heads rather than measuring the
overall form or screen size, otherwise items on the SPACE GASS graphics screen
will appear too small or too large.
39
Graphics colors
Select "Graphics colors" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to select colors for screen, printer and plotter graphics output.
Colors are selected by first clicking the item to be changed and then selecting a
color from the palette at the bottom of the form.
40

The list of color indexes next to "Section properties" represents section properties
1-25. If you have more than 25 section properties, the pattern is repeated for
properties 26-50, 51-75, etc.
The list of color indexes next to "Load cases" represents the first 25 load cases. If
you have more than 25 load cases, the pattern is repeated for each additional group
of 25 load cases.
41
General colors
Select "General colors" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set the Windows color scheme. It controls items such as
form colors, button colors, scroll bar colors, etc.
When you select this option SPACE GASS loads the standard Windows color
selection form which can also be selected from the Windows Control Panel. The
appearance of this screen is dependant upon the version of Windows you are
running.
42
Problem size limits

Select "Problem size limits" from the Config menu.
This form allows you to set maximum job size limits.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This allows it to expand into
the available memory of your computer giving you virtually unlimited problem
size capacity dependant only on the memory capacity of your computer.
The size limits you set allow you to reserve space for a job, with space being
allocated according to the size of each component of a job. You should set the
limits high enough so that there is enough capacity for the largest of jobs that you
are likely to encounter but small enough that you don't exceed the memory capacity
of your computer.
Keep in mind that the limits can be changed at any time, even when you are
halfway through inputting a job and find that you have run out of capacity. Just
select "Problem size limits" from the Config menu and change the limits to suit
your job size. After changing the limits you can simply return to where you left off,
with all previously entered data retained.
43
Renderer configuration
Various renderer settings and preferences are available from the Settings menu in
the renderer as shown below.
In the following form:
The "Alignment proximity" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to an axis
aligned with a "locked on" node or member or a global axis in order to align with
it.
The "Cursor pickbox size" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to a node,
member or plate in order to select it, lock onto it, or display its infotip.
The "Lock delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node or
member before you lock onto it.

The "Use previous attributes..." option, if ticked, means that when you draw a new
node, member or plate it will have the same properties (ie. section ID, material ID,
etc) as the previous item you drew or selected.
44

The "Allow duplicates..." option lets you draw members or plates on top of existing
members or plates (ie. so that they share the same nodes).
The "Allow hidden nodes to be selectable" option allows you to select nodes that
you can't see due to being behind other objects.
The "Curve quality" controls the smoothness of curved elements such as 3D nodes,
members with circular cross sections, etc. A higher curve quality makes the
renderer slightly slower and more memory hungry.
The "Result quality" specifies how many short straight lines are used to
approximate a curve when drawing deflected shapes, bending moment diagrams,
etc.
The "Highlight delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node,
member or plate before it becomes highlighted.
The "Infotip delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node,
member or plate before its infotip appears.
The "Maximum load cases shown together" is the maximum number of load cases
that will be displayed simultaneously if you select "All load cases", "All primary
load cases" or "All combination load cases". It is used to prevent memory overflow
problems when many load cases are displayed together. Note that this setting is
ignored if your model has less than 500 nodes.
The "Rotation drag distance" is the number of pixels that you can move the mouse
while the left button is held down before it will start to rotate the model. It is used
to avoid the problem of the model rotating unintentionally when you are trying to
select items or start a selection window. If this problem occurs then try increasing
the rotation drag distance slightly.
The "Rotation mode" controls how the model behaves when you rotate it with the
mouse. Trackball mode lets the model rotate about all three axes, whereas
Turntable mode prevents rotation about an axis normal to your computer screen.
Trackball mode is a bit harder to control than Turntable.
45
In the following form you can change the theme of the renderer via the "Skin"
setting. This affects the colors and styles of all the forms, buttons and input fields.
You can also separately change the colors of most the items in your model to suit
your requirements.
46
47
All of the toolbars in the renderer can be hidden/shown, moved or undocked.
Buttons can also be added or deleted.
In order to move or undock a toolbar, simply drag its handle on the left hand end of
the toolbar to the desired location.
Undocked toolbars such as the one shown below can be placed anywhere in the
renderer window or docked to the top, bottom, left or right sides of the renderer.
To hide a toolbar, simply right-click anywhere on it and then untick it from the list
of toolbars that appears. To restore a toolbar, select Toolbars from the Window
menu, click the Toolbars tab and then tick the desired toolbar.
48
Adding or deleting buttons

To add or delete buttons, right-click anywhere on a toolbar, select Customize from
the menu that appears and then click the Commands tab.
You can then select a toolbar from the list and add or delete buttons as required.
49
The Options tab also has additional settings that you might find useful as shown
below.
50
For information on how to customize the renderer's property panels, refer to

Customizing property panels.
51
Customizing property panels

Property panels can be pinned open by clicking the button at the top of the panel so
that it changes to
. If you click it again, it changes to
, indicating that the
panel is not pinned and will slide closed as soon as you move away from it.
By dragging the title bar of a panel you can drag it away from the side of the
renderer and place it anywhere on the screen or dock it to the left or right side of
the renderer. You can also split the property panels into separate node, member and
plate panels by dragging the relevant tab at the bottom of the panels.
52
For information on how to customize the renderer's toolbars, refer to Customizing

toolbars.
53
54
The SPACE GASS utility tool

The utility tool lets you reset the SPACE GASS registration and/or configuration
settings, or attach your own logo to SPACE GASS so that it appears in the printed
reports.
Reset Registration
If you have a Titan softlock, this option resets SPACE GASS back to its freshly
installed state. It is used primarily to start afresh in cases where SPACE GASS is
having difficulty obtaining a Titan license. Note that this option resets the
connection from SPACE GASS to the Titan server but does not affect the Titan
server itself or its registration.
If you have a hardware lock, this option de-registers SPACE GASS. The next time
you run SPACE GASS it will initiate the re-registration process. It is used
primarily to re-register SPACE GASS in cases such as when new modules have
been purchased or when the hardware lock has been changed.
For more information, refer to http://www.spacegass.com/install.
55

Reset Client Configuration
This option resets the SPACE GASS client configuration back to its default
settings. The next time you run SPACE GASS it will initiate the re-configuration
process.
For more information, refer to Configuring SPACE GASS.
Reset All
Choose this option to reset both the registration and client configuration.
Set Report Logo
You can use this option to set your own logo to appear at the top of your printed
reports. You must first create a JPG image file that contains your logo and any text
that goes with it. For best results, make the image file large enough so that it
contains enough pixels for a printer resolution of at least 300 dpi. For example, if
your printer operates at 600 dpi resolution and you want the printed logo height to
be 20mm, your image file will need to be at least 472 pixels in height (ie.
600/25.4x20). Regardless of the size of your image file, it will be scaled to print at
the exact height you specify in the page setup form.
After creating your JPG image file, click the "Set Report Logo" button to display
the following form.
56
You should then click the "Set Logo" button, browse to your image file and select
it.
Note that even after completing the above procedure, you must ensure that SPACE
GASS is configured to use the logo. You can do this by choosing "Page Setup"
from the SPACE GASS File menu, setting the logo height and specifying whether
it is to be on the first page only or on all pages.
For more information, refer to Page setup.
57
Getting Started
Getting started
This chapter explains how to start SPACE GASS and takes you on a guided tour of
the main SPACE GASS window and all of its menus. It also explains how you
should interact with SPACE GASS and respond to its requests for data.
59
Starting SPACE GASS

Before proceeding with this section you should have copied and installed SPACE
GASS (see also Installing SPACE GASS).
In order to start SPACE GASS, you can either:
1.
2.
Double-click the "SPACE GASS" shortcut on your desktop.

Double-click on a SPACE GASS job file (they end with .SG).
If you are running SPACE GASS for the first time, you will be taken through part
of the SPACE GASS configuration program (see also Configuring SPACE GASS).
You can control how SPACE GASS starts by the use of command line options. For
example, you can bypass the splash screen, you can prevent the previous job from
loading automatically, you can control the location of the SPACE GASS
configuration file, etc. They are fully explained in Command line options.
60
Getting Started
Command line options

You can control how SPACE GASS starts by adding one or more options to the
command line in the shortcut you use to start SPACE GASS.
To add a command line option, select "Properties" of your SPACE GASS shortcut
and append the contents of the "Target" field with one or more of the following
options.
-n
Bypasses the automatic loading of the previously used job.
-p
Bypasses the splash screen.
-w
Bypasses the Internet check for new versions of SPACE

GASS.
-c [bbggrr]
Allows you to set the datasheet alternate line color, where

[bbggrr] is the 6 character hexadecimal representation of the
desired color with bb=blue component, gg=green component
and rr=red component. For example, 50% blue, 50% green and
20% red could be specified with a command line option of c7f7f33.
-s [file]
Allows you to specify a script file that contains a list of menu

commands and other items that SPACE GASS will
automatically execute one-by-one rather than you operating it
in the normal way. For example, a command line option of -s
"c:\scripts\myscript.txt" would load the myscript.txt script file
from the c:\scripts folder. Note that the ""s can be omitted if
this option is at the end of the target field. See "Running a
script" for more information and full details of the script file
format.
-min
Runs SPACE GASS minimized so that it is not visible except

for an icon on the taskbar. This can be useful when SPACE
GASS is controlled by a script file (see the -s command line
option above), although it may be more convenient to use the
"SHOW MIN" command in the script file to achieve the same
effect. See "Running a script" for more information and full
61
details of the script file format.

-nml
Runs SPACE GASS in a normal window that is usually

smaller than the overall screen size.
-max
Runs SPACE GASS maximized so that it fills the entire screen

area. This is the default setting and is the same as if none of
the -min, -nml or -max command line options are specified.
Note that the -min, -nml and -max command line options can be overridden by the
SHOW line in a script file. See "Running a script" for more information and full
details of the script file format.
For example, to bypass the splash screen and the automatic loading of the
previously used job, you could have a shortcut target field of:
"C:\Program Files\SPACE GASS\Exe\sgwin.exe" -p -n
If you start SPACE GASS by double-clicking on a job, then the shortcut is
bypassed and any command line options in it are not used. You can, however,
apply the command line options when a job is double-clicked by starting Windows
Explorer, selecting Tools > Folder Options from the menu, clicking the File Types
tab, scrolling down to and clicking the SG file extension, clicking the Advanced
button, clicking the Edit button and then adding the command line option to the
end of the "Application used to perform action" field.
Note that you can use the -i command line option
to set up multiple shortcuts, each with its own SG.INI file for cases where you want
to be able to run SPACE GASS with different configurations. For example, you
may have a laptop that is normally connected to the office network during which
SPACE GASS needs to access jobs and libraries that are stored on the network.
However, there may also be times when the laptop is being used away from the
network on-site or at home. It would be convenient if these two scenarios could
each have its own folder settings and other configuration items.
You can set this up by simply making a copy of your SPACE GASS shortcut so that
you have a shortcut for when you are connected to the office network and another
for when you are running SPACE GASS away from the office, each with its own
SG.INI file and configuration settings. Edit the properties of each shortcut and add
-i "path" to the end of the target field, where "path" is the folder containing the
62
Getting Started
SG.INI file. For example, -i "c:\SG\Config\Office" would store the SG.INI file for
that shortcut in the "c:\SG\Config\Office" folder, and -i "c:\SG\Config\Home"
would store the SG.INI file for that shortcut in the "c:\SG\Config\Home" folder.
The next time you run SPACE GASS from either shortcut, it would run through the
configuration process and let you set them up with their own unique configuration
settings.
63
The main SPACE GASS window

When you start SPACE GASS, the following main window appears with the
structural model for the current job displayed in it. You can also click the
button to open the renderer window.
The title bar

This is the colored band across the top of the window, it contains the SPACE
GASS version, the name of the current job and the scale of the viewport if it is
being displayed in full-screen mode.
The menu bar
The second band across the top of the window contains the twelve main menu
items. By selecting one of the main menu items you can gain access to all of the
options contained within that menu. The menu bar allows you to access all of the
programs features (see also The menu system).
64
Getting Started
The toolbars
The buttons across the top and to the left of the display area form the toolbars. The
toolbar buttons replicate the most commonly used menu items and give you instant
access to them (see also The toolbars). The graphics settings buttons across the
bottom of the screen display the current settings for the drawing tool and allow the
settings to be toggled.
The graphics display area
The area in the centre of the main window displays the structural model for the
current job. The global axes are also shown in the top-right corner. You can display
up to four viewports in this area.
The text display area
The area below the graphics settings buttons forms the text display area. The first
line displays the project heading, job heading and the local axis settings. The
second line is a multi-purpose line which usually contains the status line, but which
also periodically displays other prompts and messages, some of which are purely
informative and some of which require you to respond.
65
The status line
The status line appears in the second line of the text display area of the main
SPACE GASS window. It is also displayed at the bottom of the renderer. The
status line indicates which data is present for the various parts of the current job.
The presence (or absence) of data is indicated by sequences of characters shown as
follows. In all cases, unless otherwise indicated, "Y" represents "data exists", while
"N" represents "no data exists".
If, for example, you have performed a static analysis, a dynamic frequency analysis
and an elastic buckling analysis (but no dynamic response analysis), the "Analysis"
part of the status line would appear as "Analysis:YYNY".
You can use the status line as a check to ensure you have entered sufficient
data before performing another operation. For instance, you cannot perform a
static analysis until you have applied some type of load to the structure (in addition
to which, sufficient data must be present on the structure itself). Check for the
appropriate code in the status line window before proceeding with the operation.
Headings
1. Project name, Job name, Designers initials and Notes
(Y/N)
Structure
1. Nodes
2. Members
3. Plates
4. Restraints
5. Sections
6. Materials
7. Master-slave constraints
8. Member offsets
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Loads
66
Getting Started
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Node loads
Thermal loads
Self weight
Load case titles
Lumped masses
Spectral load data
(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Analysis
1. Static analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed,
"U"=desired convergence not obtained,
"I"=ill-conditioned
2. Dynamic frequency analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
3. Dynamic response spectrum analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
4. Buckling analysis, where
"N"=not analysed,
"Y"=analysed
(Y/N/U/I)(Y/N)(Y/N)(Y/N)
Steel
1. Steel member design data
2. Steel Member design/check results, where
"N"=not designed or checked,
"D"=designed,
"C"=checked
3. Connection design data
67

4. Connection design results, where
"N"=not designed,
"D"=designed
(Y/N)(D/C/N)(Y/N)(D/N)
Concrete
1. Concrete column design data
2. Concrete beam design data
(Y/N)(Y/N)
68
Getting Started
Using the mouse

This section gives basic information about using the mouse. If your mouse has
more than one button, use the left button unless specifically told otherwise.
The right mouse button is generally used by SPACE GASS to replicate the
keyboard ESC key. The ESC key generally enables you to abort from the current
operation or form. Note, however that the right mouse button is not always active,
such as when a form is open.
The following definitions explain the basic terms that are associated with using the
mouse.
Pointer
The descriptive cursor that appears on the screen and tracks the mouse movement.
Point
Position the pointer on an item.
Click (or Pick)
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button.
Right Click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the right mouse button.
Double-click
Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the left mouse button twice.
Drag
Point to an item, press and hold the left mouse button as you move the mouse to a
new location, then release it.
Mousewheel
Rotate the mousewheel to dynamically zoom, pan or change the viewpoint. For
more information, refer to Shortcuts.
69
Dialogue boxes
When you choose a command, a form often appears so that you can select options
or type in data. If an option is dimmed, it is not currently available.
Using the keyboard with a form

Although its usually easiest to use a mouse while you work in a form, you can also
select options or fill in information with the keyboard. Some of the standard
keyboard operations that you can use in forms are as follows.
TAB
SHIFT+TAB
ENTER
ESC
ALT
70
Move to the next field in the form.

Move to the previous field in the form.
Equivalent to selecting the Ok button.
Equivalent to selecting the Cancel button.
If an option, box or button has an underlined letter
in its name, you can choose that item by holding
down ALT while typing the underlined letter.
Getting Started
Moving a form
You can move a form dragging its title bar to the new location. The title bar is the
colored band along the top of the form.
Closing a form
You can close a form by pressing the Ok or Cancel buttons. Alternatively, if the
form has a control-menu box at the left side of the title bar, you can double-click
on it to replicate the cancel button. If you single click the control-menu box, a
control menu appears which also allows you to close or move the form.
71
Data entry
Forms can contain a wide variety of data entry fields, boxes, options and buttons.
Some of the commonly used ones in SPACE GASS are:
Command buttons
You choose a command button to initiate an action, such as carrying out or

cancelling a command. The Ok, Cancel and Help buttons are common command
buttons. In SPACE GASS, they are usually located in the top-right corner of the
form. To choose a command button, you can either click on it or press TAB until
the button you want is selected, and then press ENTER.
Scroll bars
Some windows and forms have scroll bars which you can use to view information
that does not fit inside the window. If you can view all of the contents of a window
or form without having to scroll, the scroll bars may be absent or dimmed to
indicate that they cannot be used.
Scroll bars have a scroll arrow at each end with a moveable scroll box in between.
To scroll through information displayed in a window or form, drag the scroll box to
the desired position. To scroll one line at a time, click the scroll arrows, or to scroll
continuously, hold a scroll arrow down. To scroll one page at a time, click the
scroll bar on either side of the scroll box.
Text boxes
You can type appropriate information directly into text boxes. Text boxes are
generally sideways scrollable so that they can hold more data than can be displayed
in the box.
Sometimes numeric text boxes have arrow buttons attached to them. These are
called "spin buttons" and you can change the number in the text box, without
actually having to type anything, by clicking the arrows or holding them down.
72
Getting Started
When entering data into a text box, you will find that quite often a default value is
already displayed there. If a default value is highlighted then as soon as you start
typing it will be erased. To edit a default value without causing it to be erased, you
can simply click somewhere in the text box or press one of the keyboard ARROW
keys before you begin typing. The point where you clicked becomes the insertion
point for the new text.
If you want to highlight text in a text box, you can simply drag the pointer across
the text, or double-click on a word to select one word at a time. Any text that you
type will then replace the highlighted text. You can also delete highlighted text by
pressing "DEL" or "BACKSPACE".
Generally, when you select a text box by clicking on it, its default value does not
become highlighted, however if you use the TAB key to get to the text box, its
default value does become highlighted.
List boxes
Display a list of items in a scrollable window from which you can make a
selection. In special circumstances, you can sometimes select more than one item
from a list box.
Combo boxes
Appear initially as a rectangular box containing the current selection. When you
select the down arrow in the square box at the right of the selection, a list of
available choices appears. If there are more items than can fit in the box, scroll bars
are provided.
73

Radio buttons
Represent a group of mutually exclusive options. You can select only one option at
a time. If you already have one option selected, your current selection replaces it.
The selected radio button contains a black dot.
Check boxes
Represent non-exclusive options. You can select as many check box options as
needed. When a check box is selected, it contains an X.
Lists
Sometimes SPACE GASS will ask you to provide a list of items such as nodes,
members or load cases. Lists can be typed in as integers separated by commas or
dashes. If, for example, your list was to contain the items 1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15 and
20, you could type it in as 1,2,6,7,8,9,13,14,15,20 or as 1,2,6-9,13-15,20. Dashes
simply allow you to list a range of numbers.
A special type of list is used to input flange restraint positions in the steel member
design modules. This list accepts @s (AT symbol) instead of dashes and can be
used to quickly input a number of equally spaced flange restraints. For example, a
list containing the following numbers 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 could be
replaced with 5@1.2,4@0.6.
When using a file selection form in which you have
to scroll to get to the file you want, you can simply type in the first couple of
characters of the file name to automatically scroll it into view.
74
Getting Started
Managing job files

SPACE GASS jobs end with ".SG". Whenever you run SPACE GASS, it loads and
displays the job that you previously had open. The procedures for starting new
jobs, opening previously saved jobs, merging jobs, saving jobs, deleting jobs and
cleaning up jobs are explained in the following sections.
SPACE GASS jobs are actually ZIP files renamed from {Job}.ZIP to
{Job}.SG. You can manually open and view their contents with WinZip, however be
careful not to make any changes or SPACE GASS may no longer be able to open
them.
75
Starting a new job

You can start a new job by clicking the
the File menu.
toolbar button or selecting "New" from
If you have unsaved changes to the current job file then SPACE GASS will ask
you if you wish to save these changes.
76
Getting Started
Opening a job
You can open a previously saved job by clicking the
"Open" from the File menu.
toolbar button or selecting
You will be prompted for the name of the file you wish to open. SPACE GASS, by
default, looks in the most recently accessed folder when opening a job.
77
Merging jobs
You can open another previously saved job and merge it with the current job by
selecting "Merge" from the File menu. It is a good idea to save the current job first
so that you can recover it if required.
For the job being merged with the current job, you can specify whether you want to
include its structural data (required), load data and/or design data.
The insertion point is the location at which the (0,0,0) origin of the merged job will
be located. The default insertion point will guarantee that no overlapping with the
current job occurs.
In order to prevent clashing of numbered items, the merged job will be adjusted so
that its numbering starts after the highest numbers in the current job. This might
prevent some jobs from being merged if there is not enough room between the
highest numbers in the current job and the maximum numbers specified in the
problem size limits. If this occurs, you could renumber the current job and/or the
78
Getting Started
merged job before attempting the merge, or you could increase the problem size
limits if they are not already at their maximum settings.
79
Saving a job
You can save the current job by clicking the
from the File menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Save"
Saves all changes made to the job. If you have not already created a name for the
job (ie. if it is previously unsaved) then you will be prompted for a file name and a
location (performs the same function as selecting "save as" from the file menu).
"Save As" is similar to "Save", except that the job is saved under a new name that
you specify. For example, if you open Job1, make changes to it and then use Save
As to save it as Job2, Job1 will be left unchanged while Job2 will be the changed
version of Job1.
80
Getting Started
Deleting a job
You can delete a previously saved job by selecting "Delete Job" from the File
menu.
Deletes the entire job. Use it with care because the job cannot be recovered after it
has been deleted.
81
Cleaning up a job
You can clean up the current job by clicking the
"Clean-up Job" from the File menu or the floating menu.
Cleans up your model by deleting obsolete items or items that are no longer
connected to anything. For example, it will remove loads that are applied to non-
82
Getting Started
existent nodes, members or plates, or section properties that are not being used by
any members. It is very useful for quickly removing the causes of many analysis
errors.
The clean-up tool can also merge nodes that are within a specified distance of one
another, transferring members, plates, restraints, loads, etc. from the deleted nodes
to the retained nodes. If this action results in a change to the way the structure
responds to the applied loads then an error message will be displayed and the
clean-up will not proceed. Any pairs of nodes close together that are linked with
master-slave constraints will not be merged.
Dummy nodes can be removed provided they are not used as direction nodes for
members or plates.
83
Running a macro
You can run a macro by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Run a Macro"
from the File menu or the floating menu.
Macros are simply programs external to SPACE GASS that you can run from
within SPACE GASS using this tool. They can be MS-Excel or MS-Access
programs, DLLs, ActiveX programs, EXE programs or batch files.
To run a macro, simply double-click the macro name in the form shown below.
To add a new macro or edit an existing macro, just click the "Add" or "Edit"
buttons in the above form and then fill in the details in the following form.
Macro Title is the name of the macro that will appear in the "Run a Macro" form.
Macro Type specifies the type of macro that is involved.
84
Getting Started
Macro File gives the location of the external program that will be executed when
you run the macro. This is not required for ActiveX macros.
Class Name is the name of the class in an ActiveX macro.
Macro Name is the name of the macro in an MS-Excel or MS-Access macro.
Parameter is a list of extra parameters that are passed to the macro.
Examples of each type of macro are supplied with SPACE GASS and are located
in the main program folder.
85
Running a script
Scripts allow you to run and control SPACE GASS from another program external
to SPACE GASS.
A script is simply a text file that contains a list of commands that SPACE GASS
will automatically execute one-by-one. The script file can be located anywhere,
and its name and location must be specified in the command line when SPACE
GASS is started.
For example, a command line option of -s "c:\scripts\myscript.txt" would load the
myscript.txt script file from the c:\scripts folder. Note that the double quotes (" ")
can be omitted if this option is at the end of the target field. If you dont want
SPACE GASS to be visible when running in script mode then you can use a
"SHOW MIN" line in the script file as described below.
You can create a script file manually using a text editor or you can write a program
that will create the script file and hence be able to control SPACE GASS
automatically.
The commands in the script file allow you to select any of the SPACE GASS menu
items, however currently only the import, export, analysis and exit functions will
bypass their input dialogs when in script mode. All of the other functions will
display their normal dialogs and messages and then continue with the script when
you have responded to them.
Any error messages will be displayed and cause the script mode to be terminated.
Any informative messages or warnings will be added to the log file and will not
cause the script to pause.
If you want to run SPACE GASS normally, ensure that the -s script file option does
not exist in the target field of the SPACE GASS shortcut that you use to start
SPACE GASS, otherwise SPACE GASS will go into script mode and will execute
all the script commands rather than allowing you to control it normally.
The structure of a script file is as follows:
1.
86
A header line containing "SPACE GASS Script File" must appear before any other
command lines.
Getting Started
2.
An optional LOGFILE line can be included between the header line and the first
command line. It lets you generate a log file that contains a list of all the menu
commands executed from the script file, plus any messages, warnings or errors
that might occur while SPACE GASS is running in script mode. Its format is
"LOGFILE Filespec", where Filespec is the path and name of the log file you want
to create.
3.
An optional SHOW line can be included between the header line and the first
command line. You can use it to specify whether SPACE GASS runs in a
minimized, normal or maximized window when in script mode. Its format is
"SHOW MIN", "SHOW NML" or "SHOW MAX". "SHOW MIN" runs SPACE
GASS minimized so that it is not visible except for an icon on the taskbar. This is
probably the most useful setting for running SPACE GASS in script mode.
"SHOW NML" runs SPACE GASS in a window that is usually smaller than the
overall screen size. "SHOW MAX" runs SPACE GASS maximized so that it fills
the entire screen area. This is the default setting and is the same as having no
SHOW line in the script file.
Note that the SHOW line overrides any -min, -nml or -max command line options
that might have been specified. See "Command line options" for more
information.
4.
An optional PAUSE line can be included that allows you to pause the script. It can
be useful if your script is not working properly and you want to see what stage it is
up to at certain points in the script file.
5.
Command lines must appear exactly as "MENU MM SS [Extra]", where MM is a

required 2 digit main-menu number, SS is a required 2 digit sub-menu number, and
Extra is an optional list of parameters depending on the command.
Extra can be up to 128 characters long and is used only as:
(a) the file name when importing or exporting files.
(b) the merge option when importing, where M signifies to merge rather than
overwrite (eg. M c:\Data\MyData.XLS to merge file MyData.XLS with the current
job). If the "M" is omitted when importing then the current job gets overwritten.
(c) the type of static analysis, where LIN=Linear, SSF=Small displacement
theory/Secant matrix/Full loading, SSR=Small displacement theory/Secant
matrix/Residual loading, FSF=Finite displacement theory/Secant matrix/Full
loading, FSR=Finite displacement theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading,
FTR=Finite displacement theory/Tangent matrix/Residual loading, LSF=Large
displacement theory/Secant matrix/Full loading, LSR=Large displacement
theory/Secant matrix/Residual loading, LTR=Large displacement theory/Tangent
matrix/Residual loading.
87
Note that SSF, SSR, FSF, FSR, FTR, LSF, LSR and LTR are all non-linear
analyses and are only applicable if MENU 04 02 is used.
The above parameters can also be used to set the type of axial force distribution
calculation in a buckling analysis when MENU 04 05 is used.
(d) the list of load cases to be analysed, where CASES<list> specifies the list (eg.
CASES4,6,12-17,23,24 to analyse load cases 4, 6, 12-17, 23 and 24). Note that
CASES0 signifies that all load cases should be analysed.
(e) the solver type, which can be PARADISE, WAVEFRONT or WATCOM.
(f) the optimization method when analysing, where NONE=None, AUTO=Auto,
GEN=General, LX=Linear-X, LY=Linear-Y, LZ=Linear-Z, CX=Circular-X,
CY=Circular-Y or CZ=Circular-Z.
(g) the tension/compression-only effects activation in a static analysis, where
TON=Activated, TOFF=Deactivated, TNR<n>=No reversal after n iterations (eg.
TNR5 for no reversal after 5 iterations).
(h) the number of load steps in a non-linear static analysis, where STEPS<n>
specifies the number of steps (eg. STEPS1 for one load step).
(i) the maximum number of iterations per load step in a non-linear static analysis,
where ITNS<n> specifies the maximum iterations (eg. ITNS10 for a maximum of
10 iterations per load step).
(j) the convergence accuracy in a non-linear static analysis, where CNVG<n>
specifies the convergence (eg. CNVG99.99 for 99.99% convergence).
(k) the lists of steel design groups, section properties and/or load cases when
performing a steel member design or check. The lists can be specified as
GROUPS<list>, SECTIONS<list> and/or CASES<list> (eg. GROUPS15,12,13,15-20 to export groups 1-5, 12, 13 and 15-20). Note that GROUPS0,
SECTIONS0 and/or CASES0 signifies that all items should be included.
Note that any analysis or design options not set by you via the Extra parameter
are taken to be whatever was used in the previous analysis or design. For
example, if you run an analysis of load cases 1,2,3 and 4, and then run another
analysis in script mode with the CASES parameter omitted, it will also use just
load cases 1,2,3 and 4.
6.
88
Comment lines are permitted anywhere in the file provided that they have a "#"
before the first non-blank character.
Getting Started
7.
Blank lines are permitted anywhere in the file.
A sample script file follows:

SPACE GASS Script File
# Create a log file (optional)
LOGFILE C:\Space Gass Data\Text\Logfile.txt
# Import a text file (Textin.txt)
MENU 01 15 C:\Space Gass Data\Text\Textin.txt
# Perform a non-linear analysis with Linear-X optimization
and tension/compression-only effects activated
MENU 04 02 LX TON
# Export a text file (Textout.txt)
MENU 01 26 C:\Space Gass Data\Text\Textout.txt
# Exit SPACE GASS
MENU 01 41
Note that when you exit SPACE GASS via a script file, any changes to the current
job will be abandoned. If you wish to save the changes then you should include a
Save or Save-As command before the Exit command.
89
Job status
You can display the current status of the job as shown below by selecting "Job
Status" from the File menu.
90
Getting Started
Shortcuts
Many of the menu items can also be accessed using a keyboard or mouse shortcut.
Ctrl key shortcuts
They are shown in the menus with Ctrl+K or Shift+Ctrl+K after them, where K
represents the shortcut key. For example, to operate the Edit Libraries tool you
must hold down the Ctrl key and then hit the L key (Ctrl+L). Alternatively, to
access the Renumber facility you must hold down the Shift and Ctrl keys together
and then hit the R key (Shift+Ctrl+R).
Alt key shortcuts
Every menu item also has an Alt key shortcut that is represented by an underlined
character in the menu item names. If you hold down the Alt key, the underlining
appears in the menus and you can then hit the underlined character on the keyboard
to select the desired menu item. If there are more than one of the same underlined
character in a menu, you can simply hit the underlined character multiple times
until the desired menu item is selected. For example, to access the Units form you
must hold down the Alt key and then hit the S key followed by the U key
(Alt+SU). Alternatively, to access the Connect tool, you must hold down the Alt
key and then hit the S key, followed by the C key three times (Alt+SCCC).
Renderer shortcuts
While using any of the renderer tools, various keyboard shortcuts are available that
can speed things up. They are listed below.
Shortcut
Tab key
F11 key
G key
S key
X, Y or Z keys
A key (hold down)
C key (hold down)
Up/Down arrow keys
Rotate mousewheel
Drag with left mouse
button
Action
Toggles all of the property panels on or off
Toggles full screen mode on or off
Toggles the grid on or off
Toggles the snap on or off
Allows you to set the working plane
Temporarily disables aligning with a "locked on"
node or member
Temporarily disables attaching to a node or member
Zooms in/out
Zooms in/out
Rotates
91
Drag with right mouse

button
Pans
Many of the other shortcuts listed below are also available in the renderer
Other shortcuts
The following list shows a number of special mouse and keyboard shortcuts that
operate some of the most useful and commonly used tools.
Action
Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom full
Zoom previous
Pan down
Pan up
Pan left
Pan right
Pan in renderer
Rotate down
Rotate up
Rotate left
Rotate right
Rotate in renderer
Enlarge load
diagram
Reduce load
diagram
92
Keyboard
shortcut
Up arrow
Down arrow
Right arrow
Left arrow
Ctrl+Up arrow
Ctrl+Down
arrow
Ctrl+Right
arrow
Ctrl+Left arrow
Mouse shortcut
Mousewheel forwards
Mousewheel backwards
Ctrl+Mousewheel forwards
Ctrl+Mousewheel backwards
Shift+Mousewheel forwards
Shift+Mousewheel backwards
Hold the right mouse button down and
move the mouse
Shift+Up arrow "V"+Mousewheel forwards

Shift+Down
"V"+Mousewheel backwards
arrow
Shift+Right
"H"+Mousewheel forwards
arrow
Shift+Left arrow "H"+Mousewheel backwards
Hold the left mouse button down and
move the mouse
"L"+Up arrow
"L"+Mousewheel forwards
"L"+Down
arrow
"L"+Mousewheel backwards
Getting Started
Enlarge deflection
diagram
Reduce deflection
diagram
"D"+Up arrow
"D"+Mousewheel forwards
"D"+Down
arrow
"D"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge moment
diagram
Reduce moment
diagram
"M"+Up arrow "M"+Mousewheel forwards

"M"+Down
arrow
Enlarge shear force "S"+Up arrow

diagram
Reduce shear force "S"+Down
diagram
arrow
Enlarge axial force "A"+Up arrow
diagram
Reduce axial force "A"+Down
diagram
arrow
"M"+Mousewheel backwards
"S"+Mousewheel forwards
"S"+Mousewheel backwards
"A"+Mousewheel forwards
"A"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge torsion
diagram
Reduce torsion
diagram
"T"+Up arrow
"T"+Mousewheel forwards
"T"+Down
arrow
"T"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge buckling
diagram
Reduce buckling
diagram
"B"+Up arrow
"B"+Mousewheel forwards
"B"+Down
arrow
"B"+Mousewheel backwards
Enlarge stress
diagram
Reduce stress
diagram
"E"+Up arrow
"E"+Mousewheel forwards
"E"+Down
arrow
"E"+Mousewheel backwards
Previous load case

Next load case
Page up
Page down
93
First load case

Last load case
Home
End
Previous filter
Next filter
No filter
Last filter
Ctrl+Page up
Ctrl+Page down
Ctrl+Home
Ctrl+End
Previous saved view Shift+Page up

Next saved view
Shift+Page
down
First saved view
Shift+Home
Last saved view
Shift+End
Repeat last
command
94
Spacebar
Input Methods
Input methods
There are four main ways in which data can be input into SPACE GASS.
Structure Wizard
If your model resembles one of the standard structures available in the Structure
Wizard then it is the easiest way to quickly generate your model in SPACE GASS.
Even if it isnt exactly what you want, you can then use the other graphical or
datasheet tools to modify the generated model to your exact requirements.
Datasheet Input
Each component of the SPACE GASS model can be input, edited or viewed in a
Datasheet. For example, there are datasheets for nodes, members, plates, section
properties, member loads, masses, etc. Datasheets are an invaluable tool for
viewing data or making changes, particularly using the multi-row editing tool.
Graphical Input
You can use Graphical Input to input or edit any parts of the structural data or load
data in your model. This is a very powerful tool that has the advantages of allowing
you to make large changes quickly and see your changes visually as you make
them.
Importing from Other Programs
SPACE GASS is able to link to other programs and import the structural model in
a wide variety of formats.
Some of the commonly used CAD and BIM (building information management)
programs that can be linked to SPACE GASS include Tekla Structures (XSteel),
ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley
Structural and AutoCAD.
You can also import from SPACE GASS text files, CSV (comma separated value)
files, DXF files, SDNF files, Microstran ARC files and MS-Excel files.
95
If you have your own program that generates the SPACE GASS data, if it
can write the data into a SPACE GASS text file, CSV file or MS-Excel file in the
correct format then it can be imported into SPACE GASS.
If you wish to know the format of a CSV or MS-Excel file that is suitable for
importing into SPACE GASS, the best way is to generate a small model in SPACE
GASS using the structure wizard or some other method and then export it into a
CSV or MS-Excel file and use resulting file as a pattern. The SPACE GASS text
file format is fully explained in Text file format, but you can also generate a text
file from SPACE GASS and use it as a pattern.
The other formats are quite complex and are simply generated by the programs that
you are importing your SPACE GASS model from.
For more information, refer to "Linking to other programs".
Common Database
Each of the above data input methods operates on the same common database,
therefore you can use any combination of methods to input your data. For example,
you can use the structure wizard to generate the basic frame geometry, then
graphically edit the geometry and apply some loads, followed by opening up some
datasheets to view the data and make further modifications to the structure or loads.
When some data has been input, regardless of the amount or type, you can produce
an output report on the screen or printer. In addition, regardless of which input
method you use, the graphics display area displays the current state of the structural
model graphically. A graphics hardcopy can also be produced at any time.
96

Linking to other programs
SPACE GASS can link to many other engineering, CAD and BIM (building
information management) programs using a wide variety of links and file formats.
Some of the commonly used CAD and BIM programs that can be linked to SPACE
GASS include Tekla Structures (XSteel), ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley Structural and AutoCAD.
Other programs that can import and/or export CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) or IFC Step files
can also be linked to SPACE GASS. These include STAAD, Risa-3D, SAP2000
ETABS, ROBOT, SmartPlant4D Structural and others
Programs that can import and/or export DXF or SDNF files can also be linked to
SPACE GASS, however only the basic geometry can be included in these formats.
Details of the files that SPACE GASS can import/export are as follows.
SPACE GASS Text File
ZIP File
CSV File
CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step File
This format is ideal for people who

wish to write their own programs to
generate the SPACE GASS data and
then import it into SPACE GASS. The
format of SPACE GASS text files is
fully explained in "Text file input ".
This format is still available but is
essentially obsolete because the native
SPACE GASS job files are actually
ZIP files renamed from .ZIP to .SG.
This format is also ideal for people
who wish to write their own programs
to generate the SPACE GASS data and
then import it into SPACE GASS. It is
a text file with the values separated by
commas that can be written by many
programs including MS-Excel.
Useful for transferring models with
many other CAD and building
97
IFC Step File
DXF File
SDNF File
MS-Excel
98
management programs such as Tekla

Structures (XSteel), ProSteel,
Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley
Structural, AutoCAD, etc. This is a
very comprehensive format that
includes the structural and load data.
Useful for transferring models with
many other CAD and building
management programs such as Tekla
Structures (XSteel), ProSteel,
Microstation, Frameworks Plus,
StruCAD, Revit Structure, Bentley
Structural, AutoCAD, etc. This is a
very comprehensive format that
includes the structural and load data.
A drawing format text file invented for
AutoCAD that many programs can
import and export. It is a very good
means of transferring drawings from
SPACE GASS in the form of plans,
elevations, cross sections and
connection drawings into a CAD
program.
Because DXF is a drawing format,
when transferring a structural model to
another program, it is better to use the
more comprehensive and specialized
CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file formats
described above.
This is a steel detailing neutral file
format that has now been made
obsolete by the much more advanced
CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file formats
described above. It can contain the
structural geometry and section
property data and is still used by many
programs.
Microsoft Excel is a very powerful tool
for generating data and can be used to
MS-Word
Microstran ARC
quickly generate a structural model for

importing into SPACE GASS. SPACE
GASS can also export to Microsoft
Excel.
The data from a SPACE GASS model
can be exported to a Microsoft Word
document file.
A format for importing Microstran
models into SPACE GASS.
In order to import from or export to a SPACE GASS text file, CSV file, SDNF file,
Microstran ARC file, MS-Excel file or MS-Word file, the procedure simply
involves selecting the desired format from the Import or Export options in the File
menu and then choosing a file name.
Linking to other programs using the very comprehensive CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step,
IFC Step or Revit Structure transfer options are fully explained in the following
sections.
99
CIMSteel/2 Step, IFC Step and Revit links

Complete structural models can be imported into SPACE GASS or exported to
other programs using the very comprehensive CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step, IFC Step
or Revit Structure transfer options. Each of these formats can contain the complete
structural model, including loads and design data.
They can be used to link SPACE GASS with programs such as Tekla Structures
(XSteel), ProSteel, Microstation, Frameworks Plus, StruCAD, Revit Structure,
Bentley Structural, AutoCAD and many others that use the CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2)
Step or IFC Step formats.
Revit Structure is slightly different to the other programs because in addition to
communicating with SPACE GASS via the CIMSteel/2 or IFC links, it can also
communicate via special import and export menu items that can be added to the
Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
The physical and analytical models
The "physical" model includes all of the "visible" information such as the geometry
of the beams, columns, braces, cables, trusses, struts, ties, walls, slabs and
connections. It includes all the components that make up the models physical
attributes.
The "analytical" model includes the "visible" information too, but it also contains
"hidden" information such as support conditions, member end releases, offset data,
section and material properties, loads, load combinations, design data and analysis
results.
The other main difference with the analytical model is that, depending on the
program you are importing from, the geometry may be somewhat idealised so that
the centroids of members line up with the members they are connected to. For
example, bracing members that connect to a beam-column connection do not often
line up with the centroid of the beam-column connection in the real structure and in
the "physical" model, however they may be adjusted to line up in the "analytical"
model.
Section name conversion files
One of the major obstacles to successfully transferring data between programs is
that there is no standard naming convention for section property names and hence
every program uses slightly different names. To solve this problem, conversion
100

files are used to convert the section names used by SPACE GASS to the names
used by other programs. Conversion files are supplied with SPACE GASS for
converting section names to Tekla Structures, Prosteel, Revit Structure and others.
You can also make your own section name conversion files quite easily.
A conversion file is simply a text file that contains a list of the SPACE GASS
section names together with the library each section comes from and the name of
the section that is used by the program SPACE GASS is communicating with. An
extract from a typical conversion file is as follows:
SG Name, SG library, Other name
W21x101, US, W 21*101
W21x111, US, W 21*111
W21x122, US, W 21*122
You can see from the above example that the SPACE GASS name and the "Other
name" are often very similar and sometimes only involve adding or removing
spaces or changing from "x" to "*" or vice versa.
Standard section name conversion files are supplied with SPACE GASS for each
of the SPACE GASS section libraries and each of the well-known programs that
you may want SPACE GASS to communicate with. For example, Tekla Structures
conversion files are supplied for each of the SPACE GASS section libraries.
Similar sets of conversion files are also supplied for Revit Structure, Prosteel, etc.
Creating custom section name conversion files
You must first initiate a CIS/2 or IFC import or export from the File menu to
display the following form.
101
Custom section name conversion files can then be created in either of two ways.
1.
You can create a custom conversion file that is a combination of some of the
standard conversion files supplied with SPACE GASS.
To do this you must first select a program name in the "Convert section names for"
list box and then click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left and
ensure that the SPACE GASS libraries from which the sections will be taken are
listed in the "Library search order" box.
You can then create the custom conversion file by clicking the "Create a custom
section name conversion file" button.
2.
You can create a template for a custom conversion file that contains just the
SPACE GASS section names and the libraries they come from, but not the "other
program" names.
To do this you must click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left and
then ensure that the SPACE GASS libraries from which the sections will be taken
are listed in the "Library search order" box.
You can then create the template conversion file by clicking the "Create a template
section name conversion file" button.
To convert the template conversion file into a complete custom conversion file,
you should edit the template file with a text editor such as Notepad and manually
enter the "other program" names at the end of each line. You could also use MS-
102

Excel, however when opening the file, you must specify that the file is comma
delimited, otherwise each line will appear in just one cell.
Section name conversion files are stored in the SPACE GASS program folder
(usually "c:\Program files\SPACE GASS\Exe").
Details of how to import and export using these links are explained in the following
sections.
103
Import links
You can import a CIS/2 or IFC Step file by selecting "Import - from CIMSteel/2
Step" or "Import - from IFC Step" from the File menu.
When importing from Revit Structure, you can import a CIS/2 or IFC Step file
created by it or you can select the "Send Model to SPACE GASS" item from the
Revit Structure "Tools > External Tools" menu as explained in "Special Revit
Structure Links".
Even though the internal structure of CIS/2 step files and IFC step files are quite
different, the importing procedure is the same and hence the following instructions
apply to both.
The name of the file being imported is displayed in the "Data Filename" field and
you can select another file by clicking on the button to the right of the input field.
When importing, to ensure that the section names used by the source program are
converted properly to SPACE GASS names, you should do the following:
1.
If you are linking with a standard program for which a section name conversion
file exists, select it in the "Convert section names for" list box.
If the name of the program you are linking with does not appear in the list, it
simply means that there is currently no standard conversion file for that program.
104

If so, you should select "Other". You can then create and use a custom conversion
file or use one that you previously created as explained in "Creating custom
section name conversion files" in the previous section. Alternatively, you can just
skip the custom conversion file option and the section names will be imported or
exported with no conversion.
2.
Click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left to display the section
libraries form as shown below.
If you selected a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box in step
1 above, ensure that the "Use a standard section name conversion file" option is
ticked. This will activate the section name conversion using the standard
conversion files supplied with SPACE GASS.
If you selected "Other" in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above,
and you have a custom conversion file that you want to use, ensure that the "Use a
custom section name conversion file" option is ticked and that the name of the
custom conversion file is in the "Conversion filename" field. If you wish to create
a custom conversion file, follow the procedure in "Creating custom section name
conversion files" in the previous section.
If you wish to use a mixture of custom and standard conversion files, you can tick
both the "Use a custom section name conversion file" and "Use a standard section
name conversion file" options. In this case, SPACE GASS will try to convert the
section name using the custom conversion file first and, if the name cant be found
there, the standard conversion files will be used.
105

3.
You also need to check that the appropriate SPACE GASS libraries are listed in
the "Library search order" box.
The "Library search order" box controls which SPACE GASS libraries will be
used when the section names being imported are converted. If the name of a
section being imported does not appear in one of the libraries listed in this box
then it will not be converted. It is therefore important that you include enough
libraries in the "Library search order" box to ensure that all the sections being
imported have their names converted.
You can include all libraries in the box, however this may slow down the import
process slightly due to the increased number of libraries that have to be scanned.
If a section name appears in more than one SPACE GASS library then the libraries
higher up in the list will have priority.
You can choose which components of the model to import by expanding the
"Import" branch of the menu tree on the left and then clicking "Nodes" or
"Members" as shown below.
You can specify the starting node number or, if you leave it at zero, the imported
nodes will be automatically numbered starting from the first available number.
Nodes that are very close together can be merged into one, and the connecting
members and plates adjusted to suit.
106

If you select the "Adjust lower limits of node coordinates by" checkbox, SPACE
GASS will find the node with the lowest coordinates and move it to the coordinates
that you specify. The rest of the model will also be moved by the same amount.
You can specify the starting member and plate numbers or, if you leave them at
zero, the imported members and plates will be automatically numbered starting
from the first available number.
Members that have an end very close to another member can be connected
together. Similarly, members that cross each other within a specified distance can
be subdivided and connected at the intersection point.
A number of programs that generate CIS/2 and IFC Step files incorrectly mix
radians and degrees when specifying member direction angles. If you are importing
one of these non-standard files and find that some members are rotated incorrectly,
you can select the "Assume radians for all angular measurements" checkbox to
correct the problem.
For more information about the "Physical" and "Analytical" models, refer to "The
physical and analytical models" in the previous section.
107
Export links
You can export a CIS/2 or IFC Step file by selecting "Export - to CIMSteel/2 Step"
or "Export - to IFC Step" from the File menu.
When exporting to Revit Structure, you can export a CIS/2 or IFC Step file or you
can select the "Update Model from SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure
"Tools > External Tools" menu as explained in "Special Revit Structure Links".
Even though the internal structure of CIS/2 step files and IFC step files are quite
different, the exporting procedure is the same and hence the following instructions
apply to both.
The name of the file being exported to is displayed in the "Data Filename" field
and you can select another file by clicking on the button to the right of the input
field.
When exporting, to ensure that the section names used by SPACE GASS are
converted properly to the names used by the destination program, you should do
the following:
1.
If you are linking with a standard program for which a section name conversion
file exists, select it in the "Convert section names for" list box.
If the name of the program you are linking with does not appear in the list, it
108

simply means that there is currently no standard conversion file for that program.
If so, you should select "Other". You can then create and use a custom conversion
file or use one that you previously created as explained in "Creating custom
section name conversion files" in the previous section. Alternatively, you can just
skip the custom conversion file option and the section names will be imported or
exported with no conversion.
2.
Click the "Libraries" branch of the menu tree on the left to display the section
libraries form as shown below.
If you selected a program name in the "Convert section names for" list box in step
1 above, ensure that the "Use a standard section name conversion file" option is
ticked. This will activate the section name conversion using the standard
conversion files supplied with SPACE GASS.
If you selected "Other" in the "Convert section names for" list box in step 1 above,
and you have a custom conversion file that you want to use, ensure that the "Use a
custom section name conversion file" option is ticked and that the name of the
custom conversion file is in the "Conversion filename" field. If you wish to create
a custom conversion file, follow the procedure in "Creating custom section name
conversion files" in the previous section.
If you wish to use a mixture of custom and standard conversion files, you can tick
both the "Use a custom section name conversion file" and "Use a standard section
name conversion file" options. In this case, SPACE GASS will try to convert the
section name using the custom conversion file first and, if the name cant be found
there, the standard conversion files will be used.
109

You can choose which components of the model to export by clicking the "Export"
branch of the menu tree on the left.
The normal procedure is to export the analytical model because, as well as the
geometric information, it contains "hidden" information such as support conditions,
member end releases, offset data, section and material properties, loads, load
combinations, design data and analysis results. However, if you are exporting to a
program that requires the physical model then you should select it. Note that when
exporting from SPACE GASS, the geometric information in the physical and
analytical models is the same.
For more information about the "Physical" and "Analytical" models, refer to "The
physical and analytical models" in the previous section.
110
Special Revit Structure links

Revit Structure is slightly different to the other programs because there are two
ways to link it to SPACE GASS. In addition to being able to communicate with
SPACE GASS via the CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file links, Revit Structure can be
configured to create SPACE GASS jobs directly and also update the Revit model
from them.
The advantage of using the direct Revit Structure link over the CIMSteel/2 and IFC
links is that after you have transferred the model to SPACE GASS, you can import
the section property and steel design changes back into Revit Structure without
completely replacing the Revit Structure model.
The advantage of the CIMSteel/2 and IFC Step file links is that you can start with a
SPACE GASS model and transfer it into Revit Structure to create a Revit model
from scratch. You cant do this with the direct Revit Structure link.
Of course, you can use a combination of methods. You could start with a SPACE
GASS model, export it using CIMSteel/2 or IFC to create a new Revit Structure
model, add to the model in Revit Structure and then export it back to SPACE
GASS using the direct Revit Structure link.
Setting up the direct link between SPACE GASS and Revit Structure
You can add the special SPACE GASS items to the Revit Structure "Tools" menu
by running the RevitSpaceGassLink.exe file in the SPACE GASS program folder
(usually "c:\Program files\SPACE GASS\Exe").
The program will attempt to find the SPACE GASS and Revit Structure program
folders and then display them in the following form.
111

If either field doesnt display a folder name with "(file found)" at the end, you will
have to click the appropriate browse button at the right of the field to select the
program folder manually. Once both folders have been identified correctly you can
click the Ok button and the SPACE GASS items will be automatically added to the
Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
Transferring from Revit Structure
To create a complete SPACE GASS model from Revit Structure, click the "Send
Model to SPACE GASS" item from the Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
112

When exporting to SPACE GASS, you have full control over units, connections
between beams and columns, loads, member offsets, specification of tension-only
members, section names, etc.
If the names of sections in your Revit Structure model are different to the names
used in the SPACE GASS section libraries, you can use (or set up your own)
section name conversion file that converts the Revit Structure names to the SPACE
GASS names. For more information, refer to "Creating custom section name
conversion files" in "CIMSteel/2 Step, IFC Step and Revit links".
Transferring to Revit Structure
When the SPACE GASS analysis and/or design is complete, you can update the
Revit Structure model by clicking the "Update Model from SPACE GASS" item
from the Revit Structure "Tools" menu.
When importing from SPACE GASS you can elect to incorporate steel design data
into the Revit Structure model. This is then retained in Revit Structure and returned
to SPACE GASS the next time you export a model to SPACE GASS from Revit
Structure.
113
DXF links
The DXF file format is a text format invented for AutoCAD that many programs
can import and export. Because DXF is essentially a drawing format rather than for
engineering models, it is limited to the basic structural geometry when used to
transfer a structural model. For this reason, transferring a structural model is best
done using the CIMSteel/2 (CIS/2) Step or IFC Step file formats or the Revit links
which are very comprehensive and can include loads.
The DXF format is, however, a very good means of creating drawings in the form
of plans, elevations, cross sections and connection drawings for transferring into a
CAD program.
Details of how to import and export DXF files are explained in the following
sections.
114
Importing DXF files

You can import a DXF file by selecting "Import - from DXF" from the File menu.
When importing, SPACE GASS interprets each discrete line in a CAD drawing as
a member. This has two ramifications that you will need to consider.
1. CAD programs do not know that intersecting lines need to be segmented
into sub-members with nodes at the intersection points. For example, if
you drew the top and bottom chords of a truss with just two lines adding
the struts and braces as separate lines, SPACE GASS would consider that
the chords are not connected to the web members except at the chord ends.
You must ensure every member that you want in the SPACE GASS model is
drawn as a separate line in the CAD program. If you draw a line in the
CAD program which continues past a node then the member will not be
connected to that node in the SPACE GASS model.
2. You shouldnt read a DXF file, created with full member geometry, back
into SPACE GASS (it interprets each member flange and web line as an
individual member).
Note that SPACE GASS only interprets LINE, 3DLINE and POLYLINE
entities as geometry when importing a DXF file. All other entity types are ignored.
It is usually much quicker and more efficient to
draw the structure directly in SPACE GASS rather than drawing it in your CAD
program and importing it into SPACE GASS. This is because SPACE GASS knows
it is dealing with a structure and not just lines in a drawing.
115
Exporting DXF files

There are two types of DXF files that can be exported from SPACE GASS.
1.
Elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules.
2.
Steel connection drawings.
Exporting elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules

You can export elevations, plans, cross sections and member schedules by
selecting "Export to DXF" from the File menu.
116

Full geometry
You can elect to simply export a wireframe drawing that consists of lines along the
centrelines of each member, or you can also include the full member geometry
which shows the actual member shapes including flanges and webs, etc.
Drawings that include the full member geometry can have the geometry lines
shortened by a distance factor that you specify in the General Configuration form
at each end of the member so that intersecting members do not run into one
another.
Member schedule
Selecting this check box causes a member schedule to be included in the drawing.
Z axis vertical
AutoCAD and some other 3D CAD programs assume that the Y-axis is vertical for
2D drawings, while the Z-axis is vertical for 3D drawings.
If this check box is selected then the global Z-axis is made vertical in the drawing,
otherwise the Y-axis is vertical.
Label members
Members can be unlabelled, or labelled with the member names, member marks or
both.
Draw with
By choosing 3DLINEs or FACES you can generate a full 3D drawing, or by
choosing 2DLINEs you can limit the drawing to just 2D views, elevations, plans or
cross sections of the structure. Note that FACEs support hidden line removal and
shading while 3DLINEs do not.
A 3D drawing complete with full member geometry is very useful for visualizing
how the structure fits together and for checking whether members clash with each
other or not.
Similar 3D drawings with hidden line removal can also be viewed directly in
SPACE GASS without having to go to a CAD program (see also View rendered
model).
Because almost all structural drawings are made
up predominantly of 2D plans, elevations and details, the ability of SPACE GASS
to produce 2D drawings of the frame is one of the most useful aspects of being able
117

to export DXF files. SPACE GASS allows you to create a series of 2D vertical or
horizontal "slices" at any position through a 3D frame and have them exported to
CAD as cross sections, elevations or plans.
These 2D drawings can contain the full member geometry complete with dashed
and dotted hidden lines. It is then a simple matter for a draftsperson to use a CAD
package, such as AutoCAD, to add connections, notation, etc. and complete the
structural drawing.
2D drawing plane
If you have specified a 2D drawing by choosing 2DLINEs in the "Draw with"
combo box, you must choose a 2D drawing plane here.
2D drawing limits
If you have specified a 2D drawing, then you must nominate upper and lower
drawing plane limits. The limits will be along the global axis at right angles to the
2D drawing plane. Any members that lie between the two limits will be included in
the drawing.
Scale
You can scale the drawing up or down with this field. For example, a scale of 10
causes the drawing dimensions to be reduced by a factor of 10. Units for the DXF
drawing file are the same as those used in SPACE GASS.
Title
Typing a title into this field causes it to appear at the bottom of the drawing.
DXF layer names
Layer names can be any names of up to 8 characters. AutoSKETCH requires layer
names to be integers from 1 to 10 in all cases. It is recommended that you
configure your CAD software so that the hidden line layer uses dashed or dotted
lines. This ensures that they can be easily distinguished from visible geometry
lines.
You can specify that the layers should be section-specific for centerlines, full
geometry and/or text. This means that each member type will have its own layer
rather than the entire frame just going into a single layer. You can then set your
CAD software so that each layer has a different color, making identification of the
various section types very easy.
118

Exporting steel connection drawings
During or after a steel connection design, you can create fully detailed and
annotated drawings of the connections and export them to DXF drawing files in
either of two ways.
1.
Enable the "Generate drawings for a CAD system" option at the beginning of the
connection design phase (see also Running a steel connection design). This causes
a DXF drawing file to be created for every connection designed.
2.
Click the
toolbar button after the connection design phase to view the
connection drawings graphically and then selectively produce DXF files from
there (see also View steel connection drawings).
Using either method, the final result is the same. You can control the drawing layer
names by setting them in the SPACE GASS configuration data. An example of a
steel connection drawing produced automatically by SPACE GASS is shown as
follows.
119
SPACE GASS connection detail
120

Modelling the structure
Before a frame can be modelled and analysed with a program such as SPACE
GASS, it must first be idealised and modelled mathematically. The most popular
mathematical model uses the concept of nodes connected by elements of a finite
size (finite elements).
SPACE GASS requires that frames are represented by nodes connected by
members, cables or plates. Such nodes are generally free to move and rotate in
space. Practical structures, however, are connected to a footing in some way, and
so node restraints must be applied which limit the movement of selected nodes.
The relative movement between nodes connected by a member, cable or plate is a
function of the section and material properties of that element. Loads can be
mathematically represented in the model and can be applied elements. Such loads
include all of the normal force and moment type loads, in addition to load inducers
such as prescribed displacements and temperature differentials. A single analysis
can consider numerous load cases, each of which may contain many different load
types.
During the analysis phase, all unrestrained node displacements (degrees of
freedom) are calculated for each load case. Element forces and moments are then
determined from the relative movement of the nodes they are connected to and,
finally, reactions are calculated by equating element reactions at each restrained
node.
If the analysis selected is non-linear, SPACE GASS does an initial linear analysis
and then modifies the stiffness matrix for each member based on the previous
analysis node displacements and member axial forces. It then re-analyses the
structure for the modified member stiffness and continues iterating the analysis
phase in this way until convergence is achieved. Note that because the plate
elements are linear elements at this stage, their stiffness is not modified during the
non-linear analysis iterations.
121
Coordinate systems
The geometry of a structural model is referenced by a set of global XYZ axes. Each
member and plate element also has its own set of local xyz axes so that items such
as section properties and local loads can be more easily referenced.
All axes are right hand orthogonal. This means that if you are looking at the XY
plane with the Y-axis pointing upwards and the X-axis pointing to the right, the Zaxis points towards you as shown below.
Global Axes
The shape and position of a structure in space is defined by a set of global axes
(X,Y,Z). All node coordinates, for example, are input relative to the global axes
system. The global XZ plane is assumed to be horizontal, while the global Y-axis
points vertically upwards.
Note that although SPACE GASS assumes that the Y-axis is vertical by default, it
can be configured to set the Z-axis to vertical. This is done via the Viewpoint tool.
Global Axes
Member Axes
The local axes for a member have their origin at node A and are defined as follows:
1. The x-axis lies along the axis of the member and points from node A to
node B.
2. The local y-axis is normal to the local x-axis and points in the same general
direction as the global Y-axis. It is orientated such that the local xy-plane is
parallel to the global Y-axis.
122

3. The local z-axis is orthogonal with x and y.
For members that have their longitudinal axis parallel to the global Y-axis,
rule 2 is undefined and hence, for these members, the local z-axis points in
the same direction as the global Z-axis.
4. If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the member is rolled about
its longitudinal x-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis
is defined, by an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with the
direction node or axis as shown below.
Member Local Axes
123

Member Direction Angle
Member Direction Node
Member Direction Axis
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular member, you
can display them graphically (see also View local axes).
124

Plate Axes
The local axes for a plate have their origin at the centre of the plate and are defined
as follows:
1. The x-axis is in the plane of the plate and is parallel to the line joining node
A and node B.
2. The local y-axis is also in the plane of the plate and is normal to the local
x-axis.
3. The local z-axis is normal to the plane of the plate and is orthogonal with x
and y.
4. If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the local axes are rotated
about the plates normal z-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node
or axis is defined, by an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with
the direction node or axis as shown below.
Note that defining a direction angle, node or axis affects the orientation of
the plates axes but not the orientation of the plate itself.
Plate Local Axes
125
Plate Direction Angle
Plate Direction Node
126
Plate Direction Axis
If you are unsure of the orientation of the local axes for a particular plate, you can
display them graphically (see also View local axes).
127
Sign conventions
Items which act along or about an axis are considered to be positive when they act
along or about the positive axis direction. Positive rotations conform to the right
hand screw rule shown as follows.
Right Hand Screw Rule
Applied loads have their sign determined by the axes system in which they are
referred. Most types of member and plate loads can be specified in either the global
or local system, however node loads and self weight are always referenced by the
global system.
Node displacements are positive if they displace along or around the positive
global axis directions. External reactions are positive if they act along or around the
positive global axis directions.
Member Actions
Member actions follow the sign conventions as follows.
128
Member Forces and Moments
Positive axial forces cause compression in the member.

Positive moments cause compression on the positive axis side of the member.
Channel and angle sections have their flange toes pointing in the direction
of the local z-axis. Positive y-axis moments therefore cause the flange toes to go
into compression.
Positive shears cause the node A end of the member to translate in the direction of
the positive axis with respect to the node B end.
Positive torsions cause the node A end of the member to rotate anti-clockwise with
respect to the node B end when observed from the node B end.
Plate Actions
Plate actions follow the sign conventions as follows.
129
Plate Forces
130

Plate Moments
When calculating the design moments for reinforced concrete slabs, the
twisting moment Mxy must be combined with the normal bending moments Mx and
My. The Wood-Armer method is commonly used for this and is explained in
"Bending Moments in Reinforced Concrete Slabs" below.
Plate Stresses
Note that plate elements have no rotational stiffness about their local z-axis.
This means that there is effectively a rotational pin connection between the plate
and its corner nodes about the axis normal to the plate.
Positive moments cause compression in the top (positive z-axis) face of the plate.
Plane Stress
Three dimensional objects subjected to loads generally have three principal
stresses, however in structural elements where one dimension is very small
131

compared to the other two (ie. plate elements), one of the three principal stresses is
zero and a state of "plane stress" is said to exist. In this case, the stresses are
negligible with respect to the smaller dimension as they are not able to develop
within the material and are small compared to the in-plane stresses.
Principal Stress
For plates subjected to plane stress, there are two principal stresses acting in the
principal axis directions. The angle between the principal axes and the local x and
y axes is called the principal angle. The principal stresses can be calculated from
x, y and xy using Mohr circle theory as follows.
1 (max) = (x + y)/2 + SQRT((x - y)2/4 + xy2)
(min) = (x + y)/2 - SQRT((x - y)2/4 + xy2)
xymax = ( - )/2
= Tan-1(2xy/(x - y))/2
where x, y and xy are the membrane and shear stresses in the local axis
directions (as per the above diagrams), 1 and 2 are the principal stresses, xymax
is the maximum shear stress and is the principal angle.
von Mises Stress
Richard von Mises (an eminent Austrian scientist who worked on solid mechanics,
fluid mechanics, aerodynamics, aeronautics, statistics and probability theory) found
that, even though none of the principal stresses exceeds the yield stress of the
material, it is possible for yielding to result from the combination of stresses. The
von Mises criteria is a formula for combining these principal stresses into an
equivalent stress, which is then compared to the yield stress of the material. The
yield stress is a known property of the material and is usually considered to be the
failure stress.
The equivalent stress is often called the "von Mises Stress" as a shorthand
description. It is not really a stress, but a number that is used as an index. If the von
Mises stress exceeds the yield stress, then the material is considered to be at the
failure condition.
The von Mises stress can be calculated from the principal stresses according to:
vm = SQRT(((1 2)2 + 12 + 22)/2)
where 1 and 2 are the principal stresses and vm is the equivalent or "von Mises"
stress.
132
Bending Moments in Reinforced Concrete Slabs

When evaluating the design moments for a reinforced concrete slab, the twisting
moment Mxy must be taken into account in addition to the normal bending
moments Mx and My. Mxy contributes a moment effect to both the principal
bending directions x and y.
Using the Wood-Armer method, the design moments Mx* and My* can be
determined as follows:
To design bottom reinforcement (ie. calculate moments that cause tension in the
bottom face):
Mx* = Mx + | Mxy |
My* = My + | Mxy |
If either of Mx* or My* from the above calculations are < 0 then
If Mx* < 0 then Mx* = 0 and My* = My + | Mxy2/Mx |
If My* < 0 then My* = 0 and Mx* = Mx + | Mxy2/My |
To design top reinforcement (ie. calculate moments that cause tension in the top
face):
Mx* = Mx - | Mxy |
My* = My - | Mxy |
If either of Mx* or My* from the above calculations are > 0 then
If Mx* > 0 then Mx* = 0 and My* = My - | Mxy2/Mx |
If My* > 0 then My* = 0 and Mx* = Mx - | Mxy2/My |
Further information can be found by searching for "Wood-Armer" on the Internet
or at web sites such as http://www.scribd.com/doc/76706580/Slab-Design-byWood-Armer-Method or http://www.scribd.com/doc/51463621/Wood-Armer
133
Ill-conditioning and instabilities

The most common analysis errors are caused by structures that are not correctly
conditioned or stabilised.
Ill-conditioning commonly occurs when frames contain members of widely
varying stiffnesss. When a very stiff member is connected to a very flexible
member and their stiffness matrices are assembled into the structure stiffness
matrix, some of the stiffness terms of the flexible member can be completely lost
due to their insignificance in comparison with the stiffness terms of the stiff
member. Hence, the flexible member is not completely represented and illconditioning occurs.
SPACE GASS contains an algorithm which checks for possible ill-conditioning
and displays warning messages if appropriate. Generally, these messages appear
well before ill-conditioning actually occurs. They do, however serve to highlight
structures which are close to being ill-conditioned. If after the analysis, the sum of
the reactions equals the sum of the applied loads then it can be assumed that the
frame is well conditioned.
Instabilities occur when one or more nodes are free to translate or rotate without
resistance from the frame. Sometimes unstable structures are very easy to detect,
such as when restraints have not been applied or when an obvious collapse
mechanism is possible.
Instabilities are often very subtle and difficult to isolate. For example, if an
unrestrained node has a pinned connection to each of its connecting members then
it would be free to rotate and an instability would result. This type of instability can
be hard to detect because it only affects one node in the structure. True trusses must
therefore have every rotational degree of freedom restrained.
Sometimes highly ill-conditioned frames can also
be interpreted as being unstable by the program.
Another common type of instability occurs when a group of members connected
end-to-end in a straight line are free to rotate about their longitudinal axis. The
instability occurs because during the analysis the program is unable to determine
the amount of rotation of the intermediate nodes.
134

Some instabilities cannot be detected by a static analysis, and you should
therefore be wary of results that contain very large deflections or deflections that
occur in the wrong direction. However most instabilities can be detected by a
buckling analysis and are identified by very low buckling load factors. If you get
buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg. shown as
"<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could indicate an
instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more likely to be an
instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every load case.
If the model contains instabilities, the buckling analysis may, in some cases, give
invalid results. In the absence of instability or buckling messages from the static
analysis, you should always check the deflections to see if they are excessive or
not. Excessive deflections are sometimes the only indicator of instabilities.
There are no hard and fast rules to follow in the detection of conditioning and
stability problems, however if the structure is clearly drawn and examined, the
problem usually becomes evident to any moderately experienced user.
SPACE GASS is now able to automatically rectify some instabilities caused by
nodes that are free to rotate or translate in one or more directions without resistance
from interconnecting members, restraints or constraints. For more information,
refer to "Stabilize unrestrained nodes" in Running a static analysis.
135
Project Data
Project data
This chapter describes in detail each type of data that can be included in the
analysis model.
This chapter does not include design data (see also "Steel member design",
"Steel connection design" and "Concrete column design").
See also Input methods.
See also Output.
See also Print graphics.
137
Units
SPACE GASS can handle a variety of different unit sets. The units do not need to
be consistent or even belong to the same system (ie. you can mix units from Metric
and Imperial). You can quickly select standard Imperial or Metric by clicking the
"Imperial" or "Metric" buttons and then make further individual changes as
required.
If the "Convert the current job for any unit changes" box is checked then all of the
data in the current job will be converted in accordance with the units changes you
made. If the box is not checked then the units will change but none of the job data
will be converted.
If the "Save the above units as the default for new jobs" box is checked then
SPACE GASS will use the selected units as the default every time you start a new
job in the future.
138
Project Data
If you are entering data and are not sure what the correct units are for that
particular type of data, you should either (a) select the datasheet (from the
datasheets button on the top toolbar) for the particular type of data you are
entering and observe the units displayed at the bottom-right of the datasheet or, (b)
produce an output report and observe the units displayed next to each section
heading.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before accepting any output from SPACE GASS, please check that all of the
input and output data conforms to the units you have selected. You can do this
most conveniently by producing a full output report and observing the units that
are shown next to the heading in each section of the report.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If you change units for any or all data types after having input some data and
you want the data to be converted, then you must ensure that the option to
"Convert the current job for any unit changes" is checked. Otherwise the data
will not be converted automatically.
See also The structure menu.
See also Initiator.
139
Job details and attachments

This tool allows you to specify headings for your job and attach other files that you
want to embed and save with the job.
Headings
Project heading
Allows you to describe the project.
Job heading
Allows you to describe the job.
Designer
Identifies you as the designer.
Notes
Allows you to describe the job in more detail.
Attachments
You can attach external documents, drawings, spreadsheets and other files to your
job that are then saved and embedded into the main <job>.SG job file. They can be
added, opened or extracted using the form shown below.
140
Project Data
See also The structure menu.

See also Headings text.
141
Node data
Nodes are used to define the geometry of the structure in 3D space, and to mark the
start and end points of members in the model.
There are six possible displacements (degrees of freedom) per node in a 3D frame.
They are translation along, and rotation about, X,Y, Z.
Node
The node numbering order is of no consequence and successive node numbers do
not have to be sequential. For example, a straight beam with five nodes could just
as easily be numbered 24,8,2,13,99 as 1,2,3,4,5. It is possible to leave gaps in the
numbering sequence to allow for nodes which might be inserted later.
While the node numbering sequence doesnt effect the results it is easier to
interpret the results of an analysis if a logical numbering sequence has been used.
You can renumber nodes at any stage by using the graphics renumbering
facility (see also Renumber).
X, Y and Z coordinates
Global coordinates of the node that may be positive or negative.
Dummy nodes
These are nodes that are not connected to any members. They are useful as
direction nodes or reference points.
See also Node restraints.
See also Master-slave constraints.
142
Project Data
See also Members.
See also Nodes text.
See also Datasheet Input.
See also Node properties.
See also Draw.
143
Member data
Members represent the actual beams, columns, ties, struts, cables, braces, etc. in
the real structure. They must be prismatic and must be connected to a node at each
end.
Member
The member numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no
consequence if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering tool
also means that the initial member numbering order is unimportant because it can
be easily changed at any time. Successive member numbers do not have to be
sequential.
Type
Choices are:
Normal,
Tension-only,
Compression-only,
Cable.
While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with

axial, flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression
then they are automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the
model. Members such as tension bracing and slender ties fall into this category.
Slender members that rely on axial tension to resist lateral loads applied to
them should be modelled as cables rather than as tension-only members!
While in compression, compression-only members act identically to normal
members with axial, flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into
tension then they are automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed
144
Project Data
from the model. This type of member is useful in situations such as where a
support member resists download loads by bearing on a footing but is unable to
resist any uplift.
In both tension-only and compression-only cases, the program does an initial
analysis and then scans for tension-only members that have gone into compression,
and compression-only members that have gone into tension. If any of these are
found they are disabled and the structure is re-analysed. This process continues
until all tension-only members are in tension and all compression-only members
are in compression. Note that disabled members are sometimes re-enabled if their
axial force reverses sign during the iteration process.
During a dynamic analysis, tension-only and compression-only members

are treated as normal members that can take tension and compression.
See also Tension-only and compression-only effects.
Cable members use axial tension only to resist lateral loads. They have no flexural,
torsional or shear capacity, and so to avoid instabilities you must restrain all
rotational degrees of freedom for nodes connected to cable members which are not
rotationally fixed to other members. Cable end fixities of FFFFFF, FFFFFR,
FFFFRR, FFFRRR all give the same results.
Cables that arent laterally loaded are treated as tension-only members which
become disabled if they go into compression. Laterally loaded cables sag instead of
taking compression.
Cable members cannot be included in a dynamic analysis.

See also Cable members.
Cable length
If the member type is "Cable" then an unstrained cable length can be specified to
allow for cable sag when the cable length is different to the chord length (as
follows). A zero cable length indicates that the unstrained cable length is equal to
the chord length.
145

Chord length
The chord length is the straight line distance between the member ends Note that a
members chord length may not be equal to the distance between its end nodes if
offsets exist for that member.
Using a direction angle, node or axis
If a direction angle, node or axis is defined then the member is rolled about its
longitudinal x-axis by the direction angle or, if a direction node or axis is defined,
by an amount such that the local y-axis is aligned with the direction node or axis as
shown below.
Note that the three member orientation members are mutually exclusive. Hence,
setting one of them to a desired value causes the other two to be disabled.
Member Local Axes
Direction angle
The direction angle (degrees), also called the skew angle, allows you to roll the
member (with its local axes) about its longitudinal axis. It is normally set to zero
so that the member local y-axis lies in a vertical plane.
146
Project Data
Member Direction Angle
Direction node
Selecting a direction node aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated node.
A direction node can be a normal node or a dummy node (one which is not
connected to any members).
Direction Node
147
Direction axis
Choices are:
X axis,
Y axis,
Z axis,
-X axis,
-Y axis,
-Z axis,
N/A.
Selecting a direction axis aligns the local xy-plane with the nominated axis (eg. -Z
axis selected in the diagram as follows).
Direction Axis
Node A and B
The two end nodes connected to each member are referred to as node A and node
B. Node A is considered to be at the start of the member and any external loads
applied to the member are located by their distance from node A.
Node A cannot be equal to node B, however there are no restrictions relating to
node A being numerically bigger than node B or vice-versa.
End fixity
A member may be released or fixed to its end nodes with varying degrees of fixity.
Member end fixity is referenced by the local axes system and there are six possible
components at each end which may be fixed or released. These components are
148
Project Data
specified by a six character code corresponding to translational fixity along x, y
and z and rotational fixity about x, y and z respectively.
The letter "F" represents fixed and "R" represents released. Thus, as an example, a
pin ended truss member with no rotational end fixity in a 3D frame could be
modelled using a fixity of "FFFFRR" at each end (or FFFRRR if the torsions are
also released), while a pin ended truss member in a 2D frame could have fixities of
"FFFFFR". Members with fully fixed ends would have fixities of "FFFFFF".
You can also specify a spring stiffness, allowing you to model a semi-rigid joint.
The letter "S" represents a spring stiffness, applicable to rotation about the local y
or z axes of the member. If you specify a spring stiffness in the fixity code you will
also need to enter a corresponding stiffness in the y/z stiffness fields.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end
fixities specify how members are connected to their end nodes, while node
restraints specify how nodes are connected to the footings or other supports. Note
that completely rigid frame members should have member end fixities of
"FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame has pin based supports or not.
Section
The section property number references a particular member cross section from the
section property data. Thus, members with identical section properties would have
the same section property numbers.
The current section property for the members selected is displayed in this field. If
no section property has been chosen, or if more than one section property applies to
the selection, this field will be blank. The source is displayed along with an
indication of whether the section has been flipped and what type of angle section
was chosen (if appropriate).
You can change the section property by entering another section property number.
If this number corresponds with a section which has already been defined, the
corresponding properties will be displayed. All of the members selected will have
this property applied to them.
Material
The material property number references a particular material from the material
property data. Thus, members with identical materials would have the same
material property numbers.
149
For full details of the forces and moments in members, refer to "Sign
conventions".
See also Section properties.
See also Material properties.
See also Member offsets.
See also Members text.
See also Member properties.
See also Draw.
150
Project Data
Plate data
A mesh of plate elements can be used to represent walls, slabs, plates, etc. in the
real structure. Plate elements can be triangular or quadrilateral with a node at each
vertex. They can be connected at their nodes to other non-plate elements such as
beams, columns, cables, etc.
Plate
The plate numbering order affects the analysis frontwidth, however this is of no
consequence if the wavefront optimiser is used. The graphical renumbering tool
also means that the initial plate numbering order is unimportant because it can be
easily changed at any time. Successive plate numbers do not have to be sequential.
Type
Each plate can be specified as thick (using Mindlin plate theory Ref. 19,20,21) or
thin (using Kirchoff plate theory Ref. 22,23). Transverse shear is not considered
for Kirchoff plate theory and for the vast majority of applications in structural
engineering we would recommend that Mindlin plate theory be used.
Direction angle, node, axis
By default, a plates local axes are such that x and y are in the plane of the plate
and z is normal to the plate. The x-axis is aligned with a line joining nodes A and B
and the y-axis is orthogonal with respect to x and z. The direction fields allow you
to rotate the x and y axes about the plates normal z axis. The purpose for this is to
control the axes for which the output results apply.
151
Plate Axes
It is recommended that for the plate elements in a surface, you align all their inplane axes in the same direction rather than having them orientated randomly. For
circular plates, you may elect to have all of the axes aligned in the same direction
or, alternatively, you could align them radially or tangentially depending on which
type of output you require.
If the plate axes are orientated randomly then the results will be for different axis
directions and they will be difficult to compare. It will also be difficult to produce
meaningful contour diagrams if the plate axes are not aligned.
The Align plate axes tool can be used to quickly align the axes for a selection of
plate elements. It will also optionally reverse the normal z-axis of some plate
elements if they are not all pointing in the same direction. You can also use the
Reverse plate direction tool as an alternative way of reversing the normal z-axis.
Direction Angle
152
Project Data
Direction Node
Direction Axis
153

Actual thickness
This is the actual thickness of the plate and is used to calculate its self weight and
self-mass if they have been specified.
The thickness should be limited to around 15% of the in-plane plate dimensions for
Mindlin plates and around 5% for Kirchoff plates. The plate dimensions relate to
the overall plate size and not the element size.
Membrane thickness
This is used to calculate the membrane stiffness of the plate and is usually the same
as the actual thickness. The membrane stiffness terms are the ones that affect Fx,
Fy and Fxy as shown below.
Bending thickness
This is used to calculate the bending stiffness of the plate and is usually the same as
the actual thickness. The moment of inertia per unit length of the plate is taken as
Tb3/12, where Tb is the bending thickness. The bending stiffness terms are the ones
that affect Mx, My and Mxy as shown below.
154
Project Data
When calculating the design moments for reinforced concrete slabs, the
twisting moment Mxy must be combined with the normal bending moments Mx and
My. The Wood-Armer method is commonly used for this and is explained in "Sign
conventions".
Shear thickness
This is used to calculate the transverse shear stiffness of the plate and is only used
for Mindlin (thick) plate theory. For a uniform plate the shear thickness should be
approximately Ta*(5/6) to be consistent with Mindlin thick plate theory, where Ta
is the actual plate thickness. The transverse shear stiffness terms are the ones that
affect Vxz and Vyz as shown below.
155
Offset
Plates can be offset along their normal z-axis. This may be required to line them up
with other interconnecting elements such as other plates or members.
156
Project Data
Material
Material property number references a particular material from the material
property data. Thus, plates with identical materials would have the same material
property numbers.
For an accurate analysis, plates must be properly meshed into elements that
are a suitable size, shape and pattern. For more information, refer to the Mesh
tool.
For full details of the forces, moments and stresses in plates, refer to "Sign
conventions".

See also Plates text.
See also Plate properties.
See also Draw.
157
Node restraint data
Node restraints are used to model the structures supports. They are sometimes
referred to as boundary conditions.
Unrestrained nodes are generally free to move along or about any axis direction,
however practical structures must be restrained to a footing in some way, otherwise
instabilities would occur.
Nodes can be restrained about one or all of their six degrees of freedom and such a
restraint may take the form of a fixed restraint or a flexible restraint. If a degree of
freedom is given a flexible restraint then a spring stiffness must also be input.
Fixing a degree of freedom has the effect of immobilizing that node movement,
while specifying a flexible restraint causes the node movement to be a function of
the spring stiffness.
Node restraints are specified by a six character code corresponding to restraints
along X, Y and Z and about X, Y and Z respectively. "F" represents fixed, "R"
represents released and "S" represents spring (or flexible). "D" restraints are no
longer supported and "F" should be used instead.
For example, a pin-based support that prevents all translations but allows the node
to rotate about X, Y or Z would have a restraint code of FFFRRR. Alternatively, a
roller support that allows the node to move in the X direction only and rotate about
X, Y or Z would have a restraint code of RFFRRR. A fully built-in (encastre)
support would have a restraint code of FFFFFF. A restraint that prevents
movement in the Z direction while allowing all other movements and rotations
would have a restraint code of RRFRRR.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
158
Project Data
Member end fixities should not be confused with node restraints. Member end
fixities specify how members are connected to their end nodes, while node
restraints specify how nodes are connected to the footings or other supports. Note
that completely rigid frame members should have member end fixities of
"FFFFFF" regardless of whether the frame has pin based supports or not.
General restraint
The general restraint facility allows you to apply a restraint to all otherwise
unrestrained nodes.
For example, if you have a frame with two pin based supports and you want to
prevent all translations in the Z direction for all of its other nodes, you could apply
restraints of FFFRRR to the two support nodes and specify a general restraint of
RRFRRR.
In order to input a general restraint, you simply apply the desired restraint to any
unrestrained node and then tick the "General" box (or select "Yes" in the General
Restraint column if you are using a datasheet).
Using a general restraint saves data entry time and reduces the quantity of printed
output. Note that output reports only show the general restraint code on one node,
even though the analysis has assumed that it applies to all unrestrained nodes.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The general restraint facility should be used with great care and only if you are
absolutely sure of the effect it has on your model! If you apply a general restraint
early in the development of your model and then forget that it exists at some later
stage when it is no longer appropriate, you could be over-restraining your model.
This could happen if nodes are added that shouldnt get the general restraint. It
could also happen if you initially use a general restraint to prevent all out-ofplane movements in a 2D frame for example and then extend the frame to 3D
and forget to remove the general restraint.
X, Y and Z axial stiffnesses
Axial spring stiffness for degrees of freedom restrained with "S". Axial spring
stiffnesses must always be greater than zero.
When modelling the elastic properties of soil as a spring support, the spring
stiffness is based on the modulus of subgrade reaction of the soil. This is a
notoriously difficult parameter to get an accurate figure for. The following typical
values of the modulus of subgrade reaction (to be used as a guide) are extracted
159

from J. E. Bowles, "Foundation analysis and design", McGraw Hill 4th Edition,
1988.
Soil Type
Loose sand:
Medium dense sand:
Dense sand:
Clayey medium dense sand:
Silty medium dense sand:
Clayey soil with qu < 200 kPa:
Clayey soil with qu in range 200 to 400 kPa:
Clayey soil with qu > 800 kPa:
Modulus of Subgrade
Reaction
4800 - 16000 kN/m3

9600 80000 kN/m3
64000 128000 kN/m3
32000 80000 kN/m3
24000 48000 kN/m3
12000 24000 kN/m3
24000 48000 kN/m3
> 48000 kN/m3
The spring stiffness to be input into SPACE GASS is simply equal to the modulus
of subgrade reaction multiplied by the area of the footing that the spring is
modelling. For example, if you have a 600mm wide strip footing supported on soil
with a modulus of subgrade reaction of 80000 kN/m3 and the soil is modelled as
springs spaced 500mm apart, the axial stiffness of each spring would be 80000 x
0.600 x 0.500 = 24000 kN/m. Units for the spring stiffness are shown in the
headings of the node restraints datasheet.
X, Y and Z rotational stiffnesses
Rotational spring stiffness spring stiffnesses for degrees of freedom restrained with
"S". Rotational spring stiffnesses must always be greater than zero.
Important note about restraining 2D frames
It is common practice amongst some engineers to restrain all out-of-plane
movements in 2D frames. While this is generally appropriate for static analyses
(provided there are no out-of-plane loads), it may not be appropriate for buckling
and dynamic frequency analyses. This is because the frame may buckle or vibrate
in an out-of-plane direction even though there are no loads in that direction. Of
course, nodes that are braced in the out-of-plane direction should be restrained in
that direction, however nodes that can move out-of-plane in the real structure
should not be restrained in that direction in the model. Failure to do this could
affect the buckling load factors, effective lengths and dynamic natural frequencies
and mode shapes, and could result in unsafe designs.
For example, if a 2D frame rafter is sub-divided, the intermediate nodes should not
be restrained in the out-of-plane direction unless they are braced in that direction in
160
Project Data
the real structure. Restraining them would prevent any out-of-plane buckling or
vibration modes that could occur if the rafter member hadnt been sub-divided.
Another example is a pin support for a 2D XY-plane frame column base which
could be modelled with the standard 2D pin base restraint code of FFFFFR,
however this would prevent rotations about the global X-axis. In reality, a column
pin support would probably allow rotations about both horizontal axes and hence a
restraint code of FFFRFR would be more appropriate. Restraining the rotation
about the X-axis would affect the out-of-plane buckling and vibration modes of the
column and could result in incorrect results.
The general rule to follow is that if a node is free to move or rotate in the real
structure then it should not be restrained in that direction in the model. Be careful
with the general restraint, as it is applied to all nodes that dont have their own
restraint, and for some nodes this may not be appropriate.
If you have applied a general restraint and require some nodes to not have a
restraint at all, you can prevent them from getting the general restraint by
restraining them with a code of RRRRRR.
See also Node restraints text.
See also View node / member / plate properties.
161
Section property data

You can display the section property data for a member by clicking the
in the Member Properties form.
button
Section properties must be input for each type of member cross section in the
model. Each section property describes the geometric properties of a single cross
section relative to the local member axes.
Section
There are two fields, one for the section property number and the other for the
section name. Section property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any
particular order. The section property name is used as a description for the section,
and as a reference for sections which have been read from a library.
Source
This indicates the source of the section. There are four different sources:
Manual:
Library:
Shp Bldr:
Std Shps:
User defined properties.

A shape taken from a library.
The source will be the library name (eg. AUST300).
Section defined in the Shape Builder.
Section defined in Standard Shapes.
See also Standard sections libraries.

See also Shape builder.
162
Project Data
If you create a section in the shape builder by importing it from the library,
and you dont make any changes to it, the source will be the name of the library the
section was taken from. However, you can still edit the shape via the shape builder.
You can also edit other library sections in the shape builder, even if the section
wasnt input via the shape builder.
Flipped
"YES" if the section has been flipped (see also Flipping a section).
Angle Type
Indicates the angle configuration.
Choices are:
Single,
Short-Short,
Long-Long,
Starred.
See also Angle sections.

Area of section
Cross sectional area of the section.
Torsion constant
Torsional stiffness of the cross section. Calculating the torsion constant for
arbitrary cross sections can be quite complex, particularly if the cross section
changes shape (warps) under torsion. For example, a circular tube has a relatively
high torsion constant because it doesnt warp under torsion. However, if a saw cut
is made through the tube wall the torsion constant is drastically reduced because
the cross section can change shape under very small torsion loads. Thus two shapes
with very similar geometric properties can have substantially different torsion
constants.
The torsion constant for shapes which cannot warp is equal to the polar
moment of inertia.
The torsion constants for various common shapes can be calculated using the
following formulae.
163
Solid circle:
Circular tube:
Solid square:
Solid rectangle:
where A & B are length and breadth (or vice-versa)
and A>B
I, H, T, L and angle J is equal to the sum of the torsion constants of the
sections: composite sections which constitute the total
cross-section.
Y and Z moments of inertia
Principal moments of inertia of the cross section.
Y and Z shear areas
Principal shear areas of the cross section, where a value of zero represents an
"Infinite" shear area.
The shear area is the effective cross sectional area which is used in the calculation
of shear deformations. In general, the shear area depends upon the shearing stress
distribution, which in turn depends upon the shape of the cross section.
For rolled steel sections, the major axis shear area is approximately equal to the
area of the web(s). For rectangular cross sections, the shear area is equal to A/1.2,
where A is the gross area. Values for other shapes are given in standard textbooks
on strength of materials.
For most cross sections and materials, the shear deformations are
negligible compared to the flexural deformations. Therefore, the shear area can
often be specified as infinite.
164
Project Data
Principal angle
Angle (degrees) from principal axes to geometric axes in anti-clockwise direction.
For example, the principal angle is positive for single angle sections that have their
horizontal leg pointing to the left.
Section mark
Member mark used in connection detail drawings, marking plans, etc.
Member cross sections are always shown as if you are looking along the
member from the node B end to the node A end.
See also Section properties text.
See also View rendered model.
165
Standard section libraries

Standard sections libraries are available for most countries and they include all I
sections, H sections, T sections, channels, angles, square tubes, rectangular tubes
and circular tubes.
See also Standard library.
166
Project Data
Shape builder
You can open the shape builder by clicking the
button in the Member
Properties form of either the renderer or the traditional graphics window.
The shape builder allows you to modify library shapes, combine library, standard
and custom shapes into built-up sections, and create standard and custom shapes.
Standard shapes are easily created by clicking on one of the standard shapes
buttons and entering the desired dimensions. For a custom shape, you are required
to enter three or more coordinates and the shape builder will display the shape and
calculate the section properties.
Inputting shapes
To input a shape, you can:
167
Import it from a sections library by clicking the library button
Click the custom shape button

define the perimeter of a shape.
Click the line shape button

and then enter a set of coordinates to
define a shape formed by a line of a user defined thickness.
Click one of the standard shape buttons
and then enter a set of coordinates to
and then enter its dimensions.

Any shape (other than a hollow shape) can be converted to a negative shape (void)
by ticking the "Negative shape (hole)" option. This makes it very easy to model
voids in your cross section.
Editing and combining shapes

You can input up to 10 shapes from any of the above sources and combine them to
form your desired cross section.
Each shape can be translated, mirrored, rotated or transposed using the shape
editing buttons shown below.
168
Project Data
Shapes can also be dragged and snapped together via their edge and corner
reference points as shown below.
169

When dragging shapes, the behaviour can be controlled using the grid and snap
settings along the bottom of the shape builder as shown below.
Shapes can be copied by dragging while holding down the Ctrl key.
Multiple shapes can be selected by clicking them while holding down the Shift key.
You can then use the alignment buttons
at the
top of the shape builder to align the selected shapes along the top, bottom, center,
left or right. Alternatively, you can stack shapes vertically or horizontally using the
stack alignment buttons
170
Project Data
Dimensions
Dimensions can be added to shapes by clicking the dimensions button
171
Design properties
SPACE GASS can now do a steel member design or check using sections that
haven't been imported from a library, however you must specify their steel design
properties. You can do this via the shape builder "Design Properties" button.
Generally speaking, you would only use the "Design Properties" button when are
you don't want to save the section to a library because the saving to library process
also includes inputting the steel design properties.
172
Project Data
Saving sections
You can save your section to a custom library for later recall into any other jobs by
clicking the "Save to Library" button
appears below.
and then filling out the form that
If a custom section library doesnt yet exist or if you wish to create a new custom
button at the right of the "Library" field and then fill out
library, click the
the custom librarys details. Similarly, if the library doesnt yet contain any groups
or if you wish to create a new group within a custom library, click the
button at the right of the "Group" field and then fill out the groups details.
173
The SPACE GASS section libraries can now contain built-up sections made
from whatever shapes you can build in the shape builder, including voids. Built-up
or non-standard sections cannot be used in the design/check modules, however
they can be recalled into any other jobs and used in a static, dynamic or buckling
analysis.
The shape builder always shows the cross section as if you are looking
along the member from node A towards node B. This is the reverse of how it was in
SPACE GASS 10 and earlier versions.
The section properties displayed in the panel on the right side of the shape
builder apply to the whole cross section (ie. the sum of the composite shapes in the
display window).
See also View rendered model.
174
Project Data
Flipping a section
If the properties of a section have been read from a library, SPACE GASS then
asks if the section has been flipped. This simply causes the section to have its
major and minor section properties transposed and allows the section to be used in
the frame with its major axis parallel to the local y-axis instead of the z-axis. In
most cases, the major axis of a member is parallel to its local z-axis (see also
Coordinate systems).
When a section is flipped, the orientation of the local y and z axes are not affected.
This information is not required for sections with equal major and minor axis
section properties.
Flipped section orientation
You can see from the diagram above that when the section is flipped, the y and z
axes remain unchanged. This method of flipping a section is different to applying a
90 direction angle to a member. A direction angle rotates the local axes together
with the section, while the above method simply transposes the section properties.
Note that the transposed properties apply to every member which references the
flipped section property number, while a direction angle rotation affects only the
member(s) to which it is applied.
175
Column and beam Tee sections

Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to
be lying on their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and
no flipping). They are orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have
the major axis parallel to the flange.
Tee section orientation
176
Project Data
Angle sections
For angle sections, you can specify single or double angle sections.
Choices are:
Single angle,
Double angle with short legs connected,
Double angle with long legs connected,
Double angle starred (equal angles only).
Angle section orientation
The diagrams above show the orientation of a single angle section and the available
double angle sections. Note that the z-axis is the major axis in all cases.
For double equal angles, the long leg is assumed to be the vertical
leg in the diagrams above. Note that in SPACE GASS 10 and earlier,
double equal angle sections with long legs connected were adjusted
177

internally and treated as though their short legs were connected. This
adjustment was removed in SPACE GASS 11 and later versions.
178
Project Data
Material property data

You can display the material property data for a member by clicking the
button in the Member Properties form. The material property data for a plate is
always shown in the Plate Properties form.
Material properties must be input for each type of member or plate material in the
model. Each material property describes the properties of a single isotropic
material.
Material
There are two fields, one for the material property number and the other for the
material name. Material property numbers do not have to be sequential or in any
particular order. The material name is used as a description for the material, and as
a reference for materials which have been read from a library.
E
Value of Youngs Modulus for the material.
179
Poissons
Value of Poissons Ratio for the material.
Mass Dens
Mass density, required only for self weight calculations.
Temp Coeff
The coefficient of thermal expansion, required only for thermal loads. You must
ensure that this is appropriate for the temperature units you have selected (see also
Units).
Fc
Characteristic concrete strength, required only for concrete materials. Is used only
in the SPACE GASS concrete design modules.
See also Material properties text.
180
Project Data
Master-slave constraint data

You can display the master-slave constraints data for a node by clicking the
button in the Node Properties form.
Master-slave constraints allow you to connect nodes together with imaginary links
so that they translate and/or rotate together. The degree of constraint can be varied
so that any or all of the six degrees of freedom of a node can be linked to another
node. For example, it is possible to connect two nodes together with a 3D rigid
link, a 2D rigid link, a 2D translational link, a 2D rotational link, a 1D translational
link, a 1D rotational link or any other combination of the six degrees of freedom.
A node which is linked to another node is termed a "slave node" and the
node to which it is linked is termed its "master node". A master node can have
many slave nodes, however a slave node can have only one master node. A typical
frame can have many slave nodes and many master nodes. A master node cannot
be the slave of another master node. A slave node constrained DOF cannot be a
support (restraint).
A constraint link between a slave node and its master node not only affects the
movements of the slave but also the master.
Node
Slave node to be constrained.
181

Master node
The node to which the slave node is to be constrained. You can select a master
node by clicking the "Select" button and then choosing a node.
Constraint code
Master-slave constraints are controlled by a six character constraint code which
specifies the exact constraint relationship between a slave node and its master. The
six characters of the constraint code correspond to translational constraint along X,
Y and Z and rotational constraint about X, Y and Z respectively. "F" represents
fixed (constrained) and "R" represents released (unconstrained).
In order to illustrate how the constraint code works, we will consider some typical
examples of constraints in the global XY plane. Please note that the following
examples apply equally to the XZ and YZ planes also.
When considering the XY plane, the only significant characters in the constraint
code are the first, second and sixth. These correspond to translation along X and Y,
and rotation about Z. When considering the XZ plane, only the first, third and fifth
characters apply, and when considering the YZ plane, only the second, third and
fourth characters apply.
If a slave node has a constraint code of "RFxxxR" (where xxx could be any
combination of Fs and Rs) then its Y-axis translation will be the same as its
master node. Note that the X-axis translation and the Z-axis rotation of the slave
node will be completely independent and in no way affected by its master node.
This can be represented by the simple constraint equation Dys = Dym, where Dys
is the slave Y-axis translation and Dym is the master Y-axis translation.
Similarly, if a slave node has a constraint code of "RRxxxF" then its Z-axis rotation
will be the same as its master node and the X-axis and Y-axis translations will be
independent. The constraint equation in this case is Rzs = Rzm, where Rzs is the
slave Z-axis rotation and Rzm is the master Z-axis rotation.
A slightly different situation occurs if both a translational degree of freedom and a
rotational degree of freedom are constrained. An example of this is a constraint
code of "FFxxxF". In this case, the constraint code effectively places a 2D
imaginary rigid member between the slave node and its master so that the
translations of the slave node are a function of both the translations and the rotation
of the master node. The constraint equations in this case are
Dxs = Dxm-Ly*Rzm
Dys = Dym+Lx*Rzm
Rzs = Rzm
182
Project Data
where Lx and Ly are the horizontal and vertical components of the distance
between the slave and master nodes.
Constraint movements
The following list shows some common constraint codes.
FRRRRR
RFRRRR
RRFRRR
RRRFRR
RRRRFR
RRRRRF
FFFRRR
X translation constrained
(Dxs=Dxm)
Y translation constrained
Z translation constrained
X rotation constrained
Y rotation constrained
Z rotation constrained
X, Y and Z translations
constrained
(Dys=Dym)
(Dzs=Dzm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
(Dxs=Dxm)
(Dys=Dym)
183
RRRFFF
X, Y and Z rotations
constrained
FFRRRF
Rigid link in XY plane
FRFRFR
Rigid link in XZ plane
RFFFRR
Rigid link in YZ plane
FFFFFF
Rigid link in all planes
(Dzs=Dzm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
(Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm)
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm)
(Rzs=Rzm)
(Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym)
(Dxs=Dxm+Lz*Rym)
(Rys=Rym)
(Dys=Dym-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Dxs=Dxm-Ly*Rzm+Lz*Rym)
(Dys=Dym+Lx*Rzm-Lz*Rxm)
(Dzs=Dzm-Lx*Rym+Ly*Rxm)
(Rxs=Rxm)
(Rys=Rym)
(Rzs=Rzm)
Any further combinations of the six character constraint code can also be specified.
The following diagrams show the effect that each of the XY plane constraints have.
The effects shown apply equally to the XZ and YZ planes also. Note that constraint
codes for any of the three planes can be combined together as can be seen in the
examples above.
184
Project Data
Typical constraint links
185

Master-slave constraints can be used to great advantage in many structures. They
are particularly useful for modelling floor slabs in three dimensional frames. A
typical floor slab may displace and rotate in plan as a unit but its plan dimensions
do not change due to its large in-plane rigidity. This could be modelled in SPACE
GASS by using one of the perimeter nodes in a typical floor slab as the master
node for that floor and specifying all of the other perimeter nodes in that floor to be
slaves of the master node in the in-plane (XZ plane) directions using a constraint
code of "FRFRFR". Thus all nodes in the floor would move as a unit in the inplane (horizontal plane in this case) directions. They would still, however be free to
move independently in the out-of-plane (vertical) direction.
Rigid diaphragm modelled with constraints
186
Project Data
Another example is the case of wind bracing or a scissor lift where two continuous
members cross each other and are connected to each other with a bolt or pin. The
pin transfers shear from one member to the other but not moment so that the
members are free to rotate about the pin independently.
Scissor lift modelled with constraints
This situation is very difficult to model in a frame analysis program unless a

constraint facility is available. Using a master-slave constraint, it is a simple matter
to locate two nodes on the same point where the two members cross. One of the
members would be connected to the first node and the other member would be
connected to the second node. Assuming that the frame was in the XY plane, a
constraint code of "FFRRRR" could then be used to force the two nodes to
translate together but rotate independently.
A third example of a common master-slave constraints application is in the
modelling of a shear wall. A column of nodes consisting of one master and the rest
slaves could be used to form the wall itself. Any other nodes connected directly to
the wall could also be slaves of the master. Assuming that the wall was in the XY
plane, a constraint code of "FFRRRF" could be used.
Another situation which is difficult to model without using a master-slave
constraint occurs when two members of different depths are connected together
end-to-end such that their centrelines do not line up. In such cases a node could be
placed at the end of each member and then a master-slave constraint could be used
to join the two nodes together with a rigid link.
187

In some situations, short stiff members could be used as an alternative to constraint
links, however they would be susceptible to ill-conditioning problems, particularly
if they were very stiff in comparison to other members in the structure.
Master-slave constraints do not suffer from ill-conditioning problems,

regardless of how short the links are.
See also Master-slave constraints text.
188
Project Data
Member offset data

You can display the offsets data for a member by clicking the
Member Properties form.
Choices are:
button in the
Local,
Global.
It is possible to specify a rigid member segment that doesnt deform under bending
at each end of a member. These rigid segments have infinite stiffness for bending,
shear and axial deformations. Member offsets are very useful for modelling the
very stiff area at the interconnection of members (especially stiff members such as
large steel members or concrete members).
Member offsets
For example, the rectangular reinforced concrete frame shown above on the left
could be modelled quite accurately with SPACE GASS using a model similar to
the one shown on the right. Each member in the model has short member offsets at
each end where intersecting members overlap.
189
Member offsets are also very useful in situations where the centrelines of
connected members do not intersect at a node. For example, the diagonal brace
members of a plane truss may intersect below the top chord centreline. Member
offsets could be used to allow for this.
Member offsets could also be used to model the centreline mismatch when
members of different depths are connected end-to-end with "top-of-steel"
alignment.
The ends of a member with "local" offsets are offset relative to an axis
connecting the end nodes of the member rather than being relative to the axis of
the member in its final position.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Be careful when sub-dividing members that have local offsets because the
direction of the axis that the offsets are relative to will change when any
intermediate nodes are added.
See also Member offset text.
190
Project Data
Node load data
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to any node along or about the
global X, Y and Z axis directions. If a load is applied to a restrained degree of
freedom then that load is simply added to the final reaction.
Node loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be combined with
other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain node loads.
Node
Node to be loaded.
X, Y and Z forces
Node forces (global axes).
X, Y and Z moments
Node moments (global axes).
See also Node loads text.
See also Node loads.
See also View diagrams.
191
Prescribed node displacement data
Prescribed node displacements allow you to specify known displacements and/or

rotations to nodes. They can be very useful for situations where a frame deflects by
a fixed and known amount such as settlement of a support for example.
Prescribed displacements may only be applied to restrained (fixed or

deleted) degrees of freedom, otherwise they are ignored.
Prescribed node displacements may be applied in any number of load cases and
may be combined with other load types within the same load case. It is important to
note that like all other load types, prescribed node displacements do not have any
effect on load cases other than the ones in which they are input.
Case
Load case to contain prescribed displacements.
Node
Node to be displaced.
X, Y and Z translations
Node translations (global axes).
X, Y and Z rotations
Node rotations (global axes).
See also Prescribed node displacements text.
192
Project Data
See also Prescribed node displacements.
193
Member concentrated load data
Concentrated forces and moments may be applied to members in either the global
or the local axes systems. Such loads can act along or about any of the three axis
directions and can be located at any point along the member.
Member concentrated loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may
be combined with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain concentrated member loads.
Member
Member to be loaded.
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple concentrated loads on a member in the same
load case. Each load is given a sub load number (different to a load case number).
For example five concentrated loads applied to a member within the same load
case would have sub load numbers of 1,2,3,4 and 5 respectively. Unless there are
multiple loads applied to a single member within the same load case, the sub load
number should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
Choices are:
Local,
Global.
Units
Units system in which load positions are referenced.
194
Project Data
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Position
The load position is defined as the distance from node A to the load. Depending on
the "Units system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or
as a percentage of the member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load at
midspan could have the load position specified as 300mm or as 50%.
X, Y and Z forces
Member concentrated forces.
X, Y and Z moments
Member concentrated moments.
See also Member concentrated loads text.
See also Member concentrated loads.
195
Member distributed force data
Member distributed forces can be input in the local or global axes systems and can
act along any of the three axis directions.
Distributed forces may start and finish at any point along the member length and
may vary in intensity from start to finish. Thus, it is possible to apply uniform,
trapezoidal, or triangular distributed loads.
Member distributed forces may be applied in any load case and may be combined
with other load types within the same load case.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For "Local" or "Global Inclined" loads, the total load is equal to the load per
unit length multiplied by the actual distance between the load start and finish
positions. For "Global Projected" loads, the total load is equal to the load per
unit length multiplied by the projected distance between the load start and finish
positions.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
For cable members, distributed forces must be uniform and extend over the
entire length of the cable. For "Global Inclined" UDLs applied to cable
members, the total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the
unstrained cable length (which may not be equal to the distance between the
cables end nodes). For "Global Projected" UDLs applied to cable members, the
total load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the projected distance
between the cables end nodes.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member forces.
196
Project Data
Member
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed loads on a member in the same
For example two distributed loads applied to a member within the same load case
would have sub load numbers of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are multiple
loads applied to a single member within the same load case, the sub load number
should be 1.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced. There are two global axes systems
which may be used. When the axes are designated as "Global projected" the load
acts over the projected length of the member, while a "Global inclined" load acts
over the actual length of the member.
Choices are:
Local,
Global projected,
Global inclined.
Units
Choices are:
Actual,
Percentage.
Start and finish positions

The load start and finish positions are taken relative to node A. Depending on the
"Units system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or
percentage of the member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load that
extends from the 150mm mark to the end could have the load start position
specified as 150mm or as 25%, and the load finish position specified as 600mm or
as 100%. The finish position must always be greater than start.
X, Y and Z start and finish forces
Start and finish member distributed forces.
See also Member distributed forces text.
See also Member distributed forces.
197

198
Project Data
Member distributed torsion data
Member distributed torsion loads are similar to member distributed forces except
they may only be applied about the local x-axis. The load intensity may be varied
between the start and finish positions. Member distributed torsions may be applied
in any load case and may be combined with other load types within the same load
case.
Case
Load case to contain distributed member torsions.
Member
Sub load
This allows you to reference multiple distributed torsions on a member in the same
For example two distributed torsions applied to a member within the same load
case would have sub load numbers of 1 and 2 respectively. Unless there are
multiple loads applied to a single member within the same load case, the sub load
number should be 1.
Units
Choices are:
Actual,
199

Percentage.
Start and finish positions
The load start and finish positions are taken relative to node A. Depending on the
"Units system" selected, this distance may be expressed as an absolute length or
percentage of the member length. Thus, a member 600mm long with a load that
extends from the 150mm mark to the end could have the load start position
specified as 150mm or as 25%, and the load finish position specified as 600mm or
as 100%. The finish position must always be greater than start.
Start and finish torsion load
Start and finish member distributed torsion load.
See also Member distributed torsions text.
See also Member distributed torsions.
200
Project Data
Thermal load data
A thermal load can be applied to a member by specifying a temperature change,

while a thermal load can be applied to a plate in the form of a temperature change
or a thermal gradient across its thickness. Thermal loads act over the entire length
of the members or area of the plates to which they are applied.
Thermal loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other
load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain thermal loads.
Element
Member or plate to be loaded.
Thermal load
Uniform temperature change.
Thermal gradient (plates only)
Thermal gradient across plate thickness. A positive thermal gradient causes the top
(positive z-axis) face of the plate to expand and the bottom face to contract.
201
Unlike other load types, you can apply thermal

loads to non-existent members or plates without causing an analysis error. Such
loads are simply ignored during the analysis phase. For example, in order to apply
a uniform 10 temperature change to an entire structure with a highest member
number of less than 100, you could simply generate 10 thermal loads on members
1-100 without concerning yourself about possible gaps in the member numbering
sequence.
See also Thermal loads text.
See also Thermal loads.
202
Project Data
Member prestress data
A prestress can be applied to a member by specifying a tensile or compressive

force. Prestress loads act over the entire length of the members on which they are
applied.
It is possible to model prestress loads with equivalent thermal loads and vice-versa,
however this is generally unnecessary because they can both be applied directly in
SPACE GASS.
Prestress loads may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other
load types within the same load case.
Note that the prestress load you apply to a member is not likely to be the
final axial force in the member at the end of the analysis (unless its ends are fixed
in position or don't move). This is because the axial force changes as the member
stretches or compresses as its end nodes move. If you wish to achieve a particular
axial force at the end of the analysis then a trial and error process is required. This
involves setting an initial prestress force, performing the analysis, checking the
final axial force, adjusting the prestress and repeating the process until the desired
axial force is achieved. This is a common requirement in post-tensioned concrete
applications where the tendons are jacked to a known tension.
203

Case
Load case to contain prestress loads.
Member
Prestress force
The prestress force is positive for compression or negative for tension.
In some instances, you may wish to apply a
prestress load to a cable member instead of specifying a non-zero unstrained cable
length. The prestress load P that is equivalent to an unstrained cable length L is
given by the equation:
where
D = chord length,
A = cross sectional area,
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity.
See also Member prestress loads text.

See also Member prestress loads.
204
Project Data
Plate pressure data
Pressure loads may be applied to plates in either the global or the local axes
systems. Such loads can act along or about any of the three axis directions and
always extend over the entire plate surface.
Plate pressure loads may be applied in any number of load cases and may be
combined with other load types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain plate pressure loads.
Plate
Plate to be loaded.
Axes
Axes system in which loads are referenced.
Choices are:
Local,
Global.
X, Y and Z pressure
Plate pressure loads.
205

Plate pressure loads can be input graphically as explained in Plate pressure loads
or, for variable pressure loads such as hydrostatic or wind loads, the Varying plate
pressure loads tool can be used.
See also Plate pressure loads text.
See also Plate pressure loads.
See also Varying plate pressure loads.
206
Project Data
Self weight data
Self weight loads are considered as forces and moments in a static analysis and as
masses in a dynamic analysis.
Self weight can be automatically generated by the program if an acceleration (such
as gravity) is specified. Acceleration may be specified along any of the three global
axis directions. Note that self weight will only be considered if non-zero mass
densities are specified in the material property data.
When self weight loads are used as masses in a dynamic analysis, the direction and
magnitude of the X, Y and Z accelerations are ignored. The process simply
involves calculating the mass of each member and then applying half of it as
translational lumped masses to each of the member end nodes in each of the
unrestrained X, Y and Z global axis directions.
Self weight may be applied in any load case and may be combined with other load
types within the same load case.
Case
Load case to contain self weight.
207

X, Y and Z acceleration
Acceleration applied to the entire structure. See Units for the appropriate
acceleration units that apply.
See also Self weight text.
See also Self weight.
208
Project Data
Combination load case data
All loads applied to a structure are always input via primary load cases. Further
load cases can be created by combining the various primary load cases into
combination load cases.
Combination load cases can be combined into further combination load

cases.
Combination case
Load case to be formed. Cannot be equal to a primary load case.
Case
Load case to be factored and combined into the combination. This can be a primary
load case or a combination load case.
Multiplying factor
The multiplying factor applied to the primary load case when it is combined.
Consider for example a structure that is to be analysed for the following
combination load cases 10, 11 and 12.
209

Load case 1:
Load case 2:
Load case 3:
Load case 4:
Load case 5:
Load case 20:
Load case 21:
Load case 22:
where
Self weight (SW)

Floor load (LL1)
Roof traffic (LL2)
Cladding (CL)
Wind load (WL)
1.25*DL + 1.50*LL
0.80*DL + 1.50*LL
0.80*DL + 1.00*WL,
DL = SW + CL
LL = LL1 + LL2
The desired combination load cases could then be made up as follows.

Load case 10 (DL):
Load case 11 (LL):
Load case 20:
Load case 21:
Load case 22:
1.00*Load case 1 + 1.00*Load case 4

Note that for a linear analysis, it is not necessary to analyse the combination load
cases. They can be calculated by simple linear superposition of the primary load
case results during the output phase. For a non-linear (2nd order) analysis however,
the simple linear superposition rules dont apply and combination load cases have
to be fully analysed and treated in the same way as primary load cases.
For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to decide whether or not to analyse the
combination load cases and treat them the same as primary load cases or to not
analyse them and have them calculated by simple linear superposition during the
output phase. You can specify the load cases that you want analysed by listing
them at the start of the analysis phase. For example, if you have primary load cases
1,2,3 and 4, and combination load cases 10,11 and 12, you could analyse just the
primaries by entering 1-4 for the load cases list.
If you are doing a dynamic response analysis, you should create a reverse
combination load case for each spectral load case. You may also have to create
further combinations to combine the spectral load cases with different direction
vectors. For more information refer to Spectral load data.
210
Project Data
SPACE GASS will not allow a combination load case to be a simple linear
combination of analysed primary load cases if any of the primaries have been
analysed non-linearly or if the frame contains tension-only or compression-only
members. In this case the combination load case must be analysed.
You can modify the combination load case data
and obtain new results without re-analysing the structure, however this only
applies to linear superposition combinations. Results for analysed combinations
are deleted if the combination load case data is changed.
See also Combination load cases text.
See also Combination load cases.
211
Load case title data
Load case titles serve the purpose of creating clearer, more understandable output.
Primary or combination load cases may be given titles.
Case
Load case to have title defined.
Title
A description of the load case.
Notes
Notes that allow you to describe the load case in more detail.
See also Load case titles text.
212
Project Data
Lumped mass data
Lumped masses are considered in a dynamic analysis and are ignored in a static
analysis. Translational or rotational masses can be applied to any node along or
about the global X, Y and Z axis directions. If a mass is applied to a restrained
degree of freedom then that mass is simply ignored during the dynamic frequency
analysis.
Masses may be applied in any load cases and may be combined with static loads
within the same load case, although it is often a good idea to put masses in load
cases of their own (ie. not in with static loads) so that they can be isolated in
graphics displays or output reports.
Self mass can be added to the lumped masses by either by adding self-weight to a
load case that contains lumped masses or by combining lumped mass and selfweight load cases into a combination load case.
Case
Load case to contain lumped masses.
Node
Node to have masses applied.
X, Y and Z translational masses
Translational masses (global axes).
X, Y and Z rotational masses
Rotational masses (global axes).
213
The application of lumped masses

A mass that affects the natural frequencies of a structure must be applied in each of
the unrestrained directions of the node to which it is attached. For example, a 0.5
tonne machine which is attached to a point on a building rafter has an inertia in
each of the X, Y and Z directions and effects the natural frequencies of the building
in all three directions. It must therefore be applied as 0.5 tonne X, Y and Z
translational masses.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Lumped masses are not the same as loads and therefore cannot be calculated by
simply converting loads to mass units. Masses represent the structure and/or
attachments to the structure which move and rotate with it and which effect its
natural frequencies. Some types of loads would have to be input as lumped
masses while others would not. For example, dead loads and 30-100% of live
loads would normally affect the natural frequencies of a structure, however wind
loads would not.
The inertia of the structure could be modelled in one of the following two ways:
Translational masses
Consider a rigid floor slab. You could model the distribution of mass by placing a
small translational mass at each node in the slab (the sum of all node masses
equalling the total mass of the slab).
Translational and rotational masses
You could also model the rigid floor slab by lumping all of the translational mass
and a rotational mass at the centroid of the slab.
In the first approach, the rotational inertia would be provided by the action of each
of the small translational masses being a distance away from the centroid of the
slab. In the second approach, the rotational inertia would be provided directly by
the rotational mass at the centroid of the slab. It is usually more convenient and just
as accurate to use the second approach.
The rotational mass for a point at the centroid of a rectangle is
214
Project Data
where m is the mass of the rectangle, and a and b are the dimensions of the
rectangle.
The concept of rotational mass, together with formulae for calculating rotational
masses at various locations on rectangles and other shapes, is given in Clough and
Penzien (10).
Self mass
It is not necessary to manually input lumped masses for the self mass of the
structure because self mass can automatically be considered by simply adding selfweight to one or more load cases. However, automatic self mass generation does
not calculate rotational masses because of the large number of extra masses that
would be generated for a fairly insignificant improvement in results accuracy. If
required, rotational self mass must be manually applied as rotational lumped
masses.
In order to adequately define the distribution of mass along members for which
local vibrations are important, it is sometimes necessary to add intermediate nodes
(with masses applied) to such members.
See also Lumped masses text.
See also Self-weight.
See also Lumped masses.
See also Dynamic frequency analysis.
See also Running a dynamic frequency analysis.
215
Spectral load data
In order to perform a response spectrum analysis, you must first create one or more
spectral load cases. A spectral load case contains the number of a mass load case, a
direction vector and a list of mode shapes, each with its associated spectral curve
and damping factor. Spectral load cases can be combined and multiple spectral
load cases can be analysed simultaneously.
The mode shapes must have been calculated from a dynamic frequency
analysis before the response spectrum analysis can proceed.
Case
The spectral load case being created (see also "load cases" below).
Mode
A mode shape being included in the spectral load case. Multiple mode shapes can
be included in a single spectral load case by simply inputting multiple entries
(lines) with the same spectral load case number. A particular mode shape can
appear only once in each spectral load case.
In the spectral analysis, it is important to consider a sufficient number of mode
shapes. SPACE GASS provides a very efficient means of measuring the
contribution of each mode shape in the overall dynamic response. This is known as
the mass participation factor. For example, for an earthquake acting in the X
direction, the total X-axis mass participation factor should be greater than 90%
(AS1170.4 clause 7.4.2). If it is less than 90% then a few more mode shapes should
be included in the analysis. A small mass participation factor will indicate
216
Project Data
inaccurate results. For more information, refer to "Dynamic response analysis
results".
Spectral curve
The name of the spectral curve to be used with the specified mode shape. Normally
all mode shapes in a spectral load case use the same spectral curve, however you
can nominate different spectral curves for each mode if desired.
Damping
The damping factor associated with the nominated spectral curve. This value is
built into each spectral curve when it was derived and cannot be changed. It is
included in the datasheet for display purposes only.
Mass case
The mass load case for which the specified mode shapes have been (or will be)
calculated from a dynamic frequency analysis.
Direction vector
Defines the direction of the ground vibration. For example, an earthquake acting in
the X direction would have a direction vector of Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0 and Dz=0.0.
Note that for AS1170.4 and NZS4203, if auto-scaling of the base shear is activated,
the direction vector should be parallel to one of the horizontal global axes. For
these codes, to model a direction vector that is at an angle to the horizontal global
axes, you should create a separate spectral load case for each of the horizontal
global axis directions and then combine them into a combination load case using
multiplying factors that are proportional to the projected lengths of the desired
direction vector.
Load cases
For building structures, it is common to input two spectral load cases per mass load
case, one for each of the orthogonal horizontal directions. Furthermore, if the
loading code requires you to consider a combination of the two orthogonal
directions (ie. AS1170.4-2007 5.4.2.1 or NZS1170.5-2004 5.3.1) then further load
cases may also be required. Finally, because the dynamic vibrations oscillate from
one side to the other, it is also necessary to consider the reverse of all of the above
load cases.
For example, consider two basic spectral load cases defined for a particular mass
load case as follows:
Load case 21 = Direction vector 1,0,0 (ie. earthquake in X-axis direction)
217

Load case 22 = Direction vector 0,0,1 (ie. earthquake in Z-axis direction)
If the loading code requires further combinations of the above load cases in the
form of 100% of the actions in one direction plus 30% of the actions in the
perpendicular direction then further load cases are required. These are most
conveniently input as combination load cases as follows:
Load case 23 = 1.0 x case 21 + 0.3 x case 22
Load case 24 = 1.0 x case 21 - 0.3 x case 22
Load case 25 = 1.0 x case 22 + 0.3 x case 21
Load case 26 = 1.0 x case 22 - 0.3 x case 21
Finally, the reverse of the all the above load cases must be defined as further
combination load cases as follows:
Load case 31 = -1.0 x Load case 21
Thus, each pair of basic spectral load cases can spawn up to a further ten
combination load cases.
The structure should be designed to resist the envelope of all load cases.
218
Project Data
Spectral curve editor

You can open the spectral curve editor by opening the "Spectral Load Data"
datasheet from the Loads menu and then clicking the
button.
You can select the desired spectral curve from the tree in the left-hand window and
observe its data values in the right-hand window. You can also click the spectral
curve editor button (next to the Ok button) to load and display the spectral curve
editor as shown below.
219
The spectral curve editor can be used to input or edit curves in the spectral curve
library. Note, however, that the standard curves supplied with SPACE GASS cant
be changed. The editor allows you to create a spectral curve that will result in the
most accurate analysis possible.
Operation of the spectral curve editor is self-explanatory and simply involves
selecting a curve name and then inputting or modifying its properties. Each curve
contains a set of period versus acceleration pairs, a description and a damping
factor.
You can go to a specific point in a curve by clicking near it in the graphics window
or by scrolling to and selecting it in the list box. The currently selected point in the
list box is highlighted by a small circle in the graphics window. You can add (or
delete) points by clicking the buttons below the list box.
See also Standard Libraries for general information about the operation of the
library editor.
220
Project Data
Importing a spectral curve

You can import a spectral curve directly into the spectral curve editor by rightclicking the spectral library that you want to import the curve into and selecting
"From Text File" or "From Excel". Note that you can't import into a standard
library and so you have to create a custom spectral library first. You can do this by
clicking the "Add Library" button near the bottom of the form.
In order to successfully import a spectral curve into the spectral curve editor you
must ensure that you use the correct format in the text or Excel file.
You can create a text or Excel file to use as a
pattern for creating your own file by simply exporting one of the standard spectral
curves. Right-click on one of the existing curves and then choose the "Export..."
option to do this.
The correct format is as follows:
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
etc.
etc.
Line n
Line n+1
Description:Damping factor
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
{for point 1}
{for point 2}
{for point 3}
period,acceleration
period,acceleration
{for point n-1}

{for point n}
For example:
AS1170.4 S=1.0:5%
0.00,2.5
0.01,2.5
0.02,2.5
2.99,0.602276
3.00,0.600937
See also Spectral loads text.
221

See also Dynamic response analysis.
See also Running a dynamic response analysis.
222
Project Data
Area load data
223
224
Project Data
The area loads tool generates member distributed forces based on pressure loads
applied to areas defined by members that you have selected. For more information
see Area loads and Member distributed forces.
225
Sea load data
This tool lets you generate wave and ocean current loads on submerged structures
in marine and offshore environments where these effects impose significant
loading on the affected structure. For more detailed information refer to "Sea
Loads".
226
Project Data
Moving load data
The moving loads tool generates node loads and member concentrated loads based
on one or more moving vehicles. For more information refer to "Moving loads",
"Node load data" and "Member concentrated load data".
227
Text File Input

Text file input
Select "Import from text" or "Export to text" from the File menu
Inputting data into SPACE GASS via a text file is sometimes faster than using
datasheet input, however it is not as user friendly and is not recommended for first
time users of SPACE GASS.
You can use Windows Notepad to edit or create text files. The text editor linked to
SPACE GASS can be started by choosing "Text editor" from the File menu.
SPACE GASS text file names have the form <name>.TXT, where <name> is any
name. The text file should be located in the text data folder as created during the
installation procedure.
If a large proportion of the data for a job has to be
modified and you do not wish to use the normal editing facilities, the data can be
put into a text file which can then be edited using a word processor or text editor,
and then imported back into SPACE GASS.
229
Text file format

Each data group in a SPACE GASS text file must be preceded by a title line. The
title line describes the type of data in the lines to follow. For example, the node
data would be preceded by "NODES". When reading text files the program uses
only the first six characters of each title line, therefore when creating text files you
can abbreviate title lines to their first six characters.
It is possible to repeat data throughout the data file. Single items or whole groups
can be repeated. In such cases the last entry overrides any previous entries. For
example, if node coordinates were entered at the top of the file and then updated at
the end, the last group would override the first. This practice, however is not
recommended.
Groups of data do not have to be input in any particular order. The program
recognises the data types by their title lines rather than their order of appearance.
Items within a line must be separated by commas.

Lines can be continued on the next line if they end with the "&"
character.
The maximum length of a single line is 1024 characters.
The maximum length of a set of continued lines is 2048 characters.
Comment lines must begin with the "#" character.
Blank lines are permitted anywhere in the file.
Non-numeric items that contain commas must be enclosed in "quotes".
Real numbers in SPACE GASS text files no longer need to contain a decimal
point. Furthermore, all numbers in SPACE GASS text files can now be up to 15
digits long (they were previously limited to 10 digits).
230
Text File Input
Initiator
Line 1:
Line 2:
SPACE GASS Text File - Version 900

UNITS LENGTH:Len, SECTION:SecProp,
STRENGTH:MatStr, DENSITY:Dens,
TEMP:Temp, FORCE:Force,
MOMENT:Mom, MASS:Mass, ACC:Acc,
TRANS:Trans, STRESS:Stress
Len
SecProp
MatStr
Length units (ft, in, m, cm or mm)

Section property units (ft, in, m, cm or mm)
Material strength units (Ksf, Psf, Ksi, Psi,
MPa, kPa,
Pa, kg/m^2, kg/cm^2, kg/mm^2)
Mass density units (K/ft^3, K/in^3, lb/ft^3,
lb/in^3,
T/m^3, T/cm^3, T/mm^3, kg/m^3, kg/cm^3,
kg/mm^3)
Temperature units (Fahrenheit, Celsius)
Force units (K, lb, kN, N, kg)
Moment units (Kft, Kin, lbft, lbin, kNm,
kNcm, kNmm,
Nm, Ncm, Nmm, kgm, kgcm, kgmm)
Mass units (K, lb, T, kg)
Acceleration units (g's, ft/sec^2, in/sec^2,
m/sec^2,
cm/sec^2, mm/sec^2, kN/kg)
Translation units (ft, in, m, cm, mm)
Stress units (Ksf, Psf, Ksi, Psi, MPa, kPa, Pa,
kg/m^2, kg/cm^2, kg/mm^2)
Dens
Temp
Force
Mom
Mass
Acc
Trans
Stress
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
(Chars)
See also Units.
231
Headings text
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
HEADINGS
Project
Job
Designer
Notes
Project
Job
Designer
Notes
Project description
Job description
Designers initials
Job notes
(50 Char)
(50 Char)
(3 Char)
(1024 Char)
If any of the heading lines have no data then they should be entered as just a pair of
quotes (eg. "") rather than just being a blank line.
See also Headings.
232
Text File Input
Nodes text
Line 1: NODES
Next n Node,X,Y,Z,Gen1,Ndi1,Rot,Ai,Xi1,Yi1,Zi1,
lines: Gen2,Ndi2,Xi2,Yi2,Zi2
Node
X
Y
Z
Gen1
Ndi1
Rot
Ai
Xi1
Yi1
Zi1
Gen2
Ndi2
Xi2
Yi2
Zi2
Node number
X coordinate
Y coordinate
Z coordinate
# of 1st order nodes to be generated
1st order node number increment
Axis of rot. for arc or helix generation (X/Y/Z)
Angle increment for arc or helix generation
1st order X increment
1st order Y increment
1st order Z increment
# of 2nd order nodes to be generated
2nd order node number increment
2nd order X increment
2nd order Y increment
2nd order Z increment
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
For straight line generation, Ai should be zero. For arc or helix generation, Rot is
the axis of rotation, Ai is the angle increment and Xi1, Yi1, Zi1 are the centre of
rotation and the helix length increment. For example, if a helix is generated about
the Y-axis, then Yi1 is the helix length increment. For arc generation the helix
length increment is 0.
Rot choices are "X"=X-axis, "Y"=Y-axis, "Z"=Z-axis.
See also Nodes.
233
Members text
Line 1:
Next n
lines:
MEMBERS
Mem,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Sp,Mp,
Fa,Fb,Ya,SZa,SYb,SZb,Cab,Gen1,Mbi1,Nai1,Nbi1,
Gen2,Mbi2,Nai2,Nbi2
Mem
DirAng
DirNode
DirAxis
Type
Na
Nb
Sp
Mp
Fa
Fb
SYa
SZa
Syb
SZb
Cab
Gen1
Mbil
Nail
Nbil
Gen2
Mbi2
Nai2
Nbi2
Member number
Direction angle
Direction node
Direction axis
Member type (N/T/C/A)
Node number A
Node number B
Section property number
Material property number
Node A fixity (F/R/S)
Node B fixity (F/R/S)
Y rotational stiffness at node A
Z rotational stiffness at node A
Y rotational stiffness at node B
Y rotational stiffness at node B
Cable length
# of 1st order members to be generated
1st order member number increment
1st order node A increment
1st order node B increment
# of 2nd order members to be generated
2nd order member number increment
2nd order node A increment
2nd order node B increment
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(2 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(6 Char)
(6 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Type choices are "N"=Normal, "T"=Tension-only, "C"=Compression-only,

"A"=Cable.
Fa, Fb choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released. "S"=Spring can also be used for the
y and z rotational fixities.
234
Text File Input

See also Members.
235
Plates text
Line 1:
Next n
lines:
PLATES
Plate,DirAng,DirNode,DirAxis,Type,Na,Nb,Nc,Nd,
TA,TM,TB,TS,Mat,Offset,Gen,PInc,NInc
Plate
DirAng
DirNode
DirAxis
Type
Na
Nb
Nc
Nd
TA
TM
TB
TS
Mat
Offset
Gen
PInc
NInc
Plate number
Direction angle
Direction node
Direction axis
Plate type (K/M)
Node number A
Node number B
Node number C
Node number D
Actual thickness
Membrane thickness
Bending thickness
Shear thickness
Plate offset
# of plates to be generated
Plate number increment
Node number increment
Type choices are "K"=Kirchoff (thin), "M"=Mindlin (thick).

See also Plates.
236
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(2 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Node restraints text

Line 1: RESTRAINTS
Next n Node,Rest,Gr,Gen,NInc,Ax,Ay,Az,Rx,Ry,Rz
lines:
Node
Rest
Gr
Gen
NInc
Ax
Ay
Az
Rx
Ry
Rz
Node number
Restraint code (F/R/D/S)
General restraint (Y/N)
# of restrained nodes
X axial spring stiffness
Y axial spring stiffness
Z axial spring stiffness
X rotational spring stiffness
Y rotational spring stiffness
Z rotational spring stiffness
(Integer)
(6 Char)
(1 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Rs choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released, "D"=Deleted, "S"=Spring.

Gr choices are "Y"=General restraint, " " or "N"=Normal restraint.
237
Section properties text

Line 1: SECTIONS
Next n Sec,Secn,Lib,Ast,Mark,Flip,Ar,Ix,Iy,Iz,Ay,Az,Pa,
lines:
Scs,Dpth,Wdth,Fw,Ft,Hf
Note that Dpth,Wdth,Fw,Ft and Hf are only required if Scs is R,C,T,L or I
Sec
Secn
Lib
Ast
Mark
Flip
Ar
Ix
Iy
Iz
Ay
Az
Pa
Scs
Dpth
Wdth
Fw
Ft
Hf
Section property number

Section name
Section library name
Angle section type (A/S/L/X)
Section mark
Section flipped (Y/N)
Area of section
Torsion constant
Y moment of inertia
Z moment of inertia
Y shear area
Z shear area
Principal angle
Standard shape (R/C/T/L/I)
Overall depth or diameter
Overall width or web width
Flange width if T-beam or L-beam
Flange thickness if T-beam or L-beam
Height to bot. of flange if T-beam or L-beam
(Integer)
(15 Char)
(8 Char)
(1 Char)
(5 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Ast choices are " "=Not an angle section, "A"=Single angle, "S"=Double angle
with short legs connected, "L"=Double angle with long legs connected,
"X"=Double starred angle.
Flip choices are "Y"=Flipped, " " or "N"=Not flipped.
Scs choices are " "=Not a standard shape, "R"=Rectangle, "C"=Circle, "T"=Tbeam, "L"=Left L-beam, "I"=Right L-beam. If Scs is blank, the section is assumed
to come from Ar, Ix, Iy, Iz, Ay, Az and Pa.
238
Text File Input
239
Material properties text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
MATERIALS
Mat,Matl,E,Pr,D,T,Fc
Mat
Matl
Lib
E
Pr
D
T
Fc

Material name
Material library name
Youngs modulus
Poissons ratio
Mass density
Coefficient of thermal expansion
Characteristic concrete strength
240
(Integer)
(15 Char)
(8 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Text File Input
Master-slave constraints text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
CONSTRAINTS
SNode,MNode,Cnst,Gen,SInc,MInc
SNode
MNode
Cnst
Gen
SInc
MInc
Slave node number

Master node number
Constraint code (F/R)
# of slave nodes to be generated
Slave node number increment
Master node number increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(6 Char)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Cc choices are "F"=Fixed, "R"=Released.

241
Member offset text

Line 1: OFFSETS
Next n Mem,Ax,Dxa,Dya,Dza,Dxb,Dyb,Dzb
lines:
Mem
Ax
Dxa
Dya
Dza
Dxb
Dyb
Dzb
Member number
Axes system (L/G)
Member offset from A along x-axis
Member offset from A along y-axis
Member offset from A along z-axis
Member offset from B along x-axis
Member offset from B along y-axis
Member offset from B along z-axis
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global.

242
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
Text File Input
Node loads text

Line 1: NODELOADS
Next n Case,Node,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,Gen,NInc
lines:
Case
Node
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
Gen
NInc
Load case number

Node number
X force
Y force
Z force
X moment
Y moment
Z moment
# of loaded nodes to be generated
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
See also Node loads.
243
Prescribed node displacements text

Line 1: NODEDISPS
Next n Case,Node,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,NInc
lines:
Case
Node
Tx
Ty
Tz
Rx
Ry
Rz
Gen
NInc
Load case number

Node number
X translation
Y translation
Z translation
X rotation
Y rotation
Z rotation
# of displaced nodes to be generated
See also Prescribed node displacements.
244
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Member concentrated loads text

Line 1: MEMBCONC
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Ax,Un,Ps,Fx,Fy,Fz,Mx,My,Mz,
lines: Gen1,MInc,Gen2,SInc,PInc
Case
Mem
Sl
Ax
Un
Ps
Fx
Fy
Fz
Mx
My
Mz
Gen1
MInc
Gen2
SInc
PInc
Load case number

Member number
Sub load number
Axes system (L/G)
Units system (A/%)
Load position
X force
Y force
Z force
X moment
Y moment
Z moment
# of loaded members to be generated
Member number increment
# of loads per member to be generated
Sub load number increment
Load position increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global.

Un choices are "A"=Actual, "%"=Percentage.
See also Member concentrated loads.
245
Member distributed forces text

Line 1: MEMBFORCES
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Ax,Un,St,Fi,Xs,Xf,Ys,Yf,Zs,Zf,
lines: Gen,MInc
Case
Mem
Sl
Ax
Un
St
Fi
Xs
Xf
Ys
Yf
Zs
Zf
Gen
MInc
Load case number

Member number
Sub load number
Axes system (L/G/A)
Units system (A/%)
Start position
Finish position
X start force
X finish force
Y start force
Y finish force
Z start force
Z finish force
# of loaded members to be generated
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global-projected, "A"=Global-inclined.

See also Member distributed forces.
246
Text File Input
Member distributed torsions text

Line 1: MEMBTORSION
Next n Case,Mem,Sl,Un,St,Fi,Ts,Tf,Gen,MInc
lines:
Case
Mem
Sl
Un
St
Fi
Ts
Tf
Gen
MInc
Load case number

Member number
Sub load number
Units system (A/%)
Start position
Finish position
Start torsion
Finish torsion
# of torsion loads to be generated
Member # increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)

See also Member distributed torsions.
247
Thermal loads text

Line 1: THERMAL
Next n Case,Elem,Type,Temp,GradY,GradZ,Gen,EInc
lines:
Case
Elem
Type
Temp
GradY
GradZ
Gen
EInc
Load case number

Element number
Element type (M/P)
Temperature change
Reserved (must be set to 0.0)
Plate thermal gradient
# of thermal loads to be generated
Element # increment
Type choices are "M"=Member, "P"=Plate.

248
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Member prestress loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
PRESTRESS
Case,Mem,Force,Gen,MInc
Case
Mem
Force
Gen
MInc
Load case number

Member number
Prestress force
# of prestress loads to be generated
Member # increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
See also Member prestress.
249
Plate pressure loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
PRESSURE
Case,Plate,Px,Py,Pz,Gen,PInc
Case
Plate
Ax
Px
Py
Pz
Gen
PInc
Load case number

Plate number
Axes system (L/G/A)
X pressure
Y pressure
Z pressure
# of loaded plates to be generated
Plate number increment
(Integer)
(Integer)
(1 Char)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Ax choices are "L"=Local, "G"=Global-projected, "A"=Global-inclined.

See also Plate pressure.
250
Text File Input
Self weight text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
SELFWEIGHT
Case,Ax,Ay,Az
Case
Ax
Ay
Az
Load case number

X acceleration
Y acceleration
Z acceleration
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
See also Self weight.
251
Combination load cases text

Line 1:
COMBINATIONS
Next n lines: Comb,Case,Fact
Comb
Case
Fact
Combination load case number

Load case number (primary or combination)
Multiplying factor
See also Combination load cases.
252
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
Text File Input
Load case titles text

Line 1:
TITLES
Next n lines: Case,Title,Notes
Case
Title
Notes
Load case number

Load case title
Load case notes
(Integer)
(50 Char)
(255 Char)
See also Load case titles.
253
Lumped masses text

Line 1: LUMPEDMASS
Next n Case,Node,Tx,Ty,Tz,Rx,Ry,Rz,Gen,NInc
lines:
Case
Node
Tx
Ty
Tz
Rx
Ry
Rz
Gen
NInc
Load case number

Node number
X translational mass
Y translational mass
Z translational mass
X rotational mass
Y rotational mass
Z rotational mass
# of loaded nodes to be generated
254
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
Text File Input
Spectral loads text

Line 1:
Next n
lines:
SPECTRAL
Case,Mode,Curve,MCase,Dx,Dy,Dz
Case
Mode
Curve
MCase
Dx
Dy
Dz
Load case number

Mode shape
Spectral curve name
Mass case
X direction vector
Y direction vector
Z direction vector
(Integer)
(Integer)
(50 Char)
(Integer)
(Real)
(Real)
(Real)
See also Spectral loads.
255
Steel member design text

Line 1:
STEELMEMBERS
Next n lines: Group,Title,MList,SGrade,Units,LoadHeight,
ScanCode,CalcLcMjr,LcMjr,BraceMjr,CalcLcMnr,
LcMnr,BraceMnr, CalcLb,Lb+,Lb-,TopPos,
TopRest,BotPos,BotRest, Ast,EndCon,
EccEffect,Criteria,Bolts,Dia,Gen,GInc,MInc
(Integer)
(50
Char)
List of analysis members in the group
(50 Int)
MList
Strength grade (N/H)
(1 Char)
SGrade
Units system (A/R)
(1 Char)
Units
(1 Char)
LoadHeight Load height position (C/T)
(4 Char)
ScanCode Library scan code
(1 Char)
CalcLcMjr Calculate LcMjr from a buckling analysis (Y/N)
Major axis compression effective length
(Real)
LcMjr
BraceMjr Major axis braced in position at both ends of group (Y/N) (1 Char)
(1 Char)
CalcLcMnr Calculate LcMnr from a buckling analysis (Y/N)
Minor axis compression effective length
(Real)
LcMnr
BraceMnr Minor axis braced in position at both ends of group (Y/N) (1 Char)
Calculate Lb+ and Lb- (Y/N)
(1 Char)
CalcLb
Positive bending effective length
(Real)
Lb+
Negative bending effective length
(Real)
LbList of restraint positions (intermediate only) on top flange (50
TopPos
Real)
List of restraint types (end and intermediate) on top flange (52
TopRest
Char)
List of restraint positions (intermediate only) on bottom (50
BotPos
flange
Real)
List of restraint types (end and intermediate) on bottom (52
BotRest
flange
Char)
Angle section type (A/S/L/X)
(1 Char)
Ast
End connection type (C/F/W/S/L)
(1 Char)
EndCon
(1 Char)
EccEffect Consider eccentric effects (Y/N)
Design criteria (W/D)
(1 Char)
Criteria
Group
Title
256
Group number
Group title
Text File Input

Bolts
Dia
Gen
GInc
MInc
Maximum number of bolts in cross section (0=Welded)

Bolt diameter
Number of groups to be generated
Group number increment
(Integer)
(Real)
(Integer)
(Integer)
(Integer)
SGrade choices are "N"=Normal strength, "H"=High strength.

Units choices are "A"=Actual, "R"=Ratio.
LoadHeight choices are "C"=Shear centre or below, "T"=Top flange.
CalcLcMjr choices are "Y"=Calculate LcMjr from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use
the input value of LcMjr.
BraceMjr choices are "Y"=Both ends of the design group are braced in position
for buckling about the major axis, "N"=Either or both ends of the design group are
not braced in position for buckling about the major axis.
CalcLcMnr choices are "Y"=Calculate LcMnr from a buckling analysis, "N"=Use
the input value of LcMnr.
BraceMnr choices are "Y"=Both ends of the design group are braced in position
for buckling about the minor axis, "N"=Either or both ends of the design group are
not braced in position for buckling about the minor axis.
CalcLb choices are "Y"=Calculate Lb+ and Lb- from the flange restraints,
"N"=Use the input values of Lb+ and Lb-.
TopPos and BotPos are lists of the intermediate flange restraint positions which
can include @ multipliers but not dashes. For example, restraint positions
1.2,3.0,4.8,6.6,8.4,10.2,11.4 could be listed as 1.2,5@1.8,1@1.2 or
1.2,5@1.8,11.4.
TopRest and BotRest must be a string of characters without commas, dashes or
@s. For example FLLPLR.
Ast choices are "A"=Single angle, "S"=Double angle with short legs connected,
"L"=Double angle with long legs connected, "X"=Double starred angle. Ast is only
considered if the section is an angle section.
257

EndCon choices are "C"=Centroid, "F"=Flange, "W"=Web, "S"=Angle short leg,
"L"=Angle long leg.
EccEffect choices are "Y"=Consider end connection eccentric effects, "N"=Ignore
eccentric effects.
Criteria choices are "W"=Use weight design criteria, "D"=Use depth design
criteria.
See also Steel member design data.
258
Text File Input
Terminator
Line 1:
END
259
Text file errors

Error messages which may occur while a text file is being read by SPACE GASS
are as follows.
Illegal or missing numeric value
Essential real or integer numeric value has been omitted or is beyond the problem
size limits.
Illegal data encountered
Unexpected data type was encountered (eg. integer instead of real).
Title line not recognised
Incorrect data group title has been detected (eg. NEDES instead of NODES).
Generation data out of limits
Items to be generated would exceed the problem size limits. Change the generation
data or choose "Problem size limits" from the Config menu and increase the limits.
Illegal or missing character
Illegal character detected or expected character not found.
Maximum limit exceeded
One of the problem size limits has been exceeded. Choose "Problem size limits"
from the Config menu and increase the limits.
Library not found
The standard sections or materials library cannot be found.
Wrong format library
The standard sections or materials library is in an invalid or old format and cannot
be read.
Section or material not found
Specified section or material name cannot be found in specified library.
Demonstration version limit exceeded
The demonstration version of the program allows only 1 section property, 1
material property, 5 steel design groups, and 1 steel design connection.
260
Text File Input

Not a valid SPACE GASS text file
The file does not have a valid SPACE GASS text file format or the first line does
not indicate that it is SPACE GASS data.
Restraint positions are not in ascending order
The intermediate flange restraint positions must be in ascending order.
Restraint positions do not match types
The number of intermediate flange restraint positions must match the number of
restraint types less the two end restraint types. Each use of an @ multiplier in a
restraint positions list must have only one corresponding restraint type.
L or C restraint is ineffective
A Lateral restraint type must have Full or Partial restraint types between it and the
end of the design group on both sides to be effective. A Continuous restraint type
must be between Full, Partial or Lateral restraint types to be effective.
Ignored segments must be at ends
You have specified an ignored segment at an intermediate position along the group.
Segments to be ignored must be at either or both ends of the group only.
Require intermediate restraint positions only
Restraint positions should be specified for the intermediate restraints only. SPACE
GASS already knows the positions of the restraints at the ends of the group.
100 members per design group limit exceeded
A steel member design group cannot contain more than 100 members.
100 cases per combination limit exceeded
A combination load case cannot contain more than 100 primary load cases.
100 flange restraints limit exceeded
A steel member design group cannot contain more than 100 flange restraints per
flange.
No members in steel design group
A steel member design group must consist of at least one analysis member.
Restraint position exceeds maximum distance
A flange restraint has been positioned beyond the length of the steel member
design group.
261

Illegal or missing restraint type
An illegal character has been detected in the steel member design restraint types
field or the restraint type is missing.
Comma is missing
A list of numbers is missing a comma.
There must be a value between separators
A list of values has two adjacent commas, dashes or @s.
Too many values in list
A list of numbers contains too many values.
Cannot use "-" range in this data field
You are not permitted to use dashes in this list of integers.
Cannot use "@" multiplier in this data field
You are not permitted to use @s in this list of numbers.
Multiplier must be an integer
The number before an @ in a list of numbers must be an integer.
Cannot have a repeated member
The same member has been referenced twice in a single connection.
Must have at least one supported member
All connection types require at least one supported member.
An apex connection must be the same on both sides
If you have specified one side of a connection to be an apex then you must use
exactly the same connection type for the other side.
An internal stiff seat must be the same on both sides
If you have specified one side of a connection to be an internal stiff seat then you
must use exactly the same connection type for the other side.
This connection requires two supported members
Apex and internal stiff seat connections require two supported members.
This connection requires only one supported member
Baseplate connections must have only one supported member. It doesnt matter
whether the supported member is specified as side A or side B.
262
Text File Input
This connection requires a supporting member

A supporting member is always required (except for apex, stiff seat or baseplate).
This connection requires no supporting member
Apex and baseplate connections cannot have a supporting member.
No connection type specified
You have not specified a valid connection type for one of the supported members.
Supported member not specified
You have not specified a supported member for one of the connection types.
Invalid bolting procedure for connection type
A snug bolting procedure cannot be used in bolted end plate, apex or moment
baseplate connections, use bearing or friction bolting procedures.
Haunches are only for B.E.P, welded moment or apex
Haunches are supported only in bolted end plate, apex and welded moment
connections.
Invalid bolt strength for bolting procedure specified
Normal strength bolts cannot be tensioned for bearing or friction bolting
procedures. Use high strength bolts.
Stiff seat bearing length required
Because you have not specified a supporting member for the stiff seat connection,
the bearing length cannot be calculated by SPACE GASS. Specify a supporting
member or a stiff seat bearing length (or both).
Cannot have fillet weld for welded apex connection
Welded apex connections require butt welds for the flanges.
Must have the same bolting procedure on each side
You must specify the same bolting procedure on both sides of an apex or internal
stiff seat connection.
Cannot have a haunch on only one side of an apex
If you have specified a haunch on one side of an apex connection then you must
also specify a haunch on the other side.
Must have the same haunch depth on each side of an apex
263

Apex connections require the same haunch depth on both sides.
264
Text File Input
Text file example

The following sample text file contains all of the data for the worked example used
in the appendices at the end of this manual.
SPACE GASS Text File - Version 900
UNITS LENGTH:m, SECTION:m, STRENGTH:kPa, DENSITY:T/m^3, TEMP:Celsius, &
FORCE:kN, MOMENT:kNm, MASS:T, ACC:m/sec^2, TRANS:m, STRESS:kPa
HEADINGS
"SPACE GASS Worked Example"
"25m Single Span Portal Frame"
"PS"
""
NODES
1,0.000,0.000
2,0.000,3.750
3,0.000,7.500
4,1.630,7.585
5,3.260,7.671
6,6.250,7.828
7,12.500,8.155
8,18.750,7.828
9,21.740,7.671
10,23.370,7.585
11,25.000,7.500
12,25.000,3.750
13,25.000,0.000
MEMBERS
1,0.00,0, ,N,1, 2,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
2,0.00,0, ,N,2, 3,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
3,0.00,0, ,N,3, 4,3,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
4,0.00,0, ,N,4, 5,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
5,0.00,0, ,N,5, 6,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
6,0.00,0, ,N,6, 7,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
7,0.00,0, ,N,7, 8,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
8,0.00,0, ,N,8, 9,2,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
9,0.00,0, ,N,9,10,4,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
10,0.00,0, ,N,10,11,3,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
11,0.00,0, ,N,11,12,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
12,0.00,0, ,N,12,13,1,1,FFFFFF,FFFFFF
RESTRAINTS
1,FFFFFR
2,RRFFFR,Y
13,FFFFFR
SECTIONS
1,"530 UB
2,"360 UB
3,"360 UB
4,"360 UB
92","AUST250", ,"C1"
51","AUST250", ,"R1"
51-A","", ,"HNCH ",N,0.10773E-01,0.472E-06,0.14524E-04,0.63586E-03
51-B","", ,"S4 ",N,0.96446E-02,0.472E-06,0.14519E-04,0.36376E-03
MATERIALS
1,"STEEL","METRIC"
265
NODELOADS
2,7,0.0,-4.5
MEMBFORCES
1,3,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,4,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,5,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,6,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,7,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,8,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,9,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
1,10,1,A,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-0.9,-0.9
2,3,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,4,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,5,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,6,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,7,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,8,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,9,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
2,10,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,-2.250,-2.250
3,1,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,2,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,6.300,6.300,0.0,0.0
3,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,1,L,A,0.0,1.7410,0.0,0.0,6.480,6.480
3,6,2,L,A,1.7410,6.2590,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,1,L,A,0.0,3.4820,0.0,0.0,3.600,3.600
3,7,2,L,A,3.4820,6.2590,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,2.160,2.160
3,11,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
3,12,1,G,%,0.0,100.0,4.500,4.500,0.0,0.0
4,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,5.040,5.040
4,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
4,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.140,4.140
5,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
5,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,1.440,1.440
6,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
266
Text File Input

6,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
6,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,4.680,4.680
7,1,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,2,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,3,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,4,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,5,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,6,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,7,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,8,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,9,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,10,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,11,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
7,12,1,L,%,0.0,100.0,0.0,0.0,0.9,0.9
SELFWEIGHT
1,0.0,-9.807E-03,0.0
COMBINATIONS
10,1,1.25
10,2,1.50
11,1,0.80
11,3,1.00
11,6,1.00
12,1,1.25
12,3,1.00
12,6,-0.96
13,1,0.80
13,4,1.00
13,7,1.00
14,1,1.25
14,5,1.00
14,7,-6.50
TITLES
1,Dead load (DL)
2,Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
3,Cross wind (CW)
4,Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
5,Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
6,Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
7,Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
10,1.25DL+1.5LL
11,0.8DL+CW+IPCW
12,1.25DL+CW+ISCW
13,0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
14,1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
STEELMEMBERS
1,"","1,2",N,A,C,A ,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
2,"","5,6",N,A,C,A ,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
3,"","8,7",N,A,C,A ,N,12.517,1.2,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.3,2.5,3.7,4.9,6.1,7.3,8.1",RLLLLLLLF,"4.9",RLF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
267

4,"","12,11",N,A,C,A ,N,20.0,1.7,Y,1.0,1.0, &
"1.2,2.4,3.6,5.3,7",RLLLLFIF,"",RF,N,N,A,C,Y,W,0,0.02
STEELCONNECT
1,"Left baseplate",0,1,0,8,0,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
2,"Left eave",2,0,3,0,1,S,B,0.0,0.0,3.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
6,"Bolted apex",0,6,7,2,2,B,B,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
11,"Right eave",11,10,0,3,0,S,S,3.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
12,"Right baseplate",0,0,12,0,8,S,S,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, &
H,N,N,N,N,0.07,0.07,0.0,H,S,0,Y,Y,S,G,B,T
END
268
Structure Wizard
Structure wizard
You can open the structure wizard by clicking the
"Structure wizard" from the Structure menu.
Structure wizard input provides a very fast means of inputting data into SPACE
GASS for structures that conform generally to one of the standard structures shown
above.
The structure wizard input method can still be
used for structures which dont conform exactly to the structures shown above. In
269

such cases it can be used to input the basic structure and then modified by one of
the other data entry methods. For example, a portal frame with its apex off centre
could be initially input as a symmetrical portal frame using the structure wizard
and then modified graphically by moving the apex node to its correct location.
Once a structure has been selected, a structure specific form is opened which
allows you to input basic data relating to the frame geometry, supports, pattern
loads, etc. SPACE GASS will then generate the structure, and apply any pattern
loading, automatically.
The input form for a single bay portal frame is shown below.
Important note regarding restraints applied to wizard generated

models
For all 2D frames generated by the structure wizard, out-of-plane translations on
some non-support nodes are restrained. This has two major implications that you
should be aware of.
1. If you extend the frame to 3D after it has been generated then the 2D
restraints may no longer be appropriate. If this is the case, you should
modify or delete them.
270
Structure Wizard
2. Even though a frame is 2D, it may often be appropriate to allow some
nodes to move and/or rotate in the out-of-plane direction. This is especially
the case if a buckling or dynamic frequency analysis is to be performed
where out-of-plane movements can occur even when there are no loads in
that direction. Because of this, you may have to modify the restraints
generated by the structure wizard to allow these movements. Conversely,
you may have to apply more out-of-plane restraints if those movements are
prevented in your real structure.
For more information, refer to Node restraint data and, in particular, the
section entitled "Important note about restraining 2D frames".
271

Portal frame builder
This tool lets you generate all of the structural, load and design data for a complete
portal frame building. You can then go ahead and analyse and design it using the
normal analysis and design tools available in SPACE GASS. It supports gable
(symmetrical and asymmetrical) and monoslope roofs, overhangs, knee braces,
haunches, fly bracing, uneven frame spacings, openings, roof/wall bracing and end
wall props.
Wind loads are generated in accordance with AS/NZS 1170.2:2011 for all regions
in Australia and New Zealand. They are calculated for each direction based on the
region, average recurrence interval, terrain category (including transition zones),
shielding and topography. Openings can be allowed for by specifying minimum
and maximum internal Cp,i pressure coefficients for each wind direction. Wall
loads can be applied to the columns (the normal situation) or to the eave ties and
end frame rafters for buildings that have tilt-up panels.
Load cases are automatically generated for all combinations of the dead, live and
wind loads.
You can access the portal frame builder tool from within the renderer by clicking
the
button or by selecting "Portal frame builder" from the Structure menu.
Note that if you haven't purchased the portal frame builder tool, you can still run it
in a free trial mode that limits you to a pre-defined building width and height, and
prevents you from exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully
activated.
A video showing the portal frame builder in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/portal.
273
Refer to Geometry, Extra data, Sections and materials, Loads, Load cases or
Design for more details about the input parameters.
274
Portal frame geometry

This form lets you define the basic geometric data for the portal frame building.
Options
The basic options are largely self-explanatory, however some of the less obvious
ones are explained in more detail below.
275

If "Define eaves height by" is set to "Sheeting intersection" then the height is
measured from the footing to the intersection point of the wall and roof sheeting.
Otherwise it is measured to the "Springing height", which is the underside of the
rafter (or haunch if one exists) at the face of the column.
Eave and ridge ties are extended down the full length of the building, whereas end
frame prop ties are placed just between the end frame and the first internal frame at
each end of the building wherever there is a prop.
Gridlines and dimensions can be generated automatically if ticked. You can also
edit them or add extra dimensions manually using the renderer's normal gridline
and dimensioning tools.
If you tick "Align column outside flanges" and the end frame columns are different
to the internal frames then the columns will be adjusted so that their outside flanges
line up down the length of the building. If unticked, the columns will be aligned via
their centroids.
The "Connect rafter props to bottom flange" option lets you decide between
connecting the props to the rafter centerline or to the bottom flange. If connected to
the centerline the connection is pin-ended, whereas if connected to the bottom
flange the connection is rigid. The reason for the rigid connection is to prevent
shear force in the prop generating torsion in the rafter and potentially causing it to
fail unrealistically.
Geometry
All dimensions in the geometry fields are relative to the sheeting lines.
276

Bay spacings and bracing
The frames are assumed to be equally spaced by default, however you can change
the spacings as required. The bay spacings are to the frame centroids and will
affect the overall length of the building if you change them.
Purlin and girt details

Purlins and girts are not added to the model as actual members, however they are
included in the steel member design data as flange restraints.
The purlin and girt depths are required so that the frame positions can be calculated
relative to the sheeting lines. For gable frames, the purlins on each rafter are
equally spaced with the first purlin positioned 200mm from the ridge. For
monoslope frames, the purlins equally spaced and centered between the columns.
The girts are equally spaced with the first girt positioned 200mm from the footing.
Fly braces can be positioned at every 2nd, 3rd, etc... purlin or girt as specified by
you.
Of course you can manually adjust the purlin, girt and fly brace data to suit your
exact requirements via the steel member design input data once the model has been
generated.
277
278
Portal frame extra data

This form lets you input the end frame props, bracing, knee braces, haunches and
the position of the model.
End frame props and bracing

This table allows you to specify the props and bracing for the front and rear walls.
If the front and rear walls have identical data then you can input the data for one
wall and then click the "Duplicate at Front/Rear" button.
Prop positions can be input as actual values or as percentages of the end frame
width relative to the column centroids. Alternatively, you can click the "Generate
End Frame Props" button to quickly generate equally spaced props with or without
bracing.
279
Knee braces and haunches

You can specify knee braces or haunches in the internal and/or end frames using
the following fields. The knee brace length is the horizontal distance from the face
of the column, while its height is the vertical distance from the intersection of the
centroids of the column and rafter. The haunch length is the horizontal distance
from the face of the column.
280
Positioning and numbering

By default, the model is generated with its front-left corner at the global origin,
however you can control this with the X,Y,Z position fields. This is especially
useful if you are adding the generated model to an existing structure in your job.
The nodes, members and load cases use the next available numbers unless you
specify starting numbers in the "Start..." fields.
Connections
The portal frame builder can also generate all of the main connections in the
building. All you need to do is specify the type of connection to be used for the
knees, ridges and baseplates. These can then be designed or checked in the steel
connection design module.
281
Portal frame sections and materials

This form lets you define the section and material properties of the various
components of the building.
282
Portal frame loads

This form lets you define the dead load, live load and wind load generation
parameters.
Dead and live loads

The "Roof sheeting and purlin dead load" is a permanent load that is applied to all
load combinations, whereas the "Services and superimposed dead load" is
considered to be a temporary load that is only applied to the downward load
combinations.
The dead loads you input are applied to the actual roof area, while the live load is
applied to the plan projection of the roof area. If you tick the "Calculate" live load
option then it will be calculated based on the maximum of 0.25 and 1.8/A + 0.12
kPa as given in AS/NZS 1170.1 table 3.2. Note that the distributed live load is
applied to the entire roof area, even if the roof area is greater than 200m^2. The
1.4kN concentrated live load specified in AS/NZS 1170.1 (but not in conjunction
with the distributed live load - see AS/NZS 1170.1 section 3.1) is not applied.
283
Wind loads
Wind loads can be calculated for any region in Australia or New Zealand. The
average recurrence intervals (ARIs) for the ultimate and serviceability limit states
are used to calculate the regional wind speeds from AS/NZS 1170.2 table 3.1.
Wind directions
If you tick the "Apply same wind in all directions" option then you are only
required to input one set of wind data for the shielding, topographic, terrain
category and internal pressure parameters. Otherwise, these data must be defined
for each of the four orthogonal building axes.
Shielding multiplier (Ms)

The shielding multiplier (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.3) takes into account
shielding provided by other upwind buildings or structures. It is 1.0 if there is no
shielding. You can enter the desired value directly or you can click the "Calculate"
button and then input various shielding parameters and have Ms calculated for you.
The ns, hs, bs and h values and the calculation of Ms are all explained in AS/NZS
1170.2 section 4.3.
284
Topographic multiplier (Mt)

The topographic multiplier (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.4) takes into account the
topography and its effect on the wind that is applied to the structure. It is 1.0 if
there are no topographic effects. You can enter the desired value directly or you
can click the "Calculate" button and then input various topographic parameters and
have Mt calculated for you. The H, E, Lu, x and z values and the calculation of Mt
are all explained in AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.4.
285
Terrain category
The terrain category affects the terrain height multiplier Mz,cat (see AS/NZS
1170.2 section 4.2). Mz,cat can be based on a single terrain category or it can be an
averaged value if the terrain category changes on the upwind side of the structure.
SPACE GASS allows for averaging two terrain categories in accordance with
AS/NZS 1170.2 section 4.2.3. Note that the "Approach" TC is closer to the
structure than the "Upwind" TC and the "TC transition distance" is the distance
from the structure to the point where the terrain category changes.
Internal pressure coefficients

In order to take into account openings, you can input the Cp,i pressure coefficients
for maximum pressure (Pos) and maximum suction (Neg). These coefficients are
then used when factoring the Cp,i=1.0 internal pressure primary load cases into the
ultimate and serviceability combination load cases.
Wind loads on walls

Wind loads are normally applied to the columns when horizontal girts support the
wall sheeting, however if the eave ties or end wall rafters are loaded instead (such
286

as with tilt-up panels) then you can tick the "Load rafters/eaves tie" options to
allow for this.
Walls as effective surfaces

When SPACE GASS calculates the action combination factors Kc,e and Kc,i (see
AS/NZS 1170.2 section 5.4.3) it assumes that each wall is potentially an effective
surface. You can, however, specify certain walls to be not considered as an
effective surface in these calculations if required (see AS/NZS 1170.2 table 5.5).
Sheeting
In order to calculate friction loads, the portal frame builder needs to know the type
of sheeting and its direction. You can choose between "Smooth" (no friction loads),
"Ribbed" or "Corrugated".
287
Portal frame load cases

This form lets you view the primary and combination load cases.
The 4 internal wind pressure primary load cases (cases 4 to 7) are for the ultimate
limit state and apply to a Cp,i pressure coefficient of 1.0. The 8 external wind
pressure primary load cases (cases 8 to 15) are also for the ultimate limit state and
are based on the actual Cp,e pressure coefficients. Along with dead load and live
load, they are factored into the various combination load cases for ultimate and
serviceability limit states.
You can add extra combination load cases to this table, however it is sometimes
easier to do this in the main SPACE GASS combination load cases datasheet once
the model has been generated.
288
Portal frame design

This form lets you input the steel member design parameters.
The data is the same as in the steel member design input form but with some fields
disabled. For more information, refer to Steel member design data.
Once the model has been generated, please check the steel member design data
that was generated and check that it is what you want. If not, you can edit it using
the normal steel member design data input/editing methods.
289
290
Portal frame assumptions

The following is a list of assumptions made in the current version of the portal
frame builder.
1. Impact loading from wind borne debris (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 2.5.8)
is not taken into account.
2. The wind direction multiplier Md (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 3.3) is
assumed to be 0.95 for regions B, C and D, and 1.0 for all other regions
and wind directions.
3. The permeable cladding reduction factor Kp (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section
5.4.5) is assumed to be 1.0.
4. Frictional drag forces (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 5.5) are not taken into
account.
5. The dynamic response factor Cdyn (see AS/NZS 1170.2 section 6) is
assumed to be 1.0.
6. The wind load applied to the triangular part just below the roof in the end
walls of gable buildings is not taken into account if there are no end wall
rafter props.
7. The distributed live load is applied to the entire roof area, even if the roof
area is greater than 200m^2.
8. The 1.4kN concentrated live load specified in AS/NZS 1170.1 (but not in
conjunction with the distributed live load - see AS/NZS 1170.1 section 3.1)
is not applied.
291
Datasheet Input
Datasheet input
You can open a datasheet by clicking the
toolbar button and then selecting
from the datasheet menu that appears. Alternatively, you can select one of the
datasheet items from the Structure, Loads or Design menus.
Datasheet input is the one of the most useful methods of entering data into SPACE
GASS. All types of frame and steel design data can be input or edited via a
datasheet.
For more information about operating the datasheets, refer to Using datasheets.
293
Using datasheets
All datasheets have the same format, appearing in a grid format like a spreadsheet.
The members datasheet is shown below.
Common datasheet operations

Sorting the data on any
column
Click the column heading to sort on. Further clicks cause

the sorting to alternate between ascending and
descending order.
Frozen key columns
Allows you to scroll the main data sideways without

scrolling the key columns so that you can always see
which row you are working on. In the members
datasheet, the "Member" column is the key column.
Multi-row editing
Possibly one of the most useful datasheet editing tools! It
294
Datasheet Input
allows you to edit multiple rows of data simultaneously.

The procedure is as follows:
1. Select the rows to be edited by clicking the
buttons at the left end of the rows, using the
CTRL or SHIFT keys to highlight multiple rows
(see "Selecting rows" below).
2. Move in any highlighted row to the column you
want to edit.
3. Click the right mouse button.
4. Enter your data, select between replacing,
multiplying, dividing, adding or subtracting and
then click the Ok button.
5. All the highlighted rows will be updated.
6. Go back to step 2 above to edit another column.
Split screen
Move to the small black bar just to the left of the

horizontal scroll arrow, click and drag it to the right to
introduce and position a vertical split screen division.
Editing existing data
Move to the desired cell using the keyboard or mouse

and then type in or select the desired data.
Entering new data
Move to the bottom (blank) row and then type in or

select the desired data.
295
Combo boxes
To edit combo box cells, either click the arrow and then
make your selection or just use the keyboard arrow keys
to move to the combo box cell and then type the first
character of the desired selection. For example, to
change a Yes/No combo box to Yes, just move to the cell
and then type Y.
Selecting rows
Click the button to the left of the row to be selected.

You can select multiple rows by:
1. Dragging up or down the selection buttons.
2. Selecting one row, holding down the CTRL key
and then selecting additional rows.
3. Selecting one row, holding down the SHIFT key
and then clicking on another selection button to
select all the rows in between.
Alternatively, you can click the blank button at the topleft corner of the datasheet to select all the rows.
Cutting, copying and

pasting
Cut or copy selected rows from a datasheet to any other

Windows program or paste from another Windows
program into a datasheet.
Duplicating rows
Rows of data can be duplicated using the normal copy

and paste methods, however some datasheets such as
section properties contain hidden fields that would not be
duplicated using these methods. For example, all the
geometric data for shape builder sections is stored in
hidden fields. To ensure that the hidden fields are
duplicated the following procedure can be used:
1. Select the rows to be duplicated and then click
the right mouse button on one of the buttons at
the left end of the selected rows.
2. Select "Duplicate Rows" from the menu that
appears.
3. Change the numbers of the duplicates via the
"Paste Overwrite Error" form that appears so that
296
Datasheet Input
the duplicates do not simply overwrite the

selected rows.
The duplicate rows will be inserted into the datasheet.
Deleting rows
Select the rows to be deleted and then press the Delete

key or click the datasheets delete button or click the
right mouse button and select Delete from the menu that
appears.
Special buttons
Special buttons on some of the datasheets allow you to

quickly change specific data in the current row. For
example, the special fixity buttons in the members
datasheet (shown left) let you choose commonly used
fixity codes without having to type them in.
Counter
A counter at the bottom-right corner of the datasheet tells

you how many rows of data are in the datasheet.
Generation
The generate button on some datasheets allows you to

generate a number of extra items (members, nodes, etc.).
When you click the generate button you will be
presented with a generation form which varies for each
type of input. Most of the generation forms are selfexplanatory, however some of them employ 2nd order
generation which is explained below.
Note that it is often better and more convenient
to use the graphical Copy tool for generating
data rather than using the datasheet generate
buttons.
297

Generation
The above node generation form allows you to generate items along two axes at
once. It can also be used to generate extra series at different levels (ie. the 2nd
order).
Consider the following 20 node grid in the XY plane. It could have been created by
inputting the coordinates for node 1 then generating four 1st order nodes (5,9,13 &
17) along a line with a node increment of 4 and X increment of 2.4, followed by
three 2nd order rows of nodes with a node increment of 1 and a Y increment of 1.5.
298
Datasheet Input
Grid of generated nodes
If only 1st order generation is required, you should specify zero for the number of
2nd order items to be generated.
The node generation form also has the unique ability to generate nodes along a
line, arc or helix.
The axis of rotation, which only applies to an arc or helix, defines the point about
which the nodes will be generated. The angle increment causes the nodes to be
generated at some regular angle increment.
The helix length increment defines a regular increment along a parametric path at
which the nodes will be generated.
2nd order generation is also employed in the member and member concentrated
load datasheets.
Renumbering data
Any data can be renumbered by simply changing its number in a datasheet.
However, be careful, because related data in other datasheets will not be
automatically renumbered to match. A better way to renumber nodes, members or
plates is to use the graphics renumber tool. It not only lets you renumber large
groups of nodes, members and plates effortlessly, it also adjusts all of the restraints,
constraints, loads, and design data automatically to allow for the new numbering
sequence (see also Renumber).
299
A convenient way to quickly move around and edit

numeric cells in a datasheet is to use the keyboard arrow keys to move to the
desired cell, type the new data, then use the keyboard arrow keys to move to the
next cell. You do not have to press ENTER to accept the new data.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
When you use a datasheet to renumber items, none of the other data which may
reference the renumbered items is adjusted. You must do this yourself or use the
renumber tool instead (as explained above).
See also Analysis data.
See also Steel member design data.
See also Steel connection design data.
300
Graphical Input
Graphical overview
Inputting and editing your model using graphical methods is one of the most useful
and intuitive input methods. You can see exactly what is in your model and you
can see the changes as you make them. Nodes, members and plates can simply be
drawn on the screen, and there are numerous tools for copying, renumbering,
stretching, moving, generating loads and otherwise manipulating your model.
When you start SPACE GASS, it opens the traditional graphics window which is
the original graphical interface in SPACE GASS that has many tools for inputting,
editing and displaying your model. There is also the renderer which is a more
advanced graphical window that also lets you input, edit and display your model in
both wireframe and fully rendered form.
For more information about the use of the two graphical windows, refer to The
renderer and The traditional graphics window.
The renderer
301
302
Graphical Input
The renderer
The SPACE GASS renderer is now the recommended tool for all of your input,
analysis, design and display tools. Of course you can still edit your model in the
traditional graphics window, however the editing tools in the renderer are generally
more advanced and offer additional features over the traditional editing tools.
All of the data is shared between the renderer and the traditional graphics window
and so you can make changes in either one and then see your model updated in the
other one as soon as it gets focus.
You can open the renderer by clicking the

window.
button in the traditional graphics
Rendering mode
When in the renderer you can switch between wireframe, outline and rendered
views of your model by clicking the render mode selection button.
303
Zoom, pan, rotate

You can zoom, pan or rotate your model via the mouse scrollwheel or by dragging
it around using the left or right mouse buttons as shown below.
Zoom by rotating the mousewheel or by holding down the mousewheel while

moving the mouse or by pressing the keyboard Up/Down arrow keys. If you find
that zooming doesnt work, click on the graphics area before trying again.
Pan by holding down the right mouse button while moving the mouse.
Rotate by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse. You can
also drag the view selector (shown below) or click on one of its faces, edges or
corners.
The view selector

An alternative to rotating the model by dragging it around directly is to drag the
view selector around. You can also click one of the view selector faces, edges or
304
Graphical Input
corners to go straight to a specific viewpoint. If you click on the small square
attached to the front face it will take you to the 30,10 viewpoint.
Note that you can also right-click one of the view selector faces to change the
working plane (or press X, Y or Z while you are working).
Node, member and plate property panels

The property panels operate in two slightly different modes as described below.
Mode 1 - When you double-click on a node, member or plate in the model, the
appropriate property panel opens and you can make changes and then click the Ok
button at the bottom of the panel to confirm the changes. Alternatively, if you make
some changes in a property panel and then simply click on a another node, member
or plate in your model, the previous changes will be confirmed and the newly
selected item's data will appear in the property panel.
Mode 2 - If you select one or more nodes, members or plates and then right-click
and select "View/Edit Properties (Form)" from the menu that appears, the
appropriate panel will open with the combined data for all of the selected items.
When in this mode, you cannot select other nodes, members or plates until you
have clicked the Ok or Cancel buttons at the bottom of the panel. Blank fields
indicate that the data is different for the selected items. Be careful with blank fields
because if you enter data into one of them then all of the selected items will get that
data.
Single selection
Multiple selection
305
306
Graphical Input
307

Section and material property panels
The section and material property panels are located by default on the right hand
side of the renderer and are usually closed unless you have them pinned open. To
open them simply hover over the tab.
You can open the property panels to view the section and material properties and
color match them to the members in your model, or you can click a particular
section or material in the panel to have all the matching members in your model
selected.
308
Graphical Input
Controlling property panels
that it changes to
309
310
Graphical Input
Drawing in the renderer
Once you are in a tool that involves drawing a line or vector, to begin drawing you
must position your cursor at the start of the line, click the left mouse button, move
the cursor to the other end of the line and then click the left mouse button again.
The line is dragged around with the cursor as you position the second point. The
end of the first line then becomes the start of the next line and the process
continues for subsequent lines until you press Esc or click the right mouse button
(right-click) to end the sequence.
There are a number of working plane, attachment, alignment and snap tools
available to help you position points exactly where you want them while drawing
or selecting points. These are explained as follows.
Working plane tool

At any time while drawing lines or just generally moving the mouse cursor, you
can see its coordinates displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the renderer.
Depending on the current working plane, you will notice that only two of the
coordinates change as you move the mouse and the third one is held constant. You
can change the working plane by pressing the X, Y or Z keys or by right-clicking
one of the view selector faces or by clicking the working plane button
bottom toolbar.
in the
Note that whenever you graphically select a point or a node, the working plane
moves to the plane of that point or node. If you have a grid displayed (see below),
it is drawn in the current working plane.

The following discussion applies to all tools that involve selecting points or
drawing vectors, such as when drawing nodes, members or plates, moving,
stretching, copying, extending, connecting or even when adding dimensions.
311

During these operations there are a number of aligning, snapping and attachment
tools that can help.
To attach to a node (or the end of a member or the vertex of a plate), just move
close to the node until it changes color. This indicates that you are close enough,
and you can then click the left mouse button to attach to it.
To attach to an intermediate point on a member, just move close to the member
until it changes color. You can then move along the member to find its mid-point,
third points, quarter points or fifth points, each of which will show up as a different
colored dot with a label next to it. You can then click to attach to the desired point.
Note that if you wish to position a point close to a node or member without
attaching to it, you can hold down the C key to temporarily turn off the attachment
feature.
If you are drawing the second end of a line then "Perpendicular" and "Orthogonal"
attachment points will also be highlighted on the member if applicable.
312
Graphical Input
You can even align your point with an orthogonal line extending from a node or a
member's midpoint. In order to do this you must first briefly hover over the node or
member until you hear a faint pop sound that indicates that you have "locked on" to
it. You can then move away and a dotted line will extend from the "locked on"
node or member to your point, allowing you to line up with it exactly.
Note that you can temporarily turn off alignment with locked on nodes or members
by holding down the A key while you are working. You can also change the "locked
on" delay via the "Lock delay" setting in the Attachment and alignment methods
Preferences form in the Settings menu (see below).
Similarly, you can align your point with any of the "locked on" member's three
local axes as shown below.
313
When aligning with a locked on node or member, you can position your point an
exact distance from the locked on item by simply typing the distance rather than
having to click the point with your mouse.
When drawing a line, if it is close to being aligned with one of the three global axes
then it will snap to that axis. You can then either click the point with your mouse or
you can just type the length of your line.
314
Graphical Input
Snap tool
The renderer also has a snap tool which can be turned on or off via the snap button
in the bottom toolbar or by pressing the S key.
315

Positioning points using the keyboard
In addition to being able to type a length when you are locked on to an item or
aligned with a global axis as described above, you can also type an X,Y,Z
coordinate to position your point if you are not locked on to an item or aligned with
an axis. Coordinates can be entered as absolute or relative and in cartesian or polar
coordinates. Examples of each of these are as follows:
Type
Alignment
vector length
Drawn line
length
Absolute
cartesian
Relative
cartesian
Absolute polar
Relative polar
Situation
Locked to a
node or member
Aligned with a
global axis
Not locked or
aligned
Not locked or
aligned
Not locked or
aligned
Not locked or
aligned
Format
Length
Example
10.2
Length
6.75
X,Y,Z
1.2,2.4,0.9
@X,Y,Z
@0,0,6.35
Length<VertAngle<HorAngle
6.5<45<0
@Length<VertAngle<HorAngle @10<30<0
For more information, refer to Using the keyboard to position points.
Selection methods
You can select nodes, members or plates directly by clicking them with the left
mouse button or you can use a selection window. If the second corner of the
selection is to the right of the first then it is a "Normal" selection window in which
only the nodes, members or plates that fall completely within the window are
selected. Alternatively, if the second corner is to the left of the first then it is a
"Crossing" selection window in which any nodes, members or plates that are within
the window or which cross the boundary of the window are selected. A normal
selection window is drawn as a rectangular box, whereas a crossing window is
shown as a filled rectangle. The two types of selection window are shown below.
316
Graphical Input
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you can simply select them again,
either by clicking directly or by using a selection window.
Normal selection window
Crossing selection window
317
Selecting a tool
Once you have made your selection, you can get access to the various graphical
tools by right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears. A typical
member selection menu is shown below.
318
Graphical Input
319
After selecting from the menu, the tool you selected may open a form or it may
require you to pick extra points. For example, if you selected the "Generate Arc"
tool from the above menu, the Arc tool would then require you to pick a point on
the concave side of the arc so that it knows which direction to use when creating
the arc. Whenever the graphical editor requires you to do something, it displays a
red prompt at the bottom-left corner of the window as shown below. It is therefore
a good idea to look there if you are not sure what to do next.
Grid tool
A grid can be displayed as a visual aid while you are developing or viewing your
model. The grid also assists in identifying the working plane, as it is always
displayed in that plane. The grid can be turned on or off via the grid button
the bottom toolbar or by pressing the G key.
in
Note that if you change your working plane (see above) then the grid automatically
moves to that new plane.
320
Graphical Input
Restraints
Node restraints can be turned on or off in the renderer using the
button in the
bottom toolbar. Restraints are shown using combinations of the following icons.
Icon
Restraint
3D fixed
Example
FFFFFF
3D pinned
FFFRRR
2D fixed
FFRRRF
2D pinned
FFRRRR
1D translation fixed
RFRRRR
1D translation spring RSRRRR

1D rotation fixed
RRRRRF
1D rotation spring
RRRRRS
321

Shortcuts
While using any of the renderer tools, various keyboard shortcuts are available that
can speed things up. They are listed below.
Shortcut
Tab key
F11 key
G key
S key
X, Y or Z keys
A key (hold down)
C key (hold down)
Up/Down arrow keys
Rotate mousewheel
Drag with left mouse
button
Drag with right mouse
button
Action
Toggles all of the property panels on or off
Toggles full screen mode on or off
Toggles the grid on or off
Toggles the snap on or off
Allows you to set the working plane
Temporarily disables aligning with a "locked on"
node or member
Temporarily disables attaching to a node or member
Zooms in/out
Zooms in/out
Rotates
Pans
All of the toolbars in the renderer can be hidden/shown, moved or undocked, and
buttons can be added or deleted. For more information refer to Customizing
Toolbars.
Renderer settings and preferences

Various renderer settings and preferences are available from the Settings menu as
shown below.
322
Graphical Input
The "Alignment proximity" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to an axis
aligned with a "locked on" node or member or a global axis in order to align with
it.
The "Cursor pickbox size" controls how close the mouse cursor must be to a node,
member or plate in order to select it, lock onto it, or display its infotip.
The "Lock delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node or
member before you lock onto it.

The "Use previous attributes..." option, if ticked, means that when you draw a new
node, member or plate it will have the same properties (ie. section ID, material ID,
etc) as the previous item you drew or selected.
The "Allow duplicates..." option lets you draw members or plates on top of existing
members or plates (ie. so that they share the same nodes).
The "Allow hidden nodes to be selectable" option allows you to select nodes that
you can't see due to being behind other objects.
The "Curve quality" controls the smoothness of curved elements such as 3D nodes,
members with circular cross sections, etc. A higher curve quality makes the
renderer slightly slower and more memory hungry.
323

The "Result quality" specifies how many short straight lines are used to
approximate a curve when drawing deflected shapes, bending moment diagrams,
etc.
The "Highlight delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node,
member or plate before it becomes highlighted.
The "Infotip delay" controls how long the mouse cursor must be near a node,
member or plate before its infotip appears.
The "Maximum load cases shown together" is the maximum number of load cases
that will be displayed simultaneously if you select "All load cases", "All primary
load cases" or "All combination load cases". It is used to prevent memory overflow
problems when many load cases are displayed together. Note that this setting is
ignored if your model has less than 500 nodes.
The "Rotation drag distance" is the number of pixels that you can move the mouse
while the left button is held down before it will start to rotate the model. It is used
to avoid the problem of the model rotating unintentionally when you are trying to
select items or start a selection window. If this problem occurs then try increasing
the rotation drag distance slightly.
The "Rotation mode" controls how the model behaves when you rotate it with the
mouse. Trackball mode lets the model rotate about all three axes, whereas
Turntable mode prevents rotation about an axis normal to your computer screen.
Trackball mode is a bit harder to control than Turntable.
324
Graphical Input
In the following form you can change the theme of the renderer via the "Skin"
setting. This affects the colors and styles of all the forms, buttons and input fields.
You can also separately change the colors of most the items in your model to suit
your requirements.
325
Other renderer tools

Other features and tools currently available in the renderer are as follows:
326
Graphical Input
Printing of your rendered or wireframe model.
Exporting to other image formats such as DWG, DXF, IGES or STL.
Undo/redo with unlimited steps.
Shape builder.
Library editor.
Find tool.
Draw tool
Copy node, member or plate properties tool.
Move tool.
Rotate tool.
Copy tool.
Mirror tool.
Stretch tool.
Scale tool.
Renumber tool.
Check connectivity tool.
Generate arc tool.
Generate bends tool.
Subdivide tool.
Intersect tool.
Extend tool.
Connect tool.
Remove intermediate nodes tool.
Remove crossed member nodes tool.
Move intermediate nodes tool.
Align members tool.
Generate taper/haunch tool.
Reverse member direction tool.
Mesh plates tool.
Reverse plate direction tool.
Align plate axes tool.
Copy node, member or plate loads tool.
Generate moving loads tool
Generate area loads tool.
Combination load cases editor.
Manage load cases tool.
Static load to mass conversion tool.
Load case titles viewer.
327
If you have a large model with loads displayed and the renderer is
operating slowly when you zoom, pan or rotate, try turning off the loads display or
at least select less load cases to be displayed simultaneously.
328
Graphical Input

This is the original graphical interface for SPACE GASS that is gradually being
replaced by The renderer.
The process of inputting a frame graphically into SPACE GASS simply involves
drawing lines on the screen with your mouse. Each line represents a member or the
edge of a plate. Nodes are automatically attached to the ends of each member, at
plate vertices and at points where members intersect. Node, member and plate
numbering is performed automatically, or at your discretion. The graphics
renumber facility lets you renumber nodes and/or members, and automatically
adjusts all the other data that references nodes and/or members accordingly.
In order to draw a line, you must position your cursor at the start of the line, click
the left mouse button, move the cursor to the other end of the line and then click
the left mouse button again. The line is dragged around with the cursor as you
position the second point. The end of the first line then becomes the start of the
329

next line and the process continues for subsequent lines until you press ESC or
click the right mouse button (right-click) to end the sequence.
If the end of a member is drawn so that it touches another member, the two
members become connected. If attach is on then you only have to position a
member close to another member in order to connect them. If you connect a
member to an intermediate point along an existing member, the existing member is
subdivided into two, and a node is automatically inserted at the intersection point.
Nodes, members and plates can be deleted, moved, copied, rotated, stretched,
mirrored or subdivided. It is simply a matter of selecting a node, member or plate,
or placing a window around a group of nodes, members and plates, and then
performing the desired operation in accordance with the instructions following in
this chapter. If you want to move a single node, you can just select it with your
mouse and then drag it to its new location. You can see the members connected to
the node being stretched as you move the node.
selection window is drawn with a solid line, whereas a crossing window is drawn
with a dashed line. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you can simply select them again,
either by clicking directly or by using a selection window.
330
Graphical Input
331
Once you have made your selection, you can get access to the various graphical
tools by right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears. A typical
member selection menu is shown below.
332
Graphical Input
333
After selecting from the menu, the tool you selected may open a form or it may
require you to pick extra points. For example, if you selected the "Generate Arc"
tool from the above menu, the Arc tool would then require you to pick a point on
the concave side of the arc so that it knows which direction to use when creating
the arc. Whenever the graphical editor requires you to do something, it displays a
red prompt at the bottom-left corner of the window as shown below. It is therefore
a good idea to look there if you are not sure what to do next.
Positioning points accurately in the traditional graphics window

In order to input a structure graphically you have to be able to position the graphics
cursor accurately. Unless you have the steady hands of a surgeon and you are an
expert with the mouse, this is virtually impossible. Therefore, SPACE GASS has a
number of indispensable tools that enable you to draw a structure to the nearest
micron regardless of your surgical abilities.
All of these tools can be accessed via the settings menu or activated, deactivated
and/or configured using the graphics settings buttons across the bottom of the
screen and/or the keyboard. All of these settings can be toggled without
interrupting the use of most graphics tools.
[Keyboard "G"] Clicking the Grid button displays a grid of dots
on the screen at any user defined spacing. If the grid has been activated the grid
button will appear depressed and instead of the text "Grid: Off" the button will
display a message "Grid: x", where x is the spacing you defined. The grid can lie in
the XY, XZ or YZ planes.
See also Grid.
[Keyboard "S"] The Snap facility, if turned on, activates a
secondary crosshair graphics cursor which indicates the actual selection point and
which moves in discrete steps rather than moving smoothly. The snap spacing can
be set equal to the grid spacing or any other desired value. As with the Grid button,
if you activate the Snap button and enter a spacing at the prompt the text on the
button will change from "Snap: Off" to "Snap: x", where x is the spacing you
defined.
334
Graphical Input
For example, if you set the snap spacing to 100mm the cursor will move in steps of
100mm, enabling you to draw to an accuracy of exactly 100mm. The button will
indicate that snap has been set to 100mm by displaying the text "Snap: 100" (if
units are set as mm). You can change the snap spacing as you move the cursor.
SPACE GASS automatically senses when SNAP is not required and turns it off
temporarily in such cases.
See also Snap.
[Keyboard "O"] The Ortho tool forces lines to be drawn either
horizontally or vertically. Since structures are made up predominantly of horizontal
beams and vertical columns, it is a very useful tool indeed.
See also Ortho.
[Keyboard "A"] The Attach facility displays an aperture
circle with the graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing members by
simply picking points near them. The aperture circle indicates how close you must
get to a member in order to attach to it. It is very useful for attaching new members
to existing members or for locating points which are at the ends of members.
See also Attach.
[Keyboard "X,Y,Z and P"] The Plane facility allows you to change
the current drawing plane. You will be able to select the drawing plane (choice of
XY - "Z", YZ - "X" and XZ - "Y") as well as specifying an offset. An offset is the
distance from a virtual plane to the specified plane, the distance being measured
perpendicular to the virtual plane. For example, selecting the XY plane with an
offset of 5m will result in every node being created with coordinates of x,y,5.
See also Plane.
[Keyboard "C"] The Coordinates facility allows you to
toggle between one of four coordinate systems. The different systems available are:
Cartesian
Cartesian-Relative
Polar
Polar-Relative
335

The text display at the bottom right corner of the screen will constantly change to
reflect the position of the graphics cursor on the screen. The format of this text is
governed by the coordinates system you have selected. Selecting the "Off" option
switches all coordinates systems off and disables the coordinates display text.
See also Coordinates.
The keyboard can also be used to position points precisely. You simply type
in the coordinates of the point using cartesian or polar coordinates in absolute or
relative modes (depending upon the coordinates system selected). Note that there is
no icon or button for this tool. You just need to type a number and the coordinates
input form will appear automatically.
See also Using the keyboard to position points.
See also The renderer.
Other tools
There are also a number of other tools that are of great use when inputting data
graphically.
The query frame facility (see also Node properties, Member properties and Plate
properties) allows you to point to a node, member or plate and obtain information
about node coordinates, member end fixities, section properties, material
properties, etc. You can also query analysis results and steel member design
results.
You can use the zoom, pan and viewpoint facilities to view the structure in
different ways. Zoom allows you to zoom in on a portion of the structure and have
it enlarged for a detailed inspection. Pan allows you to translate the structure in any
direction on the screen. Viewpoint allows you to rotate your viewpoint to any
position around the structure.
There are a host of additional tools which allow you to scale the structure or
diagrams to any desired value, show the rendered model, superimpose loading
diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment diagrams, shear force
diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, reactions, stress diagrams,
envelopes and dynamic mode shapes, display steel connection drawings, show
local axes, restraints, constraints, offsets, top flanges, etc.
336
Graphical Input
You can also set up a number of filters, each of which limits the amount of the
model that you can see and work on. The contents of each filter can be based on a
range of axis coordinates, node properties, member properties, load types and many
other selection criteria that you can control. Filters can also be selected in the
output reports so that they can be quickly customized to include exactly what you
want to see.
Searching for specific nodes, members or plates is easy with the find function. You
can search for nodes, members or plates directly, or by reference to their properties.
All aspects of what you see on the graphics screen can be saved as views that can
be named and then recalled at any time. All filters, viewpoint, scales, zoom, pan
and other settings applicable at the time the view is saved are recalled when the
saved view is recalled.
Many of the above mentioned procedures are identical in the renderer, however
some of them are not and some renderer tools have more options available. For
more information, refer to The renderer.
337
Selection methods
This tool is replicated in the renderer and in the traditional graphics window.
selection window is drawn as a rectangular box, whereas a crossing window is
shown as a filled rectangle. The two types of selection window are shown below.
In order to de-select nodes, members or plates, you simply select them again, either
by clicking directly or by using a selection window.
338
Graphical Input
Note that you can select all nodes, members or plates by holding down Ctrl and
pressing the A key.
339
Select all
The Select All tool lets you quickly select all visible nodes, members or plates and
then perform an operation on them.
The procedure is as follows.
1. Click the right mouse button and then select "Select All" from the floating
menu that appears. Alternatively, press Ctrl-A on the keyboard or select
"Select All" from the Structure menu.
The visible nodes, members or plates are highlighted graphically the same
as if you had selected them by picking them with the mouse.
Note that any nodes, members or plates outside the graphics window or
those that are suppressed due to being filtered out are not selected.
2. You can then click on a toolbar button or click the right mouse button and
choose from the floating menu that appears to perform an operation on the
selected items.
You can cancel the highlighting by pressing the keyboard ESC key or by
selecting "Cancel" from the floating menu.
340
Graphical Input

These tools are only available in the renderer. They include the functionality of
the traditional Attach and Ortho tools.
The following discussion applies to all tools that involve selecting points or
drawing vectors, such as when drawing nodes, members or plates, moving,
stretching, copying, extending, connecting or even when adding dimensions.
During these operations there are a number of aligning, snapping and attachment
tools that can help.
To attach to a node (or the end of a member or the vertex of a plate), just move
close to the node until it changes color. This indicates that you are close enough,
and you can then click the left mouse button to attach to it.
To attach to an intermediate point on a member, just move close to the member
until it changes color. You can then move along the member to find its mid-point,
third points, quarter points or fifth points, each of which will show up as a different
colored dot with a label next to it. You can then click to attach to the desired point.
Note that if you wish to position a point close to a node or member without
attaching to it, you can hold down the C key to temporarily turn off the attachment
feature.
If you are drawing the second end of a line then "Perpendicular" and "Orthogonal"
attachment points will also be highlighted on the member if applicable.
341
You can even align your point with an orthogonal line extending from a node or a
member's midpoint. In order to do this you must first briefly hover over the node or
member until you hear a faint pop sound that indicates that you have "locked on" to
it. You can then move away and a dotted line will extend from the "locked on"
node or member to your point, allowing you to line up with it exactly.
Note that you can temporarily turn off alignment with locked on nodes or members
by holding down the A key while you are working. You can also change the "locked
on" delay via the "Lock delay" setting in the Attachment and alignment methods
Preferences form in the renderer's Settings menu.
Similarly, you can align your point with any of the "locked on" member's three
local axes as shown below.
342
Graphical Input
When aligning with a locked on node or member, you can position your point an
exact distance from the locked on item by simply typing the distance rather than
having to click the point with your mouse.
When drawing a line, if it is close to being aligned with one of the three global axes
then it will snap to that axis. You can then either click the point with your mouse or
you can just type the length of your line.
343
For information about the grid, snap and working plane tools in the renderer, refer
to Grid, Snap and Plane.
For more information about using the keyboard to position points, refer to Using
the keyboard to position points.
For more information about operating the other tools in the renderer, refer to The
renderer.
344
Graphical Input
Grid
A grid can be displayed as a visual aid while you are developing or viewing your
model. The grid also assists in identifying the working plane, as it is always
displayed in that plane.
The renderer version
The Grid tool can be turned on or off via the grid button
or by pressing the G key.
in the bottom toolbar
Note that if you change your working plane then the grid automatically moves to
that new plane.
345
For more information about the attachment, alignment, snap and working plane
tools in the renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Snap and Plane.
The traditional graphics window version

You can display a rectangular grid in the XY, XZ or YZ global planes by clicking
the
toolbar or selecting "Grid" from the Settings menu or pressing
"SHIFT+CTRL+G" on the keyboard (or just "G" if a graphics command is active).
It is a useful visual reference as you move the cursor around the screen. The GRID
can be set to any desired size provided it is not too fine or too coarse to be properly
displayed. The GRID setting uses the same system of units as the structure being
displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Grid" toolbar button or reselecting the "Grid" menu item.
The current GRID setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated
above).
346
Graphical Input
If you change the operating plane while a grid is displayed, the grid will not be
updated until you perform an operation which refreshes the entire screen such as
PAN, ZOOM, VIEWPOINT, SCALE, REDRAW, etc.
In the traditional graphics window, the grid can only be displayed in one of
the global planes. It cannot be offset a distance out along one of the axes. If you
are operating in a plane which is offset from the 0,0,0 global origin and your
viewpoint is at an angle to the plane you are working in, do not try to use the
displayed grid as a reference. It is only useful if you are operating in the same
plane as the grid or if your viewpoint is perpendicular to the operating plane.
347
Snap
The snap tool causes the cursor to move in discrete steps and allows you to
accurately position points on an imaginary snap grid.

The Snap tool which can be turned on or off via the snap button
in the bottom
toolbar or by pressing the S key. The snap spacing can be set to any desired
increment or it can be made to match the currently displayed grid spacing.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, grid and working plane
tools in the renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Grid and Plane.

You can activate snap mode by clicking the
toolbar or selecting
"Snap" from the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+S" on the keyboard (or
just "S" if a graphics command is active).
348
Graphical Input
It allows you to accurately position the graphics cursor. The SNAP facility can be
set to any desired increment which may or may not match the GRID setting (as
desired). The SNAP increment uses the same system of units as the structure being
displayed.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Snap" toolbar button or reselecting the "Snap" menu item.
The current SNAP setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as indicated
above).
For convenience, SNAP is automatically turned off temporarily during some

graphics operations such as when you are simply picking members. This avoids the
problem of not easily being able to pick objects due to the SNAP stepping effect.
When SNAP is turned off, you may notice that the graphics cursor moves in
very small increments which are not useful fractions of whole numbers. These
increments actually represent the distance between pixels on the screen. When you
position the cursor on a known point, the coordinates display sometimes indicates
that the cursor is not exactly on the point. This is because there is no pixel exactly
on the point and the cursor has therefore moved to the closest pixel. SPACE GASS,
however ignores the small movement to the closest pixel and assumes that the
cursor is located exactly on the desired point. When SNAP is turned on this does
not occur.
349
Ortho
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window. The renderer has
other alignment tools that replicate the function of this Ortho tool.
The ortho tool limits the lines that you draw to only horizontal or vertical.
You can activate ortho mode by clicking the
toolbar or selecting
"Ortho" from the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+O" on the keyboard
(or just "O" if a graphics command is active).
If ORTHO is on, it activates a secondary crosshair graphics cursor which indicates
the actual selection point and which moves in such a way that only horizontal or
vertical lines (relative to the frame global axes) can be drawn. It is a very useful aid
for drawing and positioning members, as most structures contain predominantly
horizontal and vertical members.
It can be toggled on or off by again clicking the "Ortho Mode" toolbar button or reselecting the "Ortho Mode" menu item.
The current ORTHO setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as
indicated above).
If you are drawing new members with ORTHO on

and ATTACH set to "NEAR/END", then the attachment point for any new member
which attaches to an intermediate point on another member is positioned so that
the new member stays truly orthogonal. You can also use ATTACH set to
"ORTHOGONAL" for the same result.
350
Graphical Input
Attach
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window. The renderer has
other attachment tools that replicate the function of this Attach tool.
The attach tool lets you attach nodes, members, plates and reference points to
existing nodes, members or plates without having to position the cursor exactly on
them.
You can change the attach setting by clicking on the
toolbar
button or selecting "Attach Mode" from the Settings menu or pressing
"SHIFT+CTRL+A" on the keyboard (or just "A" if a graphics command is active).
If ATTACH is on (as indicated on the toggle button above), the program displays
an aperture circle with the graphics cursor and allows you to attach to existing
nodes members when you pick points near them. The aperture circle indicates how
close you must get to a node, member or plate in order to attach to it. The point of
attachment depends on the ATTACH setting.
351
The settings that may be displayed on the attach button are:

Off:
Middle/End:
Nearest/End:
n%/End:
Middle:
Nearest:
Orthogonal:
Perpendicular:
352
Function is deactivated.
Attaches to the middle or the end, whichever is
closest.
Attaches to the nearest point or, if an end falls within
the aperture circle, attaches to the end.
Attaches to a point at the nearest n% increment
along the member, or the end, whichever is closest.
Attaches to the middle.
Attaches to the nearest point.
Attaches to a point that makes the line being drawn
exactly horizontal or vertical.
Attaches to a point that makes the line being drawn
perpendicular to the member being attached to.
Graphical Input
For example, if you draw a new member and wish to attach it to the end of an
existing member, you can simply set ATTACH to "MIDDLE/END" and then
locate the start of the new member near the end of the existing member. The two
members will be automatically connected with a common node at the intersection
point.
To connect a member to the mid point of another member ensure that ATTACH is
set to "MIDDLE" and then simply position the end of the first member to within
the aperture circle radius of the second member. The second member is
automatically broken into two and a node inserted at the intersection point.
The attach setting is only used if the aperture circle touches a node, member
or plate.
353
Plane
The plane tool allows you to specify an operating plane in or parallel to the global
XY, XZ or YZ planes in which the graphics cursor will move.
At any time while drawing lines or just generally moving the mouse cursor, you
can see its coordinates displayed in the bottom right-hand corner of the renderer.
Depending on the current working plane, you will notice that only two of the
coordinates change as you move the mouse and the third one is held constant. You
can change the working plane by pressing the X, Y or Z keys or by right-clicking
one of the view selector faces or by clicking the working plane button
bottom toolbar.
in the
Note that whenever you graphically select a point or a node, the working plane
moves to the plane of that point or node. If you have a grid displayed, it is drawn in
the current working plane.
For more information about the attachment, alignment, grid and snap tools in the
renderer, refer to Attachment and alignment methods, Grid and Snap.

You can change the plane setting by clicking the
toolbar button or
selecting "Operating Plane" from the Settings menu or pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+P"
on the keyboard (or "X", "Y", "Z" or "P" if a graphics command is active).
It allows you to accurately move the graphics cursor to any desired position in 3D
space.
354
Graphical Input
The current PLANE setting is displayed on the graphics settings button (as
indicated above).
The "Offset" field is the distance from the operating plane to the structure origin. It
can be seen by observing the coordinates display as you move the graphics cursor.
You can often take advantage of the fact that when
picking points in any graphics operation, the operating plane offset is changed to
match the coordinates of the most recently picked point.
If you change the viewpoint such that the
operating plane is no longer visible, the program will automatically change the
operating plane to a visible one.
355
Coordinates
The Coordinates tool shows the position of the mouse cursor while you are
drawing lines or selecting points.
In the renderer, the coordinates tool is for display purposes only and cannot be
changed to relative or polar. It appears in the bottom right-hand corner of the
renderer as shown below.

This tool not only allows you to view the mouse coordinates, but you can also
cycle between cartesian and polar coordinates using absolute or relative modes.
You can change the displayed coordinates by clicking the

toolbar button or selecting "Coordinates Display" from the Settings menu or
pressing "SHIFT+CTRL+C" on the keyboard (or just "C" if a graphics command is
active).
The current COORDINATES setting is displayed on the graphics settings button
(as indicated above).
Choices are:
356
Cartesian,
Cartesian-Relative,
Polar,
Polar-Relative,
Off.
Graphical Input
When a graphics operation is active, the actual coordinates of the graphics cursor
are displayed at the bottom-right corner of the screen.
If you select the second corner of a window or line and the COORDINATES
setting is in a relative mode then the coordinates displayed are relative to the first
point of the window or line. Relative coordinates are the same as absolute
coordinates when you select a single point or the start of a line.
The COORDINATES setting does not restrict your choice of Cartesian,

polar, absolute and relative modes when inputting points from the keyboard. For
example, you can enter a point from the keyboard using polar coordinates even if
the COORDINATES display is set to Cartesian coordinates (see also Using the
keyboard to position points).
357
If you cant easily position a point using the mouse, you can simply type in the
desired coordinates. You can enter points in cartesian or polar coordinates, using
absolute or relative modes. As soon as you start typing, the following form will
appear automatically.
A point can be entered using cartesian coordinates by simply typing the X, Y and Z
values separated by commas. For example, 2.3,1.2,0.5 locates a point at X=2.3,
Y=1.2 and Z=0.5.
If you type less than three values for a point, the missing values are assumed to be
zero. For example, 2.3,0,0 could be shortened to just "2.3", or 2.3,1.2,0 could be
shortened to "2.3,1.2".
To locate the "0,0,0" origin very quickly, you only
have to type 0.
A point can be entered using polar coordinates by typing a distance, followed by a
vertical angle (from the global XZ plane), followed by a horizontal angle (from the
global XY plane). <s are used to separate the values rather than commas. For
example, a point 10 units from the origin with a vertical angle of 45 and a
horizontal angle of 15, could be typed in as 10<45<15.
To enter points in relative mode (ie. relative to the other end of a line) apply an
"@" prefix to the coordinates. For example, a point which is 8 units in the X
direction and 6 units in the Y direction from a previous point, could be typed in as
@8,6, or @10<36.9.
358
Graphical Input
If you are using the renderer, you can also type a length if you are drawing a line or
vector that is aligned with a global axis or an alignment vector from a node or
member that you are "locked on" to.
Type
Alignment
vector length
Drawn line
length
Absolute
cartesian
Relative
cartesian
Absolute polar
Relative polar
Situation
Locked to a
node or member
Aligned with a
global axis
Not locked or
aligned
Not locked or
aligned
Not locked or
aligned
Not locked or
aligned
Format
Length
Example
10.2
Length
6.75
X,Y,Z
1.2,2.4,0.9
@X,Y,Z
@0,0,6.35
Length<VertAngle<HorAngle
6.5<45<0
@Length<VertAngle<HorAngle @10<30<0
In the traditional graphics window, if you use the

keyboard to type in coordinates for a point that is within the aperture circle
distance of a member, and ATTACH is on, the point will not attach unless you
make a direct hit. Any point positioned with the keyboard is kept at the exact
coordinates that you type in.
For information on attachment, alignment, working plane, grid and snap tools that
allow you to position points accurately in the renderer, refer to Attachment and
alignment, Plane, Grid, Snap and The renderer.
For information on snapping and attachment tools available that allow you to
position points accurately in the traditional graphics window, refer to The
traditional graphics window.
359
Infotips
If you hover the mouse over a node, member or plate in the renderer, an infotip
appears that gives useful information about the object as shown below.
Infotips can be turned on or off by clicking the
button in the bottom toolbar of
the renderer. Note that you can also temporarily hide infotips while you're working
by holding down the I key.
360
Graphical Input
Property panels
The property panels described here are only available in the renderer.
Node, member and plate property panels
The node, member and plate property panels operate in two slightly different
modes as described below.
Mode 1 - When you double-click on a node, member or plate in the model, the
appropriate property panel opens and you can make changes and then click the Ok
button at the bottom of the panel to confirm the changes. Alternatively, if you make
some changes in a property panel and then simply click on a another node, member
or plate in your model, the previous changes will be confirmed and the newly
selected item's data will appear in the property panel.
Mode 2 - If you select one or more nodes, members or plates and then right-click
and select "View/Edit Properties" from the menu that appears, the appropriate
panel will open with the combined data for all of the selected items. When in this
mode, you cannot select other nodes, members or plates until you have clicked the
Ok or Cancel buttons at the bottom of the panel. Blank fields indicate that the data
is different for the selected items. Be careful with blank fields because if you enter
data into one of them then all of the selected items will get that data. Note that after
selecting nodes, members or plates, if the property panel is already open then the
"View/Edit Properties" item will not appear in the right-click menu.
Single selection
Multiple selection
361
362
Graphical Input
Section and material property panels
The section and material property panels are located by default on the right hand
side of the renderer and are usually closed unless you have them pinned open. To
open them simply hover over the tab.
You can open the property panels to view the section and material properties and
color match them to the members in your model, or you can click a particular
section or material in the panel to have all the matching members in your model
selected.
363

Controlling property panels
that it changes to
364
Graphical Input
365
Multiple viewports
This tool is only available in the traditional graphics window.
SPACE GASS allows you to present more than one view of your structure on the
screen at any one time in the traditional graphics window. Up to four different
windows, or "viewports", can be displayed and individually configured to better
display your structure.
The procedure involves clicking the
button or selecting "Viewports" from the
Window menu. Once you have opened multiple viewports you can page through
the different views using the
and
toolbar buttons (the TAB and
SHIFT+TAB keys perform the same functions).
When you click the viewport tool you are presented with a number of different
configurations. Most of these configurations are self explanatory, with the
exception of the bottom four buttons.
These four buttons allow you to select any one of the four viewports, either on their
own, or in combination. Each corner of the screen corresponds with viewports 1, 2,
3 and 4 respectively. If one of the viewports selected is already displayed it will
return to the configuration defined by the diagram on the button selected.
366
Graphical Input
Each of the viewports which are displayed have their own unique configuration.
This applies to scales, viewpoint, filters, superimposed diagrams, toggle button
settings, etc. The configuration you specify for a viewport will be retained when
you close the viewport so that, when you open that viewport again, the same
settings will be active.
You can use the viewports to display a variety of different information including
different views of the structure, graphics settings, bending moment, shear force,
axial force, stress and displacement diagrams, dynamic and buckling mode shapes,
filters, load cases, member top flanges, 3D geometry, local axes, etc. When you
select a different viewport (either by clicking on it with the mouse, selecting it via
the "Viewport" toolbar buttons or Window menu, or by using the TAB and
SHIFT+TAB keys) the settings you have selected for that viewport will be
indicated via the toggle buttons.
Graphics commands apply to the active viewport. Some graphics commands allow
you to move between viewports without exiting from the command. For instance,
consider a job where you have 4 viewports displayed with viewport 1 as the active
viewport. If you select the draw facility and start drawing a line in the active
viewport, you can then move the cursor to any other viewport without exiting from
the draw command.
You will find that as you move the cursor between the viewports each viewport
displays a drawn line which has the same coordinates as in the viewport where you
first started drawing the line. This is useful in a number of situations, such as when
you start drawing a line in one viewport but cannot locate the end point in that
viewport. This feature applies to some graphics functions and can be switched on
and off via the "Viewports" form (ie. by toggling the "Activate Viewport Under
Cursor" check box in the viewports form).
367
Node properties
The node property forms described here are only available in the traditional
graphics window. For information about the renderer's property panels, refer to
Property panels or The renderer.
Node properties include node coordinates, node restraints and master-slave
constraints. Hence, selecting the graphical option for "Nodes", "Node restraints" or
"Master-slave constraints" will all take you to the same node properties form.
There are three modes available for editing node properties as follows.
To edit or query node properties one node at a time
Simply double-click on a node.
Note "Edit/Query Node" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one node at a time, you can
simply click on any other node to display and edit its properties without exiting the
command. When doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the
previously displayed node are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any nodes to display their
analysis results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query node properties for multiple nodes using a form
Select some nodes graphically, click the right mouse button and then select
"Properties (Form)" from the floating menu that appears.
368
Graphical Input
Note "Edit Node Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Edit mode works in a similar way to edit/query mode except that you cant select
other nodes while the form is open. You can, however select multiple nodes
initially and make changes to all of them simultaneously.
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the nodes selected, more than one value exists. If
you leave such a field blank then the selected nodes will retain their individual
values. However, if you type into a blank field then all of the selected nodes will
receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the master-slave constraints part of the node properties form.
Allows you to graphically select a master node rather than having to type in its
node number.
To edit or query node properties for multiple nodes using a datasheet
Select some nodes graphically, click the right mouse button and then select
"Properties (Datasheet)" from the floating menu that appears.
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal nodes datasheet
because it contains extra columns for restraints and master-slave constraints.
369
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above datasheet.
You can view node restraints or master-slave constraints graphically by

depressing the "View node restraints" or "View master-slave constraints" toggle
buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any node properties that affect the structures geometry, you
may not be able to select some nodes, members or plates until after a redraw. This
is due to their displayed position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box
allows you to order an automatic redraw after you exit the node properties form.
You can remove restraints and/or constraints by
either blanking the restraint or constraint field or by typing "NONE" in the field or
by clicking the delete button.
See also Nodes.
See also Floating mouse menus.
370
Graphical Input
Member properties
The member property forms described here are only available in the traditional
Member properties include member type, connectivity, orientation, fixity, section
properties, material properties and member offsets. Hence, selecting the graphical
option for "Members", "Section properties", "Material properties" or "Member
offsets" will all take you to the same member properties form.
There are three modes available for editing member properties as follows.
To edit or query member properties one member at a time
Simply double-click on a member.
Note "Edit/Query Member" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one member at a time, you
can simply click on any other member to display and edit its properties without
exiting the command. When doing so, any changes you made to the properties of
the previously displayed member are saved.
371

You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any members to display
their analysis results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query member properties for multiple members using a
form
Select some members graphically, click the right mouse button and then select
Note "Edit Member Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
other members while the form is open. You can, however select multiple members
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the members selected, more than one value exists. If
you leave such a field blank then the selected members will retain their individual
values. However, if you type into a blank field then all of the selected members
will receive the new value.
Special buttons
Shows or hides the section properties part of the member properties form.
372
Graphical Input
Shows or hides the material properties part of the member properties form.
Shows or hides the member offsets part of the member properties form.
Allows you to input a section or material from a standard library.
Initiates the shape builder.
Initiates the standard shapes input.

Section and material properties are different to the other items in the members form
because a single section or material can be shared amongst many members. All
other items of data in the members form have their own independent values for
each member. Hence, as soon as you change the section or material property
number, the rest of the section or material data changes to match.
You can scroll through the sections or materials in
the current job by changing the section or material number in the member
properties form. All of the properties that have been defined for that section or
material will be displayed. If no properties have been defined for that section or
material then the name field will be blank, as will the properties fields.
To edit or query member properties for multiple members using a
datasheet
Select some members graphically, click the right mouse button and then select
Note that the datasheet that appears is different to the normal members datasheet
because it contains extra columns for section properties, material properties and
offsets.
373
You can view member hinges, member offsets or section properties

graphically by depressing the "View member hinges", "View member offsets" or
"View rendered model" toggle buttons in the side toolbar.
If you change any member properties that affect the structures geometry,
you may not be able to select some nodes or members until after a redraw. This is
due to their displayed position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box
allows you to order an automatic redraw after you exit the node properties form.
See also Members.
374
Graphical Input
Plate properties
The plate property forms described here are only available in the traditional
Plate properties include plate type, connectivity, orientation of local axes, plate
thickness, plate offset and material properties.
There are three modes available for editing plate properties as follows.
To edit or query plate properties one plate at a time
Simply double-click on a plate.
Note "Edit/Query Plate" in the title bar of the form that appears.
Although this mode only lets you edit the properties of one plate at a time, you can
simply click on any other plate to display and edit its properties without exiting the
command. When doing so, any changes you made to the properties of the
previously displayed plate are saved.
You can also press the "Results" button and then click on any plates to display their
analysis results in a scrollable window (see also Query analysis results).
To edit or query plate properties for multiple plates using a form
Select some plates graphically, click the right mouse button and then select
Note "Edit Plate Properties" in the title bar of the form that appears.
375
other plates while the form is open. You can, however select multiple plates
Blank fields
A blank field indicates that for the plates selected, more than one value exists. If
you leave such a field blank then the selected plates will retain their individual
values. However, if you type into a blank field then all of the selected plates will
receive the new value.
Special buttons
Allows you to input a material from a standard library.
Material properties are different to the other items in the plates form because a
single material can be shared amongst many plates. All other items of data in the
plates form have their own independent values for each plate. Hence, as soon as
you change the material property number, the rest of the material data changes to
match.
You can scroll through the materials in the current
job by changing the material number in the plate properties form. All of the
properties that have been defined for that material will be displayed. If no
properties have been defined for that material then the name field will be blank, as
will the properties fields.
To edit or query plate properties for multiple plates using a datasheet
Select some plates graphically, click the right mouse button and then select
376
Graphical Input
You can view plate offsets graphically by depressing the "View offsets"
toggle button in the side toolbar.
If you change any plate properties that affect the structures geometry, you
may not be able to select some nodes or plates until after a redraw. This is due to
their displayed position becoming out-of-date. The "Regen" check box allows you
to order an automatic redraw after you exit the node properties form.
See also Plates.
377
Node restraints
Node restraints are incorporated into node properties.
See also Property panels.
378
Graphical Input
Section properties
Section properties are incorporated into member properties.
379
Material properties
Material properties are incorporated into the member and plate properties forms.
380
Graphical Input
Master-slave constraints
Master-slave constraints are incorporated into node properties.
381
Member offsets
Member offsets are incorporated into member properties.
382
Graphical Input
Copy node properties

The Copy Node Properties tool lets you copy the restraint and master-slave
constraint properties of a node to a selection of destination nodes.
After selecting the destination nodes, right-click and select "Copy Node Properties"
from the menu that appears. You should then click the source node, after which its
properties are copied to the destination nodes.
The procedure is the reverse of the renderer procedure above. After selecting the
source node, right-click and select "Copy Node Properties" from the menu that
appears. You should then select the destination nodes, right-click and then select
Ok to have the properties copied.
383
Copy member properties

The Copy Member Properties tool lets you copy the member, section, material and
offset properties of a member to a selection of destination members.
After selecting the destination members, right-click and select "Copy Member
Properties" from the menu that appears. You should then click the source member,
after which its properties are copied to the destination members.
source member, right-click and select "Copy Member Properties" from the menu
that appears. You should then select the destination members, right-click and then
select Ok to have the properties copied.
384
Graphical Input
Copy plate properties

The Copy Plate Properties tool lets you copy the plate, material and offset
properties of a plate to a selection of destination plates.
After selecting the destination plates, right-click and select "Copy Plate Properties"
from the menu that appears. You should then click the source plate, after which its
properties are copied to the destination plates.
source plate, right-click and select "Copy Plate Properties" from the menu that
appears. You should then select the destination plates, right-click and then select
Ok to have the properties copied.
385
Draw
The Draw tool allows you to draw new nodes, members or plates and attach them
to existing nodes, members or plates. Nodes are automatically generated at the ends
of each member or plate vertex. If a member or plate is attached to the intermediate
point of an existing member, the existing member is subdivided into two and a
node is automatically inserted at the intersection point.
When in drawing mode you can control the
numbering of new nodes, members and plates being drawn by pressing the
keyboard N, M or P keys and then specifying the number of the next node, member
or plate to be drawn. Alternatively, you can simply let SPACE GASS find the next
available node, member or plate. You can easily renumber any nodes, members or
plates later using the Renumber tool.
For members, the procedure is as follows.
1. Click the
button.
(renderer) or
(traditional graphics window) toolbar
Note that you can switch to drawing plates by pressing the T key to switch
to drawing triangular plates or the Q key to switch to drawing
quadrilateral plates. You can switch back to drawing members by pressing
the M key.
2. Pick the start of a new member. This can be a new point not connected to
existing members or plates, or it can be an existing member or plate end
point or member intermediate point.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other
nodes or members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then
align with an orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on"
node or member. You can also align with one of the three global axes. For
more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember
also that when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in
the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, refer to
386
Graphical Input
"Using the keyboard to position points".
3. Pick the end of the new member. Again, this can be a new point or a point
on an existing member or plate.
4. If you wish to draw another member that extends from the end of the
member just drawn then pick another end point. You can keep picking end
points for additional members.
5. Press ESC or the right mouse button to end the operation.
6. Return to step 1 above to draw another member, or press ESC or the right
mouse button to exit from the tool.
Be careful when subdividing or connecting to intermediate points on

members that have local Y or Z member offsets. Because local offsets are
calculated relative to a straight line joining the members end nodes, they will
change direction if you add intermediate nodes. It is therefore recommended that
you should always convert any local Y or Z member offsets to global before adding
intermediate nodes.
If you wish to draw multiple members between the same two nodes, you will
need to first activate the "Allow duplicates when drawing new members" option in
the "General configuration" item of the Config menu.
For plates, the procedure is as follows.
1. Click the
or
(renderer) or
(traditional graphics window)
toolbar button and then select between drawing triangular or quadrilateral
plates.
Note that you can switch between drawing triangular or quadrilateral
plates while drawing by pressing the T key to switch to drawing triangular
plates or the Q key to switch to drawing quadrilateral plates. You can also
switch to drawing members by pressing the M key.
Note also that while in quadrilateral plate drawing mode, you can draw
triangular plates by simply double-clicking the 4th node.
387
2. Pick the start of a new plate. This can be a new point not connected to
existing members or plates, or it can be an existing member or plate end
point or member intermediate point.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other
nodes or members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then
align with an orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on"
node or member. You can also align with one of the three global axes. For
more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember
also that when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in
the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, refer to
"Using the keyboard to position points".
3. Pick the next vertex of the new plate. Again, this can be a new point or a
point on an existing member or plate.
4. Pick the third and fourth (if a quadrilateral plate) vertices of the new plate.
5. If you wish to draw another plate that extends from the end of the plate just
drawn then pick another point. You can keep picking points for additional
plates.
6. Press ESC or the right mouse button to end the operation.
7. Return to step 1 above to draw another plate, or press ESC or the right
mouse button to exit from the tool.
You can draw triangular plates while in quadrilateral plate drawing mode
by double-clicking the 4th node of quadrilateral plates.
While drawing, you can switch between drawing members or plates by

pressing the M key to switch to drawing members, the T key to switch to drawing
triangular plates or the Q key to switch to drawing quadrilateral plates.
388
Graphical Input
Plates must be flat (ie. all vertices in the same plane).
After drawing some members or plates, if you are not sure that they are
properly connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the
"Connectivity" tool.
389
Move
The Move tool allows you to select one or more nodes, members or plates and
move them in any direction on the screen.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be moved, right-click and select
"Move" from the menu that appears. You should then pick two points that
represent the ends of a vector through which the items are to be moved.
Alternatively, if you have only selected one node to be moved, you can choose
between "Move Along Vector" or "Move To Location". The "Move to Location"
option requires you to pick a destination point rather than two ends of a vector.
Don't forget that when drawing in the renderer, you can attach to other nodes or
members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with an
orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You can
also align with one of the three global axes. For more information, refer to
Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that when drawing, you can
use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For
more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to position points".

There are two ways to move nodes. They are explained as follows.
1. For one node only:
Click the
toolbar button or select "Move" from the Structure menu and
then select the node you wish to move. Move the node and pick its
destination point. You can see the members attached to the node being
moved and stretched as you move the node.
OR
For one or more nodes:
Select the nodes you wish to move, click the right mouse button and then
select "Move" from the floating menu that appears. Pick two points that
390
Graphical Input
represent the vector through which the selected nodes are to be moved.
Remember that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can
simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, see "Using the keyboard to position points".
2. All selected nodes are then moved.

3. Select more nodes to move, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit
from the tool.
To remove an intermediate node from two
members connected end-to-end and convert them into a single continuous member,
either use the Remove intermediate nodes tool in the renderer or use the Move tool
to simply move the intermediate node onto either one of the end nodes.

intermediate nodes.
After moving some nodes, if you are not sure that the members and plates
attached to them are properly connected to other nodes, members or plates, you
can use the "Connectivity" tool.
391
Rotate
The Rotate tool allows you to select one or more nodes, members or plates and
rotate them about any user defined axis.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be rotated, right-click and select
"Rotate" from the menu that appears. You should then pick the centre of rotation
and then fill out the form that appears below. Note that the sign of the angle of
rotation follows the "right hand screw rule".
Don't forget that when picking points in the renderer, you can attach to other
nodes or members, or you can "lock on" to a node or member and then align with
an orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. For
more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that
when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of
the desired point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to
position points".
392
Graphical Input
Copy
The Copy tool allows you to copy nodes, members or plates in any straight line
direction, or around an arc or helix. This is very useful for structures such as
trusses where you can draw just the first panel and then make copies of it to build
up the complete structure.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be copied, right-click and select
"Copy Along Line", "Copy Along Arc" or "Copy Along Helix" from the menu that
appears.
If copying along a line, you should then pick two points that represent the ends of a
vector through which the items are to be copied.
If copying along an arc, you should then pick the center of the arc and then fill out
the form that appears below.
393
If copying along a helix, you should then pick the center of the helix arc and then
fill out the form that appears below.
394
Graphical Input
After copying some members or plates, if you are not sure that they are
properly connected to other nodes, members or plates, you can use the
"Connectivity" tool.
395
Mirror
The Mirror tool allows you to create a mirror image of any user defined nodes,
members or plates about any user defined surface.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be mirrored, right-click and select
"Mirror" from the menu that appears. You should then pick a point that lies
anywhere in the mirror plane followed by filling out the form shown below.
an orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. For
more information, refer to Attachment and alignment methods. Remember also that
when drawing, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the coordinates of
the desired point(s). For more information, refer to "Using the keyboard to
position points".
396
Graphical Input
Delete
The Delete tool allows you to delete any or all of the structure. The items to be
deleted are first highlighted so that you can verify them before they are actually
removed. Nodes connected to deleted members or plates are also deleted unless
they are connected to other members or plates that still exist.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be deleted, press the Delete key or
right-click and select "Delete" from the menu that appears. The selected items are
then deleted.
.
397
Stretch
The Stretch tool lets you stretch all or part of your model.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be stretched, right-click and select
"Stretch" from the menu that appears. You should then pick an anchor point, plus
two points that represent the ends of a vector through which the items are to be
stretched.
Each selected item is then moved parallel to the stretch vector by an amount that is
proportional to its distance from the anchor point. The distance by which a point is
moved parallel to the stretch vector is given by:
where D is the distance moved, Lv is the length of the stretch vector, Dn is the
distance from the node to the anchor point in the direction of the stretch vector, and
Dv is the distance from the start of the stretch vector to the anchor point in the
direction of the stretch vector.
398
Graphical Input
Scale
You can use this tool to apply a scale factor to selected nodes, members or plates.
For example, you could use it to enlarge your model by 20% or, if you had
mistakenly input your node geometry in millimetre units instead of meters, you
could scale the model down by 0.001.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be scaled, right-click and select
"Scale" from the menu that appears. You should then pick a base point about which
the scaling occurs, followed by specifying the scale factor in the form shown
below.
an orthogonal line or an extension line from the "locked on" node or member. You
can also align with one of the three global axes. For more information, see
"Aligning, snapping and attachment tools" in The renderer. Remember also that
when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can simply type in the
coordinates of the desired point(s). For more information, see "Using the keyboard
to position points".
The Scale tool only affects the node coordinates. It doesnt adjust offsets,
section properties, loads or any other parts of your model.
399
Generate arc
The Arc generation tool lets you apply an arc to any member by adding
intermediate nodes with any desired radius and arc plane.
After selecting the members to be converted to an arc, right-click and select
"Generate Arc" from the menu that appears. You should then pick any point on the
concave side of the member so that the tool knows which way to bend the arc.
If you have selected multiple members connected end-to-end and the "Generate
continuous arc over multiple connected members" option is ticked then the Arc
tool will try to generate a continuous arc that encompasses all of the connected
members. This is particularly handy if you have already generated an arc and then
wish to re-select it and change its radius. With this option unticked, a separate arc
will be generated for each selected member.
400
Graphical Input
Generate bends
This tool in the renderer allows you to generate bends of any radius between
members that are currently connected to each other.
After selecting the members to be adjusted, right-click and select "Generate Bends"
from the menu that appears. Each bend is approximated by a series of straight line
segments and you can specify the number of segments per 90 degrees in the form
shown below. You can also specify a threshold angle to stop bends being generated
between members that are close to being aligned in a straight line.
401
Note that a bend will not be generated between connected members if the angle is
less than the threshold angle, if the bend radius is too large or if there are more
than two members or a plate connected to the intersection node.
402
Graphical Input
Subdivide
The Subdivide tool allows you to select one or more members and subdivide them
by inserting intermediate nodes at regular or irregular positions along them.
After selecting the members to be subdivided, right-click and select "Subdivide"
from the menu that appears. You should then specify the number of subdivisions
and their spacing in the form shown below.
If the node insertion points are irregular, you can nominate "Insertion points" to be
expressed as inclined distances, or as projected distances along one of the global
axis directions. Naturally, you cannot nominate projected distances along a global
axis which is at right angles to the axis of the member being subdivided.
Insertion points are referenced from the node A end or Node B of the members.
They can be expressed as actual distances or as percentages. For example, to
subdivide a 10m beam into 2m, 3m, and 5m beams, you could type 2,5, or 2,50%,
or 20%,50% into the "Insertion points" field. In all three cases, the final result is
the same.
If you are using percentages for all of the insertion points, then the inclined or
projected axis specification is irrelevant.
403
If the inserted nodes are to be equally spaced then

you can leave the "Insertion points" field blank.

intermediate nodes.
404
Graphical Input
Mesh
The Mesh tool allows you to select one or more plates and then mesh them into
smaller elements. You can also subdivide quadrilateral plates into triangles.
Unlike frame elements, plate elements (like all finite elements) are not exact and
hence the accuracy of the analysis increases as the number of plate elements is
increased. It is therefore important that your model is properly meshed.
The normal procedure for generating a well meshed model is to draw large plates
that define the overall walls, slabs and other components and then use the mesh
tool to subdivide the large plates into smaller elements.
The meshing pattern also affects the analysis results to some extent. For example,
because all of the elements in the following diagram are orientated at the same
angle, an effect referred to as "mesh induced anisotropy" occurs which results in
lower computational accuracy.
A meshing pattern that will achieve more accurate results is shown below.
405
After selecting the plates to be meshed, right-click and select "Mesh Plates" from
the menu that appears.
Note that if members also exist around the perimeter of the plates being meshed
then they can also be subdivided during the meshing operation if the "Split
406
Graphical Input
members along plate edges and connect to newly generated intermediate nodes"
option is checked.
After meshing, each plate element must be flat (ie. all vertices in the same
plane), have internal angles less than 135 and an aspect ratio less than 4:1.
407
Connect
The Connect tool allows you to connect members that cross each other within a
specified distance but which are not currently connected.
After selecting the members to be connected, right-click and select "Connect" from
the menu that appears. Members that cross each other within the tolerance you
specify in the following form will be connected.
After using the Connect tool, if you want to check that the members are
properly connected, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
See also Intersect.
408
Graphical Input
Intersect
The Intersect tool allows you to join two or more members and automatically insert
nodes at the intersection points. It works with members that are not touching each
other, and with members that cross over each other.
After selecting the members to be intersected, right-click and select "Intersect
Move", "Intersect Extend" or "Intersect Offset" from the menu that appears. You
should then click a member that the selected members are to intersect with.
If you choose "Intersect Move", the ends of the selected members will be moved to
the intersection points.
If you choose "Intersect Extend", new members will be added that extend from the
ends of the selected members to the intersection points.
If you choose "Intersect Offset", member offsets will be added that offset the ends
of the selected members to the intersection points.
Because the "Move ends" or "Extend ends" selection only affects members which
dont already pass through the intersection point, the selection is irrelevant for
members that cross over each other.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Concentrated loads and distributed forces acting on a member that is subdivided
as the result of an intersect operation are now automatically re-distributed onto
the subdivided members, however in the traditional graphics window distributed
torsion, thermal and prestress loads are not!
Be careful when intersecting with members that have local Y or Z member

offsets. Because local offsets are calculated relative to a straight line joining the
members end nodes, they will change direction if you add intermediate nodes. It is
therefore recommended that you should always convert any local Y or Z member
offsets to global before intersecting at an intermediate point.
409
After using the Intersect tool, if you want to check that the members are
properly connected, you can use the "Connectivity" tool.
See also Connect.
410
Graphical Input
Extend
Members can be extended or shortened using this tool in the renderer.
After selecting the members to be extended or shortened, right-click and select
"Extend" from the menu that appears. You must then select a reference point
graphically. This just allows you to control which ends of the members will move
and which ends will stay in place. The form shown below then appears.
The "Mode" option lets you choose between specifying a new length or specifying
an extension or reduction. The "Move" option lets you control which ends of the
members will be moved. In the "New length" or "Extension" field at the bottom of
the form, you can specify the new length or extension (or shortening) as an
absolute value or as a percentage of the original member length.
411
Remove intermediate nodes

In the renderer you can remove intermediate nodes by selecting the desired
members, right-clicking and then selecting "Remove Intermediate Nodes" from the
menu that appears.
Note that intermediate nodes can only be removed from members that are straight.
For members that aren't straight you can simply use the Move tool to move an
intermediate node onto its neighbour to remove it.
412
Graphical Input
Remove crossed member nodes

This renderer tool lets you remove nodes that are at the intersection of members
that cross over each other, such as you get with wall or roof cross bracing.
After selecting the nodes attached to the crossed members, right-click and then
select "Remove Crossed Member Nodes" from the menu that appears.
413
Move intermediate nodes

You can move intermediate nodes along a member using this tool in the renderer.
After selecting the two members on either side of the intermediate node to be
moved, right-click and select "Move Intermediate Nodes" from the menu that
appears.
In the form shown below, you can enter the distance to be moved or the new
member lengths as absolute lengths or as percentages.
414
Graphical Input
Align members
It is easy to align or stack members using the render's "Align Members" tool.
After selecting the members to be adjusted, right-click and select "Align members"
from the menu that appears and then click another member to align them with. In
the form that appears you can then choose to align the members according to their
tops, bottoms or sides. Alternatively, you can stack members side by side or on top
of one another using the "Stack" options.
In the before and after diagrams below, the blue beam has been adjusted to align
with the red beam's top flange.
415
416
Graphical Input
Generate taper/haunch
The Taper/Haunch generation tool in the renderer lets you model tapered members
with or without haunches.
A member can be tapered by varying its depth, width or both depth and width. If
the depth is varied, the taper can be applied to the top of the member, the bottom of
the member, or evenly to both the top and bottom. If the width is varied, the taper
is applied evenly to both sides of the member. If a haunch is selected, its depth is
varied and is applied to the bottom of the haunch only.
SPACE GASS uses a series of prismatic member segments to approximate the
exact taper. You can use up to 50 segments per taper, however usually 3 segments
is enough to get very close to the exact solution. The cross section dimensions for
each prismatic member can be set equal to the tapers largest end dimensions,
smallest end dimensions or average dimensions for the segment under
consideration.
After selecting the member(s) to be tapered or haunched, right-click and select
"Generate Taper/Haunch" from the menu that appears. If you have selected more
than one member then they must be a continuous run of members with no gaps inbetween. Each selected member will become a segment of the total taper or
haunch. Alternatively, if you have selected just one member then it will be
subdivided as part of the taper/haunch process.
The member that you select first determines the start of the taper/haunch. If there
was only one member then the node A end will be the start of the taper/haunch. If
you selected the members using a selection window or if you selected an
intermediate member first, the start of the taper/haunch will be at the end with the
lowest numbered member.
The following form shows an example of generating a taper.
417
The following form shows an example of generating a hanuch.
418
Graphical Input
Note that whenever a taper or haunch is generated, member offsets are also
calculated and applied to the tapered/haunched members. The offsets take into
account the changed centroid location in the built-up sections and ensure that the
tapered/haunched members are correctly positioned relative to each other.
419
Reverse member direction

This tool in the renderer allows you to reverse the direction of selected members so
that their local x-axes point in the opposite direction. It effectively swaps the node
A and node B numbers in the member data.
After selecting the members to be reversed, right-click and select "Reverse
Member Direction" from the menu that appears to display the form as shown
below.
Any options that you tick in the form below will be adjusted so that they are not
affected by the reversal, otherwise they will be reversed with the member.
Note that you can see the direction of members using the View member origins
tool.
420
Graphical Input
Reverse plate direction

The Reverse Plate Direction tool lets you reverse the direction of plates, effectively
swapping their front and back faces. It also results in the plates local x and z axes
having their directions reversed.
Original Plate
Reversed Plate
After selecting the selected plates, right-click and select "Reverse Plate Direction"
from the menu that appears. If you tick the "Adjust the direction of loads so that
421

they are unaffected by the reversal" option then any plate loads will be adjusted so
that they remain in the same general direction as before the plates were reversed.
Note that the order of the nodes around a plate are changed after the plate has been
reversed.
422
Graphical Input
Align plate axes

You can use this tool to align the local axes of a number of plates. After you have
drawn and meshed some plates, you will probably find that their local axes are all
pointing in different directions. If they are left this way then the results will be for
different axis directions and they will be difficult to compare. It will also be
difficult to produce meaningful contour diagrams if the plate axes are not aligned.
After selecting the plates to be aligned, right-click and select "Align Plate Axes"
from the menu that appears. You should then click a plate that the selected plates
are to be aligned with.
Options include allowing plates to be reversed (ie. the direction of their local zaxes are reversed), letting plates that are currently aligned with a direction node or
axis to be re-aligned, and adjusting pressure or thermal gradient loads for reversed
plates.
423
Renumber
The Renumber tool allows you to renumber nodes, members or plates at any stage
of the program operation. Items that reference nodes, members or plates such as
restraints, constraints, loads and steel design data are automatically adjusted for the
new numbering sequence.
After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be renumbered, right-click and
select "Renumber" from the menu that appears. In the form shown below, the
"Increment by" option allows you to create a gap in a sequence of nodes, members
or plates without having to redefine the entire numbering sequence. You can also
renumber in one, two or three directions simultaneously if required.
424
Graphical Input

After selecting the nodes, members or plates to be renumbered, right-click and
select "Renumber" from the menu that appears. In the form shown below, the
"Increment by" option allows you to create a gap in a sequence of nodes, members
or plates without having to redefine the entire numbering sequence.
425
Note that if a node, member or plate is to be renumbered to a node, member or

plate that already exists, SPACE GASS displays an error message and forces you
to change the renumbering data before renumbering can proceed.
426
Graphical Input
Connectivity check
The Connectivity tool lets you see graphically what is connected to a particular
node, member or plate. It is a very handy tool if you are not sure if certain nodes.
members or plates are properly connected. For example, it will quickly tell you if a
member simply passes over a node or if it is properly connected to it.
Right-click on a single node, member or plate and then select "Connectivity
Check" from the menu that appears. The nodes, members and plates that are
connected to the selected item are then highlighted graphically. You can then
proceed to click on any other nodes, members or plates in your model to check
their connectivity.
427
Node loads
This tool allows you to graphically apply force and moment loads to nodes. Node
loads are always referenced to the global axes system. If you wish to apply node
loads in local axes you should use member concentrated loads instead (see also
Member concentrated loads).
1. Select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
select "Node Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Node Loads - Graphical" from the
Loads menu, select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse
button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new loads then you
would probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the load
cases in the datasheet that follows. If you are editing loads then you may
also wish to leave the load cases list field blank unless there are a large
number of load cases and you want to restrict the datasheet to just some of
them.
You should then choose between showing the loads applied to each
selected node individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as
a group to all the selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the nodes). The
advantage of the "group" selection is that you only have to input one line
of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the selected nodes. This can
be particularly useful if you are applying the same load to a number of
nodes. If you are inputting a different load on each node then you should
choose the "individual" selection. Choosing "individual" can also be useful
if you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the nodes
you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each node individually
then you can also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just
428
Graphical Input
the ones that are loaded. If you are inputting new loads then you would
probably choose to show all the selected nodes, whereas if you are editing
existing loads or just viewing loads then showing just the loaded nodes
may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing loads shown. You can add, edit
or delete loads and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The
operation of the datasheet is the same as the non-graphical datasheets (see
also Datasheets).
Refer to "Using datasheets" for information on how to operate the above

datasheet.
See also Node load data.
429

This tool allows you to graphically specify displacements and rotations to nodes.
The prescribed displacements are load case specific. Node displacements are
always referenced to the global axes system and can only be applied to restrained
degrees of freedom.
1. Select the nodes you wish to displace, click the right mouse button and
then select "Prescribed Node Displacements" from the floating menu that
appears.
OR
Select "Prescribed Node Displacements - Graphical" from the Loads menu,
select the nodes you wish to displace, click the right mouse button and then
click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new displacements
then you would probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify
the load cases in the datasheet that follows. If you are editing
displacements then you may also wish to leave the load cases list field
blank unless there are a large number of load cases and you want to restrict
the datasheet to just some of them.
You should then choose between showing the displacements applied to
each selected node individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or
applied as a group to all the selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the
nodes). The advantage of the "group" selection is that you only have to
input one line of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the selected
nodes. This can be particularly useful if you are applying the same
displacement to a number of nodes. If you are inputting a different
displacement on each node then you should choose the "individual"
selection. Choosing "individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying
to see what displacements are already applied to the nodes you have
selected.
430
Graphical Input
If you have elected to show the displacements applied to each node
individually then you can also choose between showing all the selected
nodes or just the ones that are displaced. If you are inputting new
displacements then you would probably choose to show all the selected
nodes, whereas if you are editing existing displacements or just viewing
displacements then showing just the displaced nodes may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing displacements shown. You can
add, edit or delete displacements and then click the Ok button to save any
changes. The operation of the datasheet is the same as the non-graphical
datasheets (see also Datasheets).

datasheet.
See also Prescribed node displacement data.
431

This tool allows you to graphically apply force and moment concentrated loads to
members. Member loads can be referenced to the global or local axes systems and
can be positioned anywhere along the member.
1. Select the members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
select "Concentrated Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Member Concentrated Loads Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the members you wish to load,
click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
them.
selected member individually (ie. one line of data for each member) or
applied as a group to all the selected members (ie. one line of data for all
the members). The advantage of the "group" selection is that you only have
to input one line of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the
selected members. This can be particularly useful if you are applying the
same load to a number of members. If you are inputting a different load on
each member then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
"individual" can also be useful if you are simply trying to see what loads
are already applied to the members you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member individually
then you can also choose between showing all the selected members or just
432
Graphical Input
probably choose to show all the selected members, whereas if you are
editing existing loads or just viewing loads then showing just the loaded
members may be preferable.
also Datasheets).

datasheet.
You can apply more than one concentrated load to
the same member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load
number for each different member concentrated load.
See also Member concentrated load data.
433

This tool allows you to graphically apply distributed forces to members. Member
loads can be referenced to the global or local axes systems and can be positioned to
start and finish anywhere along the member. They can be uniformly distributed or
linearly varying along the member.
select "Distributed Forces" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Member Distributed Forces Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the members you wish to load,
click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
them.
434
Graphical Input
also Datasheets).

datasheet.
You can apply more than one distributed force to
the same member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load
number for each different member distributed force. This allows you to apply
"stepped" distributed forces along a member without having to resort to
intermediate nodes.
435

See also Member distributed force data.
436
Graphical Input

This tool allows you to graphically apply distributed torsions to members. Member
distributed torsion loads are always referenced to the local axes system and can be
positioned to start and finish anywhere along the member. They can be uniformly
distributed or linearly varying along the member.
select "Distributed Torsions" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Member Distributed Torsions - Graphical" from the Loads menu,
select the members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
click Ok.
them.
437

also Datasheets).

datasheet.
You can apply more than one distributed torsion
to the same member within the same load case by specifying a different sub-load
number for each different member distributed torsion. This allows you to apply
438
Graphical Input
"stepped" distributed torsions along a member without having to resort to
intermediate nodes.
See also Member distributed torsion data.
439
Thermal loads
This tool allows you to graphically apply thermal loads to members or plates.
1. Select the members or plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button
and then select "Thermal Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Thermal Loads - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select the
members or plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
click Ok.
them.
selected member or plate individually (ie. one line of data for each member
or plate) or applied as a group to all the selected members or plates (ie. one
line of data for all the members or plates). The advantage of the "group"
selection is that you only have to input one line of data in the datasheet to
have it applied to all the selected members or plates. This can be
particularly useful if you are applying the same load to a number of
members or plates. If you are inputting a different load on each member or
plate then you should choose the "individual" selection. Choosing
are already applied to the members or plates you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each member or plate
individually then you can also choose between showing all the selected
members or plates, or just the ones that are loaded. If you are inputting new
loads then you would probably choose to show all the selected members or
440
Graphical Input
plates, whereas if you are editing existing loads or just viewing loads then
showing just the loaded members or plates may be preferable.
also Datasheets).
441

datasheet.
See also Thermal load data.
442
Graphical Input

This tool allows you to graphically apply prestress loads to members.
select "Prestress Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Member Prestress Loads - Graphical" from the Loads menu, select
the members you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click
Ok.
them.
443

also Datasheets).

datasheet.
See also Member prestress data.
444
Graphical Input

This tool allows you to graphically apply pressure loads to plates. Plate pressure
loads can be referenced to the global or local axes systems.
1. Select the plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
select "Pressure Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Plate Pressure Loads - Graphical"
from the Loads menu, select the plates you wish to load, click the right
mouse button and then click Ok.
them.
selected plate individually (ie. one line of data for each plate) or applied as
a group to all the selected plates (ie. one line of data for all the plates). The
of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the selected plates. This can
be particularly useful if you are applying the same load to a number of
plates. If you are inputting a different load on each plate then you should
if you are simply trying to see what loads are already applied to the plates
you have selected.
If you have elected to show the loads applied to each plate individually
then you can also choose between showing all the selected plates or just
probably choose to show all the selected plates, whereas if you are editing
445

existing loads or just viewing loads then showing just the loaded plates
may be preferable.
also Datasheets).

datasheet.
See also Plate pressure data.
See also Varying plate pressure loads.
446
Graphical Input
Self weight
Self weight or self mass can be input into any load cases by simply specifying the
acceleration due to gravity in any of the three global axis directions.
You can open the self weight datasheet by clicking the
toolbar button or
selecting "Self Weight" from the Loads menu and then entering data into the
datasheet as explained in Self weight data.
447

Combination load cases combine existing load cases to allow analysis of a structure
with the interaction of different loads. Combination load cases are given a load
case number the same as any other load case.
You can open the combination load cases grid by clicking the
toolbar of the renderer as shown below.
button in the top
Existing combination load cases can be edited by typing into any cell. New
combination load cases can be added by typing into the blank line near the top of
the grid.
By hovering over a column heading or a cell in any row, information about the load
case will be displayed including its title (if one exists).
448
Graphical Input
Alternatively, if you right-click on a column heading or a cell in any row, you can
input or edit a load case's title.
If you have a large number of columns and you don't want to repeatedly scroll
sideways to get to the cells you need, you can condense the grid for any
combination load case by simply clicking the arrow to the left of the combination
load case you are interested in. You can then condense the grid for any other row
or you can revert back to the default sorting by clicking the * button near the topleft corner of the grid.
449
When creating combination load cases, if the columns you need are not included in
the grid, you can add them by clicking the "Add Columns" button near the top-right
corner of the grid and then listing the extra load cases required.

You can open the combination load cases datasheet by clicking the
button as shown below.
450
toolbar
Graphical Input
451
Load case titles

Load case titles allow you to describe your load cases so that they can be easily
identified. For each load case you can specify a short title and a longer description.
You can open the load case titles datasheet by selecting "Load Case Titles" from
the Loads menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Load case
title data.
Note that you can open a load case titles viewer from within the renderer that can
be left open while you work with other tools. For more information, refer to Load
case titles viewer.
452
Graphical Input
Lumped masses
This tool allows you to graphically apply lumped masses to nodes. Masses are
always referenced to the global axes system. You must apply some lumped masses
before a dynamic frequency analysis can be performed.
1. Select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
select "Lumped Masses" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Click the
toolbar button or select "Lumped Masses - Graphical" from
the Loads menu, select the nodes you wish to load, click the right mouse
button and then click Ok.
2. In the load case form that appears, if you are inputting new masses then
you would probably leave the load cases list field blank and specify the
load cases in the datasheet that follows. If you are editing masses then you
may also wish to leave the load cases list field blank unless there are a
large number of load cases and you want to restrict the datasheet to just
some of them.
You should then choose between showing the masses applied to each
selected node individually (ie. one line of data for each node) or applied as
a group to all the selected nodes (ie. one line of data for all the nodes). The
of data in the datasheet to have it applied to all the selected nodes. This can
be particularly useful if you are applying the same mass to a number of
nodes. If you are inputting a different mass on each node then you should
if you are simply trying to see what masses are already applied to the nodes
you have selected.
If you have elected to show the masses applied to each node individually
then you can also choose between showing all the selected nodes or just
the ones that are loaded. If you are inputting new masses then you would
453

probably choose to show all the selected nodes, whereas if you are editing
existing masses or just viewing masses then showing just the loaded nodes
may be preferable.
3. A datasheet then appears with any existing masses shown. You can add,
edit or delete masses and then click the Ok button to save any changes. The
also Datasheets).

datasheet.
Note that static loads can be converted to masses using the static load to mass
conversion tool in the renderer. For more information, refer to Static load to mass
conversion.
See also Lumped mass data.
454
Graphical Input
Static load to mass conversion

Static loads such as dead loads and live loads can be converted to masses if you
want to use them in a dynamic analysis and you don't want to re-enter them from
scratch as masses. You can select the "Static Load to Mass Conversion" option
from the Loads menu in the renderer to bring up the form below.
You can convert a number of static load cases at once by entering them as a list in
the "Static load case list" field. You must also enter a corresponding list of mass
load cases in the "Mass case list" field. They can have the same load case numbers
as the static loads, however for your own organizational purposes it is usually a
good idea to keep them separate.
It is usual to have the "Create mass in all three directions regardless of static load
direction" option ticked, as masses generally have inertia in all three directions. As
such, static loads that have components in more than one direction on a single
object are first resolved into the resultant direction and then converted to a single
mass. Alternatively, if the "Create mass in all three directions..." option is not
ticked then the masses will simply be placed in the same directions as their source
static loads.
If the "Delete masses in destination mass cases first" option is ticked then all
masses in the destination mass cases will be deleted first, otherwise they will be
added to.
455
Note that self weight static loads are not converted with this tool because self mass
can be generated automatically in the dynamic analysis. Note also that moments
and torsions are not converted to rotational masses.
456
Graphical Input
Spectral loads
Spectral loads must be defined for each load case that you wish to include in a
dynamic response analysis.
You can open the spectral loads datasheet by selecting "Spectral Load Data" from
the Loads menu and then entering data into the datasheet as explained in Spectral
load data.
Note that spectral curves can be created, imported or exported via the spectral
curve editor. For more information, refer to Spectral curve editor.
457
Area loads
One-way or two-way area loads can be generated by specifying a pressure that is
applied to a roof or a floor or any other set of members that can form closed or
open polygons. The pressure loads are converted to member distributed forces
calculated from the contributing area of each member. You can select many
members that form multiple open or closed areas and the area loading tool will
process them all at once.
458
Graphical Input
Two-way loads require closed areas formed by three or more perimeter members
and the generated member loads are based on the load surface spanning in two
directions, generally resulting in a mixture of uniform, triangular and trapezoidal
loads.
One-way loads don't require closed areas and the generated loads are based on the
load surface spanning in just one direction, resulting in uniformly distributed loads
if the supporting members are parallel, or trapezoidal if the supporting members
are not parallel.
After selecting the desired members to be loaded, right-click and then select
"Generate Area Loads" from the menu that appears.
459
460
Graphical Input
For one-way area loads, if you click the "View Dummy Members" button in the
one-way area loading form shown below, you can visually see the dummy
members that effectively "close" the open polygons on which the one-way loads
are based. Of course, the "dummy" members don't exist and don't attract any load.
"Projected" areas results in the loads being based on the projected areas normal to
the load direction, whereas "Actual" areas cause the generated loads to be based on
the actual areas regardless of the load direction.
The load direction can be parallel to one of the global axes or along any vector that
you specify. You can select the load direction vector graphically by clicking the
"Select Vector" button.
If the "Generate loads normal to area in general load direction" option is ticked
then the pressure is applied in the general load direction that you have specified,
but normal to each polygon. This is handy if you have a pitched roof and you want
to apply a generally vertical wind load that is normal to the roof on both sides of
the ridge.
461
The "Generate uniformly distributed forces only" option forces the pressure applied
to a polygon to be applied uniformly to each perimeter member rather than as
triangular or trapezoidal loads.
462
Graphical Input
Sea Loads
This tool lets you generate wave, ocean current, marine growth and buoyancy loads
on submerged structures in marine and offshore environments where these effects
impose significant loading on the affected structure.
The procedure for load calculation starts with the analysis of the wave by an
appropriate theory to determine the water particle velocities and accelerations at
various depths in the water body. The computed velocities and accelerations are
combined with any additional water current velocities (tidal, density current, storm
velocity, etc), marine growth loads and buoyancy loads for determining the
effective loading on individual structural elements. When combining wave and
water currents the Doppler effect of the current on the wave is automatically taken
into account.
Presently, Airy's linear wave theory and Stokes' 5th and 2nd order non-linear wave
theories are incorporated into this tool. Sea loads on the structure comprising drag
and inertia loading on individual structural members are computed using Morison's
equation. The formulation applies strictly to skeletal framed structures with slender
tubular members, but can also be applied to framed structures with non-tubular
members applying modified coefficients for drag and inertia. The tool is not
suitable for the computation of sea loads on large bodies such as vessels, shipshaped or boxed and/or plate structures where the length to effective diameter ratio
of any individual element is small.
The sea load generator uses the concept of "scenarios", each of which represents
the motion of a wave and generates multiple load cases that correspond with the
various positions of the wave. It is normal for a scenario to represent a full
wavelength, however you can reduce it to part of a wavelength by changing the
"Phase increment" and "Steps" variables so that their product is less than 360
degrees if desired.
The procedure is as follows:
1.
From within the renderer, select the members that are flooded, click the right
mouse button and then select "Generate Sea Loads" from the floating menu that
appears.
Note that all of the submerged members in your model will be loaded, regardless
of whether you select them or not. The members you select will indicate which of
them are to be regarded as "flooded". The unselected (non-flooded) members will
463

be subjected to buoyancy loads if they are tubular, whereas the selected (flooded)
members will not.
2.
464
In the sea load form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
requirements and then click the Ok button.
Graphical Input
General Parameters:
The following parameters are general in nature and apply to all the sea load cases.
Water depth
This is the depth of water above the mudline (or seabed).
Mudline level
The mudline level is essentially the seabed level. It is the level relative to the global
origin of the SPACE GASS model and is negative if the mudline is below the
SPACE GASS origin (the normal situation).
It may be prudent to set up your model so that its origin is at the waterline and
therefore Mudline level = - (Water depth). This also means that any "Levels" such
as the mudline level, marine growth levels or ocean current levels would always be
negative if below the waterline.
Water density
The normal density of water.
Kinematic viscosity
This varies with the water temperature. The default value is based on a water
temperature of 15 deg C.
465
Surface roughness
The surface roughness affects the drag of the water on the structure. The surface
roughness value you specify is only used on surfaces that have no marine growth.
For surfaces that have marine growth the surface roughness is taken as the marine
growth thickness up to a maximum of 50mm.
Member segments
The number of segments that a distributed load is broken into along a member to
simulate the curved profile of the applied load.
Marine growth load case
This is the load case that the self weight of the marine growth will go into. Because
marine growth doesn't change with waves or currents its self weight is put into its
own load case. You can the combine it with the wave and current load cases using
combination load cases in the normal way.
CDM parameters
These are the drag (CD), inertia (CM) and lift coefficients that are used in the sea
load calculations on submerged members. Guidance for selection of these
parameters is available in various code standards including API RP 2A. In the
absence of any other information you could consider using CD=0.65 & CM=1.60
for clean tubular members or CD=1.05 & CM=1.20 for fouled tubular members.
Values of CD and CM for other cross section types may be obtained from
international codes and standards including DnV codes.
The "Smooth" coefficients are used if k/D <= 0.0001, the "Rough" coefficients are
used if k/D >= 0.01 and an interpolation between the "Smooth" and "Rough"
coefficients are used if 0.0001 < k/D < 0.0, where k is the surface roughness and D
is the largest dimension or diameter of the member.
466
Graphical Input
Marine growth parameters
Any structural element submerged in water will have marine growth developed on
its wetted surfaces. Such growth effectively increases the element's exposed area to
waves which in turn attracts higher wave loading. For this reason the marine
growth parameters applicable to the region where the structure is located needs to
be considered in the sea load analysis.
At least two lines of marine growth data are required, with the marine growth only
occurring between the levels and not outside them. If the thickness or density is
different in adjacent levels then they are assumed to vary linearly between the
levels. Marine growth levels are relative to the SPACE GASS origin and are
negative if the location is below the origin.
Scenarios
Each scenario represents the motion of a wave and normally covers a full
wavelength. If the "Selection Criterion" is set to "None" then multiple load cases
representing the various positions of the wave are generated for each scenario. If
the "Selection Criterion" is set to "Maximum overturning moment" or "Maximum
base shear" then only one load case will be generated for each scenario. You can
specify multiple scenarios, each with its own direction and load case(s).
467
The following parameters are scenario specific.
Load case / Starting load case

This is the first of the load cases that will be generated for the current
scenario. If the Selection Criterion is set to None then the last load case
for the scenario = Starting load case + Steps 1, otherwise there is only
one load case per scenario.
468
Graphical Input
Still water depth

Is based on the general water depth, but also includes any tide and/or storm surge at
the time of occurrence of waves. It cannot be less than the general water depth.
Wave kinematics factor
Guidance for selection of the wave kinematics factor is available in various code
standards including API RP 2A. In the absence of any other information you could
consider using 0.85 to 0.95 for extreme cyclonic or storm waves, or 1.00 for
normal operating and fatigue waves.
Wave height
The wave height is the vertical distance between the wave crest and the trough.
Wave period
The wave period is the time it takes for the wave to travel through one wavelength
(ie. the distance between consecutive wave crests) relative to a stationary point.
The sea load output also reports the "Apparent Period", which is the wave period
relative to a point travelling with the current (if a current exists). A current in the
wave direction tends to stretch the wavelength and increases the apparent period,
while an opposing current shortens them. This is the Doppler effect of the current
on the wave.
Start phase and phase increment
Sea loading on a marine structure varies continuously as the wave passes through
the structure with the maximum loading occurring at a specific position of the
wave with respect to the structure. To determine the maximum loading, the wave is
simulated to pass through the structure beginning with the start phase position and
stepping the wave at the specified phase increment. A phase of 0 degrees
corresponds with the wave crest at the origin (ie. the 0,0,0 position) of your model.
360 degrees is equivalent to one wavelength.
Steps
This is the number of phase increment steps considered during the
analysis. End phase = Start phase + (Steps x Phase increment). If the
Selection Criterion is set to None then the number of load cases
generated for a scenario is equal to the number of steps, otherwise there is
just one load case per scenario.
Wave theory
Selection of the wave theory for analysis of any wave depends on the wave
parameters and the water depth. A general guidance for selection of the wave
469

theory can be obtained from the American Petroleum Institute's Recommended
Practice API RP 2A. In the absence of other information the following could be
considered as a rough guideline:
if 0.000 <= H/(g.T^2) <= 0.001 and 0.01 <= d/(g.T^2) <= 0.2 then select Airy's
linear theory
if 0.001 <= H/(g.T^2) <= 0.02 and 0.005 <= d/(g.T^2) <= 0.2 then select Stokes'
5th Order non-linear theory
where H = wave height, d = still water depth, T = wave period and g = gravitational
acceleration.
Selection criterion
Sea loading on the structure is evaluated at each position of the wave as it passes
through the structure and, depending on the "Selection criterion" specified in the
form, the critical position is selected as the position of the wave that results in the
maximum base shear or the maximum overturning moment at the mudline. If set to
"None" then a load case is generated at each wave position and no attempt is made
to determine the critical one.
Note that the base shear and overturning moment calculations are based on the
horizontal wave and current loads only and exclude any vertical loads from
buoyancy, self weight, marine growth or other applied loads.
Wave and current direction
These are the directions of the approaching wave and water current relative to the
global X-axis. Direction angles are positive anti-clockwise from global X when
viewed in plan.
Ocean currents
Currents occurring simultaneously with waves significantly influence the total sea
loading and need to be considered in the analysis. Current profiles should be input
for each scenario. They are combined with the wave velocities determined by the
wave analysis before Morison's equation is applied.
At least two lines of ocean current data are required, with the currents only
occurring between the levels and not outside them. If the current is different in
adjacent levels then it is assumed to vary linearly between the levels. Ocean current
levels are relative to the SPACE GASS origin and are negative if the location is
below the origin.
470
Graphical Input
The "Blockage Factor" controls how much the current stream in the vicinity of the
structure is reduced from the specified "free stream" value by blockage. In other
words, the presence of the structure causes the incident flow to diverge. Some of
the incident flow goes around the structure rather than through it, and the current
speed within the structure is reduced. Blockage factors ranging from 0.7 to 1.0 are
typical, with 1.0 representing no blockage.
Doppler effect
When waves and currents occur together, an "Apparent Period" relative to the
current is determined, accounting for the Doppler effect of the current on the wave.
A current in the wave direction tends to stretch the wavelength and increases the
apparent period, while an opposing current shortens them. The apparent wave
period is determined from API RP 2A Figure 2.3.1-2 if -0.015 <= V/gT <= 0.025,
where V is the current component in the wave direction, g is the acceleration due to
gravity and T is the actual wave period relative to a stationary point. If V/gT is
outside of the above mentioned limits then a warning is issued and the results may
not be accurate.
471
Moving loads
This tool in the renderer lets you automatically generate loads on a structure that
model moving vehicles, cranes or other moving load sources. Each moving load
scenario can contain one or more vehicles with multiple wheels travelling along
paths that consist of straight and/or curved segments. You can also specify the
speed, initial delay, time interval and load factor for each vehicle.
Overview
Moving loads are simply a set of load cases that contain vehicle loads that are in a
different position in each successive load case. If you view the load cases one after
another, it gives the appearance of the loads moving along the model. The Moving
Loads tool simply generates these load cases.
In order to proceed, you must first create a scenario that contains the set of load
cases to be generated. The scenario has a name, a starting load case number and a
time interval that represents the time between successive load cases.
You must then add one or more vehicles to the scenario, each of which contains a
set of wheels (with their positions and loads), a travel path (which determines
where the vehicle travels), a speed, a delay and a load factor (which is applied to all
of the vehicle's wheel loads). Vehicles are imported into the scenario from libraries
of standard and custom vehicles. A vehicle's travel path can go in any direction and
around corners or along an arc. The vehicle's speed multiplied by the scenario's
time interval equals the distance travelled by the vehicle in successive load cases.
You can add more than one vehicle to a scenario, in which case each vehicle moves
along its own travel path at its own speed with whatever initial delay you specify.
When the Moving Loads tool generates the load cases for a scenario, it calculates
the position of each vehicle along its travel path for each time interval and then
distributes the loads from each wheel onto the members that support it. Each wheel
of a vehicle is active if it is within the ends of the vehicle's travel path and within
the loading area that you can specify. Wheel loads are applied only to the members
you have selected, as member concentrated loads or node loads.
At any time after creating a scenario, you can produce an animated view of the
wheels moving along your model. After the loads have been generated, you can use
472
Graphical Input
the keyboard PageUp/Dn keys to scroll through the load cases and see the loads
moving across your model.
Normally only one scenario is required, however you can create multiple scenarios
if you wish to model different situations such as different combinations of vehicles
moving along a bridge.
The Moving Loads tool does not generate loads from static sources such as
bridge lane loads. They must be input using the normal load input tools in SPACE
GASS. The Moving Loads tool has facilities for combining static load cases with
the generated moving load cases.
Procedure
To operate the moving loads tool, from within the renderer select all the members
in your model that directly support the moving vehicles wheels, click the right
mouse button and then select "Generate Moving Loads" from the menu that
appears. Alternatively, you can click the moving load button (shown below) from
the renderer's top toolbar and select the "Generate Moving Loads" option.
If you havent previously defined any moving load data for this job, the following
form appears.
473
This form lets you quickly define the data for an initial scenario. After you have
clicked the Ok button, you can proceed to add vehicles to the scenario or you can
define additional scenarios.
Scenarios
A scenario is a collection of vehicles that move across the structure in steps defined
by the scenario time interval. You will commonly need just one scenario, however
you can have multiple scenarios if required, each with its own set of load cases,
time interval, vehicles and travel paths. For example, a two-lane bridge model
could have scenario 1 with the heaviest vehicle in lane 1 and the lightest vehicle in
lane 2, while scenario 2 could have the heaviest vehicle in lane 2 and the lightest
vehicle in lane 1.
A set of load cases is created for each scenario, beginning at the starting load case
specified for that scenario and incremented by 1 for each time interval. The total
number of load cases depends on how long it takes for all vehicles in the scenario
to reach the end of their travel paths.
You can add a new scenario, delete a scenario or edit the properties of a scenario
by clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the travel paths form (see
below). Alternatively, you can right-click on "Scenarios" or on the scenario name
474
Graphical Input
in the tree at the left-hand side of the form and then select the appropriate item
from the floating menu to add, delete or edit a scenario.
If you have more than one scenario, ensure that the load cases do not
overlap between scenarios. If this happens, it will be detected by SPACE GASS and
the moving load generation will not proceed.
Combining scenarios with other static load cases

The load cases generated for a scenario can be combined with other static load
cases using the grid section at the bottom of the scenario properties form. This is
necessary when the moving loads need to be combined with other load cases such
as dead loads, live loads, lane loads, etc.
For example, in the above form, the scenario 1 moving loads will be combined
with static load case 9 to form a set of combination load cases starting at load case
100. A further set of combination load cases starting at 200 will combine the
scenario 1 load cases (factored by 0.9) with static load case 6.
475

You can see this has the potential to generate a huge number of load cases and you
may, therefore, need to increase the "Maximum load cases" value via the "Problem
size limits" item of the Config menu.
If you need to combine a scenario with more than one static primary or
combination load case, simply create a combination load case that combines the
primary and combination load cases into a new combination load case first and
then combine the scenario with that new combination load case. Remember that
combination load cases can be combined into further combinations up to four
levels deep.
Combining scenarios with other load cases increases the risk of overwriting
existing load cases and having load case clashes due to overlapping of load cases
between scenarios and combinations. SPACE GASS checks for these occurrences
and prevents the load generation from proceeding if any problems are detected.
Vehicles
To add vehicles to a scenario, click the "Add Vehicle" button at the bottom of the
main moving loads form and then click the vehicle library
button to select a
vehicle from a vehicle library. For each vehicle you must also specify a speed, a
delay, a load factor and a travel path.
476
Graphical Input
The vehicle speed, combined with the scenario time interval, determines the
distance between vehicle positions in successive load cases. If a delay is specified,
the vehicle doesnt move or have its wheel loads applied to the structure until the
end of the delay period.
The load factor is applied to all wheel loads in the vehicle. It can be used, for
example, where a load reduction is allowed when multiple roadway lanes are
loaded simultaneously.
In order to model a reversing vehicle, you should specify a negative speed. In this
case, the vehicle will still move along the travel path starting from the same end,
but will be moving in reverse.
The vehicle datum, which coincides with the front-center of the vehicle, is the
point on the vehicle that tracks along the travel path.
You can add a new vehicle, delete a vehicle or edit the properties of a vehicle by
clicking the appropriate button at the bottom of the main moving loads form (see
below). Alternatively, you can click the right mouse button on a scenario or a
477

vehicle name in the tree at the left-hand side of the form and then select the
appropriate item from the floating menu to add, delete or edit a vehicle.
Travel paths
The travel path for each vehicle consists of one or more segments between stations
that can be positioned in a number of ways. The travel path stations can be defined
by node numbers, coordinates or node numbers offset by coordinates.
A segment is assumed to be straight unless you specify a radius, in which case the
curve is applied to the segment between the station that has the radius and the
previous station. For example, if you have just two stations and wish to have a
curved travel path between them, you would specify the radius at the second
station.
A curved travel path follows the shortest arc between the ends of the segment in a
clockwise direction when looking from above. If you use a negative radius then the
travel path will follow an anti-clockwise direction.
A travel path can go in any direction across your structure, regardless of where the
nodes and members are located. Travel paths do not need to be lined up with
members in the structure. Travel path stations are only required at the two ends of
the travel path and at changes in direction or radius.
Note that the vertical coordinate in the travel path has no effect on the generated
loads and is only used for visual purposes when viewing the animated vehicle's
movement (see below).
478
Graphical Input
For example, the travel path shown in the above form follows a straight line offset
8.1m sideways in the Z-axis direction from the line connecting nodes 1 and 9. If
you have many travel path stations, you can change their order by using the
promote (up arrow) and demote (down arrow) buttons on the right-hand side of the
form. You can select a travel path graphically by clicking the "Select Path" button.
Normally, you have to specify the travel path for each vehicle, however for simple
structures such as beams or monorails, the first vehicles travel path will default to
the beam or monorail nodes when you define moving load data for the first time. In
this case, all of the intermediate nodes will be included even though intermediate
stations are not required except at changes in direction.
Animated vehicle view

You can also create an animated view of a vehicle's wheels moving along the travel
path by clicking the "View Path" button in the main moving loads form. You can
then set the animation speed and other parameters in the form shown below before
clicking Ok to start the animation. Note that you can pause the animation at any
time by pressing the space bar or you can cancel it by clicking the Esc key.
479
Loading area limits

Each wheel in a vehicle is active while it is between normals that extend from the
two ends of the travel path for that vehicle. It is possible, however, that you may
want wheels to become inactive at certain times even though they are still within
the extents of the travel path. For example, if a wheel moves off the side of a
bridge or move off the end of a skew bridge, you may want it to become inactive
before it reaches the end of its travel path. You can achieve this by clicking the
"Ignore wheel that transfer the load to just one member" option in the main moving
480
Graphical Input
loads form. This has the effect of ignoring wheels that would have their load
distributed to just one member unless the wheel is directly on that one member. It
solves the problem of deactivating wheels that move off the structure in most cases.
For situations in which the above option is not suitable, you can specify a polygon
that defines a loading area. Wheels that are outside of the loading area are treated
as inactive. You can define the loading area graphically by clicking the
"Define/View Loading Area" button in the main moving loads form and then
selecting points around your model that represent the limits of the loading area.
The loading area as displayed ignores the height of the points you select and is
drawn at the topmost level of the members being loaded as shown below.
Load distribution
Wheel loads are applied only to the members that are selected graphically.
Members that are not selected graphically will not have any wheel loads applied
directly to them. For example, for a bridge design, it would be normal to select all
of the members in the bridge deck that directly support the roadway surface and not
the members lower down that are not directly subjected to the wheel loads.
For a wheel that is positioned exactly on a member, its load is applied directly to
that member. If the wheel is exactly positioned on a number of members then the
load is shared equally between them. For a wheel that is not positioned exactly on a
member, its load is distributed onto the adjacent members in inverse proportion to
the closest distance between the member and the wheel.
481

If the "Apply wheel loads to closest member only" option is selected in the main
moving loads form then each wheel load will be applied only to the member that is
closest to it rather than to all the members adjacent to the wheel.
Load generation
Once you have specified all the required vehicles and their travel paths, you should
click the Ok button to initiate the load generation. You can then use the keyboard
PageUp/Dn keys to scroll through the load cases and see the generated loads
moving across your structure.
Load cases
All primary and combination load cases generated with the moving loads module
are given load case titles that reflect their properties. Each title includes a heading
and a notes field. Please ensure that you dont edit or delete the notes field as it is
the means by which the program keeps track of which load cases belong to which
scenario.
Vehicle libraries
The vehicle libraries contain all of the standard vehicles for a number of countries
and these can be used whenever standard vehicle types are required. You can also
create your own custom libraries containing custom vehicles with any arrangement
of wheel positions and loads.
You can access the vehicle library by clicking the
properties form.
482
button in the vehicle
Graphical Input
You cant modify any of the standard libraries, however you can create your own
custom vehicle libraries to which your own vehicles can then be added. You can
create a custom library by clicking the "Add Library" button at the bottom of the
above form. Alternatively, you can click the right mouse button on "Vehicle
Libraries" in the tree of the form and then select "Add Library" from the floating
menu.
You can create a custom vehicle by clicking the "Add Vehicle" button at the
bottom of the above form. Alternatively, you can click the right mouse button on a
custom library name in the tree of the form and then select "Add Vehicle" from the
floating menu.
Envelopes
After the job has been analysed, you can display bending moment or shear force
envelopes by clicking the "Selected Load Cases" item in the load cases combo box
in the top toolbar and then typing in the range of load cases that have just been
generated for a scenario. For example, if load cases 1 to 35 were generated, you
should type 1-35 into the load cases field. Note that this may not always be
necessary as the load cases field is automatically set by SPACE GASS for the first
scenario whenever moving loads are generated.
483
On the side toolbar, you should then ensure that the envelope button
depressed and the desired bending moment
is depressed.
484
or shear force
is
diagram button
Graphical Input
Varying plate pressure loads

For retaining structures such as tanks or retaining walls, or structures subjected to
other variable pressure distributions from wind and the like, the resulting pressure
loads on plates can be generated using this tool. The pressure variation can be
linear or based on an equation that you specify.
The tool works by you defining the pressure variation and a "load axis" along
which the pressure distribution is defined. The pressure is then projected normal to
the load axis onto each plate that you have selected.
The lateral position of each plate relative to the load axis is not important. For
example, a plate a long way from the load axis will get the same pressure as a plate
close to it. Similarly, a plate on one side of the load axis will get the same pressure
as a plate on the other side.
For calculating the pressure on the walls of tanks or retaining structures, the load
axis would normally be vertical and the pressure on a plate with its centre at height
h would be the same as the pressure on the load axis at height h.
For other structures, such as a distribution of wind loads applied to a roof, it might
be more convenient to have the load axis horizontal or maybe even parallel to the
roof slope.
Plates that are beyond the ends of the load axis are not loaded. For example, if you
have a tank that is 4m high and the load axis extends from the base of the tank
vertically up to the 3m mark, the plates in the top 1m of the tank walls will not be
loaded.
485
Load Axis and Pressure Distribution
486
Graphical Input
Resulting Pressure Applied to the Plates
If the pressure variation is defined by an equation, the equation must have "x" as
the variable representing the distance along the load axis and can include any of the
operators "+", "-", "*", "/", "\, "%" and "^". It can also include any of the functions
sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan, sqrt, factorial, abs, log, ln and exp.
For example, the pressure on the walls of a bulk solids container could be
represented by the equation Pressure = rc(1-e(-z/z0))/, where, for a typical coal
container could have values of =10.8, rc=0.88, z0=4.03 and =0.62.
This could be entered into the SPACE GASS equation field as
10.8*0.88*(1-exp(-x/4.03))/0.62, where "x" is the distance along the load axis and represents
"z" in the original equation.
487

1. Select the plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then
select "Varying Pressure Loads" from the floating menu that appears.
OR
Select "Varying Plate Pressure Loads" from the Loads menu, select the
plates you wish to load, click the right mouse button and then click Ok.
2. Pick two points that represent the load axis along which the pressure
variation will be distributed.
Remember that when picking points, you can use the mouse or you can
simply type in the coordinates of the desired point(s). For more
information, see "Using the keyboard to position points".
3. In the form that appears (as follows), change the data to suit your
requirements and then click the Ok button.
The load variation can be linear for cases such as tanks subjected to
hydrostatic loads or, for more complex profiles, can be defined by an
equation that you specify as explained above.
If you specify "Local" axes then the pressure load will be applied in the
488
Graphical Input
local z-axis direction (ie. normal to the plane of the plate). If you specify
"Global" axes then you must also specify a global XYZ vector that
represents the direction of the pressure load.
4. The pressure loads are then calculated and applied to the selected plates.
5. Select more plates to load, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit
from the tool.
See also Plate pressure data.
489
Copy node loads

The Copy Node Loads tool lets you copy loads, prescribed displacements and
lumped masses from a loaded node to a selection of destination nodes.
After selecting the destination nodes, right-click and select "Copy Node Loads"
from the menu that appears. You should then click the source node, followed by
specifying the load cases that the loads are to be copied from in the form shown
below.
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination nodes for the specified load
cases" option then all pre-existing node loads, prescribed displacements and
lumped masses on the selected destination nodes contained within the selected load
cases will be deleted first. If it is unticked then the loads being copied will be
added to the pre-existing loads.

source node, right-click and select "Copy Node Loads" from the menu that appears.
You should then select the destination nodes, right-click and then select Ok to have
the loads copied. All pre-existing node loads, prescribed displacements and lumped
masses on the selected destination nodes contained within the selected load cases
will be deleted and replaced by the copied loads.
490
Graphical Input
Copy member loads

The Copy Node Loads tool lets you copy loads from a loaded member to a
selection of destination members.
After selecting the destination members, right-click and select "Copy Member
Loads" from the menu that appears. You should then click the source member,
followed by specifying the load cases that the loads are to be copied from in the
form shown below.
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination members for the specified
load cases" option then all pre-existing member loads on the selected destination
members contained within the selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is
unticked then the loads being copied will be added to the pre-existing loads.

source member, right-click and select "Copy Member Loads" from the menu that
appears. You should then select the destination members, right-click and then
select Ok to have the loads copied. All pre-existing member loads on the selected
destination members contained within the selected load cases will be deleted and
replaced by the copied loads.
491
Copy plate loads

The Copy Plate Loads tool lets you copy loads from a loaded plate to a selection of
destination plates.
After selecting the destination plates, right-click and select "Copy Plate Loads"
from the menu that appears. You should then click the source plate, followed by
specifying the load cases that the loads are to be copied from in the form shown
below.
If you tick the "Delete and replace loads on destination plates for the specified load
cases" option then all pre-existing plate loads on the selected destination plates
contained within the selected load cases will be deleted first. If it is unticked then
the loads being copied will be added to the pre-existing loads.

source plate, right-click and select "Copy Plate Loads" from the menu that appears.
You should then select the destination plates, right-click and then select Ok to have
the loads copied. All pre-existing plate loads on the selected destination plates
contained within the selected load cases will be deleted and replaced by the copied
loads.
492
Graphical Input
Managing load cases

You can use the Manage Load Cases tool to copy, renumber or delete entire load
cases by clicking the
button in the top toolbar of the renderer.
When specifying the source load case list, you can either list them directly, or you
button to display and select from a list of the load cases
can click the
currently in the job as shown below.
493

You can use the Manage Load Cases tool to copy, renumber or delete one load case
at a time by clicking the
494
button in the traditional graphics window.
Graphical Input
View nodes / members / plates

You can show or hide nodes, members or plates by clicking the
,
or
toolbar buttons or selecting "Nodes", "Members" or "Plates" from the View menu.
If the nodes, members or plates are hidden then any tools that require nodes,
members or plates to be selected are suppressed. For example, if the nodes are
hidden then node loads cannot be input or edited graphically.
495
View node / member / plate properties

You can show graphical representations of node restraints, member hinges, master,
,
or
toolbar buttons or
slave constraints or offsets by clicking the
selecting "Node Restraints", "Member Hinges", "Master-Slave Constraints" or
"Offsets" from the View menu.
496
Graphical Input
View global origin

You can show the global origin by clicking the
(renderer) or
(traditional
graphics window) toolbar button or selecting "Global Origin" from the View menu.
497
View local axes

You can show the member and plate local axes by clicking the
or selecting "Local Axes" from the View menu.
498
toolbar button
Graphical Input
View member origins

It is often useful to be able to see at which end of a member is its origin, as it
affects the placement of member fixities, offsets, loads, etc. You can show the
member origins (shown in red below) by clicking the
toolbar of the renderer.
button in the bottom
Note that you can reverse the direction of members using the Reverse member
direction tool.
499
View labelling and annotation

You can show various text labelling and annotation options by clicking the
button in the bottom toolbar of the renderer. Once you have selected or de-selected
the desired labelling items you must click anywhere in the graphics area to have the
labelling change applied.
Clicking the "Labelling Preferences" item takes you to the following form from
where you can change colors, formatting, etc.
500
Graphical Input

You can show various text labelling and annotation options by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Labelling and Annotation" from the View menu or the
floating menu.
501
Load case titles viewer

The load case titles viewer can be opened from within the renderer by clicking the
. The viewer stays open until you close it or
load case titles viewer button
change jobs. It is a handy means of seeing the details of your load cases while you
are working with other tools.
button next to them.

Note that many of the load case input fields have a
Clicking this button also lets you see which load cases exist in your job, plus you
can select from the displayed list.
502
Graphical Input
Load case titles can be input via the load case titles datasheet from within the
traditional graphics window. For more information refer to Load case titles.
You can also input/edit load case titles via the combination load cases grid in the
renderer by right-clicking a column heading or a cell in the first column.
503
View results in local XY or XZ plane

You can restrict the bending moment, shear force or stress diagrams to either or
both of the members local XY or XZ planes by clicking one of the
or
toolbar buttons or selecting "Results in Local XY Plane" or "Results in Local XZ
Plane" from the View menu.
504
Graphical Input
View diagrams
You can show loading diagrams, displacement diagrams, bending moment
diagrams, shear force diagrams, axial force diagrams, torsion diagrams, stress
diagrams and reactions by clicking the
,
,
,
,
,
,
or
toolbar buttons or selecting from the matching items in the View menu.
Diagrams of different types can be superimposed together. For example, it is
possible to include both bending moment and shear force diagrams together. In
addition, diagrams can be toggled on and off by clicking the button repeatedly.
505
View plate contours

You can use the 3D renderer to show colored contour diagrams for plate forces,
moments and stresses by clicking the
Contours" from the View menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Plate
The following form allows you to select the type of contour diagram you wish to
display as well as specifying its smoothing, color and labelling settings.
If contour smoothing is turned on then the contours appear as continuous color

gradients rather than a discrete color for each plate element.
Contour diagrams are generated from the force, moment and stress values at each
node. The value at a given node can be determined by simply averaging the values
506
Graphical Input
from each element that connects to it (non-weighted averaging) or the contribution
from each element can be weighted depending on how far the centre of the element
is from the node (weighted averaging).
For full details of the force, moment and stress contours that can be displayed, refer
to "Sign conventions".
The colors in a contour diagram can be changed by double-clicking any of the three
color icons and then selecting the desired color, or by clicking the "Color Picker"
button.
If you wish to display the full range of contour values, ensure that the "Full range"
option is ticked. If not, you can "zoom in" on a particular range of contour values
by unticking the "Full range" option and specifying upper and lower limits. Values
that fall within the upper and lower limits will be colored depending on where they
fall within the specified color spectrum, and any values that fall outside the limits
will be given the same color as values that fall on the upper and lower limits.
If you find that the contour diagram is predominantly showing the "middle" color,
you may be able to display more color detail by setting a narrower contour range.
Each plate can be labelled with its contour value if desired.
507
508
Graphical Input
View envelope
You can display an envelope of any currently displayed diagrams by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Envelope" from the View menu.
You can specify (a) just minimums, (b) just maximums, (c) both minimums and
maximums or (d) absolute maximums.
The load cases included in the envelope are the ones currently selected and
displayed in the load case selection combo box in the top toolbar. If you change the
load case selection then the envelope will be updated accordingly.
Envelopes of analysis results can also be obtained in output reports, including
envelopes that take their maximums and minimums from end A, end B or both
ends of a member. For more information, refer to Output
509
View dynamic mode shapes

After a dynamic frequency analysis, you can display animated mode shapes for all
the modes analysed by clicking the
Shapes" from the View menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Dynamic Mode
Once initiated, the following keyboard commands are available.

Operation
Display mode shapes 1 to 9
Display the next mode shape
Display the previous mode shape
Change to load case <case>
Change the display from animated to static
Change the display from static to animated
Increase the amplitude (scale)
Decrease the amplitude (scale)
Increase the frequency (speed)
Decrease the frequency (speed)
Keystrokes
1-9
Page down
Page up
C <case>
S
A
Right arrow
Left arrow
Up arrow
Down arrow
You can exit from the dynamic mode shapes commands by pressing ESC or the
right mouse button. This also causes any animation to stop and revert back to a
static display.
If you use REDRAW or any other tool which causes the graphics display
area to be regenerated while a dynamic mode shape is displayed, it will revert
back to an animated display, and the dynamic mode shapes commands will again
become active.
Some examples of mode shapes for a plane grid from the dynamic frequency
analysis module are shown following.
510
Graphical Input
1st dynamic mode shape for plane grid
4th dynamic mode shape for plane grid
511
View buckling mode shapes

After a buckling analysis, you can display the buckling mode shapes by clicking
the
toolbar button or selecting "Buckling Mode Shapes" from the View menu.
You can limit the number of buckling modes shown by defining a filter and
specifying a list of the buckling modes required.
For 2D models, it is a good idea to view the buckling mode shapes from a 3D
viewpoint so that any out-of-plane buckling modes can be observed.
512
Graphical Input
View steel member design groups

You can show steel member design groups as thick lines superimposed over the
analysis model by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Steel Member
Design Groups" from the View menu.
The groups are shown slightly shorter than their actual length so that you can easily
see where they start and finish.
To view the properties of a steel member design group you can simply click the
right mouse button on any part of a design group and then select "Steel Member
Design Input (Form)" from the floating menu. Note that this can be done regardless
of whether the groups are displayed or not.
See also Steel member design data
513
View steel member top flanges

It is important to know which is the top flange for steel members so that the
restraints you specify for the top and bottom flanges do not get mixed up. This tool
lets you display them as small triangles that touch the top flange of each analysis
member.
You can show the top flanges by clicking the
Member Top Flanges" from the View menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Steel
The top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top flange for
the first analysis member in the design group. Therefore, to find the top flange of a
design group you must look at just the first member in the group.
514
Graphical Input
View steel member flange restraints

If you are not sure where your steel design flange restraints are actually located
along the members, you can use this tool to show them graphically.
You can show the flange restraints by clicking the
"Steel Member Flange Restraints" from the View menu.
Displays all of the flange restraints that you have specified for each design group.
The flange restraints are shown adjacent to their location on the top and bottom
flanges.
515
View steel member design results

If a steel member design has been performed, this tool shows the design results
color coded for the various levels of load factor or stress ratio achieved.
You can view the design results by clicking the
"Steel Member Design Results" from the View menu.
The color divisions are chosen as follows.

Load Factors:
>= 2.00
>= 1.10
>= 1.00
< 1.00
< 0.90
< 0.50
Design error
Not designed
Stress Ratios:
<= 0.50
<= 0.90
<= 1.00
> 1.00
> 1.10
> 2.00
Design error
Not designed
(Pass)
(Pass)
(Pass)
(Fail)
(Fail)
(Fail)
You can change the colors by selecting "Graphics Colors" from the Config menu.
To view brief design result details of a steel member design group (see below) you
can simply click the right mouse button on any part of a design group and then
select "Steel Member Design Results" from the floating menu. You can then
simply click on other members to view their results. Note that this can be done
regardless of whether the design results are displayed or not.
516
Graphical Input
You can also use filters to restrict the display of members based on their design
results.
517
Query frame
You can query any node, member or plate in your model by simply double-clicking
on it.
Alternatively, you can do the query by clicking the
"Frame" from the Query menu.
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other nodes, members or
plates to have their attributes displayed.
For full details, refer to Node properties, Member properties or Plate properties.
518
Graphical Input
Query analysis results

You can query the analysis results graphically in either of two ways:
To click on a node, member or plate and get its analysis results in a
scrollable window
Click the
toolbar button or select "Analysis Results" from the Query menu or
click the "Results" button in the "Node Properties", "Member Properties" or "Plate
properties" forms.
The scrollable results form shown below displays a useful summary of the analysis
results for those nodes, members or plates you select.
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other nodes, members or
plates to have their results displayed.
To move a crosshair along a member and get its analysis results at
the crosshair location
Choose an item other than "Frame" and "Analysis Results" from the Query menu.
519

This method lets you nominate a load case and the number of intermediate member
stations as shown in the form as follows, followed by picking a member to query.
A crosshair cursor is then positioned at the node A end of the member and a line of
information near the bottom of the SPACE GASS window shows the analysis
results for the selected member at the crosshair location. You can then use the
keyboard arrow keys to move the crosshair cursor to any location on any member
in the frame, with the coincident analysis results being continuously updated and
reported in the information line.
To get a fully detailed analysis report, refer to Output.
520
Graphical Input
Query steel member design results

After a steel member design, you can query the design results by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Steel Member Design Results" from the Query menu.
The scrollable results form shown below displays a useful summary of the design
results for those members you select.
While the form is open, you can simply click on any other members to have their
design results displayed.
To get a fully detailed steel member design report, refer to Output.
521
Redraw
This tool is not applicable to the renderer, as the model is always kept up to date,
however in the traditional graphics window a redraw is sometimes required to
"clean-up" the image.
You can redraw the graphics display area with the same scale, viewpoint and
contents by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting "Redraw" from the View
menu or the floating menu.
The REDRAW facility can be useful for removing
stray lines or text which are sometimes left after a MOVE, COPY, ROTATE,
MIRROR or other graphics operation.
522
Graphical Input
Zoom
The Zoom tool allows you to zoom in or out on the entire structure or just a part of
it.
it around using the left or right mouse buttons as shown below. Alternatively, you
can press the right arrow key to "Zoom full" or the left arrow key to "Zoom
previous". You can also zoom in on a selection of nodes, members or plates by
selecting the desired items, right-clicking and then selecting "Zoom Selected" from
the menu that appears.

Zooming can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard arrow
keys as described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure
graphically, just use the mousewheel to zoom in or out. Alternatively, you can
zoom by clicking the
or the floating menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Zoom" from the View menu
There are four zoom modes as follows.

1. ZOOM full - redraws the entire structure at a scale that allows it to fit
comfortably on the screen.
2. ZOOM window - requires you to place a window around a portion of the
structure which it then enlarges and redraws to fill the screen.
523

3. ZOOM in/out - requires you to position the graphics cursor at the zoom
centre and then click the left mouse button to ZOOM in or the right mouse
button to ZOOM out.
4. ZOOM previous - reverts back to the previously displayed view.
If you have selected ZOOM Window, you can
revert to ZOOM Full or ZOOM Previous by pressing the keyboard F or P keys
while selecting the window.
524
Graphical Input
Pan
This tool allows you to move the structure in any direction on the screen. It is
useful if you cannot see the entire structure at once and you don't want to change
the scale. You simply move the structure until you can see the desired portion.

Panning can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard arrow
keys as described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure
graphically, just hold down the CTRL key and use the mousewheel to pan up or
down, or hold down the SHIFT key and use the mousewheel to pan left or right.
Alternatively, you can pan by clicking the
from the View menu or the floating menu.
toolbar button or selecting "Pan"
The sequence of operation is as follows.

1. Pick two points that represent the relative movement through which the
structure is to be panned across the screen.
2. The structure is redrawn at the new position.
The PAN operation does not change node coordinates, it simply translates
your viewpoint.
525
Scales
Parts of this tool are replicated in the renderer and in the traditional graphics
window.
The Scales tool allows you to change the scales of the undeformed frame or any of
the superimposed diagrams.
In the renderer you can change the scale of your model by zooming using the
mouse scrollwheel and you can change the scale of your loads (if they are
displayed) by clicking the load scales button
or the load auto-scaling button
in the top toolbar of the renderer. Alternatively, you can change the load
scale by holding down the L key while rotating the mouse scrollwheel.

Changing scales can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or keyboard
arrow keys as described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the structure
graphically, just use the mousewheel to zoom in or out, or hold down the M key
and use the mousewheel to change the scale of a displayed bending moment
diagram, etc.
Alternatively, you can change scales by clicking the
toolbar button or
selecting "Scale" from the View menu or the floating menu.
All scales initially default to values that allow the diagrams to fit neatly into the
available graphics display area. If you change any of the scales, they are retained
with the job.
526
Graphical Input
The "Displacements factor" and "Buckling mode factor" settings are

distortion factors rather than scales. Increasing their values causes the relevant
diagrams to increase in size. Increasing any of the other "Scale" settings causes the
relevant diagrams to be reduced in size.
527
Find
You can use the Find tool to quickly locate nodes, members or plates in your model
by clicking the
toolbar button.
In the renderer you can also find all the members or plates with a particular section
or material by clicking the desired section or material in its property panel and then
having all the matching members or plates selected.
528
Graphical Input
529
You can find nodes, members or plates by listing their numbers directly or by
specifying their properties or the nodes/members/plates to which they are
connected. Only those nodes, members or plates that satisfy all of the find criteria
in the form are found.
When a node, member or plate is found, it is highlighted graphically the same as if
you had selected it by picking it with the mouse. You can use the highlighting
simply as a visual reference to see where the found nodes, members or plates are in
your structure, or you can click a toolbar button or click the right mouse button and
choose from the floating menu that appears to perform an operation on the selected
nodes, members or plates. You can cancel the highlighting by pressing the
keyboard ESC key or by selecting "Cancel" from the floating menu.
530
Graphical Input
If you are searching for members of a certain

section or material, you can also just click the desired section or material in the
properties panel of the renderer to highlight all the members in your model that
use it.
After the Find tool highlights the nodes, members
or plates you are searching for, you can perform many graphics operations on
them by right-clicking and then selecting from the menu that appears.
531
Filters
The filter tool allows you to restrict the amount of data that is displayed in the
graphics display area or in output reports. You can use it to restrict the display to
specific nodes, node types, members, member types, plates, plate types, section
properties, material properties, load types, buckling modes, steel members, steel
connections, axis limits or any combinations of these.
To create a filter from nodes, members or plates selected graphically
Select some nodes, members or plates graphically by picking them or by using the
"Find" tool and then select "Create Filter" from the floating menu, after which the
following form appears.
To save the current selection as a filter, just click the combo box in the above form,
select a filter number and then type in the filters name. You can overwrite
previously saved filters or you can select and name an unused filter.
An alternative method of creating a filter from nodes, members or plates selected
graphically is to use the "Select" buttons in the main filters form as explained
below.
To create or edit filters
Click the
menu.
532
toolbar button or select "Filters" from the View menu or the floating
Graphical Input
For each filter you can select one or more check boxes and then specify the
corresponding items to be included in the filter. For example, if you specify a
member list of 1,2-6,9,10 and a section property list of 2,3, the filter will include
only those members in the specified list that use section properties 2 or 3. The more
check boxes you enable and corresponding items you specify, the more you limit
the nodes, members or plates that are included in the filter.
You can define up to 200 different filters and scroll between them in the form by
changing the "Filter" numeric field.
The Include/Exclude buttons simply reverse the effect of the items in the filter line.
For example, if you specify a node list of 2-5,9,13 and select "Include" then those
nodes will be included in the filter. However, if you select "Exclude" then all the
nodes except 2-5,9 and 13 will be included in the filter.
You can use the "Select" buttons in the "Nodes", "Members" and "Plates" lines to
graphically select or edit node, member and plate lists rather than having to type
them in manually. You can also use the "Select" buttons to graphically add to or
modify filters that were previously defined using other than node, member or plate
lists.
533
Filters can also be based on lists of steel design members or connections, or steel
member design results.
The "X-axis", "Y-axis", and "Z-axis" fields allow you to specify minimum and
maximum limits for one or more axis directions. You can enter ranges into the
fields manually or select them graphically by clicking their "Select" button. Any
parts of the frame which fall outside of these limits are excluded from the filter.
The "Grey out members not in filter" checkbox allows you to show in a faint line
or completely hide any members that are not included in the active filter.
To select and activate a filter
Click the "Filters" toolbar combo box
selection.
and make your
Scrolling through the filters can be most conveniently done using the keyboard
Ctrl+Page keys as described in Shortcuts.
534
Graphical Input
Views
This tool lets you save everything about the current graphics display including its
load case selections, filter selection, viewpoint, and any diagrams or node, member
or plate properties that might be shown.
This is fully explained in View manager.

To save the current display as a view or to manage the currently saved
views, click the
toolbar button or select "Views" from the View menu or
the floating menu. You must then select "Save the Current View" from the
floating menu that appears.
To save the current view, just click the combo box in the above form, select a view
number and then type in the views name. You can overwrite previously saved
views or you can select and name an unused view. You can save up to 100
different views.
To manage (delete, renumber or rename) previously saved views, click the
toolbar button or select "Views" from the View menu or the floating
menu. You must then select "Manage the Saved Views" from the floating
menu that appears.
535
To delete, renumber or rename any of the previously saved views, click the desired
view in the datasheet shown above and then delete or edit it as required.
To select and activate a view, click the "Views" toolbar combo box
and make your selection.
Scrolling through the saved views can be most conveniently done using the
keyboard Shift+Ctrl+Page keys as described in Shortcuts.
536
Graphical Input
Viewpoint
This tool allows you to rotate your viewpoint around the structure. You can obtain
an elevation from any side, a plan view or a view from any other position. In the
renderer you can also switch between orthographic and perspective viewing modes.
Rotate the viewpoint by holding down the left mouse button while moving the
mouse. An alternative to rotating the model by dragging it around directly is to
drag the view selector around. You can also click one of the view selector faces,
edges or corners to go straight to a specific viewpoint. If you click on the small
square attached to the front face it will take you to the 30,10 viewpoint.

Changing the viewpoint can be most conveniently done using the mousewheel or
keyboard arrow keys as described in "Shortcuts". For example, while viewing the
structure graphically, just hold down the H key and use the mousewheel to rotate
537

your viewpoint horizontally, or hold down the V key and use the mousewheel to
rotate your viewpoint vertically.
Alternatively, you can rotate your viewpoint by clicking the
toolbar button or
selecting "Viewpoint" from the View menu or the floating menu.
The current viewpoint setting is displayed near the top-right corner of the graphics
display area together with a small set of axes. You can watch the axes move as you
change the viewpoint or, by activating real-time structure rotation, you can also
watch the entire structure rotating as you change the viewpoint.
There are a number of ways to change the viewpoint as explained as follows.
1. Clicking the arrow buttons above the side toolbar buttons (as follows)
allows you to change the viewpoint quickly without having to first click on
any other buttons. After reaching the desired viewpoint, pick a point
anywhere inside the graphics display area to cause a redraw at the new
viewpoint.
2. Choosing "Viewpoint-View real-time" from the View menu or the floating

menu allows you to rotate the entire structure on the screen using the
keyboard arrow keys. After reaching the desired viewpoint, pick a point
anywhere inside the graphics display area to cause a redraw at the new
viewpoint.
3. Choosing one of the "View front/View plan/View (30,10)/etc." items after
clicking the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from the "Viewpoint" item of
the View menu or the floating menu causes the structure to be immediately
redrawn at the new viewpoint. The "(30,10)" item corresponds to a
horizontal angle of 30 and a vertical angle of 10. It is a useful viewpoint
for 3D structures.
4. Choosing "Select" after clicking the "Viewpoint" toolbar button or from
the "Viewpoint" item of the View menu or the floating menu causes the
following form to appear.
538
Graphical Input
You can change the viewpoint by editing the "Horizontal angle" and
"Vertical angle" text boxes directly, or you can click on one of the arrow
buttons at the bottom-left corner of the form. When using the arrow
buttons, the amount by which the viewpoint changes can be controlled by
setting the value in the "Angle increment" field.
Alternatively, you can click on one of the seven plane buttons which take
you immediately to a front, plan, left, (30,10), right, back or bottom
viewpoint.
SPACE GASS normally assumes that the global Y-axis is vertical when
displaying the structure graphically, however the viewpoint form allows
you to change the vertical axis to one of the other global axes.
The viewpoint settings (including the "Vertical axis" setting) only affect the
graphics display. They dont affect the local axis definitions, the steel design top
flange definitions, or the analysis and design modules in any way.
539
View manager
In the renderer you can save the current view for later recall by right-clicking
anywhere in the graphics area and then selecting "Save View" from the menu that
appears. The view is saved as soon as you enter a name and click Ok in the form
shown below.
The view manager (located in a panel on the right side of the renderer) lists all of
the saved views. You can recall a view by simply clicking on it in the View
Manager panel.
Note that the View Manager panel can be pinned open by clicking the button at the
top of the panel so that it changes to
,
indicating that the panel is not pinned and will slide closed as soon as you move
away from it. Note also that you can drag the View Manager panel away from the
side of the renderer and dock it to another location or you can just place it
anywhere on your screen.
540
Graphical Input
Notes
Notes can be attached to nodes, members or plates, or simply placed anywhere on
or near the model.
To add a note you can right-click anywhere in space or on a node, member or plate
and then select "Add Note" to bring up the following form. The form lets you set
the note's colors, leader length and location. When you click Ok the note appears
in the renderer. Notes are saved with the job and stay with the model unless you
delete them.
541
In order to move, edit or delete a note, you must open the Notes Editor via the
button in the bottom toolbar of the renderer as shown below. Notes can also be
hidden en-masse via the "Show notes" option in the renderer's View menu.
542
Graphical Input
543
Measurements and dimensions

The Measurement and Dimensioning tool in the renderer lets you measure
distances and angles between points that you select graphically or lengths and
orientations of members. You can also add dimensions to your model.
Measure
Right-click on a member, on a node or on any point away from your model and
then select "Measure/Dimension" in the menu that appears. Alternatively, you can
select two nodes or two other points, right-click and then select
"Measure/Dimension" or you can simply click the
button in the toolbar at the
bottom of the renderer. The form that appears below shows the actual distance (or
member length), the projected distances and the angles between the nodes, member
ends or points selected.
You can then continue to click other nodes, members or points on or around your
model and see the data updated in the form.
544
Graphical Input
Dimension
At any time while using the Measure tool, you can click the "Add Dimension'
button in the form to add a dimension to your model. If the dimension is not
exactly how you want it, you can experiment with the settings in the "Dimension"
part of the form to adjust it as required.
Dimensions can be updated or deleted by simply selecting them, right-clicking and
then selecting "Edit Dimension" or "Delete" from the menu that appears.
545
Don't forget that if you want to select a point that is not on a node or a member but
is lined up with one, you can simply hover over the node or member for a second
until you hear the "lock on" pop sound and you can then move away and still stay
lined up. This is handy if you want to add dimension lines some distance away
from a point such as with the "12m" dimension in the model shown above. In this
case you could click the node at the bottom of the column, hover over the apex
node until it "locks on" and then move back in line with the column staying lined
up with the apex node before clicking the second dimension point (see below). For
more information, see Attachment and alignment methods.
546
Graphical Input
Gridlines
Gridlines can be added to your model at any stage of its development. As well as
providing a visual reference, they can also be attached to when you are drawing or
editing your model.
Gridlines can be created, edited or turned on or off via the

button in the
renderer's bottom toolbar. You can simply enter the desired gridline tags, positions
and elevations into the appropriate tables of the form shown below. By entering
more than one line of data in the Elevations table you can have multiple sets of
gridlines at different elevations.
547
Gridlines can also be generated by clicking "Auto Generate Gridlines" buttons via
the form shown below.
548
Graphical Input
Textures
Textures can be applied to members and plates depending on their material. For
example, if the material name starts with "Steel" then the steel texture is used, or if
it starts with "Conc" then the concrete texture is used. Textures are also available
for aluminium, timber and brickwork. They can then be turned on or off via the
button in the toolbar at the bottom of the renderer.
Textures off
549
Textures on
550
Graphical Input
Transparency
When in rendered mode, the appearance of members and plates can be adjusted to
be fully or partially transparent by clicking the
the renderer.
in the toolbar at the bottom of
The transparency can then be adjusted by sliding the controls for members and or
plates followed by clicking anywhere in the graphics area of the renderer.
The following before and after images show how members and plates can be made
to look transparent.
551
552
Graphical Input
553
Repeat last command

By pressing the keyboard spacebar, you can repeat the last command. This can be
useful in situations where you need to repeat an operation a number of times.
554
Analysis
Analysis
SPACE GASS uses the well documented stiffness method combined with a
wavefront equation solver to model the elastic behaviour of structures. It is capable
of performing five types of analysis, as follows.
Linear (1st order) static analysis

Non-linear (2nd order) static analysis
Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS analysis modules can accurately deal with semi-rigid joints,
elastic supports, master-slave constraints, offsets, tension/compression-only
members, and cable members (static and buckling analysis only).
Although the wavefront method is not highly sensitive to badly numbered
structures, a wavefront optimizer which automatically minimizes the frontwidth is
also available with SPACE GASS. The wavefront optimizer means that both the
node, member and plate numbering sequences are incidental to the program.
SPACE GASS has been dimensioned dynamically. This means that during the
analysis phase SPACE GASS automatically adjusts its memory requirements
according to the size of the job. If the available memory in your computer is
enough to solve the structure entirely in memory then the analysis phase will be
extremely fast. If you run out of memory during an analysis then some of the
analysis data will be automatically written to disk and the analysis phase will not
be quite as fast. You should aim to have as much of the data as possible held in
memory during the analysis by minimizing the frontwidth or by increasing the
memory capacity of your computer.
555
Static analysis
The SPACE GASS static analysis module is capable of performing linear or nonlinear analyses. Furthermore, you can analyse some load cases linearly and others
non-linearly in the same model.
For non-linear analysis, SPACE GASS offers a choice of small, finite or large
displacement theories in its non-linear static analysis solver.
For cable members, SPACE GASS always uses a large displacement theory that
has been designed to cope with the highly non-linear behaviour and large
deflections that occur within cables (see also Cable members). For structures that
contain both cables and non-cable members, it is important to note that while the
large local cable deflections are allowed for in the analysis, the non-cable parts of
the structure are still analysed using small displacement theory.
The plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements only and therefore no P- or P-
effects are considered for them during a non-linear analysis.
Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes simple buckling
checks on individual members and on the frame as a whole, a full buckling analysis
is usually required in addition to the static analysis. If the buckling capacity of the
frame has been exceeded then the static analysis results are invalid and should not
used!
If the static analysis results are to be used for a steel design to AISC-LRFD,
Eurocode 3, AS4100 or NZS3404, the load cases used in the strength design must
be analysed non-linearly unless you know that the second order effects are
negligible.
The non-linear static analysis facility available with SPACE GASS considers
geometric non-linearities rather than material non-linearities.
Material non-linearities occur as a result of the non-linear stress-strain relationship
of most materials. This effect becomes more significant as the material reaches its
yield point and the stress-strain curve flattens out. SPACE GASS does not consider
material non-linearities because they are relatively insignificant in comparison with
geometric non-linearities and because their effect only becomes noticeable when
the material is highly stressed.
556
Analysis
There are many types of geometric non-linearities, some of which can be

significant and many of which are relatively insignificant. The most important
geometric non-linearities are:
P- effect
P- effect
Axial shortening effect
Tension/compression-only effect
Catenary cable effect
Some sources refer to the additional effects of shear deformations and rigid end
gussets as being geometric non-linearities also. While SPACE GASS fully
considers these additional effects during the analysis phase, it does not consider
them to be non-linearities because they can be solved directly in one analysis and
do not require an iterative procedure.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, no P- or P-

557
Displacements, actions and reactions

During the static analysis phase, there are three basic groups of data that have to be
calculated. They are node displacements, member and plate actions (forces and
moments) and support reactions.
Node displacements
Node displacements are calculated for each load case being analysed and for every
unrestrained degree of freedom in the structure. Each node may translate along or
rotate about any or all of the three global axis directions. Restrained (fixed or
deleted) degrees of freedom are automatically assigned displacements of zero
except for those nodes that have prescribed displacements specified. In such cases
those nodes are assigned the prescribed displacement only for the particular load
case in which they were specified.
Member actions
There are twelve forces and moments that can be calculated for each member. Each
end of a member is subjected to an axial force, a torsion, bending moments about
its y and z axes and shear forces along its y and z axes.
The program is also capable of calculating forces and moments at user defined
intermediate points along members. These intermediate values, however are not
calculated during the analysis phase. Instead they are calculated as required when
the output report is produced.
For more information, refer to Sign conventions.
Plate actions
Three forces and three moments are calculated for each plate node, making a total
of 18 actions per triangular plate and 24 actions per quadrilateral plate. Two axial
stresses, three shear stresses and three bending stresses are also calculated for each
plate.
These are later used to calculate the 17 different force, moment and stress values
for each plate that can be shown graphically as colored contours or included in text
reports.
For more information, refer to Sign conventions.
558
Analysis
Reactions
External node reactions are the forces and moments exerted by the structure on the
supports. They are calculated only for restrained nodes and are referenced by the
global axes system.
559
P-D effect
The P- effect occurs as a result of the ends of an axially loaded member moving
laterally with respect to each other. A moment of P. is induced which alters the
members equilibrium and causes the relative member end movement to change
further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the members critical buckling load, a point of
equilibrium eventually occurs such that the P- moment is balanced by moments
applied by other members or restraints.
The P- effect is not considered for plate elements.
560
Analysis
P-d effect
The P- effect occurs as a result of lateral curvature being induced in an axially
loaded member. A parabolic moment distribution is induced along the length of the
member which alters the members effective stiffness and causes the curvature to
change further.
P- effect
Unless the axial load P exceeds the members critical buckling load, a point of
equilibrium eventually occurs such that the P- moments are balanced by internal
flexural resistance built up within the member.
The P- effect is not considered for plate elements.
561
Tension-only and compression-only effects

While in tension, tension-only members act identically to normal members with
axial, flexural, torsional and shear capacity. However, if they go into compression
then they are automatically disabled and act as if they have been removed from the
model. Similarly, compression-only members act identically to normal members
unless they are disabled as a result of going into tension.
Although the solution of tension-only or compression-only members requires an
iterative analysis method, SPACE GASS puts it into a slightly different category to
the other non-linear effects and makes it available in either a linear or a non-linear
static analysis.
Unlike the P- and P- effects, tension-only and compression-only effects result in
an exact solution provided that convergence can be achieved.
For tension/compression-only effects, convergence is sometimes difficult (if not
impossible), especially if the frame is highly symmetrical. If convergence is not
achieved after three iterations, SPACE GASS relaxes the tension/compression-only
criteria slightly in an attempt to improve the chances of reaching convergence.
During the first three iterations SPACE GASS disables tension-only members
which have either end in compression. During iterations four and five it disables
tension-only members which have the average of their end forces in compression.
During the sixth and further iterations it disables tension-only members which have
both ends in compression. A similar procedure is followed for compression-only
members which have tensile forces at their ends.
If tension/compression-only effects have been activated with "No reversal" then
convergence is usually achieved after two or three iterations, even for highly
symmetrical structures. This "No reversal" method is not usually recommended,
however because it sometimes results in members being prematurely disabled and
then not being able to be re-enabled in later iterations after the axial forces have
been redistributed around the frame.
Tension/compression-only effects are ignored by the dynamic frequency

analysis module. No tension-only or compression-only members are disabled in a
dynamic frequency analysis, regardless of their axial force.
562
Analysis
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Tension-only members should not be used to model cables.
See also Members.
563
Cable members
The analysis of cable members requires special treatment because of their pure
axial capacity, large displacements and highly non-linear behaviour.
Cable members never actually go into compression, they simply sag or change
their shape so that they are in equilibrium at all times. They have no flexural,
torsional or shear capacity, and resist lateral loads by tension alone.
Cable loading
Cable members can be loaded with UDLs, thermal loads, prestress loads and self
weight. For "Local" or "Global projected" UDLs, the total load is equal to the load
per unit length multiplied by the actual (for "Local") or projected (for "Global
projected") distance between the end nodes. For "Global inclined" UDLs, the total
load is equal to the load per unit length multiplied by the unstrained cable length.
Cables must be loaded with at least one uniformly distributed load (self weight will
do) in every load case they are analysed for. If there is no UDL on a cable, SPACE
GASS will apply an artificial lateral UDL equal to one-tenth of the self-weight of
the cable. While this adds a non-existent load to the model, it is not likely to affect
the results significantly due to the small magnitude of the load.
Note that the procedure of converting cables without UDLs to tension-only
members in SPACE GASS 9.03 and earlier versions is no longer done.
Restraining nodes connected to cables
Cable members have zero moment capacity and must be assumed to be pin-ended
even if the end fixities are input as FFFFFF. This would normally cause rotational
instabilities in the nodes that are connected only to cables, however SPACE GASS
recognises this and automatically restrains these rotations if instabilities would
occur.
Cable convergence
Convergence is often a problem for structures which contain cables because of
their large deflections and highly non-linear behaviour. There are four recognized
methods for obtaining convergence.
1. One load step, many iterations, no damping.
2. One load step, many iterations, deflection related damping.
3. One load step, many iterations, damping with uniform relaxation.
4. Many load steps, one iteration per load step, no damping.
564
Analysis
All four methods give the same results for the same final convergence. Methods 1
and 2 are generally the fastest but they dont achieve convergence in all structures,
especially flexible structures. Methods 3 and 4 are more likely to achieve
convergence but sometimes require more iterations. For methods 3 and 4, the
number of iterations required is pre-defined by the number of relaxation steps or
load steps that you specify at the start of the analysis.
For each method, but methods 3 and 4 in particular, it is generally apparent after
only a few iterations whether convergence is going to be achieved or not. If the
convergence level is not steadily creeping upwards or has not reached about 60%
or 70% by 5 or 6 iterations then it is unlikely that convergence will be achieved. If
this happens, it is generally best to stop the analysis and then start it again with a
different method, or change the damping, or increase the number of load steps. For
example, using method 4, it is quite feasible that 50 load steps will converge where
40 load steps will not.
If you lower the convergence accuracy, the analysis may not converge
sufficiently and you risk getting incorrect results. It is particularly important that
you dont lower the convergence accuracy for highly non-linear structures such
as those that contain cables.
Cable prestress
The prestress load you apply to a cable is not likely to be the final axial force in the
cable at the end of the analysis. This is because the axial force changes as the cable
stretches or sags as its end nodes move. If you wish to achieve a particular axial
force at the end of the analysis then a trial and error process is required. This
involves setting an initial prestress force, performing the analysis, checking the
final axial force, adjusting the prestress and repeating the process until the desired
axial force is achieved. This is a common requirement in post-tensioned concrete
applications where the tendons are jacked to a known tension.
In some instances, you may wish to apply a
prestress load to a cable member instead of specifying a non-zero unstrained cable
length. The prestress load P that is equivalent to an unstrained cable length L is
given by the equation:
where
D = chord length,
565

A = cross sectional area,
E = Youngs modulus of elasticity.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
If cable members exist in your structure, it is imperative that you specify them as
"Cable" members in your SPACE GASS model. If you try to model them as
"Normal" or "Tension-only" members, the results will be incorrect.
See also Members.
566
Analysis
Non-linear analysis procedure

The procedure that SPACE GASS adopts to perform a non-linear static analysis is
as follows.
1. An initial linear static analysis is performed.
2. For each element in each load case, a modified stiffness matrix is
assembled.
For non-cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the deformation
of the structure and the member axial forces calculated in the previous
analysis iteration. The modifications to the stiffness matrix are in
accordance with the theory presented by Ghali and Neville (2) for small
displacement theory or the theory presented by Hancock (24) for finite and
large displacement theory. They involve changes to the axial and flexural
stiffness terms, taking into account P- P- and axial shortening effects (if
activated).
For cable members, the modified stiffness is based on the unstrained cable
length, the cable lateral loads and the deflected position of the cable ends
calculated in the previous analysis iteration.
For plate elements, the stiffness matrix is unchanged.
3. If P- effects are turned on with finite or large displacement theory, the
non-cable member fixed end actions are adjusted for the deformation of the
structure.
4. If P- effects are turned on, the non-cable member fixed end actions are
adjusted for the change in flexural stiffness of the member.
5. The frame is re-analysed with the modified member stiffness matrices. In
this and later analysis iterations, each load case must be solved separately
because the structure stiffness matrix is now different for each load case.
This can take considerably longer than the initial linear analysis, especially
if there are numerous load cases.
6. The results of the latest analysis are compared with the previous analysis
and the level of convergence is displayed on the screen. If the level of
convergence has reached the requested convergence accuracy then the
567

results have converged and the analysis terminates. If not, steps 2 and 3 are
repeated for the unconverged load cases until a solution is reached. If some
load cases have still not converged after the specified number of iterations
per load step then the program pauses and asks if further iterations are
required. If no further iterations are requested, the analysis terminates and
the results for the converged load cases only are saved.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, no P- or P-

568
Analysis
Static analysis buckling

Although a SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis does not perform a full
buckling analysis, it does include some buckling checks as described below. For
details of the capabilities of a full buckling analysis, refer to Buckling analysis.
1.
The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis includes a simple buckling check on
individual members that is intended to alert you if a member is being removed
from the model due to its Euler buckling load being exceeded. However, it is not a
full buckling check that considers groups of members or the structure as a whole.
A common misconception appears to be that if the static analysis passes this
simple single member buckling check then buckling is not a problem. Another
misconception is that if the simple buckling check fails, you can just subdivide the
buckled member until the error goes away and everything will be Ok. Clearly, this
doesn't fix the problem, it just transfers the buckling from a single member mode
to a multi-member mode that is no longer detected by the single member buckling
check. The only way to be sure that buckling is not a problem is to perform a full
buckling analysis.
2.
The SPACE GASS non-linear static analysis also includes a frame buckling check
that simply alerts you if the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded. This
will allow you to determine if the static analysis results are reliable or not, and
nothing more. It will not calculate member effective lengths or the buckling load
factor, and hence will not be able to alert you if buckling is close to happening.
Consequently, a full buckling analysis will still be required for most structures.
It is very important to note that the results of a static analysis will be incorrect if
the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded, and hence one of the key
roles of a buckling analysis is to ratify the static analysis results.
Although most practical structures do not come close to reaching their buckling
load, unless you know that your frame has not reached its buckling load, you
should perform a buckling analysis.
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements, they will not buckle
regardless of the load applied.
See also Buckling analysis.
569
The wavefront optimizer

The SPACE GASS wavefront optimizer temporarily re-organises the structure
during the analysis phase to achieve close to the smallest possible frontwidth with
the fastest possible analysis time.
The basic philosophy behind the optimizer is quite simple. It alters the order in
which members and plates are loaded into the stiffness array by starting at one end
of the structure and proceeding through it to the other end in one complete pass.
Depending on the operating mode selected, the optimization can follow an irregular
path, a straight line path or a circular path.
The optimizer usually reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of the optimum,
however some structures such as large cubes which do not have a well defined
"long dimension" can reduce its efficiency to almost 60%. Large cubic structures
therefore may require careful member and/or plate numbering if they produce
excessively large frontwidths.
If you have already numbered the members and plates to achieve the smallest
possible frontwidth then the optimizer will of course not have much effect. If,
however you have numbered the elements badly, the optimizer will probably have
a dramatic effect. The most noticeable effect will be the smaller analysis time
which is partly proportional to the frontwidth squared.
You can control the direction along which the optimization proceeds by selecting
the optimization mode at the start of the analysis. The various optimization mode
settings are described in the following sections.
Not activated
If the optimizer is not activated, the members and plates are loaded into the
stiffness array in the order that they are numbered. If they have been badly
numbered and the structure is large then excessive analysis times may result.
Auto mode
SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear" modes and then uses the
one that gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't add significant time to the analysis
and is the recommended setting.
General mode
SPACE GASS starts at the lowest numbered member or plate and then loads all of
the elements that are connected directly to it. It then takes each of the connected
570
Analysis
elements in turn and loads all of the elements that are connected to them. This
process continues until all elements in the structure have been loaded. This mode
results in very efficient frontwidths for most structures.
Linear mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure in a straight line
direction parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes or along a vector that you
specify. After you have specified linear mode, you must also nominate the axis or
vector along which optimization will proceed. This should generally be in the
direction of the long dimension of the structure.
Linear mode is ideally suited to long thin structures which have a well defined long
dimension. The "long dimension" of a structure is not necessarily the dimension
with the greatest length, rather it is defined such that if you make a cut through the
structure at right angles to the long dimension at its widest point, you will cut
through the least number of elements.
In the truss in the following diagram, the most efficient direction for the optimizer
to proceed is horizontally. This is because a cut at right angles to the horizontal
cuts through only four members.
Horizontal optimization
571
Vertical optimization
In the 2D multi-storey frame above, the most efficient direction for linear
optimization is vertical even though the frame height is less than the frame width.
Circular mode
This mode instructs the optimizer to proceed through the structure around an arc
with the axis of rotation parallel to one of the global X, Y or Z axes. After you have
specified circular mode, you must also nominate the axis about which optimization
will proceed, followed by the coordinates for the centre of rotation.
Circular mode is ideally suited to curved structures such as the circular frame
shown following. Structures which are not perfectly circular but which have a
general shape which is arranged around a central point can also be optimized very
efficiently using circular mode. The centre of rotation should generally be near the
centre of the structure, however this is not absolutely essential.
572
Analysis
Circular optimization
Circular mode can also be used to great advantage with structures that require
linear optimization in two directions.
A three dimensional multi-storey frame for example would probably require its
primary optimization direction to be vertical. As the optimizer reached each floor,
however a secondary horizontal direction would also need to be specified
otherwise it would not know in which direction to go along the floor. Without a
secondary direction, the optimizer would simply have to load the floor elements in
the order of their numbering and this could result in an unnecessarily large
frontwidth if the elements were badly numbered.
It is not possible to specify a primary and secondary direction with the optimizer in
linear mode, however it is possible to do this in circular mode by having the centre
of rotation a large distance away from the structure. Using circular mode in this
way is very similar to linear mode except that as the optimizer progresses across
(or up) the structure, the angle of attack also changes slightly as it moves around
the arc.
573
Bi-directional optimization
574
Analysis
Consider for example the three dimensional multi-storey frame shown above. The
primary optimization direction is vertical and the secondary direction for each floor
is to the left. By using circular mode and positioning the centre of rotation at a
large distance away from the frame as shown in the following diagram, the desired
result can be achieved.
Bi-directional optimization using circular mode
As the optimization line progresses up the structure, it reaches the right hand side
of each floor before the left hand side. Thus, the structure as a whole is optimized
from bottom to top and each floor is optimized from right to left.
Note that this method of optimization is usually the best way to deal with large
cubic shaped structures.
If you are not sure which optimizer mode to use
for a particular structure, it is recommended that you experiment with various
modes to see how small a frontwidth can be achieved. You can do this by running
the analysis and then terminating it by pressing ESC or the right mouse button
after the frontwidth has been calculated and displayed on the screen. Once you
have found the most efficient mode, you can simply let the analysis continue to the
end as normal.
575
The wavefront analysis method

Conventional structural analysis programs utilizing the stiffness method generally
use a bandwidth equation solver which requires that nodes be numbered correctly
to ensure the smallest possible bandwidth.
The wavefront method, however requires that the members and plates be numbered
correctly to ensure the smallest possible frontwidth. The optimum wavefront
numbering sequence, however is quite logical and is not sensitive to adding more
nodes, members and plates at a later stage which are out of sequence. This can be
quite a problem with the bandwidth method.
For most structures, the element numbering sequence doesnt matter because the
frontwidth capacity of SPACE GASS is quite large. Large structures, however can
be made to analyse faster by optimizing the frontwidth. The displacements
calculation time is roughly proportional to the square of the frontwidth.
A wavefront optimizer is available with SPACE GASS which internally re-orders
the stiffness matrix and which generally reduces the frontwidth to within 95% of
the optimum. The optimizer adds only a few seconds to the analysis time and gives
you the freedom of not having to concern yourself with element numbering
sequences even for the largest structures.
For those of you who are interested in the wavefront solution method, the
following sections should give you an insight into the inner workings of the
SPACE GASS analysis module.
576
Analysis
A quick frontwidth calculation method

In order to minimize the frontwidth, members and plates should be numbered from
side to side across the structures shortest dimension while gradually proceeding up
the length of the structure. The numbering should proceed up the entire length of
the structure in one pass. A tall multistorey building for example would have the
ground floor columns numbered first, followed by first floor beams, first floor
columns, second floor beams, second floor columns etc., right up to the top.
A quick frontwidth calculation can be done as follows.
1.
This procedure assumes that the element numbering sequence proceeds generally
from one end of the structure to the other in a single pass as described in the
paragraph above.
2.
Make an imaginary cut through the structure at its widest point and at right angles
to the general direction of element numbering. For example, the multistorey frame
described above would have a horizontal cut at any one of its levels.
3.
On one side of the cut only, count the number of nodes that are connected to
elements that have been cut.
4.
Add 1 to the number of nodes in step 3 above and multiply by the degrees of
freedom (DOF) per node. For 3D frames this will generally be 6 DOF per node.
5.
Subtract the number of restrained DOF (ie. the restraints applied to the nodes
counted in step 3).
The final figure is the structure frontwidth.

It is generally not necessary for you to know any more about the wavefront method
than has been described above, however for those of you wishing to know more, a
detailed explanation of the wavefront analysis method follows.
577
The wavefront method in more detail

Both the bandwidth and wavefront methods are primarily concerned with the
assemblage and solution of a very large structure stiffness array. This array equates
node displacements to externally applied loads as follows.
[P]=[K][D], where
[P] = Load array

[K] = Structure stiffness array
[D] = Node displacement array
[P] and [K] are fully defined while [D] is the unknown.
The wavefront method is different to the bandwidth method in that the structure
stiffness array is assembled in order of element numbering rather than node
numbering, and a much smaller portion of the array is required in memory at any
one time.
In the wavefront method, the program loads each element into the stiffness array in
order of the element numbering sequence. The nodes associated with each element
have stiffness equations that occupy certain rows and columns in the array.
This loading process continues until one or more nodes have been fully assembled.
A node is said to be fully assembled when all elements connected to it have been
loaded into the array. At this point the equations associated with that node can be
solved and removed, thus leaving space in the array for other nodes.
Further elements are then loaded and their nodes take the place of nodes that have
previously been solved and removed. More node equations are eliminated and the
whole process continues until the entire structure has been fed in and the stiffness
array emptied. The frontwidth is equal to the largest number of node equations that
occupied the stiffness array at one time.
578
Analysis
Running a static analysis

You can run a static analysis by selecting "Linear Static Analysis" or "Non-linear
Static Analysis" from the Analysis menu or you can change from linear to nonlinear or vice-versa using the Type analysis parameter in the form shown below.
Load case list

If you want to analyse all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise you
should type in a list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes) that you want
analysed.
For the fastest analysis time you should generally analyse only the load cases that
can occur in reality. For example, there is no point in analysing a live load case on
its own because it can't occur in real life without being combined with dead load.
This means that you should generally analyse just the combination load cases and
not the primary load cases that the combinations are made from.
It is sometimes also possible to achieve time savings by analysing non-linearly
only those load cases that cause 2nd order effects, and analysing all of the other
load cases linearly. This would have to be done in two runs, however because a
579

non-linear analysis can take considerably longer than a linear analysis (especially if
there are a large number of load cases), it is often worthwhile.
Further time savings can be made by not analysing linear combination load cases.
"Linear combination load cases" are combinations that have all of their primary
load cases analysed linearly. Results for non-analysed linear combinations are
assembled from the primary load cases at the time a report or graphics output is
generated. If a combination load case has one or more of its primary load cases
analysed non-linearly or if the structure contains tension-only or compression-only
members then the combination will have to be analysed in order to obtain results
for it.
When specifying the load case list, you can either list them directly, or you can
click the
button to display and select from a list of the load cases currently in
the job as shown below.
Tension/Comp-only effects
Tension/compression-only effects can be "fully operational", "operational with no
reversal" or "fully de-activated".
"Fully operational" means that tension-only or compression-only members which
have been disabled during the analysis are able to be re-enabled if their axial force
is reversed.
580
Analysis
"Operational with no reversal" means that once they have been disabled they
cannot be re-enabled even if their axial force has reversed. No reversal is useful if
the fully operational analysis will not converge, however you should check the
results and, if required, manually disable some tens/comp-only members and then
re-analyse.
No reversal normally applies from the first iteration onwards, however you also
have the option of activating it after a specified number of iterations. This means
that the analysis will initially proceed with tension/compression-only effects fully
activated and, if convergence hasnt been achieved after a specified number
iterations, it will change to "no reversal" mode.
"Fully de-activated" means that they are treated as normal members, able to take
tension and compression.
See also Tension-only and compression-only effects.
Cable damping factor
This allows you to apply damping to the cable connected nodes. It does this by
multiplying the stiffness terms of the unrestrained cable-only node degrees of
freedom by the factor:
where Ratio depends on the damping relaxation and Damping is the cable damping
factor.
Damping relaxation steps
If cable damping is used, it must be relaxed as the solution proceeds so that at
convergence there is no damping at all.
Setting the damping relaxation steps to zero causes the damping to be relaxed in
direct proportion to the change in deflection between the current and previous
iterations. As convergence approaches 100%, the change in deflections approaches
zero and hence the damping approaches zero.
581

Alternatively, setting the damping relaxation steps to a finite value causes the
damping to be relaxed in uniform steps down to zero. If this method is used, the
analysis keeps iterating until the damping is fully relaxed, regardless of whether
convergence has been achieved earlier or not.
Number of load steps
This allows you to apply the load gradually in a number of small load steps. If you
specify a single load step then all of the load is applied in the first iteration (this is
how the program worked in all previous versions). If cable damping is also being
used, the damping relaxation process begins anew for each load step.
Iterations per load step
This parameter allows you to specify the maximum number of iterations that will
occur in a load step before the program begins prompting you for extra iterations.
A special case occurs if you specify just one iteration per load step, in which case
the program proceeds to the next load step after one iteration regardless of whether
convergence has been achieved or not.
The analysis will finish if the convergence accuracy is satisfied, even if the
number of iterations per load step hasnt been completed.
Convergence accuracy (%)
The convergence accuracy is only applicable for non-linear analyses. After each
iteration, SPACE GASS compares the results of the latest analysis with the results
of the previous analysis. If the comparison shows that the level of convergence has
reached or exceeded the specified convergence accuracy then the analysis is
assumed to have converged.
If you lower the convergence accuracy, the analysis may not converge
sufficiently and you risk getting incorrect results. It is particularly important that
you dont lower the convergence accuracy for highly non-linear structures such
as those that contain cables.
582
Analysis
Retain results of other load cases
If you have specified that not all load cases are to be analysed and, if results
already exist for some of the non-specified load cases, you can choose to retain
them or have them deleted.
Show messages from single member buckling check
During a non-linear analysis, SPACE GASS performs a simple Euler buckling
check on each member individually (regardless of whether you have the buckling
analysis module or not). If the buckling check fails then the member is disabled for
the remainder of the analysis. If you select the "Show messages from single
member buckling check" check box then a message is displayed whenever a
member fails the simple buckling check. For more information, refer to Static
analysis buckling.
Perform frame buckling check
SPACE GASS can optionally perform a frame buckling check during a non-linear
analysis that simply alerts you if the structure's buckling capacity has been
exceeded. If this happens, you cannot use the results of the static analysis because
they will most likely be invalid and you should run a full buckling analysis to get
the buckling load factor and find out where the buckling is occurring. For more
information, refer to Static analysis buckling and Buckling analysis.
Check for non-existent load cases
If you have defined combination load cases that contain other load cases which
dont yet exist, this option will detect and report them. It is optional because some
users prefer to have a standard set of combination load cases that contain primary
load cases which are just ignored during the analysis if they dont exist.
Stabilize unrestrained nodes
Nodes that are free to rotate or translate in one or more directions without
resistance from interconnecting members, plates, restraints or constraints can be
automatically restrained during the analysis so that instabilities dont occur.
For example, if a node was connected to a number of members, all of which were
pin-ended, a rotational instability would normally result due to the unrestrained
rotation of the node. However, the stabilize option would apply a temporary
rotational restraint to the node during the analysis, preventing an instability.
Although this solves many instabilities, it doesnt fix them all, and the prevention
of non-trivial instabilities is still dependent on good modelling practice.
583

Rotate local loads with member chord rotation
If this option is ticked then after the first analysis iteration any local member loads
will be rotated with the chord rotation of the members to which they are applied. It
can be used to ensure that wind loads or hydrostatic loads remain normal to the
member direction as the model deforms. This option is only enabled with finite or
large displacement theory in a non-linear analysis.
Type
Even though you have already chosen "Linear" or "Non-linear" from the Analysis
menu, this pair of radio buttons allows you to change your mind without having to
exit the form. A linear analysis generally involves only one iteration and does not
adjust the stiffness of the structure based on its deformation. It is suitable for
simple beams or fully braced frames, but not for sway frames or flexible structures
in which non-linear effects are significant. A non-linear analysis involves an
iterative procedure that updates the stiffness of the structure after each iteration and
gives more realistic results than a linear analysis.
Solver
The "Paradise" solver is a new parallel multi-core sparse solver that fully utilizes
the multiple cores in a modern computer's CPU. All of the available cores are run
in parallel to get the maximum possible analysis speed. It also takes full advantage
of the sparseness of the structural matrix during the solution to minimize memory
requirements and further increase the speed. The Paradise solver is the
recommended setting for all static analyses.
The "Wavefront" solver also takes into account the sparseness of the matrix but
doesn't run in multi-core mode. It is generally slower than the Paradise solver and
can be used if the Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution.
The "Watcom" solver is the one used in pre-SPACE GASS 12 versions. It is
considerably slower than the Paradise and Wavefront solvers and is therefore of
limited use.
All three solvers should yield virtually identical results.
Theory
Small displacement theory (based on Ghali and Neville (2)) is the default setting
and is suitable for most structures in which the members aren't subjected to
significant chord rotations (changes in direction of members). Small displacement
theory results are output in the undeformed axes system. The finite and large
displacement theories (based on Hancock (24)) take member chord rotations into
584
Analysis
account and base their equilibrium equations on the deformed geometry. Finite and
large displacement theory results are output in the deformed axes system.
Large displacement theory uses more exact methods than finite theory when
adjusting the stiffness matrix to allow for the deformation of the structure, however
for many structures they yield very similar results.
Note that although the finite and large displacement theories can handle larger
displacements, it is often harder to achieve convergence with them than with small
displacement theory, especially when large displacements occur.
Matrix
The main stiffness matrix can be a secant matrix (relating the full loads to the total
displacements) or a tangent matrix (relating the residual loads to incremental
displacements). A tangent matrix generally reaches convergence in a smaller
number of iterations than a secant matrix and is more suited to large displacements,
however this is not always the case. They both yield similar results. Note that small
displacement theory always uses a secant matrix.
Residual loads are the imbalance between the applied loads and the internal frame
forces at each node. Incremental displacements are the difference in displacements
between the current and the previous iteration. The residual loads and the
incremental displacements both approach zero as the solution approaches
convergence.
Note that if you use a secant matrix with finite or large displacement theory and
full loading, the stiffness matrix is non-symmetrical. This means that during the
analysis, the stiffness matrix uses up twice as much memory as it otherwise would
and so it should be avoided if your model is large.
Loading
For a secant matrix, you can choose between full or residual loading (see above),
whereas the tangent matrix always uses residual loading. They both yield similar
results, but if convergence is a problem then it may be worth experimenting with
this setting.
Convergence
Convergence can be based on deflections or residuals or both and is achieved when
they approach zero. It is recommended to have them both selected.
585

P-Delta (P- effect
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate P- effects. The P effect is usually the most significant 2nd order effect and is mandatory for nonlinear analyses which comply with most limit states design codes of practice. See
also P-D effect.
P-delta (P- effect
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate P- effects. The P effect is mandatory for non-linear analyses which comply with most limit states
design codes of practice. See also P-d effect.
Axial shortening effect
For a non-linear analysis, you are able to activate or de-activate axial shortening
effects. The axial shortening effect models the effect of the "shortening" of the
distance between the ends of a member due to its curvature. Axial shortening
induces extra tension in a member that has a significant curvature. It is turned off
by default and generally has a minimal effect on the analysis results.
Optimization method
The wavefront optimizer can be de-activated or it can be operated in one of four
modes as follows.
1. No optimization
2. Auto mode - SPACE GASS trials the "General" and various "Linear"
modes and then uses the one that gives the smallest frontwidth. It doesn't
add significant time to the analysis and is the recommended setting.
3. General mode - SPACE GASS determines the path along which

optimization proceeds through the structure.
4. Linear mode - You select from the X, Y or Z axes or a vector along which
optimization proceeds in a straight line through the structure.
5. Circular mode - You select either of the X, Y or Z axes about which

optimization proceeds around an arc through the structure.
See also The wavefront optimizer.
586
Analysis
Optimization axis
If you have selected "Linear" or "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode
then you must select the axis or vector along or about which optimization will
proceed.
Coordinates of optimization centre
If you have selected "Circular" for the wavefront optimization mode then you must
select the centre of rotation about which optimization will proceed.
When all of the information has been entered, the static analysis module calculates
the displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each load case and then saves
them ready for graphical or text report output.
If you want to terminate the analysis before it is finished, just press ESC or the
right mouse button. If you terminate the analysis in this way, the results for any
load cases which have already converged are saved. This applies to non-linear
analyses and to linear analyses with tension-only or compression-only members.
587
Static analysis results

At the end of the static analysis, a message stating whether the analysis was
successful or not is displayed together with a number of possible warnings and
errors.
Refer to "Ill-conditioning and instabilities" for details of what to do if an illconditioning or instability message is displayed.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of what to do if a frame buckling
message is displayed.
Displacements, forces, moments and stresses
The displacements, forces, moments and stresses calculated during the static
analysis can be included in a report. They can also be viewed graphically in
diagrams superimposed over the undeformed frame as described in "View
diagrams". For plate elements, contour diagrams can be displayed as described in
"View plate contours".
You can also query individual nodes, members or plates graphically to find their
displacements, forces and moments as described in "Query analysis results".
For full details of the forces, moments and stresses in members and plates,
refer to "Sign conventions".
Bill of materials
A bill of materials report showing quantities, lengths and masses of each type of
component in the structure can be included in a report. It bundles members of the
same type and length together and shows their individual and total lengths and
masses. It also shows the total structure mass and centre of gravity location.
Centre of gravity
The SPACE GASS bill of materials report includes the coordinates of the structure
centre of gravity.
588
Analysis

The SPACE GASS dynamic frequency analysis module is able to analyse multiple
mass load cases consisting of self mass and/or user defined lumped masses in a
single run. For each mass load case it calculates the natural frequency (eigenvalue),
period and mode shape (eigenvector) for any user defined number of vibration
modes. The natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes comprise the dynamic
properties of the structure.
You must perform a dynamic frequency analysis before performing a

dynamic response analysis.
589
Modelling considerations
The dynamic properties of a structure are dependent only on its geometric
properties, stiffness and mass. The geometric properties and stiffness of the
structure are determined automatically from the node coordinates, member
connectivity and fixity, plate connectivity, node restraints, section properties and
material properties. The structure mass is made up of self mass (applied as lumped
masses on every node) and extra applied lumped masses. Self mass can be
calculated automatically during the dynamic frequency analysis if requested, while
any extra lumped masses must be pre-defined by the user.
In most cases, lumped masses placed at nodes are an adequate means of defining
the mass distribution throughout the structure. However, where the distribution of
mass is critical, extra nodes may be required. For example, consider a vertical
cantilevered structure (such as a pole or tower). In order to accurately determine
the natural frequencies you must define the distribution of mass up the cantilever
by adding intermediate nodes with masses applied to them. A similar situation
applies with a continuous beam where the mode shapes between supports are
important.
As a general rule, extra intermediate nodes (with masses applied) should be added
to members for which the mass is a significant part of the total mass of the
structure. Structures with a small number of members are often affected in this
way.
Dynamic mode shape deflections are calculated
and output at nodes only. Therefore, in order to get realistic looking mode shapes
it is sometimes necessary to add intermediate nodes to some members, particularly
if the deflected shapes of these members have significant curvature. If the local
deflected shape of a member is of interest then the distribution of mass along it will
also be important and the requirement for intermediate nodes will apply anyway.
The dynamic frequency analysis module cannot analyse structures that

contain cable members.
590
Analysis
Running a dynamic frequency analysis

You can run a dynamic frequency analysis by selecting "Dynamic Frequency
Analysis" from the Analysis menu.
The dynamic frequency analysis is a linear analysis and hence cannot be used with
models that contain cable members. Furthermore, it treats tension-only and
compression-only members as normal members that can take tension and
compression.
Note that the requirement to save the stiffness matrix during an initial static
analysis is no longer required for a dynamic frequency analysis.
Load case list

analysed.
click the
591
Note that only the load cases that contain lumped masses or self-weight are
considered during a dynamic frequency analysis. Load cases that contain selfweight with other static loads and no lumped masses are not considered, however
load cases that contain only self-weight are considered. Any static loads that exist
in the dynamic load cases are ignored.
Consider the following examples:
Contents of load case
Masses only
Self-weight only
Static loads only
Masses + self-weight
Masses + static
Masses + self-weight + static
Self-weight + static
Considered
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (static loads ignored)
Yes (static loads ignored)
No
Self mass
The self mass of the structure can be calculated automatically by SPACE GASS
and included in the dynamic frequency analysis. This can be done either by adding
self-weight to a load case that contains lumped masses or by combining lumped
mass and self-weight load cases into a combination load case.
592
Analysis
Self mass is applied by calculating the mass of each member and then applying half
of it as translational lumped masses to each of the member end nodes in each of the
unrestrained X, Y and Z global axis directions. The mass of each plate is also
calculated and applied to its perimeter nodes
Self mass generation does not calculate rotational masses because of the large
number of extra masses that would be calculated for a fairly insignificant
improvement in results accuracy. If required, rotational self mass must be manually
applied as rotational lumped masses.
See also Self-weight.
Tolerance (Hz)
The accuracy to which the dynamic natural frequencies will be calculated. For
example, a tolerance of 0.001 means that the frequencies will be within +/- 0.001
of the exact value.
The tolerance can also have a significant effect on the accuracy of the mode
shapes. While the mode shapes are usually of secondary importance if only a
dynamic frequency analysis is done, they are very important if the frequency
analysis is followed by a dynamic response analysis. Inaccurate mode shapes from
the frequency analysis can cause significant errors in the mass participation factors
from the response analysis and its results in general.
Even if a natural frequency is accurate to within 0.01Hz, its corresponding mode
shape may not be accurate enough for a dynamic response analysis. If the "Extra
iterations for mode shape accuracy" option is turned on (see below) then SPACE
GASS will detect significantly incorrect mode shapes during the frequency analysis
and will correct them automatically by doing more iterations. Small mode shape
inaccuracies cannot be detected by the frequency analysis, however they
sometimes make themselves evident in the response analysis by mass participation
factors that exceed 100%. A warning is given if this occurs and you should repeat
the frequency analysis using a smaller tolerance.
If the results of the frequency analysis wont be used in a response analysis then a
tolerance of 0.01 is more than enough, however if a response analysis is to follow
then a tolerance of 0.001 or less should be used.
593
Each extra decimal place in the tolerance will increase the number of
iterations per mode by 3 or 4. For example, a tolerance of 0.0001 will require 3 or
4 more iterations per mode than a tolerance of 0.001.
Frequency upper limit (Hz)
The upper limit above which the dynamic frequency analysis will no longer search
for natural frequencies. Once this limit is reached, the analysis will stop, even if not
all requested dynamic modes have been calculated.
Frequency lower limit (Hz)
The lower limit below which the dynamic frequency analysis will not search for
natural frequencies.
Dynamic modes
The dynamic frequency analysis module calculates the mode shapes, natural
frequencies and natural periods for the number of dynamic modes requested. It also
sorts them into ascending frequency order.
Frequency shift (Hz)
The dynamic frequency analysis normally calculates natural frequencies starting
from 0Hz and working upwards, however if a frequency shift is specified then the
frequencies below the frequency shift value are skipped.
For example, if your structure has natural frequencies of 1.2Hz, 3.2Hz, 6.7Hz,
10.2Hz, 15.3Hz and 16.1Hz but you are only interested in the frequencies above
10Hz, you could specify a frequency shift of 10Hz. This would skip the lower three
modes (saving you considerable analysis time) and just calculate frequencies
10.2Hz, 15.3Hz and 16.1Hz.
If you have defined combination load cases that contain other load cases that dont
yet exist, this option will detect and report them. It is optional because some users
594
Analysis
prefer to have a standard set of combination load cases that contain primary load
cases which are just ignored during the analysis if they dont exist.
resistance from interconnecting members, plates, restraints or constraints can be
Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy
The dynamic frequency analysis is complete when the natural frequencies have
reached the desired accuracy (as specified by the tolerance), however it is possible
that at this point the dynamic mode shapes are not totally accurate. Mode shape
accuracy can be achieved by turning on the "Extra iterations for mode shape
accuracy" option, however if the dynamic mode shapes are only used as a visual
aid to assess the vibration location and its shape then the extra iterations and
analysis time involved may not be warranted.
If, however, a dynamic response analysis is to be done based on the frequency
analysis then the mode shapes are very important and it is imperative that the
"Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy" option is turned on. Even with the extra
iterations, in some cases the mode shapes may still not be accurate enough (as
sometimes evidenced by a mass participation factor from the response analysis that
exceeds 100%) and further accuracy can then only be achieved by using a smaller
tolerance.
Solver
recommended setting for all dynamic frequency analyses.
595

can be used if the Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution.
limited use.
Optimization method
modes as follows.
1. No optimization


Optimization axis
proceed.
596
Analysis
When all of the information has been entered, the dynamic frequency analysis
module calculates the natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes for each load
case and then saves them ready for graphical or text report output.
right mouse button.
597
Dynamic frequency analysis results

The natural frequencies, periods and mode shapes calculated during the static
analysis can be included in a report. They can also be viewed graphically in
animated diagrams superimposed over the undeformed frame as described in
"View dynamic mode shapes".
Mode shape displacements are relative only. They define the mode shape, not its
magnitude. You cant compare the displacements of different mode shapes in an
attempt to determine which mode will result in the largest displacements. The scale
factor for the displacements of each mode shape is unique to that mode.
The mode shapes in SPACE GASS are normalized. This means that the
translations and rotations in a mode shape will have been adjusted such that each
translation or rotation is divided by the absolute value of the largest translational
displacement for the mode shape under consideration. This makes it easier for you
to relate the displacement of a particular node to the maximum displacement within
a mode shape. For example, a normalized displacement of 0.60 indicates that the
node moves by an amount which is 60% of the maximum displacement in that
particular mode shape.
If you wish to use the dynamic frequency analysis results to perform an earthquake
analysis, refer to "Dynamic response analysis".
598
Analysis

The SPACE GASS spectral module performs a dynamic response analysis of
structures subjected to earthquake loads given in the form of acceleration response
spectra. Its general approach means that the spectral module is not just restricted to
earthquakes, but can calculate the maximum response of a structure subjected to
any ground vibration provided that all supports are vibrating in phase (ie. the same
response spectrum is applied at all supports simultaneously).
The spectral module considers the vibration of the structure and identifies the
maximum values that result from the vibration. Generally, the maximums at
different points of the structure occur at different times during the dynamic event.
Consequently, the spectral results do not represent an equilibrium state of the
structure, rather an envelope of the maximums. Furthermore, because the
earthquake action has no sign (ie. its accelerations are both positive and negative),
the maximum values have no sign and hence the sign of the results is
indeterminate. Usually, the results are dominated by one of the mode shapes which
SPACE GASS can identify and apply its sign to the results. Alternatively, you can
select which mode shape the sign should be taken from.
The spectral module is not code specific, however for ease of use with the
Australian and New Zealand loading codes, many of the analysis input parameters
have alternative code specific input options. These options require you to simply
select from tables taken from the code rather than having to type in numeric values.
Future versions will include these input aids for other international codes also.
The earthquake loads are provided in the form of curves called "acceleration
response spectra" which graph acceleration versus period. Each spectral curve is
derived from the time-history record of a ground vibration for a specific level of
damping, and is not dependent in any way on the properties of the structure being
analysed. Usually, for one earthquake, there are several spectral curves for different
damping ratios (eg. 0%, 1%, 2%, 5% and 10% of the critical damping). In the
design codes, the spectral curves are derived from a set of earthquake records
which are smoothed and averaged.
A spectral curve library containing some standard (unauthorised) curves is supplied
with SPACE GASS. The built-in graphical spectral curve editor allows you to
modify or create your own spectral curves as required. The acceleration values in a
spectral curve are always specified in terms of g (acceleration due to gravity) units.
Before being used in an analysis, SPACE GASS automatically multiplies them by
599

the dimensionless spectral curve multiplier and by the appropriate value of g to
yield acceleration units that are consistent with the currently selected units system.
For an accurate spectral analysis, it is important that the spectral load cases have
been defined correctly and that appropriate combinations of the spectral load cases
have been specified. For more information, refer to "Spectral load data".
The results of the spectral analysis include deflections, forces, moments and
reactions that can be displayed graphically, printed, or used in a steel design in the
same way as the results from a static analysis. It is also possible to combine
spectral load cases with static load cases in combination load cases.
Refer to "Dynamic response analysis results" for details and interpretation of the
results of a dynamic response analysis.
600
Analysis
Running a dynamic response analysis

You can run a dynamic response analysis by selecting "Dynamic Response
Analysis" from the Analysis menu.
Before a dynamic response analysis can proceed, you must have performed
a dynamic frequency analysis.
601

Spectral load case list
Leave blank if you want to analyse all spectral load cases, otherwise enter the load
cases (separate by commas/dashes) you want analysed.
Check this box if you want to keep the analysis results of previously analysed
spectral load cases. Otherwise, if they are not being re-analysed in the current
session, they will be discarded.
Loading code
This allows you to select the loading code to be used. If you choose an AS or NZS
code, you should ensure that you have also selected spectral curves for that same
code in your spectral load data.
One major difference between the "General" loading code and the AS or NZS
codes is that the spectral curve multiplier must be manually defined for General,
whereas it can be calculated based on code specific factors for the AS or NZS
codes. There are also a number of other AS and NZS specific factors applied
internally during the dynamic response analysis.
Limit state
For NZS, you must choose between serviceability or ultimate limit states together
with an appropriate ductility factor.
The selected ductility factor is only used if a non-NZS spectral curve is used
in the spectral load data. If you have used a predefined NZS spectral curve then the
ductility factor is derived from it.
Auto scaling of base shear
This is a code related parameter that instructs the program to scale the results so
that the sum of the support reactions obtained from the response spectrum analysis
is not less than a user defined proportion of the total static force (or a user defined
percentage of the structures weight for the "General" code).
Vertical direction
The axis indicates the vertical direction of the structure. This should usually match
the vertical axis setting in the Viewpoint form.
602
Analysis
Base shear factor (%)
Controls the scaling of the results so that the sum of the support reactions resolved
along the axis of the direction vector is not less than the total static force (resolved
in the same direction) multiplied by the scaling factor. For example, if you select a
scaling factor of 90% the total reaction vector will be not less than 90% of the total
static force vector.
Site factor
An AS1170.4-1994 specific factor that allows you to nominate an appropriate soil
profile. You can elect to have the site factor calculated for you or you can choose a
"User Defined" structure type and then type in the site factor directly.
The site factor you select is only used if a non-AS1170.4-1994 spectral curve
is used in the spectral load data. If you have used a predefined AS1170.4-1994
spectral curve then the site factor is derived from it.
Site subsoil class
An NZS specific factor that allows you to nominate an appropriate site subsoil
class.
The site subsoil class you select is only used if a non-NZS spectral curve is
used in the spectral load data. If you have used a predefined NZS spectral curve
then the site subsoil class is derived from it.
Horizontal base shear factor (%)
A "General" loading code specific factor that controls the scaling of the results so
that the sum of the support reactions resolved along the axis of the direction vector
equals the weight of the structure (including applied lumped masses) multiplied by
the horizontal base shear factor. It is used if the direction vector is predominantly
horizontal. For example, if you select a horizontal base shear of 3% the total
reaction vector must be equal to 3% of the weight of the structure.
Vertical base shear factor (%)
A "General" loading code specific factor that controls the scaling of the results so
that the sum of the support reactions resolved along the axis of the direction vector
equals the weight of the structure (including applied lumped masses) multiplied by
the vertical base shear factor. It is used if the direction vector is predominantly
vertical. For example, if you select a vertical base shear of 2% the total reaction
vector must be equal to 2% of the weight of the structure.
603
Sign of the results

Because the results of a response spectrum analysis are a combination of a number
of mode shapes, the final sign of the results has to be determined. Choosing "No
sign" is of limited use and means that all deflections, forces, moments and
reactions will be positive. Choosing "Auto Sign" means that the sign of the
predominant mode shape will be applied to the results. Choosing "Select Mode"
tells the program to extract the sign from a nominated mode shape.
Spectral curve multiplier
The spectral curve multiplier is used to control the scale of the spectral curve
acceleration values. It can be typed in directly or, by clicking the button next to the
spectral curve multiplier field, can be defined via various code specific factors. For
AS1170.4, it is based on probability, hazard, structural ductility and performance
factors. Alternatively, for NZS1170.5, it is based on hazard, return period, nearfault and structural performance factors. Each of the code specific factors can be
typed in directly or calculated automatically based on descriptions of the structure
location, structure importance and construction method.
Mode combination method
The results for spectral load cases that contain more than one mode shape are
obtained by combining the results for each of the mode shapes. You can choose
between:
SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of Squares
The simplest and most commonly used mode combination method that
works well for most situations.
CQC - Complete Quadratic Combination

Recommended when some of the mode shapes to be combined have
natural frequencies that are close together.
Either method can be used regardless of the spectral curve damping factors.
When all of the information has been entered, the dynamic response analysis
module performs its calculations for each load case and then saves them ready for
graphical or text report output.
right mouse button.
604
Analysis
Dynamic response procedure

For each spectral load case, the analysis module calculates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Total static (earthquake) force in each global axis direction.

Dominant period in each global axis direction.
Mass participation factor for the dominant mode in each global axis direction.
Total mass participation factor in each global axis direction.
Total mass participation factor.
The mode to be used for determining the sign of the results.
Node displacements for each mode.
Mass participation factor in the earthquake direction for each mode.
The following calculations are then performed:

1.
Forces, moments and reactions are calculated from the node displacements for
each mode.
2.
Displacements, forces, moments and reactions for each mode are combined into a
single set of values for all the modes combined. This is done using SRSS or CQC
as specified by the user.
3.
If base shear scaling is requested, the displacements, forces, moments and

reactions are then scaled by a factor so that the base shear is equal to the base
shear factor times the total mass (for "General") or not less than the base shear
factor times the total static force (for AS or NZS loading codes).
Note that the base shear is simply the X, Y and Z reactions resolved into a vector
in the direction of the earthquake. Similarly, the total static force is the X, Y and Z
static forces resolved into a vector in the direction of the earthquake.
For "General", if the direction vector is predominantly horizontal then the
horizontal base shear factor is used (this is the normal case), otherwise the vertical
base shear factor is used.
For a detailed explanation of the dynamic response analysis results, refer to

"Dynamic response analysis results".
605
Dynamic response analysis results

The results of a response spectrum analysis include normal deflections, forces,
moments and reactions that can be displayed graphically, printed or used in a steel
design in the same way that the results of a static analysis are used. In addition,
spectral load cases and static load cases can be mixed together in combination load
cases.
The output results also include a summary of the analysis input parameters and
details of the governing mode shapes, total static forces, total masses and mass
participation factors. Details are given for the three global axis directions and for
the direction vector.
The key output results are explained in more detail as follows:
Total static force
The earthquake force calculated by an equivalent static method for each global axis
direction.
Total mass
The total mass (including self mass) applied to the model for each global axis
direction. Note that any mass applied to restrained degrees of freedom is ignored.
Mass participation factor
The results are highly sensitive to the number of mode shapes included in the
analysis. An insufficient number of modes will result in an inaccurate solution. The
mass participation factor (MPF) represents the contribution of a particular mode
shape to the overall dynamic response of the structure. Each mode has its own
MPF.
The total MPF for each direction is a reliable indicator of the number of modes
required. If all modes are considered then the sum of the MPFs (the total MPF)
will be 100%. In reality, we only consider a finite number of modes and the total
MPF should be at least 90% for a good result. If the total MPF is less than 90%
then more modes should be included in the analysis.
Usually, an earthquake is applied along one of the two horizontal axes, as defined
by the direction vector. For example, an earthquake acting in the X direction would
have a direction vector of Dx = 1.0, Dy = 0.0 and Dz = 0.0. In this case, the total
MPF in the X direction should be greater than 90%. The values of the total MPFs
in the other two directions are not important.
606
Analysis
A MPF that exceeds 100% indicates that the mode shapes from the dynamic
frequency analysis are not accurate enough. If this happens, you should repeat the
dynamic frequency analysis using a smaller tolerance.
Base shear
The horizontal reaction in each global axis direction shown as a percentage of the
total mass. This should match the reactions shown graphically.
The table in the output report showing the mass participation factors for each mode
shape individually gives a good indication of the contribution of each mode shape
in the overall dynamic response of the structure. From it you can quickly see which
mode is dominant.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM (kN,T,Sec,Hz)
------------------------Spectral case 5: Sample AS1170.4 Case
Mass load case: 3
Direction vector: Dx = 1.000, Dy = 1.000, Dz = 1.000
Auto scaling of base shear: AS1170.4
Vertical direction: Y-Axis
Base shear: Not less than 80% of total static force
Results scaled by factor: 2.825
Site factor: 0.670
Sign of the results: Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
Acceleration coefficient: 0.080
Importance factor: 1.000
Structural response factor: 4.500
Spectral curve multiplier: 0.017778
Mode combination method: SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares)
Total MPF for Total
Dominant Static Total Dominant Mass Part Base
Direction Mode Force Mass Mode Factor Shear
X-Axis 1 0.5371 2.1209 99.999% 100.000% 1.056%
Y-Axis 3 0.2686 1.1209 29.745% 29.745% 0.023%
Z-Axis 0 0.0000 0.0000 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Mode Damping Natural Natural Mass Part
Direction Shape Spectral Curve Factor Period Frequency Factor
Vector 1 NEWCASTLE 2% 2.0% 0.4378 2.284 65.419%
Vector 3 NEWCASTLE 0% 0.1% 0.0133 75.470 10.365%
Total 75.783%
Spectral case 6: Sample General Case

Mass load case: 2
Direction vector: Dx = 1.000, Dy = 1.000, Dz = 0.000
Auto scaling of base shear: AS1170.4
Vertical direction: Y-Axis
607

Base shear: Not less than 80% of total static force
Results scaled by factor: 1.532
Site factor: 0.670
Sign of the results: Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
Acceleration coefficient: 0.080
Importance factor: 1.000
Structural response factor: 4.500
Spectral curve multiplier: 0.017778
Mode combination method: SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of Squares)
Total MPF for Total
Dominant Static Total Dominant Mass Part Base
Direction Mode Force Mass Mode Factor Shear
X-Axis 1 0.8363 4.1209 99.999% 100.000% 2.244%
Y-Axis 3 0.4182 4.1209 50.829% 91.077% 0.239%
Z-Axis 0 0.0000 0.0000 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%
Mode Damping Natural Natural Mass Part
Direction Shape Spectral Curve Factor Period Frequency Factor
Vector 1 AS1170.4
Vector 2 AS1170.4
Vector 3 AS1170.4
Vector 4 AS1170.4
Total 95.514%
608
S=.67
S=.67
S=.67
S=.67
5.0%
5.0%
5.0%
5.0%
0.6102
0.0253
0.0206
0.0153
1.639 50.096%
39.566 2.584%
48.544 25.278%
65.291 17.556%
Analysis
Buckling analysis
The SPACE GASS buckling analysis module performs a rational elastic buckling
analysis of a frame to determine its buckling load factors, buckling mode shapes
and member effective lengths.
The buckling load factor is the factor by which the loads need to be increased to
reach the buckling load. A load factor less than 1.0 means that the working loads
exceed the structures buckling capacity.
For information about displaying buckling mode shapes and finding out where
buckling is occurring, refer to "Buckling analysis results".
The buckling modes considered in the buckling analysis involve flexural instability
due to axial compression in the members (also known Euler buckling) and should
not be confused with flexural-torsional buckling (torsional instability due to
bending moments) or axial-torsional buckling (torsional instability due to axial
loads).
An accurate buckling analysis such as the one available in SPACE GASS looks at
the interaction of every member in the structure and detects buckling modes that
involve one member, groups of members, or the structure as a whole.
A buckling analysis is an essential component of every structural design because it:
1.
Determines if the loads exceed the structure's buckling capacity and by how much.
2.
Calculates the member effective lengths for use in the member design.
3.
Determines if the static analysis results are useable or not.
Points 1 and 3 above highlight the fact that a buckling analysis must always be
performed unless you are certain that the structure's buckling capacity exceeds the
applied loads by a suitable factor of safety.
It is very important to note that the results of a static analysis will be incorrect if
the structure's buckling capacity has been exceeded (see point 3 above), and
hence one of the key roles of a buckling analysis is to ratify the static analysis
results.
609
If you get buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg.
shown as "<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could
indicate an instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more
likely to be an instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every
load case.
If the model contains instabilities, the buckling analysis may, in some cases, give
invalid results. In the absence of instability or buckling messages from the static
analysis, you should always check the deflections to see if they are excessive or
not. Excessive deflections are sometimes the only indicator of instabilities.
Once the buckling load factors have been determined, a simple formula is used to
calculate the member effective lengths as described in the next section. The
effective lengths can then be automatically transferred into the steel member design
modules.
The method that SPACE GASS uses to calculate the buckling factors (eigenvalues)
and corresponding mode shapes (eigenvectors) is based on the theory developed by
Wittrick and Williams (12).
Note that the magnitudes of the effective lengths or the effective length factors (k
factors) from a buckling analysis cannot be used to determine if buckling is a
problem or not. This can only be determined by looking at the buckling load
factor.
Because plates are linear elements, they will not buckle regardless of the
load applied.
Refer to "Static analysis buckling" for details of some simple buckling checks that
are included in non-linear static analyses.
Refer to "Special buckling considerations" for details of items to be aware of when
preparing your model for a buckling analysis.
Refer to "Buckling analysis results" for details and interpretation of the results of a
buckling analysis.
610
Analysis
Buckling effective lengths

The effective length of a compression member is the length of an equivalent pinended strut that has an Euler buckling capacity equal to the axial force Pcr in the
member at the point of frame buckling. It can be determined from:
It is evident from the formula that because the member actual length is not
involved in the calculation, subdividing the member into smaller segments does not
change its effective length. Thus, the effective length of a strut is the same as the
effective length of one of its segments if it has been subdivided.
Effective lengths calculated by the buckling analysis can be automatically
transferred into the steel member design modules. This has the obvious advantage
that effective lengths don't have to be transferred manually, but it also offers design
efficiencies in that the effective lengths will be calculated specifically for each
design load case rather than having to use one set of effective lengths for all load
cases.
If you are manually specifying the compression effective lengths in the steel
member design data rather than having them transferred automatically from the
buckling analysis, for design groups that consist of a number of analysis members
connected end-to-end, you should use the MAXIMUM (not the sum!) of its
individual analysis member effective lengths.
Overestimation of effective lengths
Effective lengths from a buckling analysis are sometimes overestimated because
the portion of the frame that buckles first determines the buckling load factor
(BLF) and, consequently, controls the effective lengths of all the members in the
frame. The buckled portion of the frame may just involve one or two members and
may be remote from many of the members that are having their effective lengths
controlled by it.
For example, the buckling collapse of the left-hand column of a portal frame due to
a heavy load applied to it can control the effective length of the right-hand column
which has no such load applied. Consequently, each column would have a different
effective length.
611

It would be ideal if the buckling analysis could increase the BLF beyond the first
buckling mode so that the effective length for each member could be based on a
buckling mode that involved that member. Unfortunately, this is not often possible
because once the frame has reached its first buckling mode, it has generally
collapsed and cannot resist any increase in load.
However, if the first buckling mode involves only minor members such as bracing
or similar, rather than a collapse of the frame, it may be possible to continue the
buckling analysis to a higher order buckling mode in order to get more realistic
effective lengths.
You can see from the above discussion that members which are lightly loaded at
the point of frame buckling will get a long effective length because of their small
Pcr (see the equation above). In some cases, this may result in conservative designs,
however there are a few factors that can help as follows:
1.
Members that have long effective lengths are generally lightly loaded axially, and
these two effects tend to cancel each other out during the design phase.
2.
For codes such as AS4100 that don't require it, turn off the slenderness ratio check
at the start of the design phase. This is often very effective because, in the
slenderness ratio check, a long effective length does not benefit from being
cancelled out by a small axial force.
3.
For sway members, you can limit the effective lengths to a multiple of the actual
member length by entering a factor into the "compression effective length ratio
limit" field at the start of the design phase. In fact, effective lengths charts in most
design codes limit the effective lengths for sway members to not more than 5.0
times the actual member length.
4.
For braced members, you can simply specify them as "braced" in the steel member
design data for the direction(s) in which they are braced. This will limit the
effective lengths from the buckling analysis to the actual member length.
612
Analysis
Special buckling considerations

Although a buckling analysis requires no more input data than a standard static
analysis, there are a number of items to be aware of when preparing a model for a
buckling analysis.
Restraining the structure for buckling
It is important that you restrain the appropriate degrees of freedom to prevent
buckling modes that cant occur in the real structure. For example, if a plane frame
is braced in the out-of-plane direction, you must ensure that the braced nodes are
restrained in that direction, otherwise the buckling load factor may apply to an
unexpected out-of-plane buckling mode. A general restraint is usually the most
convenient way to achieve this. For example, applying a general restraint of
RRFRRR to a plane frame in the XY plane will prevent all out-of-plane
translations.
Conversely, it is also important that you dont prevent node movements that can
occur in the real structure. For example, consider a plane frame rafter that is
restrained in the out-of-plane direction at the two ends via an RRFRRR general
restraint, but which is able to buckle in the out-of-plane direction between the ends.
If you subsequently add some intermediate nodes to the rafter, they will also get
the general restraint and this will prevent them from translating out-of-plane,
changing the out-of-plane buckling characteristics of the rafter. To avoid this, you
could apply restraints of RRRRRR to the intermediate nodes so that they dont get
the general restraint.
Note that a static analysis of a plane frame is not as sensitive to out-of-plane
restraints as a buckling analysis because static analysis out-of-plane displacements
generally only occur if out-of-plane loads are applied. This is not true of a buckling
analysis which can cause buckling in any direction, even if there are no loads in
that direction.
Buckling analysis with secondary members
Structures are often modelled with the secondary members such as ties or bracing
removed. If these members are required to prevent buckling of the major members
in the real structure then they should be included in the buckling analysis model,
otherwise the buckling capacity of the structure will be underestimated by the
analysis.
This is particularly true of tower structures that contain large numbers of slender
members that prevent buckling of the major support members.
613

Buckling analysis with tension-only or compression-only members
Extra care must be taken with buckling analysis of structures that contain tensiononly or compression-only members.
For example, consider a portal frame building modelled in 3D with tension-only
wall bracing members that prevent the building from swaying longitudinally.
Special treatment is required for the load cases that contain predominantly gravity
loads which would cause all the wall braces to go into compression and therefore
become disabled. In such load cases, the buckling analysis would yield very low
buckling load factors because the wall bracing members would have been disabled
and a longitudinal sway buckling mode at very low load would result. Of course, in
the real structure this could not happen because the wall brace members would
prevent it as soon as the sway mode was initiated.
One solution is to introduce a very small horizontal load into these load cases
which is small enough to have a negligible effect on the static analysis results but
large enough to cause the wall brace members to go into tension. The result is that
they are not removed from the buckling analysis model and are therefore able to
prevent the unrealistic longitudinal sway buckling mode.
Similar situations can occur in any structures that contain tension-only or
compression-only members.
Buckling analysis with cable members
Extra care is needed for structures containing cable members because of their
highly non-linear nature. Because the axial force distribution in cable structures can
change dramatically as the load factor is increased beyond the working load, it is
recommended that the buckling analysis be performed on combination load cases
that factor the working loads up close to the buckling load and result in buckling
load factors that are close to 1.0.
For example, if a buckling analysis of a working load case for a cable structure
yields a primary buckling load factor of 5.2, you could create a combination load
case which factors up the working loads for the particular load case by 5.0 say, and
then re-do the buckling analysis for the combination load case instead. If the
subsequent buckling load factor is 0.90 say, then the final load factor (for the
working load case) is 5.0 x 0.90 = 4.50.
Buckling analysis with plate elements
Because the plates in SPACE GASS are linear elements with no adjustment of
stiffness due to P-delta effects, they will not buckle regardless of the load applied.
614
Analysis
Buckling instabilities
Occasionally, you may find that a requested buckling mode can't be calculated and
"Unstable" appears in the buckling output report. This occurs when a node floats
free due to local buckling of all of the members to which the node is connected.
Sometimes it is possible to avoid this problem and calculate higher order buckling
modes by adding intermediate nodes to the members which have buckled.
Modelling multiple structures in one job
It is sometimes useful to model more than one structure in a single job, however
this is not recommended if you are performing a buckling analysis to obtain
compression effective lengths. The buckling analysis finds the lowest buckling
load factor for the entire model and then calculates the effective lengths for all the
members in the model based on that buckling load factor. For example, if you have
modelled structure A and structure B in one job, and structure A has the lowest
buckling load factor, the effective lengths for structure B will be incorrectly based
on the buckling load factor from structure A. SPACE GASS can't detect if there are
multiple structures in a single model and therefore you need to put them into
separate jobs if you want to use effective lengths from a buckling analysis.
615
Running a buckling analysis

You can run a buckling analysis by selecting "Buckling Analysis" from the
Analysis menu.
The input data requirements for a buckling analysis are the same as those for a
static analysis. No extra buckling data is required.
You do not have to run a static analysis before a buckling analysis.
Load case list

analysed.
For the fastest analysis time you should generally analyse only the load cases that
can occur in reality. For example, there is no point in analysing a live load case on
its own because it can't occur in real life without being combined with dead load.
616
Analysis
This means that you should generally analyse just the combination load cases and
not the primary load cases that the combinations are made from.
click the
Tolerance
The accuracy to which the buckling load factors will be calculated. For example, a
tolerance of 0.01 means that the load factors will be within +/- 0.01 of the exact
value.
Each extra decimal place in the tolerance will increase the number of
iterations per mode by 3 or 4. For example, a tolerance of 0.001 will require 3 or 4
more iterations per mode than a tolerance of 0.01.
Load factor upper limit
The upper limit above which the buckling analysis will no longer search for
buckling load factors. Once this limit is reached, the analysis will stop, even if not
all requested buckling modes have been calculated.
617

Load factor lower limit
The lower limit below which the buckling analysis will not search for buckling
load factors.
Buckling modes
The number of buckling modes that are required. Normally only the first buckling
mode is of interest, because beyond that the structure has usually collapsed and
further modes are of academic use only.
If the first buckling mode is caused by local buckling of a slender member or group
of members rather than the frame as a whole, the model should be changed so that
overall frame buckling occurs instead. One way of achieving this could be to
change the slender members into tension-only members so that they become
disabled rather than buckle (see also Members).
You should view the buckling mode shapes graphically to determine whether or
not overall frame buckling has occurred.
If you have defined combination load cases that contain other load cases which
dont yet exist, this option will detect and report them. It is optional because some
users prefer to have a standard set of combination load cases that contain primary
load cases which are just ignored during the analysis if they dont exist.
resistance from interconnecting members, restraints or constraints can be
618
Analysis
Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy
The buckling analysis is complete when the buckling load factor has reached the
desired accuracy (as specified by the tolerance), however it is possible that at this
point the buckling mode shapes are not totally accurate. Mode shape accuracy can
be achieved by turning on the "Extra iterations for mode shape accuracy" option,
however because buckling mode shapes are only used as a visual aid to assess the
buckling location and its shape then the extra iterations and analysis time involved
is not usually warranted.
Solver
recommended setting for all static analyses.
One current restriction of the Paradise solver is that it doesn't generate buckling
mode shapes and so if mode shapes are essential then you should use the
Wavefront solver instead. This restriction is likely to be removed in a future
version. Note that buckling mode shapes are for visual purposes only and do not
affect the calculation of the buckling load factor, the member effective lengths or
any of the other modules that use the buckling analysis results.
can be used if the Paradise solver is unable to obtain a solution or if you require
buckling mode shapes.
limited use.
Optimization method
modes as follows.
1. No optimization
619



Optimization axis
proceed.
Axial force distribution
The buckling properties of a structure are largely dependent on the axial force in
the members. The buckling analysis module performs its own static analysis first to
determine the axial force distribution and you can nominate either linear or nonlinear for this initial static analysis phase. Generally, the choice between linear or
non-linear doesn't significantly affect the buckling load factor and, because linear is
faster, it is recommended for most frames. Naturally, some structures, such as those
containing cable members, which cannot be analysed linearly, require you to select
non-linear.
620
Analysis
When all of the information has been entered, the buckling analysis module
calculates the buckling load factor and mode shapes for each load case and then
saves them ready for graphical or text report output.
right mouse button.
Because plates are linear elements, they will not buckle regardless of the
load applied.
621
Buckling analysis results

At the end of the buckling analysis, a message showing the lowest buckling load
factor is displayed as follows.
This gives an instant indication of whether the buckling capacity of the frame has
been exceeded or not. A buckling load factor of less than SF x 1.0, where SF is a
suitable safety factor would be unsatisfactory.
Based on the buckling load factor for each load case, a simple formula is then used
to calculate the member effective lengths as described in "Buckling effective
lengths". The effective lengths can then be automatically transferred into the steel
member design modules.
For a more detailed list of the buckling load factors and member effective lengths
for each load case, you should view or print a report that includes the buckling load
factors and/or buckling effective lengths.
If you get buckling load factors that are below the minimum allowable value (eg.
shown as "<0.001" when the minimum allowable value is 0.001), this could
indicate an instability problem rather than a buckling problem. It is even more
likely to be an instability problem if the low buckling load factors occur in every
load case.
By displaying the buckling mode shapes, you can generally see where the buckling
would occur, however some models show no movement at all. In these cases, the
buckling generally involves node rotations without any translations, making it
difficult to see the source of the buckling. The buckling load factor report,
however, gives the locations of the maximum node translations and rotations which
can help to identify where the buckling is happening.
Load Load Node at Node at
622
Analysis
Case Mode Factor Tolerance Iterations Max Trans Max Rotn
1 1 3.207 0.008 11 4 (X) 3 (Z)
2 1 0.801 0.008 8 4 (X) 3 (Z)
In the above example, the buckling mode involves translations in the X-axis
direction and rotations about the Z-axis.
If you want to display any higher order mode shapes, just press the "Filters" toolbar
button and then list the mode shapes required in the "Buckling modes" field.
If a frame appears to buckle in the wrong direction, it is because the

buckling mode shape diagrams are only intended to show the mode of buckling and
not its direction or magnitude.
When displaying the buckling mode shapes
graphically, SPACE GASS makes no attempt to show the member curvature
between end nodes (ie. the node positions are simply joined by straight lines). You
can, however improve the look of the mode shapes by adding intermediate nodes to
the members.
623
Analysis warnings and errors

SPACE GASS performs numerous checks for illegal and inconsistent data. Many
of these checks are done in the data input modules and any errors detected there
must be corrected immediately. However, some errors and warnings such as
instabilities and ill-conditioning cannot be detected until the analysis phase.
If any errors in the data are detected, SPACE GASS lists them on the screen, aborts
the analysis and then returns to the main menu, ready for correction of the
offending items. Warnings are displayed at the end of the analysis and do not cause
it to abort.
Node # not found for member #
A member is connected to a non-existent node.
Direction node # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent direction node.
Section # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent section property.
Section # has impractically large section properties for the frame size
The properties of a section are too large for the frame dimensions. This error is
often due to the section properties being input in the wrong units.
Material # not found for member #
A member has referenced a non-existent material property.
Member # has zero length
A member is connected to two nodes with identical coordinates.
Restraint applied to non-existent node #
A restraint has been applied to a node which doesnt exist.
Slave node # not found
A non-existent node has been specified as a slave node.
Master node # not found for slave node #
A non-existent node has been specified as a master node.
624
Analysis
A constraint has been applied to a restrained DOF on node #
Any restrained degrees of freedom for a slave node cannot be constrained to a
master node.
Node # has been specified as both slave and master
A master node cannot be the slave of another master node.
Member # with PA<>0.0 must have identical Y and Z axis fixities at an end
Because of the difficulty involved in calculating the stiffness matrix for a member
with a non-zero principal angle when the member end fixities are about its nonprincipal axes, the Y and Z fixities at an end must be the same.
Cable member # must not have any translational fixities released
For stability, cable members must have all of their translational fixities fixed.
Cable member # must not have member offsets
Cable members cannot have member offsets.
Cable member # must not have semi-rigid joints
Cable members are always assumed to be pin-ended, and hence cannot have semirigid joints.
Member # must not have shear fixity released with semi-rigid joints
Members with semi-rigid joints cannot have shear fixities released. This restriction
only applies when the semi-rigid joint and the shear fixity act in the same plane.
Node load on non-existent or dummy node #, load case #
A node load has been applied to a non-existent node.
Prescribed displacement on non-existent or dummy node #, load case #
A prescribed displacement has been applied to a non-existent node.
Concentrated load on non-existent member #, load case #
A concentrated member load has been applied to a non-existent member.
Distributed force on non-existent member #, load case #
A distributed member force has been applied to a non-existent member.
Distributed torsion on non-existent member #, load case #
A distributed member torsion has been applied to a non-existent member.
Prestress load on non-existent member #, load case #
625

A prestress load has been applied to a non-existent member.
Prescribed displacement applied to end of cable member #, load case #
Nodes at the ends of cable members must not have prescribed displacements
applied to them.
Prescribed displacement applied to released restraint on node #, load case #
Prescribed displacements can only be applied to node degrees of freedom which
are restrained.
Prescribed displ. applied to master constraint DOF on node #, load case #
Prescribed displacements must not be applied to master node degrees of freedom
which are constraining a slave node.
Concentrated load is off the end of member #, load case #
A concentrated member load has been located beyond the ends of the member.
Concentrated load applied to cable member #, load case #
Concentrated member loads must not be applied to cable members.
Distributed force is off the end of member #, load case #
A distributed member force has been located beyond the ends of the member.
UDL must act over full length of cable member #, load case #
Uniformly distributed loads applied to cable members must act over the entire
cable length.
Trapezoidal load applied to cable member #, load case #
Distributed trapezoidal loads must not be applied to cable members.
Distributed torsion is off the end of member #, load case #
A distributed member torsion has been located beyond the ends of the member.
Distributed torsion applied to cable member #, load case #
Distributed torsion loads must not be applied to cable members.
Load case # has been specified as both primary and combination
Load cases can be primary or combination, but not both.
Combination # contains non-primary load case #
Combination load cases can only be made up from primary load cases.
Combination load cases cannot be further combined.
626
Analysis
None of the load cases selected exist

There are no valid load cases in the load cases list selected for analysis.
Insufficient space on drive C, # bytes extra required
The analysis module has detected that there is not enough space left on the hard
disk for the analysis to run to completion. Extra space equal to the number of bytes
shown is required. You should terminate the analysis, remove any unwanted data
files or programs and then try the analysis again.
Cable member # is ill-conditioned in load case #
The program was unable to accurately calculate the cable geometry and stiffness
matrix.
Member # has buckled in load case #, axial load = 123.23. Continue?
During a non-linear analysis, the program was unable to calculate the stiffness
matrix for the member because its Euler buckling load was exceeded. If you
continue, the member is simply disabled for the rest of the analysis iterations. Note
that this message is the result of a simple local member buckling check only.
Overall frame buckling or buckling of multiple members is not considered! The
local member buckling messages can be suppressed by clearing the appropriate
check box at the start of the analysis.
Instability found at member # in load case #
An instability has been detected at a specified member. The instability could be
located at either end of the member.
Not all load steps were completed
The load was applied in more than one step, however it was stopped before all
steps were completed. Because the full load was not reached, the results cannot be
used for the load cases being analysed.
WARNING: Possible ill-conditioning detected, check reactions
Ill-conditioning may have been detected. If the reactions equal the applied loads
then no ill-conditioning has occurred. This message is only a warning which can be
suppressed from the output reports if necessary.
WARNING: Analysis did not reach desired convergence in all load cases
The level of convergence in a non-linear analysis has not reached the required
convergence accuracy for some load cases. This is not necessarily fatal if the
convergence achieved is close to that requested. Note also that some of the load
627

cases may have fully converged and this can be checked by looking at the output
reports.
628
Steel Member Design

Steel member design
Throughout this chapter it can be assumed that all information applies
equally to all of the supported steel member design codes unless specifically stated
otherwise.
This chapter describes in detail the data required to be input before a design or
check can proceed. It discusses the internal methods, philosophies and assumptions
that the program uses as it designs or checks members, and it explains how to
initiate the actual design or checking process once the steel member design data
has been input.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Before you use the steel member design module, you should read all of the
assumptions described later in this chapter (see also "Steel member design/check
assumptions") to verify that its performance and capabilities are adequate for
your situation. It is up to you to determine whether or not the steel member
design module is suitable for your requirements.
The steel member design module is a general purpose design and code checking
program which reads the frame analysis output data, calculates the critical location
and load case for each member and then selects the most suitable steel member size
from a library of standard sections. Alternatively, you may specify a steel member
size to be checked and the program determines whether or not the member is
adequate. For a given frame, you can specify any selected number of members to
be designed or checked.
The design module is also capable of passing the designed steel sizes back into the
frame analysis data and re-analysing the structure. This process can be iterated
until the results converge. It usually only takes two or three iterations.
During the design/check phase SPACE GASS automatically calculates the load
factor for limit states codes or combined stress ratio for working stress codes at
numerous stations along each member. It considers yielding of the cross section,
lateral buckling, slenderness ratios, and all possible combinations of shear, tension,
compression and bending for both in-plane and out-of-plane failure.
629
The steel member design module doesnt consider torsional effects.

After all specified members have been designed or checked, a detailed report can
be produced for each member showing the critical location or segment on the
member, the critical load case, section properties, effective lengths, and the
complete computations involved in the design. Sections of the report can be
suppressed if required. A color-coded graphical representation of the design/check
results can also be displayed.
The SPACE GASS steel member design module can handle most types of steel
members including beams, columns, ties, struts, braces, and members subjected to
combinations of axial loads, shear forces and bending moments (uniaxial or
biaxial).
All references to BS5950 in this document apply to BS5950-1:2000. Although
SPACE GASS still has a design module for BS5950:1990, it is now obsolete and is
not referred to in this document.
The AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and HK CP2011
modules assume that second order effects have been taken into account by a second
order elastic analysis. Moment magnification is not considered. The NZS3404
module uses the "Other than capacity" design method with non-seismic ductility
categories only.
Refer to "Steel member input methods" for details on how to input steel member
design data.
Refer to "Running a steel member design" for details on how to perform a steel
member design.
Refer to "Steel member design results" for details and interpretation of the results
of a steel member design.
630
Steel Member Design
Steel member input methods

Before you can perform a steel member design, you must define each of the steel
members you wish to design and then input some design parameters for each of
them. This can be done in three ways as follows.
1.

This option performs a quick initial input of the steel members and their design
parameters for the entire model or for any part of it that you wish to select.
After the quick initial input, you can refine the design parameters for each steel
member by using a steel member input form or datasheet (see items 2 and 3
below). You can also skip the auto-create step completely if you prefer to input the
steel design data from scratch using a steel member input form or datasheet.
2.

This option allows you select a steel member graphically and then define or edit its
design parameters via a form. It is restricted to one steel member at a time.
3.

This option lets you select one or more steel members graphically and then define
or edit their design parameters via a datasheet. It can handle multiple steel
members, however they must have been previously defined using methods 1 or 2
above.
Alternatively, you can select "Steel Member Design Input-Datasheet" from the
Design menu to open a datasheet and input or edit design parameters for steel
members regardless if they have previously been defined or not.
The recommended procedure is to use the auto-create tool to perform a quick initial
setup of the steel members and then refine them using a steel member input form or
datasheet.
Each of the three input methods are explained in detail in the following sections.
If you want to have multiple steel members with identical design parameters, you
can copy the design parameters from one steel member to many others by using the
"Copy steel member properties" tool. Note, however, that you cant copy to steel
members that havent been defined yet.
631

This tool automatically creates multiple steel design members (also known as
"design groups") from a selection of analysis members. Each generated steel design
member can contain multiple analysis members connected end-to-end, provided
they are of the same cross section, are generally collinear and dont extend past a
major axis support.
You can access the auto-create steel members tool by selecting "Steel Member
Design Input-Auto create multiple steel members" from the Design menu or
selecting "Auto-create multiple steel members" from the floating menu.
You can select analysis members from different locations throughout the model
and with different section properties, and SPACE GASS will automatically sort
through them and group them appropriately into steel design members.
You can even select the entire model and have all of the steel design members
created automatically. However, you should check the generated members to
ensure that their effective lengths, restraints and other data are correct.
The numbering convention adopted by this operation is such that the number of
each generated steel design member is set to match the number of the first analysis
member that it contains. This makes it easy to keep track of how the steel design
members relate to the analysis members. However, please be aware that any
existing steel design members that dont follow this convention will be overwritten
if their numbers clash with the new steel design members being generated. Of
course, any steel design members that contain the selected analysis members will
also be overwritten during the generation.
After you have selected the analysis members to be grouped into steel design
members, click the right mouse button and select "Auto-create multiple steel
members" from the floating menu (or select "Ok" if you initiated the operation
from the menu). You can then specify restraint, effective length and other data for
the generated steel members via the forms shown below.
632
Steel Member Design
Specify Flange Restraints Manually

Select this option if you want to directly specify all of the flange restraints along
the generated steel members in the next form. Otherwise, the flange restraints will
be placed in accordance with the data you specify in this form.
End Flange Restraints
These are the flange restraints that will be placed at the ends of the generated steel
members.
633
Intermediate Flange Restraints

Flange restraints will be placed at the intermediate nodes along the generated steel
members depending on which options you select in this area of the form. Your
choices are any or all of the following:
1.
Apply flange restraints to all intermediate nodes

If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed on
both flanges at every intermediate node.
2.
Apply flange restraints to nodes connected to other members

If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed at
the intermediate nodes that are connected to other members. You have the option
of ignoring interconnecting members that lie in the plane of the steel member (ie.
in the plane of the steel members web). You can also control which flanges to
which the restraints are applied.
3.
Apply flange restraints to restrained intermediate nodes

If selected, intermediate flange restraints of the type you specify will be placed at
the intermediate nodes that have analysis restraints applied to them. Analysis
restraints that only apply in the direction of the plane of the steel members web
are ignored.
Note that this only applies to normal analysis restraints and not the general
restraint.
Tolerances
The tolerances affect whether or not a selection of analysis members are suitable
for grouping into a steel design member. A selection of analysis members of the
same cross section connected end-to-end will be able to be grouped into a steel
design member provided the bend angle, twist angle or step distance between
adjacent analysis members do not exceed the tolerances you specify.
Delete all Existing Design Groups First
If you select this option, all steel design members will be deleted before the new
steel members are generated. Otherwise, only those steel design members that
contain the selected analysis members will be deleted before the generation.
634
Steel Member Design

After clicking the "Next" button, the following form appears. For detailed
information about the data in the form, refer to "Steel member design data".
All steel design members generated will be created with the data that you specify in
this form.
After the steel design members have been created, you should check each one,
paying particular attention to the following:
1.
You should split any steel design member that extends past an interconnecting
member that effectively acts as a major axis support point for the design member.
635

2.
If you have specified that bending effective lengths are to be calculated

automatically based on the flange restraints, they will be calculated such that they
never substantially exceed the actual length of the steel design member. If the
unrestrained flange length is longer than this (ie. the bending effective length is
longer than the steel design member length) then you should specify them
manually rather than having them calculated automatically.
You can show the steel design members graphically by clicking the
button
near the bottom of the side toolbar. They show up as thickened lines that are drawn
slightly shorter than their actual length so that you can easily see where they start
and finish.
Steel design members can be viewed or edited graphically on an individual basis as
described in "Steel member input form", "Steel member input datasheet" or via the
steel member design datasheet.
For an overview of the various methods available for inputting steel member
design data, refer to "Steel member input methods".
636
Steel Member Design

This tool allows you to graphically define and edit steel design members (also
known as "design groups"). Note that multiple steel design members can be defined
in a single operation using the "Auto-create steel members" tool.
You can access the steel member input form by selecting "Steel Member Design
Input-Graphical" from the Design menu or selecting some members and then "Steel
Member Design Input (Form)" from the floating menu.
It is recommended that you initially generate all the steel design members using the
"Auto-create steel members" tool and then check and edit them on an individual
basis using the procedure described here.
Each steel design member contains one or more analysis members connected endto-end. After you have selected the analysis members that you wish to include in a
steel design member, click the right mouse button and select "Steel Member
Design Input (Form)" from the floating menu (or select "Ok" if you initiated the
operation from the menu).
Because the top flange for a steel design group is taken to be the same as the top
flange for the first member in the design group, it is important to be able to control
which member comes first in the design group. Flange restraint positions are also
referenced from the end of the first member in the design group.
If you are inputting a new design group, the member that you select first will be
placed first in the design group (assuming that it is at either end of the group). If
you want to select a "first" member, you should pick it directly or ensure that it is
the only member selected if you use a window.
If you use a window and select a group of members initially, then the end one with
the lowest member number will be placed first in the design group.
In the steel member form that appears, type in the data for the selected design
group, and then click the form Ok button.
For detailed information about the data in the form, refer to "Steel member design
data".
637
"Use Previous" button

Click the "Use Previous" button to set all the data in the form to the same as when
the form was previously used.
You can show the steel design members graphically by clicking the
button
near the bottom of the side toolbar. They show up as thickened lines that are drawn
slightly shorter than their actual length so that you can easily see where they start
and finish.
638
Steel Member Design
You can also show the flange restraints graphically by clicking the
button near
the bottom of the side toolbar. It enables you to see exactly where the flange
restraints are and whether they are on the correct flange or not.
639

This tool allows you to graphically edit steel design members (also known as
"design groups") that were previously defined using the "Auto-create steel
members" and/or "Steel member input form" tools.
You can access the steel member input datasheet by selecting "Steel Member
Design Input-Datasheet" from the Design menu or selecting some members and
then "Steel Member Design Input (Datasheet)" from the floating menu.
After you have selected one or more steel design members, click the right mouse
button and select "Steel Member Design Input (Datasheet)" from the floating menu
(or select "Ok" if you initiated the operation from the menu).
For detailed information about the data in the datasheet, refer to "Steel member
design data".
640
Steel Member Design
Copy steel member properties

This tool lets you copy the design properties of a steel design member (also known
as a "design group") to a selection of destination steel design members.
Note that the properties can only be copied to members that have already been set
up as steel design members.
1.
Select the source member that you wish to copy the properties of, click the right
mouse button and then select "Copy Steel Member Properties" from the floating
menu that appears.
OR
Select "Copy Steel Member Properties" from the Design menu and then select the
source member that you wish to copy the properties of.
2.
Select one or more destination members by picking them individually or by

putting a selection window around them and then click the right mouse button and
click "Ok".
3.
The steel design properties of the source member will then be copied to the
selected destination members.
4.
Select another source member, or press ESC or the right mouse button to exit from
the tool.
After the copy, you should check the destination members to ensure that the
effective lengths, flange restraints and other data are appropriate. In particular,
check that the effective lengths are correct and that the flange restraints are not
located off the ends of the steel design member.
641
Steel member design data

This section describes the steel member design data that is required to be input
before you can design and/or check steel members that are part of a frame analysis
model.
642
Steel Member Design

The form that appears when you input steel member design data graphically is
shown above. The steel member datasheet contains the same information in a
different format.
Group
Each steel design member is made up of one or more analysis members. Hence, the
concept of steel design groups is introduced. A steel design group usually
represents a single piece of steel in the real structure. It could be modelled as a
single member or a number of members in the analysis model.
In order to make it easier to relate member
numbers to group numbers, it is often a good idea to give the design group the
same number as the first member in the group. Otherwise, there is sometimes a
tendency to confuse member numbers and group numbers when scanning the
design output data. By default, SPACE GASS will give a design group a number
corresponding to the first of the members selected (when performing a graphical
steel frame data input). You can, of course, change this if you wish.
Description
An optional brief description of the steel design group.
Member list
A list of analysis members to be combined into the steel design group. This is often
only one member in each group.
Because the top flange for a steel design group is
taken to be the same as the top flange for the first member in the design group, it is
important to control which member comes first in the design group. Flange
restraint positions are also referenced from the end of the first member in the
design group.
See also Member groups.
Strength grade
The strength grade for members can be set to normal or high. The actual yield
strengths are taken from the standard section libraries supplied with SPACE GASS.
All of these libraries can be viewed or edited (see also Section libraries).
Choices are:
Normal,
High.
643
Units
The compression effective lengths and flange restraint positions can be specified as
actual distances or as ratios of the design group length.
Choices are:
Actual,
Ratio.
Load height position

The load height position is used to allow for the case when a member is subjected
to a downwards load acting above its shear centre causing an increased tendency
for the flange to buckle laterally (out-of-plane). The load height position can be set
to "Top flange" if this occurs, or "Shear centre" if the predominant load is
positioned at the shear centre or below such that it resists lateral buckling of the
flange.
Choices are:
Shear centre,
Top flange.
The load height position affects the value of the load height factor kl which is used
to calculate the bending effective length of the member.
Destabilizing and stabilizing loads
See also Load height factor.
644
Steel Member Design
Scan code
In order to control the types of steel sections that the program selects during the
course of a design, a library scan code is required. This allows you to select the
types of sections that should only be considered for each member. For example,
you could use it to tell the program that only I-sections were to be considered for
the design of a portal frame column. Without the library scan code the program
would simply choose the lightest adequate steel section from the library, regardless
of its type or shape.
The library scan code is simply a list of up to four characters that contains the
group codes of sections that are to be considered during the design of a member.
You can input the scan code directly or click the "Select" button and then choose
the section types you require and the scan code will be created for you.
Compression effective lengths (Lc major and minor)
These are the effective lengths for overall buckling about the major and minor axes
due to axial compression. Depending on the "Units" selected, the Lc values may be
expressed as an absolute length or as a ratio of the total group length.
Compression effective lengths can be calculated from a buckling analysis, however
you can elect to input them directly if you prefer. To have them calculated, select
the "Calculate from Buckling Analysis" check box. Of course to have Lc
calculated, you must have the buckling analysis module (it is not a standard
program feature) and you must run a buckling analysis before you can run the steel
member design.
Having the Lc values calculated automatically is more efficient than specifying
them directly because case specific Lc values can be calculated for each design
load case. If you specify Lc values directly then they are used for every load case.
If the Lc values are not being transferred automatically from a buckling analysis,
for design groups that consist of a number of analysis members connected end-toend, you should use the MAXIMUM (not the sum!) of its individual analysis
member effective lengths.
The "Braced in Position at Both Ends of Group" check boxes indicate whether or
not the group is braced for each of the major and minor axis directions. If you
specify that the group is braced then its compression effective length in the
direction you specify will not be allowed to exceed the overall group length,
regardless of whether it was calculated from a buckling analysis or specified
645

directly by you. Because this can substantially reduce the effective lengths used in
the design, please use this option with care!
It is sometimes useful to model more than one structure in a single job,

however this is not recommended if you are performing a buckling analysis to
obtain compression effective lengths. The buckling analysis finds the lowest
buckling load factor for the entire model and then calculates the effective lengths
for all the members in the model based on that buckling load factor. For example,
if you have modelled structure A and structure B in one job, and structure A has
the lowest buckling load factor, the effective lengths for structure B will be
incorrectly based on the buckling load factor from structure A. SPACE GASS can't
detect if there are multiple structures in a single model and therefore you need to
put them into separate jobs if you want to use effective lengths from a buckling
analysis.
During the design phase, the compression effective lengths as calculated or

defined by you may be adjusted depending on parameters you specify at the start of
the design phase. For more information about this, refer to Running a steel
member design.
For single angle sections, the compression effective lengths must be input
relative to the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISCLRFD, AISC-ASD, HK CP2011 and EUROCODE 3, they are optionally converted
to the principal axes during the design/check phase. To prevent this conversion,
refer to Running a steel member design.
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the compression
effective lengths are referred to as "Lc major" and "Lc minor" in this document
and in the data entry parts of the program. However, in the design output reports,
they are changed to match the notation of the design code that was used.
See also Buckling effective lengths.
Bending effective lengths (Lb +ve and ve)
Bending effective lengths for positive moments (Lb +ve) and for negative moments
(Lb ve) are normally calculated based on the flange restraints that you specify,
646
Steel Member Design

however you can elect to input them directly if you prefer. To have them
calculated, select the "Calculate from Flange Restraints" check box.
During the design, if you have elected to have the bending effective length
calculated, it is taken as the length of the segment under consideration multiplied
by three additional factors kt twist factor), kl (load height factor) and kr (lateral
rotation factor) such that Lb = Lseg x kt x kl x kr.
Alternatively, if you have specified the bending effective length directly then the
specified value is used without modification.
kt, kl and kr are fully explained in AS4100/NZS3404 clause 5.6.3. In AS1250,
SABS0162, BS5950, AS3990, HK CP2011 and EUROCODE 3 there are no kt kl
and kr factors and so SPACE GASS uses the rules of AS1250 clause 5.9,
SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3.5, AS3990 clause 5.9, HK CP2011
clause 8.3.4 or EUROCODE 3 clause F.1.2 to calculate equivalent kt, kl and kr
factors which, when multiplied together, produce an overall effective length factor
kb.
In order to cater for all design code naming conventions, the bending
effective length is referred to as "Lb" in this document and in the data entry parts
of the program. However, in the design output reports, it is changed to match the
notation of the design code that was used.
See also Twist factor.
See also Load height factor.
See also Lateral rotation factor.
Flange restraints
Flange restraint positions are referenced from the end of the first member in a
design group. SPACE GASS assumes that there is a restraint at each end of a group
and you should therefore specify the intermediate restraint positions only.
Restraint positions should be specified independently for the top and bottom
flanges. Up to 100 intermediate positions can be specified for each flange. If there
are no intermediate restraints for a particular flange then the restraint positions field
should be left blank.
When specifying restraint positions, you can use @s to specify relative positions
or groups of equally spaced positions. For example, restraint positions of
647

1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 could be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6, or positions
of 1.2,1.8,2.7,3.3 could be specified as 1.2,1@0.6,2.7,1@0.6.
Depending on the "Units" selected, the restraint positions may be expressed as an
absolute distance or as a ratio of the total group length.
Flange restraint types must be specified for each intermediate restraint position and
for the two ends of the design group. Refer to "Flange restraints" for restraint
definitions.
Choices are:
Full (F)
Partial (P)
Lateral (L)
Full and rotational (R)
Partial and rotational (S)
Unrestrained at end (U)
Continuous lateral restraint (C)
Ignore segment (I)
The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or zaxis if the section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group
as a whole is defined such that it is the same as the top flange of the first member
in the group.
You can verify graphically which is the top flange by clicking the
button near
the bottom of the side toolbar. It displays a small triangle that points to the top
flange of each member.
For single angle sections, flange restraints must be input relative to the nonprincipal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISCASD, they are converted to the principal axes during the design/check phase.
See also Flange restraints.
See also Effective flange restraints.
648
Steel Member Design

Consider eccentric effects
For members that have eccentric end connections, you can elect to consider or
ignore the resulting eccentric moments. Eccentric moments are only added if they
increase the normal design moments.
Note that even if you select this check box, you can disable eccentric effects
globally by deselecting the eccentric effects check box in the steel member
design/check form.
Maximum bolts in cross section
In order to calculate the effective web and flange areas, and subsequent member
capacities, the presence of bolt holes at the member ends must be taken into
account. SPACE GASS requires you to estimate the number and diameter of bolts
per cross section at the ends of each member to be designed or checked. A bolt
count of zero indicates that the member end is welded.
During the design, SPACE GASS checks to see that the bolts per cross section
specified can be fitted into the cross section. If not, the number is reduced to the
maximum that can be accommodated. If the member is too small to take even a
single bolt then the connection is assumed to be welded.
Bolt diameter
End connection bolt diameter.
Angle type
In order to define the geometry of single or double angle sections, SPACE GASS
requires the angle section type to be input.
Choices are:
Single angle,
Double angle with short legs connected,
Double angle with long legs connected,
Double angle starred (equal angles only).
Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the individual
angle sections.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles are
connected together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half of the
design axial compressive force for the combined section does not exceed the
649

compressive capacity of each angle section considered individually using an
effective length (for buckling of the sections away from each other) equal to the
distance between connection points.
The AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and HK CP2011
modules convert double angle sections into the equivalent Tee section and then
treat them as a solid Tee shape. They do not support double starred angles.
Angle section orientation
All of the possible arrangements involving single and double angles are shown in
the diagrams above. It is important to note that the major axis of a single or double
angle section is assumed to be parallel to the short leg(s) of the section as shown in
the diagrams.
650
Steel Member Design
For double equal angles, the long leg is assumed to be the vertical
leg in the diagrams above. Note that in SPACE GASS 10 and earlier,
double equal angle sections with long legs connected were adjusted
internally and treated as though their short legs were connected. This
adjustment was removed in SPACE GASS 11 and later versions.
The design procedure for angle sections is considerably more complicated than for
most other sections. This is due to the significant moments generated by eccentric
end connections which cannot usually be avoided when working with angles.
SPACE GASS is capable of taking these effects into account for both single and
double angle sections.
When designing/checking single or double angle sections for AS1250,

SABS0162 or AS3990, SPACE GASS considers only axial forces and shears.
Normal bending moments are not considered. The only moments considered are
those due to the eccentric end connections. This is not the case with the other
design modules. They consider all axial forces, shears and moments together with
any extra eccentric moments (if appropriate).
Furthermore, for single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints
must be input relative to the non-principal axes. For AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404,
AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, they are converted to the principal axes
during the design/check phase.
End connection
For non-symmetric members subjected to axial loads, such as angle sections,
channels and Tees, the program needs to know which leg, flange or web is
connected so that the extra moments due to possible eccentric end connections can
be calculated (if appropriate).
Choices are:
Concentric,
Flange(s) (for I, H, T or channel sections),
Web (for channel or T sections),
Angle short leg,
Angle long leg (vertical leg for equal angles before being flipped
or a direction angle, direction node or direction axis applied).
651

Design criteria
Most designs aim to minimize the structure weight, however if you are constrained
to a certain member depth then you can elect to minimize the member depth
instead.
Choices are:
Weight,
Depth.
Use Previous button

Click the "Use Previous" button to set all the data in the form to the same as when
the form was previously used.
See also Steel member input methods.
See also Steel member design text.
See also Running a steel member design.
652
Steel Member Design
Steel member design sign conventions

The steel member design module deals only with the member cross section axes.
The longitudinal axis of the member is of no relevance.
For most section types, steel member design input and output data always relates to
the major and minor principal cross section axes. The only exception is for single
angle sections where the effective lengths and flange restraints must be input
relative to the non-principal axes (the axes parallel to the angle legs) for all design
codes.
During the design phase, the data for single angle sections is converted to the
principal axes for AS4100, BS5950, NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISCASD. Output reports for those codes also show the data in principal axes for single
angle sections.
See also Column and beam Tees.
653
Member groups
In a typical structure, the actual beams, columns, struts, ties, etc. are modelled in
SPACE GASS as members connected together at nodes. Sometimes, however it is
convenient and often necessary for members to have nodes placed at intermediate
positions along them so that they are subdivided into smaller members. This can
occur when another member intersects a member at an intermediate point or when
a node is simply placed at an intermediate point so that deflections, forces and
moments are calculated at that point during the analysis.
Quite often the placement of intermediate nodes along a member is done purely for
frame analysis modelling purposes rather than due to an actual discontinuity or
connection in the real structure. For this reason, SPACE GASS allows you to group
frame analysis members together and design them as though they are a single entity
(as they are in the real structure). In the remainder of this manual a "design group"
represents an actual member in the real structure which consists of one or more
frame analysis members grouped together end-to-end.
Note that in the following discussion, members in a group can be listed in

either direction. For example, "1,3,8,5" and "5,8,3,1" are both suitable. The
direction can, however affect the definition of the top flange (see also Flange
restraints).
Consider, for example, a simply supported beam with a node at each end which is
subjected to an axial compressive force and a uniformly distributed dead load.
When analysed, the deflected shape and bending moment distribution along its
length is calculated by SPACE GASS. If the structural adequacy of this member is
then checked against one of the design codes, various factors are calculated based
on the deflected shape and the bending moment distribution. These factors are then
used in the calculations to determine if the member is adequate or not.
If the same beam is modelled with a third node at midspan, you would still get the
same deflected shape and bending moment distribution, however unless you were
able to group the two halves of the beam together and design them as though they
were a single member you would get a completely different design result. This is
because the factors and the combined actions moments and axial forces would be
based on the deflection and moment distributions for only half of the beam rather
than its full length.
654
Steel Member Design
If a member has been subdivided into smaller members in the analysis

model, it is important that these sub-members are grouped together in the design
model.
The rules for deciding whether or not a run of frame analysis members should be
grouped into a design group are as follows.
1.
Each member in a design group must be rigidly connected to each other end-toend, they must lie generally in a straight line, and they must have the same section
properties.
2.
The length of a design group should not be less than the major axis span.
3.
A design group must be long enough to include all of the flange restraints that
affect its bending effective lengths. Furthermore, under no circumstances should
the design group length be less than the unrestrained lengths of the top and bottom
flanges. This rule is not applicable if the bending effective lengths are specified
directly rather than being calculated.
4.
Each end of a design group should coincide with the physical end of a member or
a significant change in direction of a member, or a support point for a member. It
shouldnt normally extend past a support or past an intersecting member that
effectively acts as a support. "Support" refers to a support for the major axis span.
If it is not possible for all of the above rules to be satisfied then you should
not use SPACE GASS to design the steel members involved.
Consider the following examples, indicating how members in typical frames can be
grouped together.
655
Member grouping for gable portal
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
Group 4:
1,2
3,4,5
6
7,8
Member grouping for flat portal
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
656
1,2
3,4,5,6
7,8
Steel Member Design
Member grouping for truss
Group 1:
2,6,10,14,18,22
Group 2:
4,8,12,16,20,24
Group 3:
1
Group 4:
3
(Some of the non-critical members have not been grouped)
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
The above grouping assumes that local bending of the chords between panel
points is insignificant compared with overall bending between the end supports
(ie. the panel points are not really acting as support points for the chords). If the
chords were effectively spanning L/6 instead of L then the chord members could
not be grouped.
657
Member grouping for multi-storey frame
Group 1:
Group 2:
Group 3:
Group 4:
Group 5:
Group n:
etc...
1
2
3
4
5
n
No grouping of multiple members can occur in this case because each member acts
as a single span. The horizontal beams act as supports for the columns at each floor
and the columns act as supports for the beams.
Note that, if there was no significant axial forces in the beams such that they were
not acting as supports for the columns then the columns could be grouped into one
design group from bottom to top. This would not, however be a common situation.
658
Steel Member Design

Member grouping for continuous beam
Group 1:
Group 2:
1,2,3,4
5,6
659
Flange restraints
Flange restraints must be specified for both top
and bottom flanges at each end of a design group
and at each intermediate restraint position.
Because the positions of the start and finish flange restraints is known, only the
intermediate restraint positions should be specified. However, the end and
intermediate restraint types should be specified.
The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or z-axis if
the section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a group as a
whole is defined such that it is the same as the top flange of the first member in
the group.
You can verify graphically which is the top flange by clicking the
button
near the bottom of the side toolbar. It displays a small triangle that points to the
top flange of each member.
There are two classes of restraint types; those that occur at a discrete point and
those that occur over a continuous length of flange between two point restraints.
The number of point restraint types should exactly match the number of restraint
positions.
When @ multipliers are used in the restraint positions lists, the corresponding
restraint types must have only one character for each @ multiplier. For example,
restraint positions of 1.2,2.4,3.6,4.8,6.0,6.6,7.2,7.8,8.4 with corresponding restraint
types of LLLLLPPPP could be specified as 5@1.2,4@0.6 and LP. If the restraint
types were LLPLLPPPP, however then they would have to be specified as
2@1.2,3.6,2@1.2,4@0.6 and LPLP.
SPACE GASS accepts six point flange restraint types and two continuous flange
restraint types. They are defined as follows. Note that these definitions are slightly
different to the ones in the design codes because the code definitions apply to the
cross section rather than to each flange. The cross section restraints are
determined from the flange restraints during the design or check phase.
Full restraint (F)
660
Prevents lateral deflection of the flange to

which it is applied and fully prevents
twist rotation of the section.
Steel Member Design
Partial restraint (P)

which it is applied and partially prevents
twist rotation of the section.
Lateral restraint (L)

which it is applied but is ineffective in
preventing twist rotation of the section. A
lateral restraint can only be considered to
be effective when it is positioned between
full or partial restraints.
Full & rotational restraint (R)
The same as full restraint above but also

with significant restraint against lateral
rotation of the flange about the cross
sections minor axis.
Partial & rotational restraint (S)
The same as partial restraint above but

also with significant restraint against
lateral rotation of the flange about the
cross sections minor axis.
Unrestrained (U)
There is no resistance to lateral deflection

of the flange to which it is applied or
twist rotation of the section. This can only
be used at the end of a design group.
An "unrestrained" end does not necessarily imply a cantilever. Flange

restraints are independent of the member support system. Cantilevers or beams
with supported ends could be restrained or unrestrained.
The following flange restraint types do not occur at a point but are continuous
between two adjacent point flange restraints.
Continuous lateral restraint (C)

which it is applied but is ineffective in
preventing twist rotation of the section. A
continuous lateral restraint can only be
considered to be effective when it is
positioned between full or partial
661

restraints.
Ignore segment (I)
This is not really a flange restraint, rather

it instructs SPACE GASS to skip past the
ignored segment length when designing
or checking. It can be used very
conveniently to ignore the very rigid area
where intersecting members connect so
that members are designed from the face
of intersecting members rather than from
their centrelines. It is also very handy for
when a member is stiffened over part of
its length and is not required to be
designed over that portion.
The above definitions allow for full, partial, lateral or no restraint against twist of
the cross section (about its longitudinal axis) (F,P,L,C or U). They also allow for
full or no restraint against lateral rotation of the critical flange (about the minor
cross section axis) in the presence of full or partial twist restraint (R or S). An extra
restraint condition which is catered for in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, AS3990
and HK CP2011 only, that provides partial restraint against lateral rotation of the
critical flange is not supported by SPACE GASS.
For single angle sections, it is unclear whether or not lateral restraints

applied to either leg are effective in providing any restraint to the section.
Consequently, you should be very careful when applying lateral restraints to
single angle sections and you should use them only if you are sure they are
effective in restraining the section. SPACE GASS will apply them if you specify
them and so the decision about whether or not they should be used is entirely up
to you.
Note that the design/check calculations are based on the effective cross section
restraint rather than the restraint on a particular flange. The effective cross
section restraint depends on which flange is the critical one and on what flange
restraints are applied to the critical and the non-critical flanges. Refer to
"Effective flange restraints" for more information.
The following diagrams are a collection of some fairly typical support and fly
brace connection details. The type of restraint that applies to each flange is shown
as either "full", "partial", "lateral" or "unrestrained". Note that the diagrams apply
662
Steel Member Design

regardless of whether or not rotational restraints also exists. The terms "full" or
"partial" could also read "full and rotational" or "partial and rotational" in each of
the diagrams.
663
Flange restraint types
664
Steel Member Design

Consider, for example, the portal frame below. The roof bracing system laterally
braces each rafter at the eaves and apex. Purlins are positioned at ninth points along
each rafter and fly braces are attached to each third purlin at rafter third points.
Girts are positioned at the mid-height of each column.
Portal frame flange restraints
We will assume that the roof sheeting has enough rigidity to allow the purlins to
prevent lateral deflection of the rafter top flange. Note that if the roof sheeting has
insufficient rigidity to prevent lateral deflection then the fly braces will not be
capable of providing any restraint to the bottom flange and will thus be totally
ineffective.
665

The frame could be set up with four design groups, each containing the following
members.
Group 1:
Group 3:
Group 6:
Group 7:
1,2
3,4,5
6
7,8
When determining flange restraint positions and types, we will assume that the
footing, eave and apex connections provide F (full) restraint to both flanges of each
member framing into them.
There is no fly bracing attached to the wall girts and they provide lateral restraint
only to the outside flange of the columns. Thus, groups 1 and 7 have top flange
restraints of F (full) at each end and L (lateral) at mid height, and bottom flange
restraints of F (full) at each end only. If there had been fly bracing to the girts then
there would also be a bottom flange mid height restraint of L (lateral). Note that the
top flange for groups 1 and 7 is the outside flange because the local y-axis for
members 1, 2, 7 and 8 points towards the outside of the frame.
Similarly, groups 3 and 6 have top flange restraints of F (full) at each end and L
(lateral) at each purlin, and bottom flange restraints of F (full) at each end and L
(lateral) at each fly brace location. Thus, the restraint arrangements for the frame
are:
Groups 1 and 7: FLF
FF
Groups 3 and 6: FLLLLLLLLF
FLLF
(Outside flange)
(Inside flange)
(Top flange)
(Bottom flange)
Note that by applying L (lateral) restraints to both flanges at each fly brace
location we are assuming that the purlins are flexurally stiff enough to fully
prevent twist rotation of the rafter. If they can only partially prevent twist
rotation of the rafter then the group 3 and 6 restraints would become
FLLPLLPLLF on the top flange and FF on the bottom flange.
Restraint Forces
The brace, purlin, girt or other member that provides full, partial or lateral restraint
to the critical flange of a member must be capable of resisting the force required to
provide such restraint. This is not automatically allowed for in the analysis or
design. If you wish to take this into account then you should add the restraint forces
666
Steel Member Design

to your applied loads. The restraint forces are code specific and you should refer to
the appropriate clauses for the design code you are using.
This effect is particularly important for deep beams where the forces required to
restrain the critical flange can be quite high. You should check that your model
is capable of withstanding these forces.
667
Column and beam Tees

Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are therefore assumed to
be lying on their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and
no flipping). They are orientated at right angles to normal beam Tees which have
the major axis parallel to the flange.
Tee section orientation
Note that although beam Tees are supported by all of the steel member design
modules, only the AS4100, NZS3404, AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3,
HK CP2011 and BS5950 modules support column Tees.
See also Steel member design sign conventions.
668
Steel Member Design
Running a steel member design

You can run a steel member design or check by selecting one of the "Steel Member
Design/Check" items from the Design menu.
669
670
Steel Member Design

AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, NZS3404, BS5950 and HK CP2011
require second order effects to be taken into account by either performing a first
order (linear) elastic analysis with moment magnification or a second order
(non-linear) elastic analysis with no moment magnification. Because a nonlinear analysis is generally more efficient and accurate than moment
magnification, and because SPACE GASS has no facilities for moment
magnification, it is recommended that a non-linear analysis be used at all times
for these codes.
Design / Check mode
You can select between design mode or check mode as follows.
1. Design mode
Works its way up from the smallest library section that conforms with the
specified library scan code until it finds a section that passes the code
requirements for the design group being designed.
2. Check mode
Just checks the section from the analysis data for the design group being
checked.
Note that SPACE GASS can now do a steel member check using sections
that haven't been imported from a library, however you must have
specified their steel design properties via the Shape builder.
Member groups list
If you want to consider all design groups (for which steel member design data has
been input) then this field can be left blank, otherwise you should type in a subset
of design groups (separated by commas or dashes).
Section properties list
If you want to consider all design groups (or a subset as specified above),
regardless of section type, leave this field blank. Otherwise, type in a list of section
property numbers (separated by commas or dashes) to limit the number of design
groups.
For example, if the columns in a frame all have section property number 3, you
could instruct the program to design only the columns by entering "3" in the
section properties list. Alternatively, you could type in all of the groups containing
columns in the member groups list above, however this would be much more
cumbersome.
671

Load cases list
If you want to consider all load cases then this field can be left blank, otherwise
you should type in a list of incorporating the load cases (separated by commas or
dashes) that you want considered.
Default section library
During the frame analysis section property input phase, sections that are read from
a library have the library name stored with their section property data. Sections that
have not been read from a library do not have a library name stored with their data.
For members with analysis section properties that were read from a library, the
steel member design module uses that library to get information about the strength
grade, properties, cross section shape, etc. of the member.
For members with analysis section properties that were not read from a library, the
design module uses the default section library to get its information.
Intermediate stations per member
During the design process, each analysis member in a design group is subdivided
into small increments using intermediate member stations. You must define the
number of equally spaced intermediate stations that are to be positioned along each
analysis member.
SPACE GASS automatically adds an extra station at each end of an analysis
member, at each point of application of a concentrated member load, at each flange
restraint position, and at the quarter points between flange restraints. If a design
group consists of more than one analysis member then the member stations are
simply added together to give a total number of stations for the design group as a
whole.
The member stations are the points at which deflections, forces and moments are
calculated. They are also the points at which code checks are carried out. It is
therefore important that there are enough stations located along the design group to
give a good representation of the deflected shape, bending moment diagram and
shear force diagram so that the design results are accurate.
9 intermediate stations for each analysis member is normally quite accurate,
however this can be increased to 75 if required. Note that the speed of the design
process is approximately proportional to the number of stations per design group.
672
Steel Member Design

Compression effective length ratio limit
Because the compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis can sometimes
be overestimated, you can specify an upper limit that will be imposed during the
design phase.
Compression effective lengths from a buckling analysis are limited to Ratio x
GLen, where Ratio is the compression effective length ratio limit that you specify
and GLen is the overall design group length.
Note that this limit applies only to compression effective lengths from a buckling
analysis and not to those specified directly.
Load factor limit or Combined stress ratio limit
Firstly, the terms "load factor" and "combined stress ratio" are defined as follows.
The load factor applies only to AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, AS4600,
BS5950, NZS3404 and HK CP2011. It is the amount by which the design actions
can be increased before the point of failure is reached.
For example, if the steel design returns a load factor of 1.12, you could
theoretically increase your loads by 12%, repeat the analysis and design, and
expect the load factor to reduce to 1.00. This is not always the case however,
because the non-linearity of the analysis means that increasing your loads by 12%
does not guarantee that the design actions will also increase by exactly 12%.
For members designed in accordance with these codes, the load factor must be
greater than 1.0. This means that the design actions can be factored up by an
amount greater than 1.0 before the member becomes inadequate.
Because the relationship between design actions and design capacity is not
linear, the load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design actions)/(design
capacity) failure equation at the end of the detailed calculations for each member
in the steel design report.
The combined stress ratio applies only to AISC-ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 and
AS3990. It is the ratio of the actual stresses to the permissible stresses for the
governing combined stress equation.
673

For members designed in accordance with AISC-ASD, AS1250, SABS0162 or
AS3990, the combined stress ratio must be less than 1.0. This means that the
combined stresses in the member are less than the combined permissible stresses.
During the design process, if the load factor is slightly less than 1.0 or if the
combined stress ratio is slightly greater than 1.0, the member is deemed to have
failed. In a real design situation however, you may decide to accept members
which are very slightly overloaded. In order to cater for this reality, SPACE GASS
allows you to decrease the load factor limit or increase the combined stress ratio
limit so that the design program can accept a small amount of overload.
Alternatively, you can increase the load factor limit or decrease the combined
stress ratio limit if you wish to design conservatively.
Slenderness ratio limit
This setting affects a simple slenderness ratio check that is only applicable to
AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD, AS1250, AS3990 and SA0162. The other codes have
more sophisticated slenderness checks built into their standard equations.
For the applicable design codes, recommendations for maximum slenderness ratios
range from 180 to 300 for struts, 300 to 350 for ties and 250 to 300 for beams. The
maximum values depend on various factors including whether the predominant
load is due to wind or not.
For tension members and members that have zero axial load, there is no
slenderness check for compression effective lengths, however there is a slenderness
check for bending effective lengths. Because of this, you may notice that in some
cases the output report shows a value of l/r (compression) which exceeds the
permissible l/r ratio without the member failing.
Interrupted check (check mode only)
If the checking procedure is uninterrupted, then after each member check, the
results are saved and the program moves on to the next member regardless of the
outcome of the check. Using this procedure, it is possible to check a large numbers
of members without any operator intervention.
Alternatively, you can elect to have interrupted checking which causes the program
to stop after each member check, notifying you of the results of the check and
allowing you to manually select other member sizes for checking. If you decide not
to try other member sizes, the program saves the results of the check and moves on
to the next member.
674
Steel Member Design

Equalizing the design sizes for matching analysis sections
SPACE GASS allows you to specify that all members with the same analysis
section property number should finish up with the same section size in the design
results. Note that this only applies to running the steel member design module in
"design" mode. For example, consider a portal frame with one analysis section for
the two columns and another for the two rafters. When you perform a steel member
design (as opposed to a check), you can specify that because the two columns share
the same analysis section property number, their final design sizes should also
match. Similarly, the two rafters can also be kept equal on each side because they
share a single analysis section property number.
If this option is not selected, the design module will design each member
independently rather than matching a single section size to all members that share
the same analysis section property number. For the portal frame example
mentioned above, this could results in four different member sizes rather than two.
Adjustment of minor axis compression effective lengths
Flange restraints capable of preventing lateral buckling of the flanges are
sometimes also capable of preventing lateral buckling of the overall cross section.
This depends on the type of the flange restraint and on the shape of the cross
section and, if applicable, means that the minor compression effective length can
be reduced to the length of the segment under consideration.
This happens regardless of whether the compression effective lengths are
calculated from a buckling analysis or specified directly.
If you select the "Adjust based on flange restraints generally" check box, the minor
compression effective length will be adjusted if:
a. both ends of the segment have full or partial flange restraints; or
b. both ends of the segment have full, partial or lateral flange restraints and
the member is a tube or box section.
If you also select the "Adjust for L restraints on equal flanged I or W shapes" check
box then condition (b) above will also be extended to apply to equal flanged I or W
shapes. Note, however, that there is some recent doubt as to whether lateral
restraints on equal flanged I or W shapes can restrain the overall cross section
laterally and therefore this check box defaults to off.
675

Consider eccentric effects
Members such as angles, channels and Tees are sometimes connected at their ends
by one flange or plate only. Depending on the shape of the section and the distance
from the point of connection to the centroid of the section this can induce eccentric
moments into the member.
This check box only affects the design groups that have eccentric effects enabled in
their design input data. For design groups that have their individual eccentric
effects disabled, this check box setting has no effect.
See also Eccentric effects for compression members.
See also Eccentric effects for tension members.
Convert single angle compression effective lengths
For single angle sections, the compression effective lengths must be input relative
to the non-principal axes. These lengths are normally converted to principal axes
during the design phase if required, however you can prevent this by unticking the
"Convert single angle compression effective lengths" option. One reason for this
might be that you have already input the compression effective lengths in principal
axes and you don't want them to be converted.
Use Kt factor for tension members
When considering eccentric end connection effects, the extra eccentric moments
are usually calculated and then added to the other bending moments in the member.
For tension members with AS4100/NZS3404, however the code allows you to use
the above approach or simply ignore the extra eccentric moments and apply a
correction factor (Kt) which is based on the cross section shape and the location of
the point of connection (see AS4100/NZS3404 clause 7.3.2). By default the steel
member design module defaults to using the Kt factor because it tends to give a
more economical design in most cases, however you can elect to use the eccentric
moments approach instead if you wish.
See also Eccentric effects for tension members.
Other factors
Various other factors can also be defined depending on the design code being used.
They include AISC-ASD and AISC-LRFD U and Cb factors, Eurocode UK and
Dutch factors, an AS4600 appendix F switch and HK CP2011 mLT factors.
676
Steel Member Design
The HK CP2011 module also allows you to choose between using clause
8.9.2 or clause 6.8.3. If you choose clause 8.9.2 then the analysis does not need to
include initial member imperfections or P- effects because they are accounted for
in the design phase (although it may be prudent for you to use both P- and P-
effects in the analysis anyway). Alternatively, if you choose clause 6.8.3 then you
must include initial member imperfections and both P- and P- effects in the
analysis.
Frame and Member Imperfections
Most design codes require you to include initial frame and member imperfections
in the analysis. The analysis module does not do this automatically and so you
must build the required imperfections into your model.
Frame imperfections can be modelled by applying notional horizontal forces or
initial deflections to nodes. Member imperfections can be modelled by applying
initial curvature to members. These must both be done in accordance with the
relevant clauses of the design code you are using.
When all of the information has been entered, the SPACE GASS steel member
design/check proceeds.
If you want to terminate the process before it is finished, just press ESC or the right
mouse button. If you terminate the process in this way, the results for any groups
that have already been designed or checked are saved.
677

The accuracy of any steel member design is dependent on the accuracy of the
analysis on which it was based. A truly accurate design can only be obtained when
the design member sizes agree with those used in the preceding analysis.
SPACE GASS has the ability to iterate the analysis-design process until the results
converge. The design sizes can then be printed out and used in the final
computations.
You can access the updating tool by answering "Yes" to the "Do you wish to
update the analysis section properties with the new design member sizes?" question
at the end of a steel member design or by selecting "Update Analysis Member
Sizes" from the Design menu.
Note that this tool only works if you have run the steel member design module in
design mode (as opposed to check mode).
After an initial design, you can use this tool to update the analysis section property
data based on the new design member sizes. You can also re-run the analysis and
design modules, and automatically iterate the entire update-analysis-design process
until the analysis and design member sizes match.
If a buckling analysis is included in the iterative procedure, after the updateanalysis-design procedure has finished, if the lowest buckling load factor is less
678
Steel Member Design

than the value you specify in the above form, a warning is given. Keep in mind that
you may want to adjust the buckling load factor warning threshold depending on
whether you are analysing working loads or factored loads.
The iterative procedure does not currently include re-running the dynamic
analysis modules. Hence, if your steel member design is based on some dynamic
response analysis results, you must re-run the dynamic analysis manually for each
iteration.
679
Serviceability check
The SPACE GASS steel member design module does not consider serviceability
requirements other than slenderness effects during the course of a design or check.
This is because there are numerous ways to limit excessive deflections, many of
which require extensive engineering judgement. The only deflections that can
easily be checked for adequacy by an automatic design program such as SPACE
GASS are the local member deflections that apply to each member individually. It
is quite appropriate to check local member deflections for simple beams and
columns, however for sway frames and for members that have been subdivided
into smaller segments, the local member deflections become meaningless.
Take for example a portal frame building that is found to have excessive lateral
sway deflections. The deflections could be reduced in many ways such as by
increasing the size of the columns, increasing the size of the rafters, introducing a
haunch, increasing the size of the haunch, adding extra roof and end wall bracing
or by adding an external restraint such as brickwork.
The optimum method in controlling deflections is determined often by architectural
constraints, cost constraints, engineering preferences and other constraints that are
not immediately obvious to a design program. Some of these parameters could
possibly be built into SPACE GASS, however the extra data required to be input
would make the program very cumbersome and unwieldy compared to the method
recommended in the following paragraph.
In order to satisfy serviceability requirements, it is recommend that the frame first
of all be designed to satisfy strength requirements. This includes the initial design
and subsequent analysis-design iterations (see also Updating analysis member
sizes). It is then a simple matter to obtain a graphical display or printout of the
deformed geometry shape and simply observe whether the frame has excessive
deflections or not. If the deflections are excessive, you can increase member sizes
manually or add bracing as required, followed by another analysis and obtain a
revised deformed geometry display. If the deflections are satisfactory it is then a
matter of performing a final code check to ensure that the changes have not caused
any members to become inadequate.
680
Steel Member Design
The steel member design/check process

This section describes in detail the internal procedures and assumptions used as the
program calculates the capacity of a design group and determines whether it is
adequate or not. Because the procedure is very similar for all codes, you can
assume that all of the discussion in this section applies equally to all codes unless
specifically stated otherwise.
The steps involved in a design are the same as those for a check except that a
design tries various member sizes until it finds one that is adequate, while a check
simply tries a single member size only and saves the results regardless of whether it
is adequate or not. This process is repeated separately for each design group.
In the remainder of this section, the process of trying a member size for
compliance with one of the steel codes will be referred to as "checking" regardless
of whether it is done as part of a steel member design or a steel member check.
681
Design groups and intermediate stations

The analysis members that make up the design group are assembled together into
one complete design member. The intermediate member stations for each analysis
member are positioned along the design group and then for each flange additional
stations are positioned at the points of flange restraints and at quarter points
between adjacent flange restraints.
For each load case being considered, the deflections, forces and moments are
calculated at each station along the entire design group. For single angle sections,
they are calculated relative to the cross section principal axes for AS4100, BS5950,
NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD, and relative to the non-principal
axes for AS1250, SABS0162, AS3990, EUROCODE 3 and HK CP2011.
682
Steel Member Design
Design segments
The program begins working its way along the design group until it gets to the end
of a segment. A segment end occurs at the start of the design group, at the end of
the design group, and wherever a full, partial or lateral flange restraint has been
applied to the critical flange. Thus the current design segment is the portion of the
design group that extends from the current critical flange restraint location back to
the end of the previous design segment (or start of the design group).
For each station in the segment, the program does a cross section capacity check
using the forces and moments which occur simultaneously at that point. It also does
various member checks for the segment as a whole using all possible combinations
of maximum forces and moments that occur anywhere in the segment.
683
Section check
A section check simply considers the capacity of a cross section and is not related
to effective lengths or any other conditions that occur away from the cross section.
The forces and moments used are those which occur simultaneously at the cross
section.
684
Steel Member Design
Member check
A member check considers the capacity of a member segment. The member check
is affected by the compression and bending effective lengths of the segment and
the shape of the deflection and bending moment diagrams along the segment. The
forces and moments used in a member check are the maximum values taken from
anywhere along the segment.
685
Critical flange
The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the compression
flange unless either end of the segment is laterally unrestrained in which case it is
assumed to be the tension flange.
SPACE GASS is not able to determine whether a loading condition is

predominantly due to gravity or wind and you should therefore check that the
above rule is valid for your situation.
For more information refer to AS1250 clause 3.3.4.7, AS4100 clause 5.5,
SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3, NZS3404 clause 5.5, AS3990 clause
3.3.4.7 or HK CP2011 clause 8.3.
686
Steel Member Design
Effective flange restraints

In the following discussion, the "segment length" is the distance between two
adjacent cross sections that are restrained or between a cross section that is
restrained and the end of the design group. A cross section is assumed to be
restrained when a full or partial restraint is applied to either flange or when a lateral
restraint is applied to its critical flange.
Member design segments
The design group in the diagram above consists of three analysis members of
different lengths. The group has full or partial restraints at the ends and three
equally spaced lateral restraints on the top flange. For the bending moment diagram
shown, the first top flange lateral restraint is ineffective because the bottom flange
is the critical flange at that point. Thus, the first segment continues past the first top
flange restraint to midspan where the top flange has become the critical one.
When determining the effective restraint at a cross section, SPACE GASS looks at
the restraint applied to the critical flange, however it also looks at the other flange
to see if a restraint has been applied to it and, if so, whether or not it affects the
cross section restraint. Thus, the effective restraint for the cross section can be
dependent on the restraint applied to both flanges.
In the following table, the "critical flange" is as per the critical flange definition,
the "other flange" is the non-critical flange and the "effective restraint" is the cross
section restraint that SPACE GASS uses in the code check.
687
For restraint type definitions see also Flange restraints. A C (continuous) flange
restraint is assumed to be equivalent to a series of L (lateral) flange restraints
spaced at increments of 1mm for the entire length of the continuous restraint.
Restraint on Critical
Flange
None or U
L
P or F
S or R
None or U
None or U
None or U
L, P or F
S or R
Restraint on Other FlangeEffective

Restraint
None or U
None
None or U
L
None or U
F
None or U
R
L
None
P or F
P
S or R
S
L, P, F, S or R
F
L, P, F, S or R
R
For single angle sections, it is unclear whether or not lateral restraints

applied to either leg are effective in providing any restraint to the section.
Consequently, you should be very careful when applying lateral restraints to
single angle sections and you should use them only if you are sure they are
effective in restraining the section. SPACE GASS will apply them if you specify
them and so the decision about whether or not they should be used is entirely up
to you.
688
Steel Member Design
Twist factor
The twist factor kt depends upon the flange restraint conditions and the cross
section shape. If the critical flange switches from top to bottom within the segment,
the critical flange thickness is assumed to be the thickness of the flange at the end
of the segment. For AS4100 and NZS3404, kt is calculated from table 5.6.3(1),
while for AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011, EUROCODE 3 and AS3990
it is taken as 1.0.
689
Load height factor

The load height factor kl relates to the point of application of gravity loads as
specified by the load height position (see also "Load height position" in Steel
member design data). It is always 1.0 if the loads are applied at or below the
member's shear centre, however for non-vertical members it can exceed 1.0 if the
top of the member is subjected to a downwards load that causes a destabilizing
effect.
If the top of the member is loaded within the segment then kl = 1.2 for all codes,
except AS4100 and NZS3404 where kl = 1.4 if both ends of the segment are fully,
partially or laterally restrained or kl = 2.0 if either end is unrestrained.
If the top of the member is not loaded within the segment but shear force is
detected at the end of a segment that is unrestrained then kl = 1.2 for all codes,
except AS4100 and NZS3404 where kl = 2.0.
If you specify the load height position as "Shear centre" then kl=1.0 regardless of
the loading condition.
For vertical members, kl=1.0 regardless of the load height position setting or the
loading condition.
690
Steel Member Design
The definition of "top of the member" in the above discussion is the side or
flange that is physically on top (ie. furthest from the ground). This definition is
different to "top flange" used elsewhere in this manual which can actually be on
the bottom if you have rotated the member about its own axis (eg. if the member is
upside down).
691
Lateral rotation factor

The lateral rotation factor kr is based solely on the flange restraint conditions. Its
value for some codes is given in the following table. The restraint codes given
represent the flange restraints at each end of the segment under consideration. For
example, PP represents partial restraint at both ends, while PF represents partial
restraint at one end and full restraint at the other end.
End
Restraints
RR
SR
FR
PR
LR
UR
SS
FS
PS
LS
US
FF
PF
LF
UF
PP
LP
UP
LL
UU
AS3990/
AS1250
0.70
0.77
0.85
.935
1.00
.935
0.84
.935
1.02
1.00
1.02
1.00
1.10
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.20
AS4100
0.70
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
SABS0162
0.70
0.77
0.85
.935
1.00
.935
0.84
.935
1.02
1.00
1.02
1.00
1.10
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.00
1.20
1.00
1.20
NZS3404
0.70
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
0.70
0.85
0.85
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
The values of kr in the table are taken from AS1250 clause 5.9, AS4100 table
5.6.3(3), SABS0162 clause 7.2.3, BS5950 clause 4.3.5, NZS3404 table 5.6.3(3)
and AS3990 clause 5.9.
There are some specific assumptions affecting kr which you should be aware of, as
follows:
692
AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 do not give specific rules
for calculating kr for all combinations of flange restraints at the ends of the
Steel Member Design

segment. In such cases interpolation has been used to calculate some of the values
of kr given in the table.
The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and

AS3990 which provides partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the cross
section minor axis) of the critical flange is not supported in SPACE GASS.
Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is a true

cantilever or not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b), BS5950 clause
4.3.5.4/4.3.5.5, HK CP2011 clause 8..4.3 and AS3990 clause 5.9.4 have not been
considered. This may cause the bending effective length for cantilevers to be
underestimated and you should therefore check the bending effective length for
cantilevers calculated by the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and
AS3990 modules.
Before accepting the bending effective length calculated by SPACE GASS, it

is recommended that you verify for yourself that the values of kr given in the
previous table are a suitable interpretation of the code that you are using.
693

During a member check, various factors are calculated. In most cases, these factors
are largely dependent on the moments at the ends of the segment under
consideration. Some of them, however depend on the values of moments and/or
displacements at mid or quarter points along the segment. It is not always possible
to have stations positioned exactly at the mid or quarter points required because
even though stations are positioned at mid and quarter points between adjacent
flange restraints, segments do not always extend between adjacent flange restraints
(particularly when the critical flange changes due to moment reversal). In such
cases, SPACE GASS simply takes the moment and/or displacement values from
the station nearest to the required point.
For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula in
clause 5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends. If the segment is
unrestrained at one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the bending moment
diagram to be matched to one of the three diagrams shown in table 5.6.2. This is
very difficult when the bending moment diagram could be any conceivable shape.
Therefore, SPACE GASS adopts a slightly conservative approach and uses m =
1.0 when there is no moment at the unrestrained end or m = 0.25 when there is a
moment at the unrestrained end.
694
Steel Member Design
Eccentric effects for compression members

Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to
axial compression are normally taken into account by calculating the extra
eccentric moments and then adding them to the normal design moments along the
entire length of the design group (unless they cause a net reduction in the final
design moment).
For all codes, the eccentric moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force
by the distance from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the cross
section.
Eccentric effects for compression members can be suppressed if required.
695
Eccentric effects for tension members

Eccentric end connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to
axial tension are taken into account in various ways depending on the design code
being used.
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, SPACE GASS simply calculates the extra
eccentric moments and then adds them to the normal design moments along the
entire length of the design group provided that they dont cause a net reduction in
the final design moment. This method is used instead of reducing the effective area
of the cross section in accordance with AS1250 clause 7.3.2, SABS0162 clause 9.2
or AS3990 clause 7.3.2.
The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules also use the above method of calculating and
adding eccentric moments if the Kt method is not used. Alternatively, if the Kt
method is used then Kt is calculated in accordance with AS4100/NZS3404 clause
7.3.2 and used to reduce the member tensile capacity rather than eccentric moments
being added. The Kt method also applies to I, H or channel sections which are
connected by their flanges only. For these sections, SPACE GASS assumes that the
provisions of AS4100/NZS3404 clauses 7.3.2(b)(i) and (ii) have been met and uses
Kt = 0.85.
Eccentric effects for tension members can be suppressed if required.
696
Steel Member Design
The code check

When all of the member properties, effective lengths, design loads and other
factors have been calculated, they are fed into the appropriate code specific
subroutines to determine the success or failure of the code check.
During this process the subroutines also calculate the load factor or the combined
stress ratio which is then passed back to SPACE GASS along with many other
design result parameters. If the latest check is more critical than any previous
checks for the design group then the results of the latest check are retained as the
governing case until another check further along the design group yields a smaller
load factor or a larger combined stress ratio.
After considering every segment in the design group for each design load case,
SPACE GASS saves the data for the governing section and member check cases
and moves on to the next design group.
697
Steel member design results

At the end of a steel member design or check, you can produce a full report
showing the results of the design or check.
The pass/fail status of each member can also be shown graphically in a color-coded
display as described in "View steel member design results". Filters can also be
created to filter members in accordance with their pass/fail status as described in
"Filters".
You can also query individual members graphically to get an abbreviated report
showing the results of the design or check as described in "Query steel member
design results".
Reports for single angle sections are in principal axes for AS4100, BS5950,
NZS3404, AS4600, AISC-LRFD and AISC-ASD.
If you have performed a design (as opposed to a check), the final design member
sizes are probably slightly different to those in the analysis section property data.
So that the design is based on the same member sizes as the analysis, the new
design member sizes should be transferred back into the analysis and then the
analysis and design process iterated until the analysis and design sizes are the
same. This is described in detail in "Updating member sizes".
Member, section and shear checks
For each steel design member in a full report, three lines of information relating to
section, member and shear checks are presented. These represent summaries of the
results of the three main checks that are performed when a steel member is
designed or checked.
The section and shear checks are performed at numerous points along each design
group. They consider the capacity of a cross section and are not related to effective
lengths or any other conditions which occur away from the cross section under
consideration. The forces and moments used in a section or shear check are the
ones which occur simultaneously at the cross section. The governing location for
the section and shear checks is shown under the "Start Posn" heading.
698
Steel Member Design

The member check is performed for each segment between adjacent points of
critical flange restraint. The member check is affected by the axial and bending
effective lengths of the segment and the shape of the deflection and bending
moment diagrams along the segment. The forces and moments used in a member
check are the maximum values taken from anywhere along the segment. The
governing segment for the member check has its start and finish locations shown
under the "Start Posn" and "Finish Posn" headings.
Load factor
The load factor applies only to AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3, AS4100, AS4600,
BS5950, NZS3404 and HK CP2011. It is the amount by which the design actions
can be increased before the point of failure is reached.
For example, if the steel design returns a load factor of 1.12, you could
theoretically increase your loads by 12%, repeat the analysis and design, and
expect the load factor to reduce to 1.00. This is not always the case however,
because the non-linearity of the analysis means that increasing your loads by 12%
does not guarantee that the design actions will also increase by exactly 12%.
For members designed in accordance with these codes, the load factor must be
greater than 1.0. This means that the design actions can be factored up by an
amount greater than 1.0 before the member becomes inadequate.
Because the relationship between design actions and design capacity is not
linear, the load factor is not equal to the inverse of the (design actions)/(design
capacity) failure equation at the end of the detailed calculations for each member
in the steel design report.
Zero variables in reports
You may notice that some variables in the steel member design output report are
shown as zero when it appears that they should have a non-zero value. This occurs
because the steel member design modules only calculate the values that are
applicable to the design actions and section type. Variables which are not
applicable for the governing failure mode are not calculated and hence appear as
zero in the output report.
699
Steel member design/check assumptions

This section lists the main assumptions that are made in the steel member design
module. Some of these assumptions are also described in the previous sections of
this chapter and others are listed only in this section. It is up to you to check that
these assumptions are suitable for your situation.
Note that some of the following general assumptions may be overridden by the
code specific items listed in the sections immediately following this one.
1. Frame imperfections are not automatically allowed for during the design
phase. When applicable (usually for multi-storey frames), you should
apply notional horizontal forces or initial deformations to the analysis
model in accordance with the requirements of the design code.
2. The top flange of a member is the flange on the positive local y-axis (or zaxis if the section has been flipped) side of the member. The top flange of a
member can be easily determined by displaying the member local axes
graphically and observing the direction of the local y-axis (or z-axis if
flipped).
3. The top flange of a group as a whole is defined such that it is the same as
the top flange of the first member in the group.
4. The critical flange at any point within a segment is assumed to be the
compression flange unless either end of the segment is laterally
unrestrained in which case it is assumed to be the tension flange. SPACE
GASS is not able to determine whether a loading condition is
predominantly due to gravity or wind and you should therefore check that
the above rule is valid for your situation.
5. All section and member capacities are calculated assuming that stiffeners
do not exist.
6. The AS4100, AISC-LRFD, BS5950, EUROCODE 3, HK CP2011 and
NZS3404 modules assume that second order effects have been taken into
account by a second order elastic analysis. Moment magnification is not
considered.
7. The AS4100, AISC-LRFD, BS5950, EUROCODE 3, HK CP2011 and
NZS3404 modules assume that the design load cases are factored
700
Steel Member Design

(ultimate).
8. The NZS3404 module uses the "Other than capacity" design method with
non-seismic ductility categories only.
9. For single angle sections, the effective lengths and flange restraints must
be input relative to the non-principal axes. For all other sections, they must
be input relative to the principal axes.
10. The compression effective lengths Lmx and Lmy, used by AS4100 and
NZS3404 in clause 8.4.2.2 for the calculation of Nc when ke=1.0, are
assumed to be equal to the lesser of the total design group length and the
normal compression effective lengths for the segment under consideration.
Lmx = MIN(Ltot,Lcmajor) and Lmy = MIN(Ltot,Lcminor), where Ltot is
the total design group length and Lcmajor and Lcminor are the normal
compression effective lengths.
11. The torsion effective length used by AS4100 and NZS3404 is assumed to
be equal to the distance between adjacent full or partial restraints.
12. A C (continuous) flange restraint is assumed to be equivalent to a series of
L (lateral) flange restraints spaced at increments of 1mm for the length of
the continuous restraint.
13. If C (continuous) or I (ignore) flange restraints are repeated without R, S,
F, P or L restraints inbetween (eg. CCC, III or CI) then the last C or I
restraint is used and the previous repeated ones are discarded.
14. If an intermediate flange restraint is positioned at the beginning or end of a
design group then it is ignored in favour of the appropriate end flange
restraint.
15. Member offsets are automatically ignored (skipped over) during a steel
member design/check provided that they occur at the ends of a design
group. They are treated the same as I (ignore) flange restraints.
16. The extra restraint condition in AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011
and AS3990 that provides partial restraint against lateral rotation (about the
cross section minor axis) of the critical flange is not supported.
17. Because it is difficult for SPACE GASS to determine whether a member is
a true cantilever or not, AS1250 clause 5.9.4, SABS0162 clause 7.2.3(b),
701

BS5950 clause 4.3.5.4/4.3.5.5, HK CP2011 clause 8.3.4.3 and AS3990
clause 5.9.4 have not been considered. This may cause the bending
effective length for cantilevers to be underestimated and you should
therefore check the bending effective length for cantilevers calculated by
the AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 modules.
18. When calculating kt for AS4100 or NZS3404, if the critical flange
switches from top to bottom within the segment, the critical flange
thickness is assumed to be the thickness of the flange at the end of the
segment.
19. When calculating kl, SPACE GASS assumes conservatively that top flange
loads always occur within the segment rather than at the segment end(s).
20. kl is calculated for "downwards" loads regardless of the member
orientation and flange positions. A "downwards" load is assumed to act in
the direction from the top flange to the bottom flange. If you want kl=1.0
for columns, sloping beams or beams on their side then you should set the
load height position to "Shear centre" regardless of the loaded flange or the
load direction.
21. The direction of the transverse load acting on a segment is determined by
the sign of the difference in shear force between the two segment ends.
22. AS1250, SABS0162, BS5950, HK CP2011 and AS3990 do not give
specific rules for calculating kr for all combinations of flange restraints at
the ends of the segment. In such cases interpolation has been used to
calculate some of the values of kr.
23. Eccentric end connection effects (if not suppressed) are taken into account
in different ways depending on the design code being used. In most cases,
the eccentric end moments are simply added to the normal design moments
for the entire design group. Exceptions are BS5950 which optionally uses
the provisions of clauses 4.6.3 (tension) or 4.7.10 (compression) and
AS4100 and NZS3404 which use a Kt factor for tension members (if
activated).
24. Where applicable (see previous item), moments due to eccentric end
connection effects for angles, channels and Tee sections subjected to axial
loads are added to the normal design moments only if they dont cause a
net reduction in the final design moment.
702
Steel Member Design

25. Eccentric end moments are calculated by multiplying the axial force by the
distance from the centroid of the connected plate to the centroid of the
cross section.
26. The major axis of a single or double angle section is assumed to be parallel
to the short leg(s) of the section.
27. Double angle sections are assumed to have no space between the
individual angle sections.
28. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules assume that double angles
are connected together at intermediate points sufficient to ensure that half
of the design axial compressive force for the combined section does not
exceed the compressive capacity of each angle section considered
individually using an effective length (for buckling of the sections away
from each other) equal to the distance between connection points.
29. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules consider only axial forces
and shears for single or double angle sections. Bending moments are not
considered. Eccentric end moments are considered where applicable. The
AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011, EUROCODE 3 and NZS3404 modules
consider axial forces, shears (along minor axis) and bending moments
(about both axes) for single or double angle sections.
30. The AS4100, NZS3404, AISC-ASD, AISC-LRFD, EUROCODE 3,
BS5950 and HK CP2011 modules convert double angle sections into the
equivalent Tee section and then treat them as a solid Tee shape. The
AS4100, NZS3404 and HK CP2011 modules do not support double starred
angles.
31. Beam Tees have the major axis parallel to the flange and are therefore
assumed to have their web vertical (assuming a zero direction angle and no
flipping).
32. Column Tees have the major axis parallel to the web and are assumed to be
lying on their side with their flange vertical (assuming a zero direction
angle and no flipping).
33. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules do not support column Tee
sections.
703

34. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded Tee sections
unless they are beam Tees with d/t<15 (lightly welded longitudinally) or
d/t<14 (heavily welded longitudinally).
35. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules assume that heavily welded
(longitudinally) I and H sections with equal flanges are flame cut. Lightly
welded (longitudinally) or unequal flanged I and H sections and all plate
web girders are assumed to be welded "as rolled".
36. The AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990 modules do not support welded box
sections.
37. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support welded circular hollow
sections, channels or angles.
38. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011 and NZS3404 modules assume that
channel sections have equal flanges.
39. The AS4100, BS5950, HK CP2011 and NZS3404 modules assume that
angle sections have uniform plate thicknesses throughout the section.
40. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules do not support solid sections.
41. The BS5950 and HK CP2011 modules assume that solid sections are class
1.
42. When calculating the area removed from the section due to a bolted end
connection, SPACE GASS assumes that the bolts are through the web(s)
unless the end connection type is specified as "F", in which case the bolts
are assumed to be through the flange(s).
43. The area removed from the section due to a bolted end connection is
assumed to apply for a distance of 250mm from each end of the design
group.
44. The BS5950 module assumes conservatively that single angle sections are
connected with a single fastener for clause 4.7.10.
45. The AS4100 and NZS3404 modules perform a web capacity check in
accordance with appendix I. If the check fails, SPACE GASS treats it as a
warning rather than a failure condition.
704
Steel Member Design

46. Serviceability requirements are not considered automatically. They must
be checked manually by direct inspection of displacement diagrams.
47. Torsional effects are not considered.
48. Member end bearing capacity is not considered.
49. For the AS4100 and NZS3404 modules, m is calculated using the formula
in clause 5.6.1.1(a)(iii) when the segment is restrained at both ends. If the
segment is unrestrained at one end, AS4100 and NZS3404 require the
bending moment diagram to be matched to one of the three diagrams
shown in table 5.6.2. This is of course very difficult when the bending
moment diagram could be any conceivable shape. SPACE GASS therefore
adopts a slightly conservative approach and uses m=1.0 when there is no
moment at the unrestrained end or m=0.25 when there is a moment at the
unrestrained end.
50. The AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules do not consider shear force
in the major axis direction.
51. If any term in the steel member design failure equation becomes negative,
it is assumed that the section has failed and a value of 9.99 is used in place
of the negative value.
52. The brace, purlin, girt or other member that provides full, partial or lateral
restraint to the critical flange of a member must be capable of resisting the
force required to provide such restraint. This is not automatically allowed
for in the analysis or design. If you wish to take this into account then you
should add the restraint forces to your applied loads. The restraint forces
are code specific and you should refer to the appropriate clauses for the
design code you are using.
This effect is particularly important for deep beams where the forces
required to restrain the critical flange can be quite high. You should check
that your model is capable of withstanding these forces.
705
BS5950-1:2000 code specific items

Sections considered
Incorporates Corrigendum No 1
3 Properties of materials and section properties
3.1 Structural steel
3.1.1 Design Strength
3.1.3 Other properties
3.4 Section properties
3.4.1 Gross cross-section
3.4.2 Net Area
3.4.3 Effective net area
3.4.4 Deductions for bolt holes
3.5 Classification of cross sections
3.5.1 General
3.5.2 Classification
3.5.5 Stress ratios for classification
3.5.6 Effective plastic modulus
3.5.6.1 General
3.5.6.2 I or H sections with equal flanges
3.5.6.3 Rectangular Hollow Sections
3.5.6.4 Circular Hollow Sections
3.6 Slender cross-sections
3.6.1 Effective section properties
3.6.2 Doubly symmetric cross-sections
3.6.2.1 General
3.6.2.2 Effective area
3.6.2.3 Effective modulus when web is fully effective
3.6.2.4 Effective modulus when web is slender
3.6.3 Singly symmetric and unsymmetrical cross-sections
3.6.6 Circular hollow sections
4 Design of structural members
4.1 General
4.1.1 Application
4.1.2 Class of cross section
4.2 Members subject to bending
4.2.1 General
4.2.1.1 General conditions
706
Steel Member Design

a, c, d, e
4.2.3 Shear Capacity
4.2.5 Moment Capacity
4.2.5.1 General
4.2.5.2 Low Shear
4.2.5.3 High Shear
4.2.5.5 Bolt holes
4.3 Lateral-torsional buckling
4.3.1 General
4.3.4 Destabilizing load
4.3.6 Resistance to lateral-torsional buckling
4.3.6.1 General
4.3.6.2 I, H, channel and Box sections with equal flanges
4.3.6.3 I-sections and box sections with unequal flanges
4.3.6.4 Buckling resistance moment
b,c
4.3.6.5 Bending strength pb
4.3.6.6 Equivalent uniform moment factor mLT
4.3.6.7 Equivalent slenderness LT
4.3.6.8 Buckling parameter and torsional index
4.3.6.9 Ratio W
4.3.8 Buckling resistance moment for single angles
4.3.8.1 General
4.3.8.2 Basic method
4.4 Plate Girders
4.4.1 General
4.4.2 Design Strength
4.4.3 Dimensions of webs and flanges
4.4.3.1 General
4.4.3.2 Minimum web thickness for serviceability
a
4.4.3.3 Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange
buckling
a
4.4.4 Moment Capacity
4.4.4.1 Web not susceptible to shear buckling
4.4.4.2 Web susceptible to shear buckling
4.4.5 Shear buckling resistance
4.4.5.1 General
4.4.5.2 Simplified method
4.6 Tension members
4.6.1 Tension capacity
707

4.6.2 Members with eccentric connections
4.6.3 Simple tension members
4.6.3.1 Single angle, channel or T-section members
4.7 Compression members
4.7.2 Slenderness
4.7.4 Compression resistance
4.7.5 Compressive strength
4.7.6 Eccentric connections
c
4.7.10 Angle, channel or T-section struts
4.7.10.1 General
4.7.10.2 Single angles
a (welded connection)
c
4.7.10.4 Single channels
b
4.7.10.5 Single T-sections
b
4.8 Members with combined moment and axial force
4.8.1 General
4.8.2 Tension members with moments
4.8.2.1 General
4.8.2.2 Simplified method
4.8.2.3 More exact method
4.8.3 Compression members with moments
4.8.3.1 General
4.8.3.2 Cross section capacity
4.8.3.3 Member buckling resistance
4.8.3.3.1 Simplified method
4.8.3.3.2 More exact method for I or H sections with
equal flanges
4.8.3.3.3 More exact method for CHS, RHS, or box
sections with equal flanges
4.8.3.3.4 Equivalent uniform moment factors
4.9 Members with biaxial moments
6 Connections
6.2 Connections using bolts
6.2.3 Effect of bolt holes on the shear capacity
B Lateral-torsional buckling of members subject to bending
B.1 Basic case
708
Steel Member Design

B.2 Buckling resistance
B.2.1 Bending strength
B.2.2 Perry factor and Robertson constant
B.2.3 Uniform I,H and channel sections with equal flanges
B.2.4 Uniform I and H sections with unequal flanges
B.2.4.1 Equivalent slenderness
B.2.4.2 Double curvature bending
B.2.6 Box sections (including RHS)
B.2.6.2 Torsion constant for a box section
B.2.6.3 Torsion constant for an RHS
B.2.7 Plates and flats
B.2.8 T-sections
B.2.8.1 Axes
B.2.8.3 Warping constant
B.2.9 Angle sections
B.2.9.1 Axes
B.2.9.2 Equal angles
B.2.9.3 Unequal angles
C Compressive strength
C.1 Strut formula
C.2 Perry factor and Robertson constant
H Web buckling resistance
H.1 Shear buckling strength
H.3 Resistance of a web to combined effects
H.3.1 General
H.3.2 Reduction factor for shear buckling
H.3.3 Sections other than RHS
H.3.3.1 Combined shear, moment and axial compression
H.3.3.2 Combined shear, moment and axial tension
H.3.4 RHS sections
H.3.4.1 Combined shear, moment and axial compression
H.3.4.2 Combined shear, moment and axial tension
I Combined axial compression and bending
I.1 Stocky members
I.2 Reduced plastic moment capacity
I.2.1 I or H section with equal flanges
I.4 Single angle members
709

I.4.1 General
I.4.2 Basic method
Assumptions
3.1.1 Design strength py obtained from fy in SPACE GASS library.
A warning, not a failure is given if py exceeds Us/1.2.
py is not adjusted.
3.4.3 The determination of steel grade for calculating the Ke value is based on the
SPACE GASS library fy value, falling between the ranges specified in
Table 9.
3.4.4 The bolt hole area is based on the values specified in the SPACE GASS
Steel Member Design data.
3.5 Solid square and solid circle sections are assumed to be a Class 1.
Solid rectangle is assumed to be an I beam with no flange outstands.
I and Box shapes use the "Generally" limits in Tables 11 and 12.
3.5.5 Unequal flanges for box sections use r1 eq 3.5.5b divided by 2.0 to allow
for the 2 webs.
Outstands of box girders are not taken into account for the calculation of r1.
3.6.2.4 When used for webs for channels, webs are assumed to be 40t instead of
120t in accordance with Table 11 and the use of 3.6.3.
4.2.3 Only vertical projection of inclined box girder web considered in shear
capacity.
4.2.5.1 A warning, not a failure is given if the 1.2pyZ limit is reached.
4.2.5.2 Alternative for Class 3 sections used.
4.2.5.3 Alternative for Class 3 sections used.
Alternative with regards to reference H.3 for Class 3 and 4 sections not
considered.
4.2.5.5 Bolt holes assumed to be distributed equally between top and bottom
flange for flanges and for webs equally distributed between the
tension and compression zone in bending.
4.3.6.7b Channels are loaded through their shear centre.
4.4.4.2c When using H3 and the section has two webs, the web forces are equally
shared between the webs - class 4 flanges - only the effective parts of
the flanges are used for calculation of flange capacity.
4.4.5 Simplified method used with stiffener spacing equal to infinity.
4.4.5.2 When using H1 to determine qw, sections other than I beams are assumed
to be applied in the same way where there are two webs (boxes), the
web capacity is for each web.
4.6 Full section properties used except where explicitly specified Zxeff and Sxeff.
4.6.2 If no eccentric moments are added and the section's connected elements
cause eccentricity then 4.6.3 used.
710
Steel Member Design

4.7.2 The 20% increase in slenderness for alternating restraints has not been
allowed for.
4.7.5 Reduced py is used for all welded sections.
Table 23 welded angles, channels and Tees are assumed to be rolled but py is
reduced as per 4.7.5.
Notes 2 and 3 not allowed for.
4.7.6c If no eccentric moments are added and the section's connected elements
cause eccentricity then 4.7.10 used.
4.7.10.1 The 20% increase in slenderness for alternating restraints has not been
allowed for.
4.7.10.2 If there is a bolt area in one flange only then a single bolt hole is
assumed, 80% reduction allowed for.
4.7.10.4 If there is a bolt hole in the web then a single row is assumed.
4.7.10.5 If there is a bolt hole in the flange then a single row is assumed.
4.8.2.3 Only equal flanged I shapes, box shapes and CHS class 1 or 2 use this
clause. Other sections use 4.8.2.2.
4.8.2.2 App I.3 not used for asymmetric sections.
4.8.3.2 App I.3 not used for asymmetric sections.
4.8.3.3 App I.1 is used for stocky members.
4.8.3.3.4 mLT is based on the segment length, mx is based on the Group length,
my is based on the segment length, myx is based on the group length
B.2.4 Channels with unequal flanges treated the same as unequal I beams refer
4.3.6.7b.
B.2.9.2 Star angles treated same as single angle but combined properties used.
H.3.1 Strut action and moment amplification not allowed for.
711
Hong Kong CP2011 code specific items

Sections considered
3 Materials
3.1 Structural Steel
3.1.2 Design strength for normal strength steels
3.1.6 Other properties
6 Design Methods and Analysis
6.8 Second-Order P- Elastic Analysis
6.8.2 Method of Analysis items (1) and (2) only
6.8.3 Applications and Limitations
7 Section Classification
7.1 General
7.2 Classification
7.3 Stress Ratios for Classification
7.5 Effective Plastic Modulus
7.5.1 General
7.5.2 I or H Sections with equal flanges
7.5.3 Rectangular hollow sections
7.5.4 Circular hollow sections
7.6 Effective Width method for slender cross sections
7.8 Shift of the centroid of the effective cross section
8 Design of Structural Members
8.1 General
8.2 Restrained Beams
8.2.1 Shear capacity
8.2.2 Moment capacity
8.2.2.1 Low Shear condition
8.2.2.2 High Shear condition
8.3 Lateral-Torsional buckling of Beams
8.3.3 Normal and destabilising loads
8.3.5 Moment resistance to Lateral-torsional buckling
8.3.5.1 Limiting slenderness
8.3.5.2 Buckling resistance moment
8.3.5.3 Equivalent dlenderness for flexural-torsional buckling
8.4 Plate Girders
8.4.1 Design strength
712
Steel Member Design

8.4.2 Minimum web thickness for servicability
8.4.3a Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange buckling
8.4.4 Moment Capacity of restrained girders
8.4.4.1 Web suspectible to shear buckling
8.4.4.2 Web susceptible to shear buckling
8.4.5 Effects of Axial force
8.4.6 Shear buckling resistance
8.5 Buckling resistance moment for a single angle member
8.6 Tension members
8.6.1 Tension Capacity
8.6.2 Members with eccentric connections
8.6.3 Single and double angle, channel and T sections
8.7 Compression Members
8.7.4 Slenderness
8.7.5 Compression resistance
8.7.6 Compressive strength
8.7.7 Eccentric connections
8.8 Tension members under combined axial force and moments
8.9 Compression Members under combined axial force and moments
8.9.1 Cross section capacity
8.9.2 Member buckling resistance
9 Connections
9.3.4.4 Effective area for tension
9.3.4.5 Effective area for shear
Appendix 8.1
Appendix 8.2
Appendix 8.3
Assumptions
3.1.2 Class 1 and 1H steels assumed.
6.8.2(3) Frame and member imperfections are not automatically considered in the
analysis, however if clause 8.9.2 is used instead of clause 6.8.3 then
there is no requirement for member imperfections in the analysis.
1. Mcx and Mcy = Zpy.
7.5.1 I or H sections with unequal flanges Seff = Z as per other sections.
7.6 Same method as BS5950-2000 is adopted to calculate effective section and
change in centroid and properties for slender sections but with HK
element limits.
8.2 Beam checked whether fully restrained or not.
8.3.5.2 Mb = Mcx from 8.2.2 if Lateral Torsional Buckling need not be checked.
713

8.3.5.3 Box sections use this code section.
8.3.5.3 Channels assume that loads pass through shear centre - warning given.
8.4 Webs without intermediate or transverse stiffeners assumed (a = infinity).
8.4.2 Warning given if eq 8.30 not met.
8.4.3 Warning given if eq 8.33 not met.
8.7 No check is done for compressive resistance if clause 6.8.3 is used instead of
clause 8.9.2.
8.8 Only eq 8.77 is applied.
8.9.2 If clause 8.9.2 is used instead of clause 6.8.3 then second-order moments
are used in equation 8.79, making it slightly conservative. MLT is max
moment in segment, Mx is max moment in group and My is max
moment in segment.
714
Steel Member Design
AISC 360-10 code specific items

Sections considered
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
B3. Design Basis
1. Required Strength
2. Limit States
3. Design for Strength Using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD)
4. Design for Strength Using Allowable Strength Design (ASD)
5. Design for Stability
B4. Member Properties
1. Classification of Sections for Local Buckling
1a. Unstiffened Elements
1b. Stiffened Elements
2. Design Wall Thickness for HSS
3. Gross and Net Area Determination
3a. Gross Area
3b. Net Area
D. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
D2. Tensile Strength
D3. Effective Net Area
E. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION
E1. General Provisions
E2. Effective Length
E3. Flexural Buckling of Members without Slender Elements
E4. Torsional and Flexural-Torsional Buckling of Members Without Slender
Elements
E5. Single Angle Compression Members
E7. Members with Slender Elements
1. Slender Unstiffened Elements, Qs
2. Slender Stiffened Elements, Qa
F. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE
F1. General Provisions
F2. Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent About
Their Major Axis
1. Yielding
2. Lateral-Torsional Buckling
F3. Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members With Compact Webs and
Noncompact or Slender Flanges Bent About Their Major Axis
715

2. Compression Flange Local Buckling
F4. Other I-Shaped Members With Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent About
Their Major Axis
1. Compression Flange Yielding
4. Tension Flange Yielding
F5. Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric I-Shaped Members With Slender
Webs Bent About Their Major Axis
1. Compression Flange Yielding
4. Tension Flange Yielding
F6. I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent About Their Minor Axis
1. Yielding
2. Flange Local Buckling
F7. Square and Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped Members
1. Yielding
2. Flange Local Buckling
3. Web Local Buckling
F8. Round HSS
1. Yielding
2. Local Buckling
F9. Tees and Double Angles Loaded in the Plane of Symmetry
1. Yielding
3. Flange Local Buckling of Tees
4. Local Buckling of Tee Stems in Flexural Compression
F10. Single Angles
1. Yielding
3. Leg Local Buckling
F11. Rectangular Bars and Rounds
1. Yielding
F12. Unsymmetrical Shapes
1. Yielding
3. Local Buckling
F13. Proportions of Beams and Girders
1. Strength Reductions for Members With Holes in the Tension Flange
2. Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped Members
716
Steel Member Design

G. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
G1. General Provisions
G2. Members With Unstiffened or Stiffened Webs
1. Shear Strength
2. Transverse Stiffeners
G3. Tension Field Action
1. Limits on the Use of Tension Field Action
2. Shear Strength With Tension Field Action
3. Transverse Stiffeners
G4. Single Angles
G5. Rectangular HSS and Box-Shaped Members
G6. Round HSS
G7. Weak Axis Shear in Doubly Symmetric and Singly Symmetric Shapes
H. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
H1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Axial
Force
1. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and
Compression
2. Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members Subject to Flexure and Tension
3. Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact Members Subject to Single Axis
Flexure and Compression
H2. Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
H3. Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or
Axial force
1. Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to Torsion
2. HSS Subject to Combined Torsion, Shear, Flexure and Axial Force
3. Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion and Combined Stress
H4. Rupture of Flanges With Holes Subject to Tension
Limit state equations used
D. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
D2-1 Pg 16.1-26 - section,member
D2-2 Pg 16.1-26 - section,member
E. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMPRESSION
E3-1 Pg 16.1-33 - member
E4-1 Pg 16.1-34 - member
E7-1 Pg 16.1-40 - member
F, DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE
F2-1 Pg 16.1-47 - section, member
F2-2 Pg 16.1-47 - member
F2-3 Pg 16.1-47 - member
717

F4-2 Pg 16.1-50 - member
F4-3 Pg 16.1-50 - member
F5-2 Pg 16.1-54 - member
F9-4 Pg 16.1-58 - member
F10-2 Pg 16.1-60 - member
F10-3 Pg 16.1-61 - member
F11-2 Pg 16.1-63 - member
F11-3 Pg 16.1-63 - member
G. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
G2-1 Pg 16.1-67 - section, member, shear
G6-1 Pg 16.1-72 - section, member, shear
H. DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
H1-1a Pg 16.1-73 - member
H1-1b Pg 16.1-73 - member
718
Steel Member Design

H1-2
H2-1
H3-1
H3-6
H3-8
H4-1
Pg 16.1-75 - member
Pg 16.1-76 - section, member
Pg 16.1-79 - section
Assumptions
GENERAL
RHS and SHS root radius is inside radius.
Flange bolt holes equally divided between flanges.
Web bolt holes equally divided between webs where applicable.
If the design calculates a high Ultimate Load Factor then a default failure
equation (Yield about xx axis) will be returned.
Warning - If a value has exceeded a limit related to a warning, the value is NOT
adjusted to be within that limit, its actual value is used in the calculation.
Section B4.2 Design Wall Thickness for HSS
The wall thickness from the section properties is always multiplied by 0.93
factor.
Section B4.3b. Net Area
1/16" or 2 mm allowance for hole diameter already assumed to be allowed for
in the design data input.
No allowance for chain holes made.
Chapter D Design of Members for Tension
Pin connected members not checked.
Block shear strength not checked.
Eyebars not checked.
Section D3. Effective Net Area
A number of factors are unknown ie the length of the connection, number of
bolts in line and the type of the weld used. The user has the choice to leave U as
1.0 via the U flag or turn it on and use the conservative approach as detailed in
the Commentary Page 16.1-250 where the net area of the connected elements
are used as Ae. A U value is returned to indicate the reduction from the net area
ie U = Ae/An.
Shapes 0-3 use a worst case assumption of U = 0.75.
Section E5 Single Angle Compression members
Section E5.(a) used - group length used as they are individual members or web
members.
Section F
Outstands on box girders treated as tee flanges.
Non double symmetric box girders are not supported by F7, each flange and
web is still checked individually.
719

No allowance made for loads placed above or below the centroid.
No allowance for cantilevers in calculation of Cb.
Section F10. Single Angles
Bending about principal axis only.
Section F11.1
Yielding of solid bars, warning issued if slenderness limit exceeded, capacities
still calculated.
Section F13.2 Proportions limits for I shaped members
Warning given if limits exceeded, calculations still done even though limits
have been exceeded.
Section G
No reduction in shear areas for bolt holes.
No web transverse stiffeners assumed.
No shear tension field action is considered (Sect G3).
Solid circle shear done same as CHS with wall thickness same as radius.
Section G4 Single Angles
Star shapes have double shear capacity of equivalent single angle.
Section G5 Rectangular HSS and Box shaped members
Box sections with different thickness flanges and possibly outstands, the
element that produces the worst Cv value is used as the controlling cv and the
sum of all of the contributing shear elements is used for Aw.
If there is a flange outstand on the box girder these are treated like a T stem kv
= 1.2.
Section G7 weak axis shear
If any torsion then equation H3-8 used.
Section H1.3
Applied if section is rolled compact in flexure about major axis (axial class
ignored).
720
Steel Member Design
Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:2005 code specific items

Sections considered
1. General
1.1.2(1) Scope of Part 1.1 of Eurocode 3
1.7 Conventions for member axes
3. Materials
3.2.2(1) Ductility requirements fu/fy
3.2.6(1) Design values of material coefficients
5. Structural analysis
5.5 Classification of cross sections
5.5.1 Basis
5.5.2 Classification
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6),(7),(8),(10)
6. Ultimate limit states
6.1 General
(1),(3),(4)
6.2.2 Section properties
6.2.2.1 Gross cross-section
6.2.2.2 Net area
(1),(2),(3)
6.2.2.5 Effective cross-section properties for Class 4 cross-sections
(1),(2),(3),(4)
6.2.3 Tension
(1),(2),(3),(5)
6.2.4 Compression
(1),(2),(3),(4)
6.2.5 Bending moment
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6)
6.2.6 Shear
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6),(7)
6.2.8 Bending and shear
(1),(2),(3),(5)
6.2.9 Bending and axial force
6.2.9.1 Class 1 and 2 cross-sections
(1),(2),(3),(4),(5),(6)
6.2.9.2 Class 3 cross-sections
6.2.9.3 Class 4 cross-sections
(2)
6.2.10 Bending, shear and axial force
721

(1),(2),(3)
6.3 Buckling resistance of members
6.3.1 Uniform members in compression
6.3.1.1 Buckling resistance
(1),(2),(3),(4)
6.3.1.2 Buckling curves
(1),(2),(4)
6.3.1.3 Slenderness for flexural buckling
(1),(2)
6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling
(1),(2),(3)
6.3.2 Uniform members in bending
6.3.2.1 Buckling resistance
(1),(2),(4)
6.3.2.2 Lateral torsional buckling curves General case
(1),(2),(4)
6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling for rolled sections or equivalent welded
sections
(1),(2)
6.3.2.4 Simplified assessment methods for beams with restraints in
buildings
(1),(2),(3)
6.3.3 Uniform members in bending and axial compression
(2),(3),(4),(5)
Annex A Method 1: interaction factors kij for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4)
Annex B Method 2: interaction factors kij for interaction formula in 6.3.3(4)
UK National Annex to Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:2005
NA.2.15 Partial safety factors for buildings
NA.2.16 Imperfection factors for lateral torsional buckling
NA.2.17 Lateral torsional buckling for rolled sections or equivalent welded
sections
NA.2.18 Modification factor, f
NA.2.19 The slenderness limit lambdac0
NA.2.20 Modification factor, kfl
NA.2.21 Interactions factor kyy,kyz,kzy and kzz
NA3.1 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005, Annex A
NA3.2 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005, Annex B
Eurocode EN 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F: Lateral torsional buckling
722
Steel Member Design
Eurocode EN 1993-1-5:2006 Plated structural elements

4 Plate buckling effects due to direct stresses at the ultimate limit state
4.1 General
4.2 Resistance to direct stresses
4.3 Effective cross section
(3),(4)
4.4 Plate elements without longitudinal stiffeners
(1),(2)
5 Resistance to shear
5.1 Basis
(1),(2)
5.2 Design resistance
(1)
5.3 Contribution from the web
(1),(3)a
5.5 Verification
7 Interaction
7.1 Interaction between shear force, bending moment and axial force
(1),(2),(4)
UK National Annex to Eurocode EN 1993-1-5:2005
NA.2.4 Basis
Eurocode EN 1993-1-8:2005 Design of joints
3.10.3 Angles connected by one leg and other unsymmetrically connected
members in tension
(1),(2)
4.13 Angles connected by one leg
(1),(2),(3)
Limit state equations used
6.2.3 Tension
(6.5) page 49 section
6.2.4 Compression
6.2.6 Shear
(6.17) page 50 section, shear
6.2.9 Bending and axial force
723

6.3.1.1 Compression buckling resistance
(6.46) page 56 - member
6.3.2.1 Bending buckling resistance
(6.54) page 60 - member
6.3.3 Uniform members in bending and axial compression
(6.61) page 65 member
(6.62) page 65 member
EN 1993-1-5:2006 5 Resistance to shear
EN 1993-1-5:2006 7.1 Interaction between shear force, bending moment and axial
force
Assumptions
Torsion is not considered.
No block or shear lag effects considered.
Hybrid girders not considered.
Webs are unstiffened.
Flange bolt holes equally divided between flanges.
Web bolt holes equally divided between webs where applicable.
If the design calculates a high Ultimate Load Factor then a default failure equation
(Yield about xx axis) will be returned.
3.2.6 G = 80769.231.
6.2.3(5) Tension Channels connected only through the web and tees connected
only through the flange, the effective area is taken as the effective area of the
connected element plus half the area of the outstanding elements.
6.2.6(2) check is done even if there is torsion (torsion is not considered).
6.2.6(5) smallest flange area used.
6.2.9.1(4) I, channel and box shapes considered.
6.2.9.2(1) equation (6.44) used.
6.3.2.2(2) Mcr is calculated using EN 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F, including channel
and unequal angles.
Table A.2 Cmi0 based on member group.
Table B3 the highest Cm value calculated for uniform or concentrated load is used.
Table B.3 Cmy based on member group.
Table B.3 Cmz based on member segment.
Table B.3 CmLT based on member segment.
EN 1993-1-5:2006 5.2 Design resistance to shear No contribution from flanges
allowed.
724
Steel Member Design

EN 1993-1-8:2005 3.10.3 1 bolt, 1 row assumed.
725
AS/NZS 4600:2005 code specific items

Sections considered
AS/NZS 4600:2005 Cold-formed steel structures (incorporating amendment 1)
SECTION 1 SCOPE AND GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE (thickness)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.3.5 Bend
1.5 MATERIALS
1.5.1.4 Ductility (fu/fy ratio)
1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.6.3(a) Design capacity
Table 1.6 (b),(c),(d),(e),(f)
SECTION 2 ELEMENTS
2.1 SECTION PROPERTIES
2.1.1 General
2.1.2 Design procedures
2.1.2.1 Full section properties
2.1.2.2 Effective section properties
(b) local instabilities
2.1.3 Dimensional limits
2.1.3.1 Maximum flat-width-to-thickness ratios
(a)(i),(b),(c)
2.1.3.4 Maximum web depth-to-thickness ratio
(a) unreinforced webs
2.2 EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF STIFFENED ELEMENTS
2.2.1 Uniformly compressed stiffened elements
2.2.1.1 General
2.2.1.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
(a),(c),(i),(ii)
2.2.1.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
(a) Procedure I
2.2.3 Stiffened elements with stress gradient
2.2.3.1 General
2.3 EFFECTIVE WIDTHS OF UNSTIFFENED ELEMENTS
726
Steel Member Design

2.3.1 Uniformly compressed unstiffened elements
2.3.1.1 General
2.3.2 Unstiffened elements and edge stiffeners with stress gradient
2.3.2.1 General
2.4 EFFECTIVE WIDTH OF UNIFORMLY COMPRESSED ELEMENTS
WITH AN EDGE STIFFENER
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Effective width for capacity calculations
2.4.3 Effective width for deflection calculations
SECTION 3 MEMBERS
3.1 GENERAL
3.2 MEMBERS SUBJECT TO AXIAL TENSION
3.2.1 Design for axial tension
3.2.2 Nominal section capacity
3.2.3 Distribution of forces
3.2.3.1 End connections providing uniform force distribution
3.2.3.2 End connections providing non-uniform force distribution
3.3 MEMBERS SUBJECT TO BENDING
3.3.2 Nominal section moment capacity
3.3.2.1 General
3.3.2.2 Based on initiation of yielding
3.3.3 Nominal member moment capacity
3.3.3.1 General
3.3.3.2 Members subject to lateral buckling
3.3.3.2.1 Open section members
3.3.3.2.2 Closed box members
3.3.3.3 Members subject to distortional buckling
3.3.3.4 Beams having one flange through-fastened to sheeting
3.3.4 Shear
3.3.4.1 Shear capacity of webs without holes
3.4 CONCENTRICALLY LOADED COMPRESSION MEMBERS
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Sections not subject to torsional or flexural-torsional buckling equation
3.4.2(1) only
3.4.3 Doubly- or singly-symmetric sections subject to torsional or flexuraltorsional buckling
727

3.4.4 Point-symmetric sections
3.4.5 Non-symmetric sections
3.4.6 Singly-symetric sections subject to distortional buckling
3.4.7 Columns with one flange through-fastened to sheeting
3.6 CYLINDRICAL TUBULAR MEMBERS
3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Bending
3.6.3 Compression
3.6.4 Combined bending and compression
APPENDIX D DISTORTIONAL BUCKLING STRESSES OF GENERAL
CHANNELS, LIPPED CHANNELS AND Z-SECTIONS IN COMPRESSION
AND BENDING
D2 SIMPLE LIPPED CHANNELS IN COMPRESSION
D3 SIMPLE LIPPED CHANNELS OR Z-SECTIONS IN BENDING ABOUT
THE AXIS PERPENDICULAR TO THE WEB
Assumptions
fy and fu are read directly from section properties. No reductions or increases in fy
from Clause 1.5.1.2 - Strength increase resulting from cold forming, or Clause
1.5.1.4(b) - Ductility.
Shapes with intermediate stiffeners are not supported.
Unlipped (plain) Cee flanges are assumed to be an unstiffened element and the web
a stiffened element.
Webs of top hats that have edge stiffened bottom flanges are assumed to be a
stiffened element (ie. flanges are assumed to provide sufficient edge support to the
web to have the web classified as stiffened).
A ratio of effective section I to gross section I is included in the design report to
provide a deflection factor approximating the increase in gross section deflections
at the reported design load forces and moments. The SPACE GASS analysis
deflections are based on gross sections.
Clause 1.3.39 - a single lateral restraint 'L' not combined with any other flange
restraint is not recognised as an effective restraint for a segment as they do not
meet the requirements of a partially retrained cross section for a segment.
Clause 1.3.39 - a continuous lateral restraint 'C' is recognised as a restraint and
assumed to meet the requirements of a partially restrained cross section for a
segment.
Clause 2.1.1 - full section properties and yield strengths read directly from section
properties.
Clause 2.1.2.1 - actual shape including bends is used to calculate effective section
properties.
728
Steel Member Design

Clause 2.1.3.1 - failure if elements exceed prescribed ratios, warning given if
elements exceed clause note's ratios.
Clause 2.1.3.3 - shear lag effects not considered. A warning given if group length <
30 * flange width.
Clause 2.2.1.3 - procedure I used, Procedure II not used.
Clause 3.2.3.1 - it is assumed (a) and (b) are satisfied for concentric end
connections.
Clause 3.2.3.2 - for channels connected by flanges only, it is assumed b(i) and b(ii)
are satisfied.
Clause 3.3.3.2.1(b) - Iyc for zeds taken as geometric axis Iy/2.
Clause 3.3.2.3 - section moment capacity based on inelastic reserve capacity NOT
considered.
Clause 3.3.3 - unequal angles, equation 3.3.3.2(13) used for bending in x and y
axis.
Clause 3.3.3 - Mo is NOT calculated using a rational flexural-torsional buckling
analysis.
Clause 3.3.3.3 - only lipped cee, lipped cee back to back and zed sections
considered for distortional buckling .
Clause 3.3.3.2.1(a) - alternative for Z-sections restrained by sheeting against lateral
movement NOT considered.
Clause 3.3.3.4 - only (i),(ii),(iii),(iv),(v),(vii)(vii based on group length)
requirements are checked, assumed other requirements checked by user.
Clause 3.3.4.1 - no shear buckling check on CHS sections.
Clause 3.3.4 - for top hat sections, shear in x axis carried by top flange and
horizontal component of web, shear in y axis carried by vertical component of the
web.
Clause 3.4.1 - holes have not been allowed for in the calculation of Ae for Nc.
Clause 3.4.2 - grade 550 shapes less than 0.9mm thickness not supported.
Clause 3.4.2 - clause notes not applied. User to specify effective lengths in steel
member design group properties.
Clause 3.4.3 - alternative equation 3.4.3(2) not considered.
Clause 3.4.3 - equal angles, if no area reduction due to fy, foc based on maximum
compressive length and smallest radius of gyration in either axis.
Clause 3.4.6 - only lipped single or back to back cee considered for axial
compression distortional buckling.
Clause 3.4.6 - Fod calculated using Appendix D2.
Clause 3.4.7 - s = 0.5 (fastener in centre of flange), smallest flange width used for
zed sections.
Clause 3.4.7 - only (i),(ii),(iii),(iv),(v),(vi),(ix),(x based on group length)
requirements are checked, assumed other requirements checked by user.
Clause 3.5 - equations 3.5.1(2) and 3.5.2(2) are included in section checks. Msx
and Msy are used in equation 3.5.1(2)for the section check.
729

Clause 3.5.1 - equations 3.5.1(1) and 3.5.1(2) are included in member checks,
equation 3.5.1(3) is used if N*/phicNc <= 0.15.
Clause 3.5.1 - actual group length used for L in the L/1000 centroid shift for
angles.
Clause 3.5.2 - equation 3.5.2(1) is included in member checks only.
Clause 3.5.2 - equation 3.5.2(1) the axial tension term is conservatively ignored
(N* is always zero) if axial tension exists.
Clause 3.6.3 - axial compression section capacity for CHS is based on gross area.
Appendix D - for zeds, the widest flange is used determining flange and lip
properties.
Appendix D - flange and lip properties represented as square corners and
centrelines.
Appendix D3 - no reduction in lambda for any bracing interval.
730
Steel Member Design
Steel member design/check errors

SPACE GASS performs numerous checks for illegal and inconsistent data. Many
of these checks are done in the steel member design data input modules and any
errors detected there must be corrected immediately. However, some errors such as
faulty member groupings cannot be detected until the design/check phase.
All of the errors in the following list cause SPACE GASS to abort the design or
check of the current design group and move on to the next group. If an error occurs
during a design or an uninterrupted check, the program continues without alerting
you and puts the error message in the output report. Alternatively, if an error occurs
during an interrupted check, the program pauses to display the message and, if it is
a section related error, gives you the opportunity to manually select other sections
to be checked.
Warnings also appear in the output report but they do not cause SPACE GASS to
abort the design or check of the current design group.
This group contains a non-existent or repeated member
One of the analysis members nominated in the design group does not exist or has
been repeated.
Members in this group are not of the same section type
All analysis members in the design group must have the same section property
number.
This group does not have a contiguous run of members
All of the analysis members nominated in the design group must be connected
together end-to-end in the frame analysis model. They must also be listed in the
design group in the order that they are connected (from either end).
A tens/comp-only member in this group is disabled
One of the analysis members in the design group is a tension-only or compressiononly member which has been disabled during the analysis, thus leaving a gap in the
group.
A member in this group has buckled
One of the analysis members in the design group has buckled during the analysis,
thus leaving a gap in the group.
731

Stations per member limit has been exceeded
The stations per analysis member limit has been exceeded or the stations per design
group limit has been exceeded.
There is a limit of 500 stations per analysis member which must be enough for the
number of intermediate member stations that you specify, plus the extra stations at
the ends, at concentrated member loads and at flange restraint points. The solution
is to either add a node at midspan of the analysis member which has too many
stations or decrease the number of stations that you specify at the start of the
member design/check phase.
A flange restraint is off the end of the member group
One or more flange restraints have been specified beyond the end of the design
group.
Inappropriate group code or shape not supported
The section data from the library has an invalid group code or shape code (see also
Section libraries).
Starred angles cannot be made up from unequal angles
Starred angles can only be made from equal angle sections.
Starred angles are not supported for this design code
This is a restriction in the AS4100, BS5950 and NZS3404 modules.
This section shape not supported for this design code
The selected steel member design module does not support the shape of the section
currently being designed or checked.
Inappropriate end connection code for this section
An end connection code which is inappropriate for the section being considered has
been input. For example, an I or H section can have end codes of "Flange(s)",
"Web" or "Centroid", or a single angle section can have end codes of "Short" or
"Long". Note that single angle sections cannot have end connection codes of
"Centroid". If eccentric effects for angles are to be ignored, they must be disabled
at the start of the member design/check phase.
Invalid fabrication code for this section
The section data from the library has an invalid fabrication code (see also Section
libraries) or a rolled section has a fabrication code which shows it to be welded.
Inappropriate section dimensions for this design code
732
Steel Member Design

A code specific constraint on section dimensions has not been met. For example,
the BS5950 module requires channels to have equal flanges. For dimension
constraints, see also Steel member design/check assumptions.
No suitable section found
The steel member design module has found that all sections from the library which
comply with the library scan code are inadequate.
WARNING: You have suppressed eccentric end connection effects
If eccentric end effects for members which are not connected concentrically have
been disabled at the start of the design/check phase then this warning appears in the
output report.
WARNING: Not all load cases considered have been analysed non-linearly
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if any member
design/check load cases have only been analysed linearly.
WARNING: Web is inadequate for combined actions (App I) (Lf=#.##)
For AS4100 and NZS3404, a warning appears in the output report if the web is
inadequate. It suggests that web stiffeners may be required. The web failure load
factor is also given.
WARNING: Angle calculations do not consider bending moments. Do a
manual check
For AS1250, SABS0162 and AS3990, the calculations for angle sections do not
consider bending moments (apart from eccentric end moments). They should be
checked manually.
733

The SPACE GASS steel connection design module lets you design or check any of
the connections in a structural model.
Some key features of the module are as follows:

Fully integrated into SPACE GASS.
Design actions obtained directly from the analysis results.
Multiple load cases considered simultaneously.
Design and checking modes available.
735
Fully rendered 3D images of each connection generated.

Annotated elevations detailing all the connection components.
Connections able to be exported to other programs.
Fully compliant with the 2007 - 2014 ASI Steel Connection Design Guides.
All bolts, welds, plates, cleats, stiffeners and doubler plates
designed/checked.
A video showing the steel connection design module in action can be viewed at
www.spacegass.com/connect.
Note that if you haven't purchased the steel connection design module, you can still
run it in a free trial mode that limits you to using minimum design actions, and
prevents you from exporting or saving the job. All other features are fully
activated.
The connection design module is currently limited to open sections, however
connections for closed (tubular) sections are currently under development and are
expected to become available in the second half of 2014.
Refer to "Creating and editing connections", "The connection manager", "Design
considerations", "Connection reports" and "Connection preferences" for full details
of the connection design module.
736
Creating and editing connections

In order to define a connection, it is simply a matter of selecting the members to be
connected, clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Steel Connection
Design" from the menu that appears. Note that most connections require two
members to be selected, however for a base plate or single member stiff seat
connection only one member needs to be selected.
You must then select the type of connection you want from the following table.
Connections that are invalid for the number of members you selected will be
disabled in the table.
737
Alternatively, if you wish to make it the same as a connection that has already been
created, you can click the "Copy from Existing Connection" button and then select
from a list of the existing connections.
738
Note that if your model already contains connections, you can see which ones are
attached to a particular member by selecting that member, clicking the right mouse
button, choosing "Steel Connection Design" from the menu and, if the selected
member already has connections they will be displayed in the following table. You
can then click "Add New Connection" to create a new connection for that member
or edit one of its existing ones.
739
Regardless of which of the above methods you used, the connection is then
designed (or checked if you have copied from an existing connection) and the
results are presented in the connection editor shown below.
From there, you can examine the connection, click the Ok button to save and exit if
you happy with it, or make changes to customize it to your exact requirements.
Connection viewer
The connection viewer in the right-hand side of the editor gives you a realistic 3D
rendered view of the connection.
You can zoom, pan and rotate the image using the mouse in the normal way.
740
Or you can click the buttons at the top of the connection viewer to do a "Zoom fit",
display annotated 2D elevations or switch back to the 3D rendered image.
741
742
Input/edit fields
In order to edit the connection, you can change any of the data fields in the lefthand side panel. Some of the key input fields are as follows:
743
Connection number
This is the unique identification number of each connection. By default it is set to
the node number at the connection, however if that number is already taken by
another connection then it uses the next available number. You can manually set it
to comply with whatever numbering scheme you prefer.
Design code
Currently only AS4100 is available.
Title
You can specify an optional title that helps you to identify each connection. If you
leave it blank then the connection is referred to by its number and connection type.
Supporting and supported member
These are the members that are connected to each other. When you first create the
connection, SPACE GASS automatically determines which member is the
supporting member and which one is supported, however if you wish to swap them
you can do so in this form. You can also set the strength for each of the members.
Connection type
If you wish to change the connection type to one of a similar category then you can
do so with this field. For example, you could change a bolted end plate to a welded
moment connection or a web side plate to a flexible end plate, however you
couldn't change a bolted end plate to a web side plate because they are in different
categories. If you wish to change to a connection of a different category then you
must click the "Change Connection Type" button on the right side of the editor and
then re-select from the table of connection types.
744

Stiffen web/flange if necessary
Ticking these options means that web or flange stiffeners will be included in a
design only if required. If you untick these options and stiffeners are required then
the connection will fail.
Stiffen end plate
If you tick this option then the end plate will always be stiffened and this may
result in a thinner end plate than would otherwise be required.
Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise
you should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes).
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then
select the load cases you want from the list that appears as shown below.
Minimum design actions

In order to ensure that each connection is well proportioned and robust, especially
when the analysis design actions are quite low, the code nominates minimum
design actions that should be complied with. Normally you would leave this option
ticked, however you can turn it off if required.
Note that if you haven't purchased the steel connection design module, you can still
run it in a free trial mode that limits you to using minimum design actions. When
745

running in this mode, any load cases you type into the "Load cases" field are
ignored and you can't turn off the "Minimum design actions" option.
Haunches, plates, welds, bolts, stiffeners and cleats
The remainder of the input fields involving haunches, plates, bolts, stiffeners and
cleats are connection dependent. You can change any of them to configure a
library button give you
connection to exactly what you want. Any fields with a
access to the relevant library for the type of data being input.
Designing and checking
When you first create a connection, it is automatically designed and the results are
presented in the connection editor. You can either accept it in that state or you can
proceed to make changes and then have it checked.
If you change one of the input fields that could be overwritten by a design, the
connection becomes locked. This is a safety feature that guards against you
inadvertently clicking the "Design" button and losing your changes. If you really
want to design the connection after making changes that lock it then you must first
click the padlock button to unlock it.
Note that some input fields do not cause the connection to be locked, as they are
input fields only and are not overwritten when you perform a design. Examples of
these are bolt strength, bolting procedure, weld strength, etc.
Locking a connection
If you wish to prevent any further changes to a connection that isn't already locked,
you can lock it by clicking the padlock button. This will stop any of the
components of the connection from being changed if a batch design is performed
via the connection manager.
746

Auto check
If the "Auto check" option is ticked then a check is automatically done as soon as
you make a change to any component of your connection. If it is unticked then no
checking is done until you click the "Check" button.
Connection status
The status line at the bottom of the editor indicates whether the connection has
passed, failed or passed with a warning. It includes the critical load case, the
utilization ratio and a brief explanation of the failure mode or warning message. A
green line indicates it has passed, red indicates failure and yellow is for a pass with
a warning message. All of these colors can be changed via the "Preferences"
button.
Key diagrams
The symbols used in the connection input fields match the ASI design guides,
however some of the commonly used ones are also shown in key diagrams that you
can view by clicking the "Key Diagram" button.
747
Hiding components
If you wish to examine components of the connection that may be difficult to see
or partially obscured, you can turn on or off the members, plates, bolts or welds
using the buttons shown below. They are all on by default.
748
749
Reset
If you wish to undo all the changes made to a connection (except for its connection
number and title), you can click the "Reset" button. This will put it back to its
default state, the same as if you deleted the connection and then re-created it.
750

Reports
A single report (including a graphical representation of the connection) for the
connection currently in the editor can be obtained by clicking the "Report" button.
Alternatively, you can generate text reports for multiple connections via the report
panel of the connection manager or via the normal SPACE GASS report generator
in the non-renderer window. Refer to "Connection reports" for more information.
Exporting
You can export the current connection to a CAD system via the "DXF" or "DWG"
buttons. It can then be imported into AutoCAD or any other program that supports
those formats.
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various connection parameters and
colors. For more information refer to "Connection preferences".
Infotips
Once you have created some connections, you can hover over a node or member in
your model to see which connections are attached to it.
751
The connection manager

The connection manager is at the heart of the steel connection design module. It
presents all of your connections in a table and lets you scroll through them,
viewing each one as you go. You can also delete connections, edit them, generate
reports or perform a batch design/check on multiple connections.
You can get to the connection manager by clicking the
toolbar of the renderer.
button in the top
Connection table
You can click on any connection in the table to see it in the connection manager
viewer or you can scroll through them by using the up and down arrow keys on
your keyboard. You can double-click any connection in the table to open it in the
connection editor or alternatively you could use the "Edit Connection" button at the
bottom of the table.
752
The colored blocks in the first column signify whether the connection has passed
(green), failed (red), passed with a warning (yellow) or not yet design/checked
(white). By hovering over the colored block for a particular connection you can
obtain its critical load case, utilization ratio, failure mode (if failed) or warning
message (if there is one). Note that any of the colors can be changed via the
"Preferences" button.
The second column indicates whether the connection has been design ("D") or
checked ("C"). The remaining columns list the members involved in each
connection, the connection type and its title.
Connections can be added or deleted by using the "Add Connection" or "Delete
Connection" buttons at the bottom. It is recommended that new connections are
added by using the procedure explained in "Creating and editing connections"
rather than via the "Add Connection" button here.
753

Batch design/check
You can use this section of the manager to design or check all of your connections
or just some of them. This will be required from time to time if your model has
been changed and/or re-analysed.
Connections
If you want to design/check all connections then this field should be left blank,
otherwise you should type in your desired list of connections (separated by
commas or dashes). Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the
input field and then select the connections you want from the list that appears as
shown below.
754
Load cases
If you want to consider all load cases then this field should be left blank, otherwise
you should type in your desired list of load cases (separated by commas or dashes).
Alternatively, you can click the "..." button to the right of the input field and then
select the load cases you want from the list that appears as shown below.
755

Check
Tick this option if you want the locked connections (usually marked with a "C" in
the second column) to be checked. These are the connections that have been locked
manually via the padlock button or locked automatically due to changes made to
them in the connection editor. They will simply be checked for adequacy and none
of their components or design parameters will be changed during the check.
Note that if the "Design" option is unticked then the locked and unlocked
connections will be checked.
Design
Tick this option if you want the unlocked connections (usually marked with a "D")
in the second column to be designed. During the design some of their components
may be changed if the model or the design actions have changed since the last
design.
Include locked connections
If you want to override any locked connections and design them anyway then you
should tick this option. During the batch design/check, all the connections
encountered that are locked will be designed instead of being checked, however at
the end they will be re-locked.
Skip connections already designed or checked
If you have a large number of connections in your model, you may be able to save
some design/check time by ticking this option to skip the ones that have already
been designed or checked. For most jobs this time saving will be minimal and so
you should generally leave it unticked.
Reports
Text reports for multiple connections can be generated by filling out the following
form and then clicking the "Generate Report" button. Alternatively, you can click
the "Report" button in the connection editor to obtain a report (including a
graphical representation of the connection) for the connection currently in the
editor. You can also obtain text reports via the normal SPACE GASS report
generator in the non-renderer window. Refer to "Connection reports" for more
information.
756
Exporting and importing connections

Connection data can be exported to various file formats including MS-Excel and
MS-Access. You can also import from MS-Excel and MS-Access.
To export from the connection table you should select all of the connections to be
exported, click the right mouse button, select "Export" and then choose the desired
export format. To import, just click the right mouse button and choose "Import".
Note that the data being exported/imported is limited to the connection number, the
associated member numbers, the connection type and its title. None of the detailed
connection data is included. This means that any changes you have made to a
connection will not be included in the exported file and will be lost if you then reimport the file. For designed connections however, once you import the data and
re-design the connections, all of the detailed connection data will be re-instated.
757
Preferences
The "Preferences" button lets you change various connection parameters and
colors. For more information refer to "Connection preferences".
758
Design considerations
Design procedure
The design procedure varies for each connection type, however the general
procedure is as follows:
1. An initial plate size is chosen from the plate library, starting with the
smallest size.
2. An initial bolt size and bolt count is chosen from the bolt library, starting
with the smallest size. The bolt count depends on the bolt size, the plate
size and the connection type.
3. An initial weld is chosen from the weld library, starting with the smallest
size.
4. A number of checks are performed to determine the adequacy of each
component and the overall adequacy of the connection. If everything
passes then the design stops. If not, it continues as follows.
5. If any weld checks fail, the weld size is incremented (or is changed from a
fillet to a butt weld) and the procedure returns to step 4. If the maximum
weld size has been reached without a solution, the procedure continues as
follows.
6. If any bolt checks fail, the bolt size is incremented and the procedure
returns to step 3. If the maximum bolt size has been reached without a
solution, the procedure continues as follows.
7. If any plate checks fail, the plate size is incremented and the procedure
returns to step 2. If the maximum plate size has been reached without a
solution then the connection fails.
Note that the actual procedure is somewhat more complicated than described above
due to the differing nature of the interaction between the plates, bolts and welds for
each connection type.
Design actions
Some of the design actions that occur at a connection are not relevant for every
connection type. The design actions considered for each connection type are listed
in the following table.
Fx (Axial
force)
Fy (Major Fz (Minor
Mx
axis
axis
(Torsion)
shear)
shear)
Mz
My
(Major
(Minor
axis
axis
moment) moment)
759
Bolted end
plate
Welded
moment
Bolted apex
Fully bolted
splice
Fully welded
splice
Bolted / welded
splice
Web side plate
Flexible end
plate
Bolted angle
cleat
Bolted angle
seat
Welded angle
seat
Bearing pad
Stiff seat
Pinned
baseplate
Zero member strength

During a connection design/check, the module also checks that the member has
sufficient section capacity to transfer the design actions to the connection. If you
get an error message stating that "The supporting or supported member has zero
strength...", it means that the member's Fy or Fyw value is zero. To fix this, you
should open the shape builder for the member in question, click the "Design
Properties" button and then ensure that the Fy and Fyw values are non-zero. Note
that if the Fy and Fyw are already non-zero, it means that the shape builder has
obtained them and put them into the fields for you. You should save the new
properties, re-analyse the model and then try the connection design again.
760
Connection reports
Text reports can be generated via the following form in the connection manager,
via the normal SPACE GASS report generator in the non-renderer window or via
the "Report" button in the connection editor.
After specifying which connections are to be included in the report and ticking the
other desired options in the above form, you should click the "Generate Report"
button.
The following report is for a single connection that was generated from within the
connection editor.
761
762
Connection preferences
You can change the defaults for various connection parameters such as dimensions,
size ranges, strength grades, colors and other options.
Note that not all parameters are used in all connections. For example, the default
bolt gauge is overridden by other requirements in the bolted end plate connection
and others.
The bolt size, weld size and plate thickness ranges limit the size of the bolts, welds
and plates in a design and allow you to exclude sizes that are unavailable or not
desired.
Most colors can also be changed and you can see the immediate effect of your
changes in the sample image on the right and in the sample pass/warning/fail status
bars at the bottom.
763
764

Concrete column design
This section describes in detail the general use of the concrete column design
module. It also includes explanations of all of the fields you need to complete to
perform a concrete column design or check. Capabilities of the concrete column
design module include:
Design and checking modes.

Rectangular, circular, trapezoidal, tee, cruciform and non-standard
shapes.
Multiple rectangular and circular voids.
Multiple reinforcing bars of any size and location.
Reinforcing bar library.
Numerous methods of quickly generating bar layouts.
Calculation and display of interaction curves for the actual
reinforcement, and for other reinforcement percentages that you
specify.
Calculation of load factors for X-axis, Y-axis and biaxial bending.
Calculation of multiple load cases simultaneously.
Calculation of moment magnifiers.
Calculation and checking of code minimum design moments.
Allowance for tension and compression.
Allowance for positive and negative moments.
Automatic transfer of column geometry, including cross section shape
from your frame analysis model.
Automatic transfer of loads from your frame analysis model.
Allowance for input of extra user-defined load cases.
Various unit sets.
See also Concrete column assumptions and notes.
765
Running a concrete column design

You can perform a concrete column design by clicking the members you wish to
design, clicking the right mouse button and then selecting "Concrete Column
Design" from the floating menu that appears.
Shape selection
These buttons allow you to select a column cross section shape.
Non-standard shapes
You can use multiple rectangular or circular voids with any of the standard shapes
to create almost any type of non-standard shape such as columns with holes, lift
cores, shear walls, etc.
Clear
Resets all of the data in the form to default values.
766
Configure
Allows you to enter the configuration form where you are able to adjust a number
of parameters and settings. The specific fields are described later in this document
(see also Concrete column configuration).
Print
Allows you to print graphics, design data and the interaction curve points (see also
Concrete design report).
Check
Performs a check of the column for the shape, reinforcement and loads you have
defined. This includes calculation of the interaction diagrams, load factors,
slenderness and moment magnifiers, etc.
Auto-check mode
If activated, a check will automatically be performed whenever you change some
data. It operates exactly the same as if you clicked on the Check button after every
change you made.
You may wish to turn this off when the module is taking a long time to perform
calculations.
Design
Performs a design of the column which modifies the reinforcing bar sizes to satisfy
the reinforcement percentage range, loads and load factor limit you have defined. It
does not move, add or remove bars, it merely changes their size.
Note that all bar sizes will be changed to the same size.
Units
The units system you wish to use.
Code
The design code you wish to use.
767

Concrete
The concrete fields allow you to define the concrete strength and the column cross
section shape dimensions.
Fc
The characteristic concrete strength.
Dimensions
The dimensions for the selected shape. Note that all of the dimensions are
pictorially represented via the small diagram above the Concrete fields.
Bars
These fields allow you to define the reinforcement sizes and layout. You can
specify multiple reinforcement bars of different sizes within the column.
Add
Allows you to add another bar.
Delete
Allows you to delete the currently selected bar.
Generate reinforcement
Allows you simply specify the number and size of bars in each cross section face,
after which all bars are automatically generated.
When you specify the number of bars in each face, keep in mind that the corner
bars belong to just one face which is usually the horizontal face. For example, in
order to specify four bars in each face of a rectangular column, you should specify
four bars in the top and bottom faces and two bars in the side faces, resulting in a
total of twelve bars.
Note that this method of bar generation completely replaces all bars that were
previously defined.
Generate bars in a line
Allows you to generate a line of bars in any direction.
768
Note that this method of bar generation adds to the bars that were previously
defined.
Unify bar sizes
Causes all of the bars to be changed to the size you specify.
Bar
The number and name of the currently selected bar. Note that the currently selected
bar is circled in blue in the cross section diagram.
D
The bar diameter.
X and Y
The position of the bar relative to the upper left hand corner of the shape.
Percentage
The reinforcement range that you wish to design within. The module looks at this
range when performing a design (ie. when you click the Design button) and will
only choose a bar if its size falls within this range.
Voids
These fields allow you to specify multiple circular and rectangular voids.
Void
The number of the currently selected void. Note that if multiple voids exist, the
currently selected void is shown in blue in the cross section diagram.
Add
Allows you to add another void.
Delete
Allows you to delete the currently selected void.
Type
You can choose either rectangular or circular voids.
769

D
The void depth (if rectangular) or diameter (if circular).
B
The void width (if rectangular).
X and Y
The position of the voids centroid relative to the upper left hand corner of the
shape.
Length
The actual length of the column.
kx and ky
The effective length factors. These values are used to calculate the effective lengths
of the column, where Lex = kx*L and Ley = ky*L.
Braced (shrt / slnd)
Specifies whether the column is braced or unbraced. If the column is fixed in
position at its ends then you should tick the box.
The value beside the braced item (ie. shrt / slnd) refers to the slenderness of the
column. "Shrt" means that a column is short and "Slnd" means that the column is
slender according to AS3600 clause 10.3.
Loads
Each load case consists of a description, axial force, bending moments and end
moment ratios. During a design or check, the program considers all load cases
simultaneously.
If the structural model has been analysed, you can select specific load cases to be
transferred to the concrete column design module. In addition, 10 blank "userdefined" load cases are created in the concrete column design module, ready for
you to manually input forces and moments to supplement the transferred load
cases.
If the frame has not been analysed then only the 10 blank load cases are available.
! IMPORTANT NOTE !
Note that loads transferred from a SPACE GASS analysis are taken from the
column ends only, regardless of whether any larger intermediate column loads
exist or not
770

Load case description
This allows you to select a load case to view. All of the moment, axial force, end
moment, moment magnifier and ratio fields apply to the load case you select. The
load factor for the selected load case is shown as follows the interaction diagram
window (along with the load factor for the governing load case).
Note that the load point for the current load case is circled in blue in the interaction
diagram window.
If the load point is displayed in red in the interaction diagram window then it
indicates that the load factor is less than the load factor limit specified in the
configuration form (usually set to 1.0).
P
Axial compression (+ve) or tension (-ve). See also Sign conventions.
Mx
Bending moment (either positive or negative) about the columns local z-axis
(shown as the horizontal axis in the concrete column module). A positive Mx
causes compression at the top of the cross section. See also Sign conventions.
My
Bending moment (either positive or negative) about the columns local y-axis
(shown as the vertical axis in the concrete column module). A positive My causes
compression at the left hand side of the cross section. See also Sign conventions.
Mx1 / Mx2 and My1 / My2
The end moments used to calculate the reference L/r ratio when determining
whether the column is short or slender. The ratio is positive when bent in double
curvature (ie. M1 is the opposite sign to M2) or negative when bent in single
curvature (ie. M1 and M2 are both the same sign).
Ratio
The ratio of the end moments. The module will calculate this value for you (given
the end moments) or you can enter it directly.
771

Apply moment magnification
If activated, the moment magnifiers will be applied to the moments you specify.
The calculated moment magnifiers and the magnified moments are displayed
beside the moment fields.
If the buckling load of the column has been exceeded for the currently selected
load case then no moment magnifier will be shown, instead the word "buckled"
will appear in red (and the moment will be multiplied by 10,000).
Minimum load compliance
If activated, the codes minimum moments will be used if they are greater than the
actual moments applied. If the moment (Mx or My) beside the multiplier is drawn
in blue then the code defined minimum moment is being used.
Check biaxial
If activated, the module will consider biaxial effects in addition to the uniaxial
effects.
The load factor for the current load case and the governing load case
appear below the interaction diagram window with a code beside them indicating
whether biaxial (B), x-axis (X) or y-axis (Y) moments govern.
Interaction diagram window
This is the large graph displayed on the left hand side of the form.
The module constructs an interaction diagram (ie. Moment vs Axial force) for the
section you define and then draws a point for every load case you have defined.
The proximity of each load point to the interaction curve indicates whether the
section can resist that load or not.
The concrete column module also optionally performs a biaxial check so

that a point lying inside the curve does not necessarily indicate that the section has
sufficient capacity.
Note that the diagram will automatically change to show negative and positive
moments dependant upon the sign of the currently selected load case moment. You
can have both negative and positive moments displayed at the same time by
changing the appropriate configuration setting (see also Concrete column
configuration).
772
The load factors for the currently selected load case and the governing load case
are displayed below the bottom left hand corner of this window. A load factor
displayed in red indicates that the load factor is less than the load factor limit
specified in the configuration form. The maximum load factor value that will be
displayed is 999.0.
Load points drawn in red have a load factor less than the load factor limit specified
in the configuration form.
Finally, three special points are shown on the diagram. These points are:
Ecc:
Dec:
Bal:
Point of Minimum Eccentricity (Code Defined)

Point of Decompression (dn = D)
Balance Point (Ku = 0.6)
Cross section window

This window, located to the right of the interaction diagram window, displays the
cross section and includes all reinforcing bars and voids.
There is also a load position indicator in the centre of the diagram which indicates
the direction of the moments and the eccentricity of the load. In many practical
situations the load application point falls outside of the cross section in which cases
the load position indicator simply points towards the load application point without
showing its actual position.
Mux / Muy
These radio buttons, located immediately below the interaction diagram window,
allow you to select between the x-axis and y-axis interaction diagrams.
773
Concrete column configuration

You can edit the concrete column design configuration by clicking the
button.
Min / Max bar dia

The bar size range that the module will use (in addition to the reinforcement
percentage range) when determining a suitable reinforcement size during a design.
Tolerance (%)
The accuracy of the load factor and neutral axis depth calculations. A smaller
tolerance means the results will be more accurate, although the solution will take
longer.
Cover
The cover that will be used when defining a standard reinforcement layout. Note
that the cover is measured to the bar centre-lines.
Beta d (G/(G+Q))
The ratio of dead load to dead+live load used when calculating the moment
magnifier for an unbraced column.
Lambda uc
The uc factor from AS3600 clause 10.4.3.
774

Load factor limit
The acceptable load factor used to determine if the column is adequate for the
given loads. A column is assumed to be adequate if the load factor (X, Y or
Biaxial) for each load case is greater than or equal to the load factor limit. The
default is 1.0.
Calculate extra curves
This allows you to calculate up to 4 extra reinforcement curves for the percentages
you specify in the fields to the right. The distribution of reinforcement in the cross
section for the extra curves is the same as for the specified reinforcement.
Show positive and negative curves together
Allows you to show both positive and negative interaction diagrams together.
Comply with code reinforcement limits
If activated, the module will apply the codes minimum reinforcement
requirements during a design if necessary.
Show grid lines
Turns on and off the grid lines in the interaction diagram window.
Show special point values
Turns on and off the numeric values for the special points shown in the interaction
diagram window.
775
Concrete column design results

You can generate a report of the column design by clicking the
button.
Graphics
This includes the interaction diagram, the column cross section, and some of the
key input and output design parameters.
The content of the printed interaction diagram will depend upon how it is displayed
on the screen; so if you wish to display multiple reinforcement curves in the report
then you should make sure they are displayed on the screen. This also applies to the
special point values, grid lines, etc.
Design data
The design data report includes full details of the reinforcing bars, loads, and
design results for each load case. Values of bending moment, axial force, kx, ky,
and are also included for each of the special points. The special points are
explained as follows:
Ecc
Dec
Bal
M=0
N=0
- Point of Minimum Eccentricity (Code Defined)

- Point of Decompression (dn = D)
- Balance Point (Ku = 0.6)
- The point where the curve crosses the vertical axis
- The point where the curve crosses the horizontal axis
Interaction points
This produces a table of bending moment versus axial force values for each of the
points that make up the interaction curve. The values of kx, ky, and are also
included for each point. The special points are also labelled for easy reference.
776
Concrete column assumptions and notes

The following assumptions and notes should be noted when using the concrete
column design module.
1.
Calculations involving shapes that have voids which overlap may not be accurate.
2.
Calculations involving bars that fall within a void or outside the cross section may
not be accurate.
3.
Calculations involving bars that overlap may not be accurate.
4.
The program does some approximate checks for bars or voids that fall outside of
the cross section, however these checks are not exhaustive and it is up to you to
verify visually that none of these conditions occur.
5.
In certain circumstances, usually where the balance point is near to zero, there will
be a step increase in the moment capacity (it will appear as a bump in the
interaction diagram). This is because there is not a gradual increase in the strength
reduction factor from 0.6 to 0.8.
6.
Sometimes, particularly in sections with very small dimensions, the curve may not
appear to be a continuous line. This is due to insufficient convergence of the
calculations. Try decreasing the tolerance in the configuration form.
7.
Calculation speed can usually be increased by turning off the calculation of extra
reinforcement curves in the configuration form.
8.
The module does not consider true biaxial moment, rather it considers the
moments uniaxially and then performs a simple biaxial check in accordance with
AS3600 clause 10.6.5.
9.
If the buckling load (Nc) has been exceeded, the moment magnifier will be
inappropriate and the term "Buckled" will appear beside the final moment field.
This is because a moment magnifier cannot be calculated if a columns buckling
load has been exceeded.
10. A load factor of 999.0 indicates that the actual load factor is greater than or equal
to 999.0.
11. A load factor drawn in red indicates failure.
777

12. The calculation of the strength reduction factor considers parts (a), (b)(i) and
(b)(ii) of AS3600 table 2.3 only.
13. The cracked moments of inertia and cracked modulus of elasticity are not used.
14. The module calculates both of the moment magnifiers (Delta s and Delta b) and
uses the largest (where appropriate). See AS3600 clause 10.4.
15. A column is bent in single curvature when the ratio of the end moments M1/M2 is
positive and double curvature when the ratio is negative.
16. Torsion or shear are not considered.
17. Cover is measured to the centre-line of the bars.
778
Output
Output
Text and graphics reports can be viewed or printed. Print previews can be obtained
and the page setup form gives you full control over the printer selection, paper size,
orientation, margins, layout, scales and output format.
You can initiate a report by clicking the
toolbar button or selecting the Output
menu. You can then choose between viewing a text report, printing a text report or
printing graphics.
For text reports, the output can be limited to just input data or just output data and
even to specific nodes, members, section properties and load cases if required. You
can also limit the output to the data specified in any of the graphical filters.
Prior to generating a report, you must choose the items that you want to include in
the report by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the above form. You can turn
a whole column of check boxes on or off by clicking the "All on" or "All off"
buttons at the bottom of the form.
After completing your selections, you can proceed to the following form.
779
Filters
You can select from any of the graphical filters to limit the output report to the data
defined in a filter. Alternatively, you can select "Use Filter Selected in Main
Toolbar" so that the data included in the output report always matches what is
shown in the graphics display area.
You can also further limit the output data by specifying lists of nodes, members,
section properties, load cases, etc. If you want to include all items for a particular
780
Output
list then the list field should be left blank, otherwise type in a list of items
(separated by commas or dashes) that you want to include in the report.
Format
Output can be printed in fixed point format (eg. 12.45) or exponential format (eg.
1.245E+01). Fixed point is generally preferred as it is easier to read and allows
numbers with different orders of magnitude to be readily identified. It cannot,
however be used with very large or very small values. In such cases, exponential
format must be used.
As well as specifying the format, you can select the number of decimal places to be
included. This cannot be greater than 3 for exponential formatting and cannot be
greater than 8 for fixed point formatting. These limits are imposed because of a
maximum 10 digit field width. Care must be taken when specifying the number of
decimal places with fixed point format. You must ensure that for the range of
values likely to be encountered, you don't exceed the 10 digit field width. For
example five decimal place fixed point format could only handle values from 999.99999 to 9999.99999. Values outside of this range would simply be printed as
"**********".
Section and material properties are always presented in exponential format
regardless of the format you specify (due to the extreme range of values usually
encountered).
Enveloping
The analysis results data for each load case can be printed separately or can be
combined into a load case envelope. If a load case envelope is specified, the
program selects and prints the maximum and minimum values from the list of
specified output load cases. The report also includes the load case numbers and the
matching coincident values that occur at the same location and load case as each
maximum and minimum.
At the end of an envelope report is a summary envelope showing the maximums
and minimums for a group of nodes and/or members. The summary report also
shows the load case numbers and the matching coincident values.
Envelope summary only
By default, envelope reports include an envelope summary at the end, however you
can limit your report to just the summary by activating this option in the report
generation form.
781

Member end A or end B
For member end forces and moments, if you wish to limit your envelope to the
maximums and minimums that occur at just one particular member end (rather than
from either end), you should tick "Member End A" and/or "Member End B". If you
tick "Either Member End" (the default setting) then the maximums and minimums
will be taken from either end.
The enveloping tool is a fast and convenient way
of determining the critical load cases, nodes, members and plates, regardless of the
size of the job.
Include warnings
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages relating to the analysis
results which sometimes appear in output reports. For example, if a non-linear
analysis does not reach the requested convergence in some load cases, then
warning messages are posted in the output report for those load cases.
Intermediate stations
SPACE GASS can print the displacements, forces and moments at any
intermediate points along a member (not just at the end nodes). Before intermediate
member displacements, forces and moments can be printed, you must specify how
many equally spaced intermediate member stations are to be considered. The
program automatically adds an extra station at each end of the member and at each
point of application of a concentrated member load.
Sorting options
Analysis results output can be sorted in one or both of two ways.
1. If sorted in order of load case, the report lists the data for every node (or
member) under a main load case heading. This is repeated for each load
case.
2. If sorted in order of node/member, the report lists the data for every load
case under a main node (or member) heading. This is repeated for each
node (or member).
Member symbols notation
Steel member design reports allow you to optionally include a summary sheet of
the symbols used in the report together with a brief description of each.
782
Output
Member section properties
This allows you to specify whether or not full section properties for the designed or
checked members are included in the output. This option is usually suppressed
because it enlarges the size of the report.
Non-critical load cases
The majority of the report for a steel member design gives information about the
governing failure mode and the critical load case. A summary showing the
performance of all of the other load cases can also be included if required. The
non-critical load cases summary includes the load factor and the failure mode for
each load case.
A description of the failure mode for each load case does not necessarily
indicate that failure has occurred. It simply indicates the failure mode if the loads
were increased enough to cause failure.
Connection symbols notation
Steel connection design reports allow you to optionally include a summary sheet of
the symbols used in the report together with a brief description of each.
Connection specifications
This allows you to include or suppress the list of detailed specifications for the
bolts, plates, welds, stiffeners and cleats from the detailed output reports.
Connection calculations
This setting allows you to include or suppress the loads, stresses, capacities, factors
and other calculated values from the detailed output reports.
Warnings and notes
This check box allows you to suppress warning messages and notes relating to the
design results which sometimes appear in output reports.
Pass/fail criteria
For output of steel member and connection design results you can set the "Pass/fail
criteria" value to include only the members/connections which have passed, only
the ones which have failed, or all members/connections.
After completing the fields in the above form, you can click the Ok (if viewing),
Print, Print preview or Page setup buttons.
783
Page setup
You can access the page setup form by selecting "Page Setup" from the File menu
or clicking the "Page Setup" button on the "Print Text Report" or "Print Graphics"
forms.
The page setup form gives you full control over the printer selection, paper size,
orientation, margins, layout, scales and output format for both text and graphics.
There are separate tabs for text and graphics settings, however if the "Keep text and
graphics common items the same" check box is selected then items that are
common to both text and graphics only need to be changed in one tab rather than
both.
If you want the text and graphics settings to be different then you must deselect the "Keep text and graphics common items the same" check box before
making the changes.
If you want to include your own logo in printed output, you should create a logo
image file in JPG format, install it with the SPACE GASS utility tool, and then
select either of the "Logo on first page only" or "Logo all pages" check boxes in
the page setup form below. For best results, make the image file large enough so
that it contains enough pixels for a printer resolution of 300 dpi or more. For
example, if your printer operates at 600 dpi and you want the printed logo height to
be 20mm, your logo image file will need to be at least 472 pixels in height (ie.
600/25.4x20). Regardless of the size of your logo image file, it will be scaled to
print at the exact height you specify in the page setup form.
784
Output
785
786
Output
View text report

You can view a text report by clicking the
"View Text Report" from the floating menu, or selecting "View Text Report" from
the Output menu.
You must first select the data that you want to view, after which the report viewer
is displayed as follows.
The report viewer allows you to view any of the input or output data in an easy-toread format. The side menu lets you go directly to any part of the report or hide any
sections of the report before printing via the button located just above the side
menu.
787
Print preview
You can generate a print preview by clicking the "Print Preview" button in the
"View Text Report", "Print Text Report" or "Print Graphics" forms.
The print preview allows you to see exactly how the output will appear on your
printer. For text reports, the side menu lets you go directly to any part of the report
or hide any sections of the report before printing.
You can output direct to the printer or you can output to a text, PDF, HTML or
picture file.
788
Output
789
790
Output
Print text report

You can print a text report by clicking the
"Print Text Report" from the floating menu, or selecting "Print Text Report" from
the Output menu.
You must first select the data that you want to print, after which the print is
produced.
791
Print graphics
You can print graphics by clicking the
toolbar button and then selecting "Print
Graphics" from the floating menu, or selecting "Print Graphics" from the Output
menu.
Scale
Specify the desired hardcopy scale or leave it at zero for automatic scale to fit. For
example, type in a value of 100 for a 1:100 scale.
Title
This is simply a description which you can use to describe the particular view that
is being printed. It is placed near the bottom-left corner of the hardcopy and can be
left blank if it is not required.
After completing the fields in the above form, you can click the Print, Print
preview or Page setup buttons.
792
Output
The status report

A status report showing the actual problem size and the problem size limits can be
included at the start of each output report. It shows the number of nodes, members,
restraints, sections, materials, constraints, loads, load cases and members with
design data. It also shows the static and dynamic analysis status, ill-conditioning
status, non-linear convergence, frontwidth, total degrees of freedom, whether there
has been a steel or concrete design or check and the design code used. The status
report can be suppressed if it is not required.
793
Standard Libraries
Standard libraries
SPACE GASS is supplied with libraries of standard sections, materials, bolts,
plates, welds, spectral curves, reinforcing bars and moving load vehicles.
The libraries can be accessed by SPACE GASS for rapid and convenient input of
standard properties. They are also scanned frequently during analysis and design
operations.
You can get access to the libraries and retrieve data via the built-in library editor by
clicking the
button at various locations throughout SPACE GASS. You can
also access the library editor by choosing "Edit Libraries" from the File menu. The
library editor is shown below.
795
You cannot modify any of the standard libraries supplied with SPACE GASS,
however you can create your own custom libraries and edit them without
restriction. You can also copy data from the standard libraries into your custom
libraries. For more information, refer to The library editor.
796
Standard Libraries
The library editor

You can open the library editor from the File menu or by clicking the
button
from various places within SPACE GASS. If opened from the File menu, the
library editor gives you access to all types of library data (eg. sections, materials,
bolts, plates, welds, reinforcing bars, spectral curves and moving load vehicles). If
opened via the
button from an area of SPACE GASS that is working with a
specific type of data (eg. section property data), the library editor gives you access
only to the applicable library types (eg. section property libraries).
797
Custom libraries
You cannot edit or delete standard libraries (shown black in the library tree),
however you can create and edit your own custom libraries (shown blue in the
library tree). To create a custom library, click the appropriate library type in the
library tree (eg. Section Libraries) and then click the "Add Library" button at the
bottom of the library editor. Alternatively, you can right-click on "Section
Libraries" in the tree and then select "New Library".
Similarly, for section libraries you can add groups (sub-categories) by clicking the
"Add Group" button at the bottom or by right-clicking on the custom library name
and then selecting "New Group".
Once a custom library has been created, you can add data by clicking the
appropriate "Add" button at the bottom or by right-clicking on the custom library,
selecting the appropriate "New" item and then entering the required data. For
section libraries, new sections can be added via the shape builder which
automatically opens when you click the "Add Section" button. Sections can also be
edited by clicking the shape builder button
library editor.
798
near the top-right corner of the
Standard Libraries
You can also drag library items from a standard or custom library into a custom
library. For section libraries, you can even drag a whole group into a custom
library. If you hold down the Ctrl key while dragging then the items will be copied
rather than being moved.
For information on how to import or export library data in other formats, refer to
Importing and exporting.
For information on how to import SPACE GASS 10 or older libraries, refer to
Importing old libraries.
799
Importing and exporting

Data can be imported into custom libraries or exported from standard or custom
libraries by opening the library editor, right-clicking on the desired library in the
library editor tree and then selecting the appropriate Import or Export option. If you
wish to create a custom library by importing data from another source, it must be in
a text or MS-Excel file formatted correctly for SPACE GASS. If you are not sure
what the correct format is, you should export one of the standard SPACE GASS
libraries to a file and then open the file to see how it is formatted and then use that
as a pattern for the file you wish to import.
For information on how to import SPACE GASS 10 or older libraries, refer to
Importing old libraries.
800
Standard Libraries
Importing old libraries

If you have custom libraries in SPACE GASS 10 or earlier formats, you can import
them into the current version of SPACE GASS by opening the library editor, rightclicking on the desired library type in the library editor tree, selecting Import ->
From Library and then locating and selecting the library to be imported. Note that
SPACE GASS 10 custom libraries are always called SGCustomLib.MDB (or
SGMoveC.dat for moving load vehicles) and are usually located in the SPACE
GASS 10 program folder (c:\Program files (x86)\SPACE GASS\Exe or c:\Program
files\SPACE GASS\Exe).
801
Section libraries
Section libraries contain the geometric and strength information for the sections
they contain. This includes the section name, shape type, section properties,
dimensions, fabrication type and material strengths. Section libraries are now
capable of holding non-standard sections and sections built from up to 10 shapes.
When importing section data from another source into a SPACE GASS section
library, if you are not sure what the correct format is, you should export one of the
standard SPACE GASS libraries to a file and then open the file to see how it is
formatted and then use that as a pattern for the file you wish to import.
Note the following requirements for section property data.
1. For sections that have webs or flanges, the y-axis is parallel to the web(s)
and the z-axis is parallel to the flange(s). For other sections the y-axis is
the vertical axis and the z-axis is the horizontal axis. The y and z axes
generally correspond to the minor and major axes respectively, however
this is not always the case.
2. Moments of inertia and plastic section modulii are for the principal axes.
3. The principal angle is positive when the principal axes are rotated anticlockwise with respect to the non-principal axes when looking at the cross
section from a member's node A end towards its node B end. Note that the
sign of the principal angle is shown reversed in the shape builder.
4. The centroid dimensions are the distances from the shape's reference point
to the centroid along the y and z axes. Reference points are shown as a red
dot in the image for each shape type in the Shape builder.
5. For column Tee sections, the dimensions are orientated the same as for
beam Tee sections (ie. the depth is parallel to the web) even though column
Tees are rotated through 90 degrees compared to beam Tees when used in
a SPACE GASS model.
6. The "Section type" field must conform to one of the following:
Circular Bar
Square Bar
Rectangular Bar
802
Standard Libraries
Circular Tube
Square Tube
Rectangular Tube
I or H Section
Plate Web Girder
Channel
Beam Tee
Column Tee
Equal Angle
Unequal Angle
Cruciform
Box Girder
Wedge
Slice
Fillet
Points Shape
LiteSteel Beam
LSB Back-to-Back
Lines Shape
Triangle
Cee Shape
Zed Shape
Top Hat
Double Angled Short
Double Angled Long
Double Angled Starred
Polygon
Polygon Tube
Equilateral Triangle
Schifflerized Angle
803
Material libraries
Each material in a standard material library contains the following information.
1. Youngs modulus
2. Poissons ratio
3. Mass density
4. Thermal coefficient
5. Concrete strength
804
Standard Libraries
Bolt libraries
Each bolt in a standard bolt library contains the following information.
1. Diameter
2. Tensile strength (normal strength)
3. Tensile strength (high strength)
4. Tensile stress area - Cross-sectional area for calculating tensile stress
5. Shank area - Plain shank cross-sectional area
6. Core area - Core cross-sectional area
7. Minimum tension - Minimum bolt tension at installation
805
Plate libraries
Each plate in a standard plate library contains the following information.
1. Width
2. Thickness
3. Yield stress (normal strength)
5. Yield stress (high strength)
806
Standard Libraries
Weld libraries
Each weld in a standard weld library contains the following information.
1. Size
807
Reinforcing bar libraries

Each bar in a standard reinforcing bar library contains the following information.
1. Diameter
2. Yield strength
3. Area
808
Standard Libraries
Spectral curve libraries

Each curve in a standard spectral curve library contains the following information.
1. Damping factor (%)
2. Period, acceleration point pairs
809
Vehicle libraries
Each vehicle in a standard vehicle library contains the following information.
1. Vehicle name
2. X, Y and load data for each wheel, where X is the distance back from the
front of the vehicle to the wheel, and Y is the distance sideways from the
centerline of the vehicle to the wheel.
810

Portal frame analysis
This worked example considers the analysis of a typical 25m span haunched portal
frame. Linear (1st order), non-linear (2nd order), dynamic (frequency and
response) and buckling analyses have been performed and the results are presented
in the computer printout at the end of this appendix.
This appendix considers only the analysis of the portal frame. The portal frame
member and connection design is covered in Portal frame member design and
Portal frame connection design.
This example is loosely based on the design example used in the AISC publication
by Woolcock, Kitipornchai and Bradford (9). There are, however a number of
significant differences between this example and the AISC example which can be
summarized as follows.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for projected length member loads,
the live load has been input over the plan rafter length rather than its
inclined length. This was a situation that the software used in the AISC
example could not model.
Because SPACE GASS has facilities for automatically calculating haunch
section properties based on the rafter size and the size of the member from
which the haunch was cut, the haunch section properties are different. The
AISC example simply approximates the haunch to a 530UB82 for half of
its length and a 410UB60 for the other half.
SPACE GASS uses a value for gravitational acceleration of 9.8066, the
AISC example uses 9.82.
SPACE GASS uses grade 300 steel, whereas the AISC example uses grade
250 steel.
The purlins used in the AISC design example are assumed to be spaced at a
maximum of 1500mm, while the structural drawings elsewhere in the
publication show them to be spaced at 1200mm maximum. This SPACE
GASS example uses purlin spacings of 1200mm as they are shown in the
drawings.
Because the members in the AISC example have been designed by hand, they have
not been able to take full advantage of some of the more calculation intensive and
811

slightly more efficient higher tiers offered by the SPACE GASS steel member
design module.
The differences between this example and the AISC example prohibit the
direct comparison of results. However, if you wish to do so, you should first modify
the SPACE GASS example in accordance with the differences listed above. If you
do the modifications, you will find that the results of the two examples agree almost
exactly.
812
Geometry and loads

The portal frame considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Building length:
Portal span:
Portal spacing:
Eave height:
Apex height:
Columns:
Rafters:
Haunches:
Roof and walls:
Static load data
Dead load (DL):
72m
25m
9m
7.5m
8.155m (3 roof pitch)
530 UB 92.4
360 UB 50.7
360 UB 50.7 (3m long)
Trimdek 0.47 sheeting
Sheeting and purlins 0.90kN/m (slope)

Self weight (calculated by SPACE GASS)
Live load (LL):
2.25kN/m (plan)
4.5kN concentrated at apex
Cross wind (CW):

(external)
6.30kN/m on windward columns

4.50kN/m on leeward columns
6.48kN/m uplift on windward 8m of rafter
3.60kN/m uplift on central 8m of rafter
2.16kN/m uplift on leeward remainder of rafter
Longit. wind (LW1):

(1st internal frame)
4.14kN/m outward on columns

5.04kN/m uplift on rafters
Longit. wind (LW2):

(external suction)

Cross wind (IPCW):

(Internal pressure)

Longit. wind (IPLW):

(Internal pressure)

813

Load combination 1:
Load combination 2:
Load combination 3:
Load combination 4:
Load combination 5:
1.25DL + 1.50LL
0.80DL + CW + IPCW
1.25DL + CW - 0.96IPCW (ISCW)
0.80DL + LW1 + IPLW
1.25DL + LW2 - 6.50IPLW (ISLW)
The distributed live load is based on a roof area of 9m x 25m = 225sqm which
requires a distributed live load of 0.25kPa.
The wind loads are based on terrain category 3 (industrial area) for region B with
Vu = 60m/s and Vs = 38m/s. Taking into account the height of the rafters and
purlins (200mm), the eaves height is assumed to be 8m and the apex height is
assumed to be 8.7m.
Dynamic frequency mass data
Dead load (DL):
Self mass (calculated by SPACE GASS)
Sheeting and purlins 91.77kg/m (slope)
Live load (LL):
229.43kg/m (plan)
458.86kg concentrated at apex
Total distributed mass:
91.77 + 229.43 = 321.20kg/m
Mass at nodes 3 and 11:

Mass at node 7:
1.63/2.0*321.20 = 0.26 tonne

1.63*321.20 = 0.52 tonne
(1.63/2.0+2.99/2.0)*321.20 = 0.74 tonne
(2.99/2.0+6.26/2.0)*321.20 = 1.49 tonne
6.26*321.20+458.86 = 2.47 tonne
Dynamic response data

Spectral curve:
Damping:
Dynamic modes:
Direction vector:
Loading code:
Vertical direction:
Sign of the results:
Base shear:
Site factor:
Acceleration factor:
814
1989 Newcastle earthquake, magnitude 6.5

5%
1,2 and 3
Dx=1.0, Dy=0.0, Dz=0.0
General
Y-axis
Signed to match first dynamic mode
Not less than 80% of total static force
2.0
0.08

Importance factor:
Structural response factor:
Spectral curve multiplier:
Mode combination method:
1.0
4.5
0.017778
SRSS
Load combinations
The static load combinations are in accordance with typical strength limit state
stipulations (excluding earthquake loading) as follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.25G + 1.5Q
1.25G + Wu
0.80G + 1.5Q
0.80G + Wu
While these load combinations are no longer in line with AS1170, they have been
retained for compatibility with the AISC publication on which this example is
based.
In this worked example it has been assumed that the distributed live load in
load case 2 need not be considered to act simultaneously with any wind load. The
structure will be designed to support either the distributed live load or the wind
load, whichever produces the most critical effect.
Notes on the structure
Extra nodes have been positioned at mid-height of the columns and at midspan of
the rafters. This is not absolutely necessary but it means that graphical displays will
automatically show the values of forces and moments at these points. Of course
you can obtain the deflections, forces and moments at these points without having
to have nodes there by simply scaling them off the diagrams or by obtaining an
intermediate displacements, forces and moments report, however these methods
may sometimes be less convenient than having the values displayed graphically.
Nodes have also been positioned at the mid-points and end-points of the haunches.
These are necessary so that the section properties can be varied along the haunch.
In the above example, the haunch has been modelled as a tapered 360 UB 50.
Only two prismatic members were used to approximate the tapered haunch because
tests have shown that this gives results very close to the exact solution. If you wish
to experiment with this, try inputting some frames with varying numbers of haunch
segments, and compare the results of the deflections and bending moments.
815
In fact, haunches do not have much effect at all on the bending moments in other
parts of the frame, however they do eliminate the need to design the rafters for the
high bending moments which usually occur at the knee. Haunches can also offer
significant reductions in deflection of the frame.
The frame, as modelled in SPACE GASS, is shown in the following diagrams.
Basic arrangement of nodes and members
816
Frame elevation
817
Method of input
The portal frame in this example was initially input as a single bay portal frame
using the structure wizard. This allowed quick and easy generation of the basic
structural geometry, restraints, section properties (including the haunch section
properties) and material properties. If the extra column and rafter nodes were not
required, it would then have been a simple matter to add the loads (graphically or
using datasheet input) and then perform the analysis.
Node, member and plate numbering
In this example we wanted to match the node, member and plate numbering with
the numbering used in the AISC example. Therefore, it was necessary to modify
the geometry slightly so that the extra nodes were added and the nodes and
members were re-numbered. This was done graphically by simply subdividing the
members and then renumbering the structure with the extra nodes included. The
rafter and haunch section properties were assigned to members 3 - 10 by
graphically changing the section property numbers of members 5, 6, 7 and 8 to
section 2, members 3 and 10 to section 3, and members 4 and 9 to section 4.
Node restraints
When the structural geometry was established, node restraints of FFFRFR were
applied to support nodes 1 and 13, and restraints of RRFRRR were applied to rafter
nodes 3, 6, 7, 8 and 11. The restraints on nodes 1 and 13 specified that the structure
was pin-based, allowing rotation about both the X and Z axes. The standard 2D
frame pin restraint of FFFFFR was not used in this case because it would have
prevented rotation about the X-axis.
The rafter node restraints were applied to simulate the effect of wall and roof
bracing that would prevent any out-of-plane (Z-axis) movements at those nodes. A
general restraint of RRFRRR was not used in this case because it would have
prevented the out-of-plane movements of nodes 2, 4, 5, 9, 10 and 12 which, in real
life, would be free to move in that direction. Although no out-of-plane movements
would occur in a static analysis (due to no loads in that direction), they could
occur in a buckling analysis and, if restrained, could result in incorrect buckling
load factors and effective lengths.
If no intermediate nodes were present that could move in the out-of-plane
directions then a general restraint could have been used.
818
Under normal circumstances it would not have been necessary to match the
node and member numbering with the AISC example. This would have removed the
necessity to subdivide the members, or change the member properties and node
restraints as described above.
Loads
The node and member loads were applied graphically. Although there are many
member loads, the graphical input facility made it very easy to input them enmasse. For most load cases, it was simply a matter of placing a window around the
members and then specifying the load applied to them.
Self weight, combination load cases and load case titles were input using
datasheets.
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, loading diagrams for each load
case were viewed followed by an output report of the complete structural data. Any
errors in the data were corrected and the model was then ready for analysis.
819
Analysis procedure
Linear analysis
The first analysis to be performed was a linear analysis for the primary load cases 1
- 7. The results of this analysis were used to check frame deflections.
Non-linear analysis
Load cases 10 - 14 were analysed in a second run because the steel member design
example is based on factored combination load cases analysed non-linearly. Both
P- and P- effects were activated, while axial shortening wasnt. The linear
analysis results for the primary load cases were retained and the stiffness matrix
was written to the disk.
A general optimization method was used, however this had little impact on
the analysis time due to the small size of the model.
The self mass of the portal frame was considered in association with mass load
case 8 (which incorporated the lumped masses due to both dead and live loading
conditions). Six mode shapes were requested.
The dynamic response analysis was performed for spectral load case 9. The sign of
the results was determined automatically and all results were retained for those
load cases analysed linearly or non-linearly.
Buckling analysis
The default options were selected for the buckling analysis (ie. only one mode
shape was calculated).
820
Analysis results
The following summary was developed based upon the results:
Maximum sway deflection:
Maximum vertical deflection:
Maximum moment (column - knee):
Maximum moment (rafter - haunch):
Maximum moment (apex):
Minimum frame buckling load factor:
Natural frequencies (first 6 frequencies):
99mm (load case 3)

119mm (load case 4)
527kNm (load case 11)
8.23 (load case 14)
0.86, 1.82, 4.88, 6.27, 6.28, 6.76 Hz
The dynamic response spectrum analysis resulted in small displacements, forces

and moments that were insignificant in comparison with the static load cases.
The results of the non-linear analysis were then used to perform a steel member
check and a steel connection design.
As an interesting exercise, the results of the non-linear analysis were then
compared with the results of a linear analysis of the combination load cases. Load
case 11 was still found to be critical with the new moments being 542kNm at the
knee, 223kNm at the end of the haunch and 132kNm at the apex. You can see that
the linear moments are actually greater than the non-linear moments. This is also
shown in the AISC example.
821
Graphical output
The following diagrams are examples of the graphical output that can be obtained
from SPACE GASS on the screen or printer.
Basic arrangement of nodes and members
Loading diagram (load case 3)
822
Deflection diagram (load cases 2, 3 and 4)
Bending moment diagram (load case 10)
823

824

Bending moment diagram envelope (load cases 10-14)
Dynamic mode shape (load case 8)
825
Buckling mode shape (load case 12) Note the out-of-plane buckling mode
826
Analysis input report

This report extract shows all of the frame analysis input data, including lumped
masses and spectral load cases.
ANALYSIS STATUS REPORT
---------------------Job name ...... Portal Frame Worked Example
Location ...... C:\Trunk\Shipping\Samples\Mixed
This is a 2D portal frame analysed and designed
worked
example appendices.
Length units ......................... m
Section property units ............... mm
Material strength units .............. MPa
Mass density units ................... kg/m^3
Temperature units .................... Celsius
Force units .......................... kN
Moment units ......................... kNm
Mass units ........................... kg
Acceleration units ................... g's
Translation units .................... mm
Stress units ......................... MPa
Nodes ................................
13
Members ..............................
12
Plates ...............................
0
Restrained nodes .....................
7
Nodes with spring restraints .........
0
Section properties ...................
4
Material properties ..................
1
Constrained nodes ....................
0
Member offsets .......................
4
Node loads ...........................
1
Prescribed node displacements ........
0
Member concentrated loads ............
0
Member distributed forces ............
78
Member distributed torsions ..........
0
Thermal loads ........................
0
Member prestress loads ...............
0
Plate pressure loads .................
0
Self weight load cases ...............
2
Combination load cases ...............
5
for the SPACE GASS
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
32765)
32765)
32765)
32765)
32765)
5000)
999)
32765)
32765)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
250000)
10000)
10000)
827
Load cases with titles ...............

Lumped masses ........................
Spectral load cases ..................
Static analysis ......................
Dynamic analysis .....................
Response analysis ....................
Buckling analysis ....................
Ill-conditioned ......................
Non-linear convergence ...............
Frontwidth ...........................
Total degrees of freedom .............
Static load cases ....................
Mass load cases ......................
14
18
1
Y
N
N
Y
N
Y
12
65
8
2
( 10000)
( 250000)
( 10000)
STEEL DESIGN STATUS REPORT

-------------------------Members with design data .............
Member design or check ...............
Connections with design data .........
Connection design ....................
4
C
5
Y
( 32765)
AS4100
( 32765)
AS4100
NODE COORDINATES (m)

---------------X
Node
Coord
1
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
4
1.630
5
3.260
6
6.250
7
12.500
8
18.750
9
21.740
10
23.370
11
25.000
12
25.000
13
25.000
Y
Coord
0.000
3.750
7.500
7.585
7.671
7.828
8.155
7.828
7.671
7.585
7.500
3.750
0.000
MEMBER DATA (deg,kNm/rad,m)
828
Z
Coord
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
(
(
10000)
10000)
----------- (F=Fixed, R=Released) (*=Cable length)

Dir
Dir Dir Memb
B
Memb
Angle Node Axis Type Node A Node B Sect Mat
Fixity
Length
1
0.00
Norm
1
2
1
1
FFFFFF
3.750
2
0.00
Norm
2
3
1
1
FFFFFF
3.750
3
0.00
Norm
3
4
3
1
FFFFFF
1.632
4
0.00
Norm
4
5
4
1
FFFFFF
1.632
5
0.00
Norm
5
6
2
1
FFFFFF
2.994
6
0.00
Norm
6
7
2
1
FFFFFF
6.259
7
0.00
Norm
7
8
2
1
FFFFFF
6.259
8
0.00
Norm
8
9
2
1
FFFFFF
2.994
9
0.00
Norm
9
10
4
1
FFFFFF
1.632
10
0.00
Norm
10
11
3
1
FFFFFF
1.632
11
0.00
Norm
11
12
1
1
FFFFFF
3.750
12
0.00
Norm
12
13
1
1
FFFFFF
3.750
Node A Node
Fixity
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
FFFFFF
NODE RESTRAINTS (kN/m,kNm/rad)

--------------- (F=Fixed, R=Released, S=Spring, *=General)
Rest
X Axial
Y Axial
Z Axial X Rotation Y
Rotation Z Rotation
Node
Code
Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness
Stiffness Stiffness
1 FFFRFR
3 RRFRRR
6 RRFRRR
829
7 RRFRRR
8 RRFRRR
11 RRFRRR
13 FFFRFR
SECTION PROPERTIES (mm,mm^2,mm^4,deg)

-----------------Sect Name
1 530 UB 92.4
Aust300
2 360 UB 50.7
Aust300
3 360 UB 50.7-A
4
360 UB 50.7-B
Area of
Torsion
Z-Axis
Princ
Sect
Section
Constant
Area
Angle
1 1.1800E+04 7.7500E+05
Infinite
0.00
2 6.4700E+03 2.4100E+05
Infinite
0.00
3 1.0845E+04 3.4719E+05
Infinite
0.00
4 9.7132E+03 3.2708E+05
Infinite
0.00
Sect Shape
Tt/Tb
Tw/Rr
1 I shape
15.60
10.20
15.60
830
14.00
Mark
C1
Shape
I shape
R1
I shape
S3
Multiple shapes User
S4
Multiple shapes User
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Y-Axis
Mom of In
Mom of In
Shr Area
2.3800E+07 5.5400E+08
Infinite
9.6000E+06 1.4200E+08
Infinite
1.4404E+07 6.4354E+08
Infinite
1.4399E+07 3.6751E+08
Infinite
Trans Mir Rotate

No
Source
No
0.00
D
533.00
Bt/Bb Btw/Bbw
209.00
0.00
209.00
0.00
Shr
2 I shape
11.50
7.30
11.50
11.40
3 I shape
11.50
7.30
11.40
Beam Tee
11.50
7.30
No
No
No
No
0.00
0.00
356.00
356.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
171.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
11.50
0.00
11.40
4 I shape
11.50
7.30
11.40
Beam Tee
11.50
7.30
No
No
No
No
180.00
0.00
333.10
356.00
11.50
0.00
No
No
180.00 178.002
11.40
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (MPa,kg/m^3,strain/degC)

------------------Young's Poisson's
Mass
Concrete
Matl Material Name
Modulus
Ratio
Density
Strength
1 STEEL
2.0000E+05
0.25 7.8500E+03
MEMBER OFFSETS (m)

-------------Memb Axes
Dxa
Dzb
3
L
0.000
0.000
4
L
0.000
0.000
9
L
0.000
0.000
10
L
0.000
Coeff of
Expansion
1.170E-05
Dya
Dza
Dxb
Dyb
-0.168
0.000
0.000
-0.168
-0.106
0.000
0.000
-0.106
-0.106
0.000
0.000
-0.106
-0.168
0.000
0.000
-0.168
831
0.000
NODE LOADS (kN,kNm)

---------Load
X-Axis
Z-Axis
Case Node
Force
Moment
2
7
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
-4.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER DISTRIBUTED FORCES (m,kN/m)

------------------------Load
Sub Axes
Start
Start/
Z Start/
Case Memb Load Sys
Position
Finish
Finish
1
3
1
GI
0.000%
0.900
0.000
0.900
4
1
0.000
0.900
0.000
5
0.900
0.000
0.900
0.000
6
0.900
0.000
0.900
0.000
7
0.900
Position
Finish
100.000%
0.000
0.000
GI
GI
GI
GI
0.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.900
0.000
8
832
X Start/
0.000
0.900
0.900
Finish
GI
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.900
0.000
9
0.900
0.000
0.900
0.000
10
0.900
0.000
0.900
2
2.250
0.000
3
GI
GI
GP
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2.250
0.000
4
2.250
0.000
2.250
0.000
5
2.250
0.000
2.250
0.000
6
2.250
0.000
2.250
0.000
7
2.250
0.000
2.250
0.000
8
2.250
0.000
2.250
0.000
9
2.250
0.000
2.250
0.000
10
2.250
0.000
2.250
3
0.000
1
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
GP
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
0.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
100.000%
6.300
833
0.000
0.000
0.000
2
0.000
1
GP
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
2
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
2
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
6.300
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
6.300
6.300
0.000
6.480
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
6.480
6.480
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
6.480
6.480
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
6.480
6.480
0.000
1.741
0.000
0.000
6.480
3.600
1.741
6.259
0.000
0.000
3.600
3.600
0.000
3.482
0.000
0.000
3.600
2.160
3.482
6.259
0.000
0.000
2.160
2.160
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
2.160
9
2.160
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
834
2.160
10
2.160
0.000
1
L
0.000
2.160
11
0.000
0.000
1
GP
0.000
0.000
12
0.000
0.000
1
GP
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
4.500
4.500
0.000%
100.000%
4.500
4.500
0.000
4
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.140
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.140
4.140
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.140
5.040
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
5.040
5.040
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
5.040
5.040
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
5.040
5.040
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
5.040
5.040
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
5.040
8
0.000
1
L
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
835
5.040
0.000
5.040
9
5.040
0.000
1
L
0.000
5.040
10
5.040
0.000
1
L
0.000
5.040
11
4.140
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.140
12
4.140
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.140
1
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
5
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
6
1.440
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
836
1.440
7
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
1.440
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
1.440
10
1.440
0.000
1
L
0.000
1.440
11
1.440
0.000
1
L
0.000
1.440
12
1.440
0.000
1
L
0.000
1.440
1
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
6
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
5
0.000
1
L
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
837
4.680
0.000
4.680
6
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
9
4.680
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.680
10
4.680
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.680
11
4.680
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.680
12
4.680
0.000
1
L
0.000
4.680
1
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
4.680
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
7
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
3
0.900
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
838
0.900
4
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
7
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.000
1
L
0.000
9
0.900
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.900
10
0.900
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.900
11
0.900
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.900
12
0.900
0.000
1
L
0.000
0.900
0.000
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.900
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
0.000%
100.000%
0.000
0.000
SELF WEIGHT (g's)

----------Load
X-Axis
Case
Accel'n
Y-Axis
Accel'n
Z-Axis
Accel'n
839
1
8
0.000
0.000
-1.000
-1.000
0.000
0.000
COMBINATION LOAD CASES

---------------------Load case 10: 1.25DL+1.5LL
1.250 * Load case 1: Dead load (DL)
1.500 * Load case 2: Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
Load case 11: 0.8DL+CW+IPCW
1.000 * Load case 3: Cross wind (CW)
1.000 * Load case 6: Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Load case 12: 1.25DL+CW+ISCW
1.000 * Load case 3: Cross wind (CW)
-0.960 * Load case 6: Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)
Load case 13: 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
1.000 * Load case 4: Longitudinal wind at first internal frame
(LW1)
1.000 * Load case 7: Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
Load case 14: 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
1.000 * Load case 5: Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction
(LW2)
-6.500 * Load case 7: Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
LOAD CASE TITLES

---------------Load
Case Title
1 Dead load (DL)
2 Live load including 4.5kN at ridge (LL)
3 Cross wind (CW)
4 Longitudinal wind at first internal frame (LW1)
5 Longitudinal wind with 0.2 external suction (LW2)
840
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Cross wind internal pressure (IPCW)

Longitudinal wind internal pressure (IPLW)
Lumped masses (DL+LL)
Spectral load case
1.25DL+1.5LL
0.8DL+CW+IPCW
1.25DL+CW+ISCW
0.8DL+LW1+IPLW
1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
LUMPED MASSES
------------Load
Z-Axis
Case Node
Mass
8
3
0.000
4
0.000
5
0.000
6
0.000
7
0.000
8
0.000
9
0.000
10
0.000
11
0.000
(kg,kgm^2)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
Mass
260.000
260.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
520.000
520.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
740.000
740.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1490.000
1490.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2470.000
2470.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1490.000
1490.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
740.000
740.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
520.000
520.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
260.000
260.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
SPECTRAL LOAD DATA

-----------------Load Mode
Damping
Case Shape Spectral Curve Factor
9
1
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
Mass
Case
8
Direction Vector
Dx
Dy
Dz
1.000
0.000
0.000
841
2
3
NEWCASTLE
NEWCASTLE
Damping
Spectral Curve Factor
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
842
5%
5%
5.0%
5.0%
8
8
1.000
1.000
0.000
0.000
Description
Newcastle 1989, Dir=N-S, Mag=6.5
0.000
0.000
Static analysis report (itemised)

This report extract shows the node displacements for primary load cases (1-9), the
member forces and moments for combination load cases (10-14), and the node
reactions for all load cases. Note that SPACE GASS lets you choose any desired
load cases for each part of the report.
Although load case 9 is a spectral load case rather than a static load case, it is also
included in this part of the report because its results are in the same form as those
of a static analysis.
NODE DISPLACEMENTS (mm,rad)
-----------------Load case 1 (Linear): Dead load (DL)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
2
-3.443
-0.037
0.000
0.000
3
-1.988
-0.069
0.000
-0.001
4
-1.704
-3.152
0.000
-0.002
5
-1.392
-7.573
0.000
-0.003
6
-0.795
-19.423
0.000
-0.004
7
0.000
-35.597
0.000
0.000
8
0.795
-19.423
0.000
0.004
9
1.392
-7.573
0.000
0.003
10
1.704
-3.152
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
843
0.000
11
0.002
1.988
-0.069
0.000
0.000
-0.037
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
12
0.001
3.443
0.000
13
0.000
0.000
Load case 2 (Linear): Live load including 4.5kN at

ridge (LL)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.002
2
-6.194
-0.048
0.000
0.001
3
-3.698
-0.097
0.000
-0.003
4
-3.193
-5.540
0.000
-0.004
5
-2.629
-13.435
0.000
-0.006
6
-1.532
-35.183
0.000
-0.008
7
0.000
-66.190
0.000
0.000
8
1.532
-35.183
0.000
0.008
9
2.629
-13.435
0.000
0.006
10
3.193
-5.540
0.000
0.004
11
3.698
-0.097
0.000
0.003
12
6.194
-0.048
0.000
-0.001
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.002
844
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 3 (Linear): Cross wind (CW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.018
2
63.213
0.117
0.000
-0.014
3
99.246
0.234
0.000
-0.004
4
98.835
-3.476
0.000
-0.001
5
98.245
-0.524
0.000
0.004
6
96.822
27.786
0.000
0.013
7
93.373
96.251
0.000
0.005
8
92.581
78.638
0.000
-0.010
9
90.748
42.540
0.000
-0.013
10
89.618
21.016
0.000
-0.013
11
88.460
0.084
0.000
-0.013
12
43.844
0.042
0.000
-0.012
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.012
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 4 (Linear): Longitudinal wind at first

internal frame (LW1)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
845
0.000
-0.003
10.251
0.100
0.000
-0.002
3
6.504
0.200
0.000
0.005
4
5.584
9.951
0.000
0.007
5
4.560
24.370
0.000
0.010
6
2.597
64.155
0.000
0.015
7
0.000
118.858
0.000
0.000
8
-2.597
64.155
0.000
-0.015
9
-4.560
24.370
0.000
-0.010
10
-5.584
9.951
0.000
-0.007
11
-6.504
0.200
0.000
-0.005
12
-10.251
0.100
0.000
0.002
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
2
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2

external suction (LW2)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
2
2.808
0.029
0.000
0.000
3
1.823
0.057
0.000
0.001
4
1.565
2.772
0.000
0.002
5
1.278
6.813
846
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
6
0.003
0.728
18.027
0.000
0.000
33.464
0.000
0.000
-0.728
18.027
-0.004
9
-1.278
6.813
0.000
-0.003
10
-1.565
2.772
0.000
-0.002
11
-1.823
0.057
0.000
-0.001
12
-2.808
0.029
0.000
0.000
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
7
0.004
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 6 (Linear): Cross wind internal pressure

(IPCW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.003
2
9.127
0.093
0.000
-0.001
3
5.925
0.186
0.000
0.004
4
5.087
9.010
0.000
0.007
5
4.154
22.143
0.000
0.009
6
2.365
58.586
0.000
0.013
7
0.000
108.759
0.000
0.000
8
-2.365
58.586
0.000
-0.013
9
-4.154
22.143
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
847
0.000
-0.009
-5.087
0.000
-0.007
11
-5.925
0.000
-0.004
12
-9.127
0.000
0.001
13
0.000
0.000
0.003
10
9.010
0.000
0.000
0.186
0.000
0.000
0.093
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 7 (Linear): Longitudinal wind internal

pressure (IPLW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
2
1.755
0.018
0.000
0.000
3
1.139
0.036
0.000
0.001
4
0.978
1.733
0.000
0.001
5
0.799
4.258
0.000
0.002
6
0.455
11.267
0.000
0.003
7
0.000
20.915
0.000
0.000
8
-0.455
11.267
0.000
-0.003
9
-0.799
4.258
0.000
-0.002
10
-0.978
1.733
0.000
-0.001
11
-1.139
0.036
0.000
-0.001
12
-1.755
0.018
0.000
0.000
13
0.000
0.000
848
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.001
Load case 8 (Linear): Lumped masses (DL+LL)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
Rotation
1
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2
-1.257
-0.020
0.000
0.000
3
-0.716
-0.034
0.000
-0.001
4
-0.613
-1.166
0.000
-0.001
5
-0.500
-2.777
0.000
-0.001
6
-0.285
-7.050
0.000
-0.002
7
0.000
-12.848
0.000
0.000
8
0.285
-7.050
0.000
0.002
9
0.500
-2.777
0.000
0.001
10
0.613
-1.166
0.000
0.001
11
0.716
-0.034
0.000
0.001
12
1.257
-0.020
0.000
0.000
13
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 9 (Spectral) Spectral load case
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Transl'n
Transl'n
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
849
Rotation
1
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
5
0.000
6
0.000
7
0.000
8
0.000
9
0.000
10
0.000
11
0.000
12
0.000
13
0.000
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.142
0.000
0.000
0.255
0.001
0.000
0.257
-0.052
0.000
0.258
-0.105
0.000
0.258
-0.168
0.000
0.254
0.000
0.000
0.258
0.168
0.000
0.258
0.105
0.000
0.257
0.052
0.000
0.255
0.001
0.000
0.142
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER FORCES AND MOMENTS (kN,kNm)

------------------------Load case 10 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P- P- 4 Itns, 99.988%
Cnv (Res gov)
Y-Axis
Memb Node
Moment
1
1
850
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
77.150
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
-40.644
0.000
0.000
0.000
2
0.000
2
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
0.000
5
0.000
5
0.000
6
0.000
6
0.000
7
0.000
7
0.000
8
0.000
8
0.000
9
0.000
9
0.000
10
0.000
10
10
0.000
11
0.000
11
11
0.000
12
0.000
72.892
-153.483
72.892
-153.483
68.634
-305.488
44.163
-298.089
43.693
-196.504
43.728
-199.207
43.261
-112.024
43.249
-116.590
42.445
7.872
42.439
7.868
40.765
118.633
40.765
118.633
42.439
7.868
42.445
7.872
43.249
-116.590
43.261
-112.024
43.728
-199.207
43.693
-196.504
44.163
-298.089
68.634
-305.488
72.892
-40.644
0.000
0.000
-40.644
0.000
0.000
-40.644
0.000
0.000
66.421
0.000
0.000
57.393
0.000
0.000
57.365
0.000
0.000
48.514
0.000
0.000
48.523
0.000
0.000
33.220
0.000
0.000
33.230
0.000
0.000
1.242
0.000
0.000
-1.242
0.000
0.000
-33.230
0.000
0.000
-33.220
0.000
0.000
-48.523
0.000
0.000
-48.514
0.000
0.000
-57.365
0.000
0.000
-57.393
0.000
0.000
-66.421
0.000
0.000
40.644
0.000
0.000
40.644
0.000
0.000
851
12
0.000
12
0.000
13
0.000
-153.483
72.892
-153.483
77.150
0.000
40.644
0.000
0.000
40.644
0.000
0.000
Load case 11 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+CW+IPCW

Cnv (Res gov)
Y-Axis
Memb Node
Moment
1
1
0.000
2
0.000
2
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
4
0.000
5
0.000
5
5
0.000
6
0.000
6
6
0.000
7
0.000
7
7
0.000
8
852
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
-111.210
-0.001
-113.935
272.886
-113.935
272.885
-116.660
526.758
-71.579
514.769
-71.697
343.477
-71.756
347.913
-71.869
203.508
-71.849
211.094
-72.025
17.416
-72.015
17.423
-72.381
-127.088
-71.867
-127.088
-71.501
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
77.731
0.000
0.000
71.656
0.000
0.000
71.662
0.000
0.000
65.587
0.000
0.000
-113.084
0.000
0.000
-97.131
0.000
0.000
-97.084
0.000
0.000
-81.016
0.000
0.000
-81.028
0.000
0.000
-50.958
0.000
0.000
-50.973
0.000
0.000
-1.128
0.000
0.000
-8.690
0.000
0.000
32.142
0.000
0.000
0.000
8
8
0.000
9
0.000
9
0.000
10
0.000
10
10
0.000
11
0.000
11
11
0.000
12
0.000
12
12
0.000
13
0.000
-50.702
-71.507
-50.708
-71.332
66.786
-71.344
59.254
-71.231
144.881
-71.195
140.473
-71.077
241.074
-70.823
252.982
-68.098
61.589
-68.098
61.588
-65.373
0.000
32.122
0.000
0.000
49.258
0.000
0.000
49.241
0.000
0.000
58.257
0.000
0.000
58.302
0.000
0.000
67.204
0.000
0.000
-67.473
0.000
0.000
-33.048
0.000
0.000
-33.050
0.000
0.000
1.375
0.000
0.000
Load case 12 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

Cnv (Res gov)
Y-Axis
Memb Node
Moment
1
1
0.000
2
0.000
2
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
3
0.000
4
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
13.908
0.000
9.650
86.625
9.650
86.625
5.392
21.162
38.036
27.534
37.852
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
43.143
0.000
0.000
2.670
0.000
0.000
2.669
0.000
0.000
-37.804
0.000
0.000
3.417
0.000
0.000
3.126
0.000
0.000
853
0.000
4
4
0.000
5
0.000
5
0.000
6
0.000
6
0.000
7
0.000
7
0.000
8
0.000
8
0.000
9
0.000
9
0.000
10
0.000
10
10
0.000
11
0.000
11
11
0.000
12
0.000
12
12
0.000
13
0.000
33.511
37.854
31.166
37.677
36.738
37.676
32.760
37.402
43.657
37.401
43.658
36.829
42.300
37.439
42.299
38.010
-41.230
38.015
-41.230
38.289
-133.038
38.299
-128.995
38.476
-194.408
38.449
-192.028
38.633
-269.109
53.057
-275.580
57.315
-138.467
57.315
-138.467
61.573
0.000
3.103
0.000
0.000
2.989
0.000
0.000
2.998
0.000
0.000
3.723
0.000
0.000
3.728
0.000
0.000
-7.768
0.000
0.000
-3.883
0.000
0.000
-24.391
0.000
0.000
-24.384
0.000
0.000
-36.594
0.000
0.000
-36.583
0.000
0.000
-43.748
0.000
0.000
-43.771
0.000
0.000
-51.114
0.000
0.000
35.916
0.000
0.000
35.943
0.000
0.000
35.941
0.000
0.000
35.968
0.000
0.000
Load case 13 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW

Cnv (Res gov)
854
Y-Axis
Memb Node
Moment
1
1
0.000
2
0.000
2
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
4
0.000
5
0.000
5
5
0.000
6
0.000
6
6
0.000
7
0.000
7
7
0.000
8
0.000
8
8
0.000
9
0.000
9
9
0.000
10
0.000
10
10
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
-54.034
0.000
-56.759
90.108
-56.759
90.108
-59.484
251.759
-55.536
242.455
-55.654
156.521
-55.684
159.966
-55.797
86.556
-55.787
92.446
-55.962
-8.640
-55.957
-8.637
-56.323
-81.824
-56.323
-81.824
-55.957
-8.637
-55.962
-8.640
-55.787
92.446
-55.797
86.556
-55.684
159.966
-55.654
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
14.709
0.000
0.000
33.609
0.000
0.000
33.609
0.000
0.000
52.509
0.000
0.000
-56.667
0.000
0.000
-49.234
0.000
0.000
-49.198
0.000
0.000
-41.651
0.000
0.000
-41.664
0.000
0.000
-27.223
0.000
0.000
-27.235
0.000
0.000
2.950
0.000
0.000
-2.950
0.000
0.000
27.235
0.000
0.000
27.223
0.000
0.000
41.664
0.000
0.000
41.651
0.000
0.000
49.198
0.000
0.000
49.234
0.000
0.000
855
0.000
11
0.000
11
11
0.000
12
0.000
12
12
0.000
13
0.000
156.521
-55.536
242.455
-59.484
251.759
-56.759
90.108
-56.759
90.108
-54.034
0.000
56.667
0.000
0.000
-52.509
0.000
0.000
-33.609
0.000
0.000
-33.609
0.000
0.000
-14.709
0.000
0.000
Load case 14 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Cnv (Res gov)
Y-Axis
Memb Node
Moment
1
1
0.000
2
0.000
2
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
4
0.000
5
0.000
5
5
0.000
6
0.000
6
6
856
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
86.713
0.000
82.455
-138.160
82.455
-138.160
78.197
-336.781
65.332
-325.836
65.148
-211.544
65.187
-215.576
65.010
-118.343
64.996
-125.205
64.722
10.888
64.715
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
-28.268
0.000
0.000
-44.806
0.000
0.000
-44.806
0.000
0.000
-61.343
0.000
0.000
74.891
0.000
0.000
64.158
0.000
0.000
64.116
0.000
0.000
53.560
0.000
0.000
53.573
0.000
0.000
35.144
0.000
0.000
35.159
0.000
0.000
0.000
7
0.000
7
7
0.000
8
0.000
8
0.000
9
0.000
0.000
10
0.000
10
10
0.000
11
0.000
11
11
0.000
12
0.000
12
12
0.000
13
0.000
10.882
64.144
114.887
64.144
114.887
64.715
10.882
64.722
10.888
64.996
-125.205
65.010
-118.343
65.187
-215.576
65.148
-211.544
65.332
-325.836
78.197
-336.781
82.455
-138.160
82.455
-138.160
86.713
0.000
-3.363
0.000
0.000
3.363
0.000
0.000
-35.159
0.000
0.000
-35.144
0.000
0.000
-53.573
0.000
0.000
-53.560
0.000
0.000
-64.116
0.000
0.000
-64.158
0.000
0.000
-74.891
0.000
0.000
61.343
0.000
0.000
44.806
0.000
0.000
44.806
0.000
0.000
28.268
0.000
0.000
NODE REACTIONS (kN,kNm)

-------------Load case 1 (Linear): Dead load (DL)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
10.293
25.270
0.000
0.000
13
-10.293
25.270
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
857
0.000
Load
0.000
0.000
-50.540
0.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
50.540
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 4.477E-13 0.000E+00

Resid 4.547E-13 4.405E-13
0.000E+00 4.334E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load case 2 (Linear): Live load including 4.5kN at

ridge (LL)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
18.261
30.375
0.000
0.000
13
-18.261
30.375
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-60.750
0.000
Reac
0.000
60.750
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 8.528E-13 0.000E+00

Resid 1.116E-12 3.411E-13
0.000E+00 1.052E-12
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
0.000
0.000
Load case 3 (Linear): Cross wind (CW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-70.889
-73.554
0.000
0.000
13
-8.224
-26.461
858
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
79.112
100.014
0.000
3.992
Reac
-79.112
-100.014
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 0.000E+00 0.000E+00

Resid 4.405E-11 2.018E-12
0.000E+00 3.865E-12
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load case 4 (Linear): Longitudinal wind at first

internal frame (LW1)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-20.355
-63.000
0.000
0.000
13
20.355
-63.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
126.000
0.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
-126.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -1.478E-12 0.000E+00

Resid 1.364E-12 2.345E-13
0.000E+00 9.948E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load case 5 (Linear): Longitudinal wind with 0.2

external suction (LW2)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-4.820
-18.000
0.000
0.000
13
4.820
-18.000
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
859
Load
0.000
36.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
-36.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -4.370E-13 0.000E+00

Resid 3.837E-13 2.274E-13
0.000E+00 3.695E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000
Load case 6 (Linear): Cross wind internal pressure

(IPCW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-15.667
-58.500
0.000
0.000
13
15.667
-58.500
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
117.000
0.000
Reac
0.000
-117.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -1.393E-12 0.000E+00

Resid 3.297E-12 1.535E-12
0.000E+00 1.080E-12
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
0.000
0.000
Load case 7 (Linear): Longitudinal wind internal

pressure (IPLW)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-3.013
-11.250
0.000
0.000
13
3.013
-11.250
0.000
0.000
860
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
22.500
0.000
Reac
0.000
-22.500
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil -2.647E-13 0.000E+00

Resid 3.944E-13 2.132E-13
0.000E+00 2.025E-13
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000
Load case 8 (Linear): Lumped masses (DL+LL)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
3.777
14.005
0.000
0.000
13
-3.777
14.005
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-28.009
0.000
Reac
0.000
28.009
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 1.635E-13 0.000E+00

Resid 3.340E-13 7.816E-14
0.000E+00 9.415E-14
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
0.000
0.000
Load case 9 (Spectral) Spectral load case
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-0.118
-0.239
0.000
0.000
13
-0.118
0.239
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
861
Reac
0.236
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 10 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL

Cnv (Res gov)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
40.644
77.150
0.000
0.000
3
0.000
-0.003
0.000
0.000
6
0.000
0.002
0.000
0.004
7
0.000
0.009
0.000
0.000
8
0.000
0.002
0.000
-0.004
11
0.000
-0.003
0.000
0.000
13
-40.644
77.150
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-154.300
0.000
Reac
0.000
154.300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 7.114E-11 0.000E+00

Resid 1.508E-04 8.702E-03
0.000E+00 3.605E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
0.000
0.000
Load case 11 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+CW+IPCW

Cnv (Res gov)
862
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-77.731
-111.210
0.000
0.001
3
-0.005
0.001
0.000
-0.002
6
0.000
-0.001
0.000
-0.006
7
0.000
-0.015
0.000
-0.001
8
0.000
-0.006
0.000
0.006
11
0.008
0.009
0.000
-0.001
13
-1.375
-65.373
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
79.112
176.582
0.000
3.990
Reac
-79.107
-176.582
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 5.348E-03 0.000E+00

Resid 7.552E-03 1.502E-02
0.000E+00 6.465E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
Load case 12 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW

Cnv (Res gov)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-43.143
13.908
0.000
0.000
3
0.003
0.002
0.000
0.000
6
0.000
-0.001
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
863
0.000
-0.001
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.001
8
0.000
0.001
0.000
0.000
11
-0.003
-0.001
0.000
-0.001
13
-35.968
61.573
0.000
0.000
7
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
79.112
-75.481
0.000
3.994
Reac
-79.112
75.481
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 5.341E-04 0.000E+00

Resid 3.230E-03 1.762E-03
0.000E+00 8.404E-04
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
Load case 13 (Non-linear): 0.8DL+LW1+IPLW

Cnv (Res gov)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
-14.709
-54.034
0.000
0.000
3
0.000
0.002
0.000
0.000
6
0.000
-0.002
0.000
-0.003
7
0.000
-0.007
0.000
0.000
8
0.000
-0.002
0.000
0.003
11
0.000
0.002
0.000
0.000
13
14.709
-54.034
0.000
0.000
864
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load
0.000
108.068
0.000
Reac
0.000
-108.068
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 3.368E-11 0.000E+00

Resid 1.201E-04 6.997E-03
0.000E+00 3.039E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000
Load case 14 (Non-linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW

Cnv (Res gov)
X-Axis
Y-Axis
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Node
Force
Force
Moment
Moment
1
28.268
86.713
0.000
0.000
3
0.000
-0.005
0.000
0.000
6
0.000
0.004
0.000
0.006
7
0.000
0.015
0.000
0.000
8
0.000
0.004
0.000
-0.006
11
0.000
-0.005
0.000
0.000
13
-28.268
86.713
0.000
0.000
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
-173.425
0.000
Reac
0.000
173.425
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Equil 8.475E-11 0.000E+00

Resid 2.542E-04 1.466E-02
0.000E+00 6.321E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
Load
0.000
0.000
865
866
Static analysis report (enveloped)

This report extract covers the same information as the previous section except that
the results are enveloped. It allows you to quickly locate the maximum and
minimum values together with their coincident values.
Note the summary envelopes at the end of each section which show the overall
maximums and minimums for all selected nodes and members.
NODE DISPLACEMENTS (mm,rad)
------------------ (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Envelope = Load Cases 1-9
and All Nodes
Load
Y-Axis
Node Case
Rotation
1
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
X-Axis
Z-Axis
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.002*
0.000
-0.018#
63.213*
-0.014
-6.194#
0.001
63.213
-0.014
-6.194
0.001
-6.194
0.001*
63.213
-0.014#
99.246*
-0.004
-3.698#
-0.003
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Transl'n
Transl'n
Rotation
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.117
0.000
0.000
-0.048
0.000
0.000
0.117*
0.000
0.000
-0.048#
0.000
0.000
-0.048
0.000
0.000
0.117
0.000
0.000
0.234
0.000
0.000
-0.097
0.000
0.000
867
3
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
4
3
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
2
868
99.246
-0.004
-3.698
-0.003
6.504
0.005*
99.246
-0.004#
0.234*
0.000
0.000
-0.097#
0.000
0.000
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.234
0.000
0.000
98.835*
-0.001
-3.193#
-0.004
5.584
0.007
-3.193
-0.004
5.584
0.007*
-3.193
-0.004#
-3.476
0.000
0.000
-5.540
0.000
0.000
9.951*
0.000
0.000
-5.540#
0.000
0.000
9.951
0.000
0.000
-5.540
0.000
0.000
98.245*
0.004
-2.629#
-0.006
4.560
0.010
-2.629
-0.006
4.560
0.010*
-2.629
-0.006#
-0.524
0.000
0.000
-13.435
0.000
0.000
24.370*
0.000
0.000
-13.435#
0.000
0.000
24.370
0.000
0.000
-13.435
0.000
0.000
27.786
0.000
0.000
-35.183
0.000
0.000
64.155*
0.000
0.000
-35.183#
0.000
0.000
96.822*
0.013
-1.532#
-0.008
2.597
0.015
-1.532
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
7
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
2
0.000
-0.008
2.597
0.015*
-1.532
-0.008#
93.373*
0.005
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
93.373
0.005*
0.000
0.000#
92.581*
-0.010
-2.597#
-0.015
92.581
-0.010
1.532
0.008
1.532
0.008*
-2.597
-0.015#
90.748*
-0.013
-4.560#
-0.010
90.748
-0.013
2.629
0.006
2.629
0.006*
64.155
0.000
0.000
-35.183
0.000
0.000
96.251
0.000
0.000
118.858
0.000
0.000
118.858*
0.000
0.000
-66.190#
0.000
0.000
96.251
0.000
0.000
-66.190
0.000
0.000
78.638
0.000
0.000
64.155
0.000
0.000
78.638*
0.000
0.000
-35.183#
0.000
0.000
-35.183
0.000
0.000
64.155
0.000
0.000
42.540
0.000
0.000
24.370
0.000
0.000
42.540*
0.000
0.000
-13.435#
0.000
0.000
-13.435
0.000
0.000
869
90.748
-0.013#
42.540
0.000
0.000
89.618*
-0.013
-5.584#
-0.007
89.618
-0.013
3.193
0.004
3.193
0.004*
89.618
-0.013#
21.016
0.000
0.000
9.951
0.000
0.000
21.016*
0.000
0.000
-5.540#
0.000
0.000
-5.540
0.000
0.000
21.016
0.000
0.000
88.460*
-0.013
-6.504#
-0.005
-6.504
-0.005
3.698
0.003
3.698
0.003*
88.460
-0.013#
0.084
0.000
0.000
0.200
0.000
0.000
0.200*
0.000
0.000
-0.097#
0.000
0.000
-0.097
0.000
0.000
0.084
0.000
0.000
0.042
0.000
0.000
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.100*
0.000
0.000
-0.048#
0.000
0.000
0.100
0.000
0.000
0.042
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
11
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
12
3
0.000
4
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
870
43.844*
-0.012
-10.251#
0.002
-10.251
0.002
6.194
-0.001
-10.251
0.002*
43.844
-0.012#
13
4
0.000
3
0.000
3
0.000
12
4
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
0.000
0.003*
0.000
-0.012#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
99.246*
-0.004
-10.251#
0.002
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
2.597
0.015*
0.000
-0.018#
0.234
0.000
0.000
0.100
0.000
0.000
118.858*
0.000
0.000
-66.190#
0.000
0.000
64.155
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
MEMBER FORCES AND MOMENTS (kN,kNm)

------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
and All Members
and All Sections
The following maximums and minimums are taken from
either end of the member
Load
Y-Axis
Memb Case
Moment
1
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
86.713*
0.000
-113.935#
272.886
-111.210
-0.001
82.455
-138.160
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
-28.268
0.000
0.000
71.656
0.000
0.000
77.731*
0.000
0.000
-44.806#
0.000
0.000
871
872
11
0.000
10
0.000
-113.935
272.886*
72.892
-153.483#
71.656
0.000
0.000
-40.644
0.000
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
82.455*
-138.160
-116.660#
526.758
-113.935
272.885
78.197
-336.781
-116.660
526.758*
78.197
-336.781#
-44.806
0.000
0.000
65.587
0.000
0.000
71.662*
0.000
0.000
-61.343#
0.000
0.000
65.587
0.000
0.000
-61.343
0.000
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
65.332*
-325.836
-71.697#
343.477
65.332
-325.836
-71.579
514.769
-71.579
514.769*
65.332
-325.836#
74.891
0.000
0.000
-97.131
0.000
0.000
74.891*
0.000
0.000
-113.084#
0.000
0.000
-113.084
0.000
0.000
74.891
0.000
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
65.187*
-215.576
-71.869#
203.508
65.187
-215.576
-71.756
347.913
-71.756
347.913*
65.187
64.116
0.000
0.000
-81.016
0.000
0.000
64.116*
0.000
0.000
-97.084#
0.000
0.000
-97.084
0.000
0.000
64.116
0.000
0.000
0.000
-215.576#
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
64.996*
-125.205
-72.025#
17.416
64.996
-125.205
-71.849
211.094
-71.849
211.094*
64.996
-125.205#
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
10
0.000
11
0.000
64.715*
10.882
-72.381#
-127.088
64.715
10.882
-72.015
17.423
40.765
118.633*
-72.381
-127.088#
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
10
0.000
11
0.000
14
53.573
0.000
0.000
-50.958
0.000
0.000
53.573*
0.000
0.000
-81.028#
0.000
0.000
-81.028
0.000
0.000
53.573
0.000
0.000
35.159
0.000
0.000
-1.128
0.000
0.000
35.159*
0.000
0.000
-50.973#
0.000
0.000
1.242
0.000
0.000
-1.128
0.000
0.000
64.715*
10.882
-71.867#
-127.088
-71.501
-50.702
64.715
10.882
40.765
118.633*
-71.867
-127.088#
-35.159
0.000
0.000
-8.690
0.000
0.000
32.142*
0.000
0.000
-35.159#
0.000
0.000
-1.242
0.000
0.000
-8.690
0.000
0.000
64.996*
-53.573
0.000
0.000
873
10
11
874
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
13
0.000
12
0.000
-125.205
-71.507#
-50.708
-71.332
66.786
64.996
-125.205
-55.787
92.446*
38.289
-133.038#
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
13
0.000
14
0.000
32.122
0.000
0.000
49.258*
0.000
0.000
-53.573#
0.000
0.000
41.664
0.000
0.000
-36.594
0.000
0.000
65.187*
-215.576
-71.344#
59.254
-71.231
144.881
65.187
-215.576
-55.684
159.966*
65.187
-215.576#
-64.116
0.000
0.000
49.241
0.000
0.000
58.257*
0.000
0.000
-64.116#
0.000
0.000
49.198
0.000
0.000
-64.116
0.000
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
13
0.000
14
0.000
65.332*
-325.836
-71.195#
140.473
-71.077
241.074
65.332
-325.836
-55.536
242.455*
65.332
-325.836#
-74.891
0.000
0.000
58.302
0.000
0.000
67.204*
0.000
0.000
-74.891#
0.000
0.000
56.667
0.000
0.000
-74.891
0.000
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
82.455*
-138.160
-70.823#
252.982
44.806
0.000
0.000
-67.473
0.000
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
78.197
-336.781
-70.823
252.982
-70.823
252.982*
78.197
-336.781#
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
13
0.000
13
0.000
10
0.000
86.713*
0.000
-68.098#
61.588
82.455
-138.160
-56.759
90.108
-56.759
90.108*
72.892
-153.483#
14
0.000
2
11
0.000
1
11
0.000
3
11
0.000
2
11
0.000
2
14
0.000
86.713*
0.000
-116.660#
526.758
-111.210
-0.001
-71.579
514.769
-116.660
526.758*
78.197
-336.781#
12
61.343*
0.000
0.000
-67.473#
0.000
0.000
-67.473
0.000
0.000
61.343
0.000
0.000
28.268
0.000
0.000
-33.050
0.000
0.000
44.806*
0.000
0.000
-33.609#
0.000
0.000
-33.609
0.000
0.000
40.644
0.000
0.000
-28.268
0.000
0.000
65.587
0.000
0.000
77.731*
0.000
0.000
-113.084#
0.000
0.000
65.587
0.000
0.000
-61.343
0.000
0.000

-------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
and All Nodes
875
Load
Y-Axis
Node Case
Moment
1
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
3
5
0.000
3
0.000
6
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
1
0.000
6
0.000
876
X-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
18.261*
0.000
-70.889#
0.000
18.261
0.000
-70.889
0.000
-70.889
0.000*
-20.355
0.000#
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Force
Moment
30.375
0.000
0.000
-73.554
0.000
0.000
30.375*
0.000
0.000
-73.554#
0.000
0.000
-73.554
0.000
0.000
-63.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
6
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
4
0.000
2
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
11
2
0.000
3
0.000
6
0.000
4
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
13
4
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000
0.000#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
20.355*
0.000
-63.000
0.000
0.000
877
2
0.000
2
0.000
4
0.000
4
0.000
3
0.000
13
4
0.000
3
0.000
2
0.000
3
0.000
11
4
0.000
3
0.000
-18.261#
0.000
-18.261
0.000
20.355
0.000
20.355
0.000*
-8.224
0.000#
20.355*
0.000
-70.889#
0.000
18.261
0.000
-70.889
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.000
0.000#
30.375
0.000
0.000
30.375*
0.000
0.000
-63.000#
0.000
0.000
-63.000
0.000
0.000
-26.461
0.000
0.000
-63.000
0.000
0.000
-73.554
0.000
0.000
30.375*
0.000
0.000
-73.554#
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Force
Force
Moment
77.150
0.000
0.000
-111.210
0.000
0.000
86.713*
0.000
0.000
-111.210#
0.000
0.000

-------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
and All Nodes
Load
Y-Axis
Node Case
Moment
1
10
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
878
X-Axis
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
40.644*
0.000
-77.731#
0.001
28.268
0.000
-77.731
0.000
11
0.000
12
0.000
0.001
-77.731
0.001*
-43.143
0.000#
12
0.000
11
0.000
13
0.000
14
0.000
12
0.000
11
0.000
0.003*
0.000
-0.005#
-0.002
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.003
0.000*
-0.005
-0.002#
13
0.000
14
0.000
14
0.000
13
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
12
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
12
0.000
-111.210
0.000
0.000
13.908
0.000
0.000
0.002
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.002*
0.000
0.000
-0.005#
0.000
0.000
0.002
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000*
-0.003
0.000#
0.006
0.000
0.006
0.000
-0.003
0.000
0.006*
0.000
-0.006#
-0.002
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
0.000
0.004*
0.000
0.000
-0.002#
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000*
-0.001
0.000#
0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.001*
-0.015
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.000
0.015*
0.000
0.000
-0.015#
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.000
879
11
13
880
11
0.000
0.000
-0.001#
14
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
0.000*
-0.006
0.000#
0.006
0.000
-0.006
0.000
0.006
0.000
0.006*
0.000
-0.006#
11
0.000
12
0.000
11
0.000
14
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
0.008*
-0.001
-0.003#
-0.001
0.008
-0.001
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000*
0.008
-0.001#
13
0.000
10
0.000
14
0.000
11
0.000
12
0.000
13
0.000
14.709*
0.000
-40.644#
0.000
-28.268
0.000
-1.375
0.000
-35.968
0.000*
14.709
0.000#
-0.015
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
0.000
-0.006
0.000
0.000
0.004*
0.000
0.000
-0.006#
0.000
0.000
-0.006
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
0.000
0.009
0.000
0.000
-0.001
0.000
0.000
0.009*
0.000
0.000
-0.005#
0.000
0.000
-0.005
0.000
0.000
0.009
0.000
0.000
-54.034
0.000
0.000
77.150
0.000
0.000
86.713*
0.000
0.000
-65.373#
0.000
0.000
61.573
0.000
0.000
-54.034
0.000
0.000
10
0.000
1
11
0.000
1
14
0.000
1
11
0.000
8
11
0.000
8
14
0.000
40.644*
0.000
-77.731#
0.001
28.268
0.000
-77.731
0.001
0.000
0.006*
0.000
-0.006#
77.150
0.000
0.000
-111.210
0.000
0.000
86.713*
0.000
0.000
-111.210#
0.000
0.000
-0.006
0.000
0.000
0.004
0.000
0.000
881
Bill of materials report

This report extract shows the bill of materials listing that can be produced by
SPACE GASS.
BILL OF MATERIALS (m,m^2,kg)
----------------Unit
Total
Memb Sect
Length
1
1
15.000
2
3
3.264
3
4
3.265
4
2
5.988
5
2
12.517
Unit
Total
Qty Section Name
Mass
Mass
4 530 UB 92.4
347.362
1389.450
2 360 UB 50.7-A
138.961
277.922
2 360 UB 50.7-B
124.458
248.916
2 360 UB 50.7
152.070
304.140
2 360 UB 50.7
317.869
635.737
Total mass
= 2856.165
Centre of gravity = 12.500,5.802,0.000
882
Length
3.750
1.632
1.632
2.994
6.259
Dynamic frequency analysis report

This report extract shows the natural frequencies and periods for each of the
dynamic modes within each mass load case. In this case there was only one mass
load case which we analysed for three dynamic modes.
DYNAMIC NATURAL FREQUENCIES (Hz,Sec)
--------------------------Mass
Case Mode
Iterations
8
1
11
2
13
3
14
4
14
5
16
6
14
Natural
Frequency
Natural
Period
Frequency
Tolerance
0.862
1.160
0.000977
1.823
0.548
0.000842
4.879
0.205
0.000890
6.275
0.159
0.000596
6.277
0.159
0.000192
6.757
0.148
0.000766
883
Dynamic response analysis report

This report extract shows the general results of a dynamic response spectrum
analysis for spectral load case 9. A dynamic response analysis also calculates
displacements, forces, moments and reactions just like a static analysis and, for
comparison purposes, they are included with the static analysis results in this
report.
DYNAMIC RESPONSE SPECTRUM (kN,kg,sec,Hz)
------------------------Spectral case 9: Spectral load case
Mass load case:
Direction vector:
0.000
Loading code:
Auto scaling of base shear:
Sign of the results:
Probability factor:
Hazard factor:
Structural ductility factor:
Structural perf. factor
Spectral curve multiplier:
Mode combination method:
Squares)
Base
Direction
Shear
X-Axis
0.218%
Y-Axis
0.000%
Z-Axis
0.000%
AS1170.4-2007
Off
Mode shape 1 (Calculated)
1.000
0.080
2.000
0.770
0.0308
SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of
Dominant
Total
Static
Total
MPF for
Dominant
Total
Mass Part
Mode
Force
Mass
Mode
Factor
0.0864 10998.8020
92.652%
98.894%
0.5035 10998.8020
59.179%
59.179%
0.0097
1234.6723
0.000%
0.000%
Damping
Natural
Natural
Mode
884
8
Dx = 1.000, Dy = 0.000, Dz =
Mass Part
Direction Shape
Factor
Vector
1
92.652%
Vector
2
0.000%
Vector
3
6.241%
Spectral Curve
Factor
Period
Frequency
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
1.1603
0.862
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
0.5484
1.823
NEWCASTLE 5%
5.0%
0.2049
4.879
Total
98.894%
885
Buckling analysis report

This report extract shows the buckling load factors and the member effective
lengths for each combination load case. The primary load cases were not included
in the buckling analysis because in real life they could not occur in isolation.
Note that member effective lengths are not calculated for load cases 11 and 13
because their buckling load factors are greater than 1000 (beyond the upper limit
specified at the start of the analysis).
BUCKLING LOAD FACTORS
--------------------Load
Node at
Case Mode
Max Rotn
10
1
13 (X)
11
1
12
1
7 (Y)
13
1
14
1
7 (Y)
Load
Node at
Factor
Tolerance Iterations Max Trans
11.137
0.007812
15
12 (Z)
>1000.0
13.848
0.007812
15
9 (Z)
>1000.0
8.199
0.007812
15
9 (Z)
BUCKLING EFFECTIVE LENGTHS (kN,m)

-------------------------Load case 10 (Linear): 1.25DL+1.5LL
Mode
1
886
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pcr
859.200
811.779
487.541
482.688
477.352
468.334
468.334
477.352
482.688
Length
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Ly
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Lz
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
11
12
487.541
811.779
859.200
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Ly
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Lz
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Ly
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Lz
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 12 (Linear): 1.25DL+CW+ISCW
Mode
1
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pcr
196.552
137.588
529.091
526.567
524.103
520.293
528.319
532.181
534.761
536.945
789.717
848.681
Length
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Load case 14 (Linear): 1.25DL+LW2+ISLW
Mode
1
Memb
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Pcr
710.976
676.063
530.441
529.252
527.689
525.385
525.385
527.689
529.252
530.441
676.063
710.976
Length
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
887

Portal frame member design
This worked example considers the AS4100 member design of the 25m span
haunched portal frame which was analysed in the previous appendix. The design is
based on the non-linear analysis results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame members. The portal
frame analysis and connection design is covered in Portal frame analysis and
Portal frame connection design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments
obtained from the non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for
combination load cases 10 - 14 are included in the static analysis report (itemised)
of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins
spaced at 1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The
frame is fully symmetrical about its centre.
889
In order to check deflections, the following maximum limits will be used.

Eaves sway limit for serviceability: h/150
Apex sag limit for dead load: L/360
890

Apex sag limit for live load: L/240
Apex deflection limit for: L/150
serviceability:
Eaves sway due to cross wind: 99*(38/60)**2= 40mm = h/188 (Ok).
(Vu = 60m/s, Vs = 38m/s)
Apex sag due to dead load: 36mm = L/694 (Ok).
Apex sag due to live load: 66mm = L/379 (Ok).
Apex uplift due to cross wind (96+109)*(38/60)**2 = 82mm = L/305 (Ok).
and internal pressure:
In order to define the steel member design data for the frame, the following design
groups were specified.
Group 1:
Left column
Members 1 and 2
Group 2:
Left rafter
Members 3, 4, 5 and 6
Group 3:
Right rafter
Members 7, 8, 9 and 10
Group 4:
Right column
Members 11 and 12
(Haunches have to be checked by hand)
Groups 3 and 4 were specified as members 10,9,8,7 and 12,11 (rather than 7,8,9,10
and 11,12) so that the positions and types of flange restraints could be referenced
from the column base and the narrow end of the haunch in similar fashion to
groups 1 and 2. This was not absolutely necessary, however it made the input of
the restraint data for groups 3 and 4 identical to the data for groups 1 and 2.
In the diagram above, the thick grey lines show the four design groups. They are
drawn short of their ends so that you can easily see where they start and finish.
891

Even though the haunches cant be design or checked (because of their varying
properties and non-standard shape), they have been included in the rafter groups 2
and 3. They have, however, been excluded from the portion of the rafter being
designed or checked by using an I (ignore) zone in the flange restraint data. If the
haunch members had simply been omitted from the rafter groups then the group
lengths would have been shorter and the compression and bending effective lengths
could have been underestimated.
All compression effective lengths were calculated by the buckling analysis and
automatically transferred into the member design. The advantage of doing it this
way is that different effective lengths can be used for each design load case. The
alternative is to manually input the effective lengths, however they are then used
for every design load case and the design is usually not as efficient.
The minor axis (out-of-plane) compression effective lengths were also specified as
being braced at each end due to wall and roof bracing that prevents any out-ofplane buckling at the rafter ends. This has the effect of limiting the minor axis
compression effective lengths to no longer than the rafter group length.
Flange restraints for the columns were placed on the outside (top) flange at each
end and at each girt location. Inside (bottom) flange restraints were placed at the
column ends. There are no column fly braces and therefore no intermediate inside
flange restraints were applied.
For each column, the column base plate was assumed to provide full restraint to
both column flanges and hence restraint codes of F (full) were specified for both
column flanges at the base.
Because wall bracing and an eaves strut effectively prevented lateral deflection of
both flanges at the top of the column and because the rafter provided partial (or
full) twist restraint, the restraints applied to the top of the column were assumed to
be F (full).
In addition, the stiffness of the haunch meant that the restraining effect of the rafter
could be considered to be applied at the bottom of the haunch, hence additional
flange restraints identical to those at the top of the column were applied to both
column flanges at the base of the haunch. An I (ignore) continuous restraint was
also applied to the segment from the bottom of the haunch to the top of the column
so that it would be ignored during the design.
Top flange restraints of L (lateral) were positioned at each purlin location in the
rafter design groups, except that the purlins close to the end of the haunch and near
892

the apex were conservatively assumed to be at the ends of the haunch and at the
apex. Bottom flange restraints were also positioned at the ends of the haunch and at
midspan of the rafter design groups to coincide with fly braces at those locations.
Restraint codes of I (ignore) were positioned between the first two rafter flange
restraints so that the haunches could be excluded from the calculations.
Fly braces were located at the face of the columns and at the apex, and hence the
top and bottom flange restraints at the ends of the rafter design groups were
assumed to be at least F (full).
The above diagram shows the location and type of all the flange restraints.
Note that the effect of the fly brace at midspan could also have been taken into
account by specifying a full restraint at the fly brace location on the top flange and
not specifying anything on the bottom flange. A full or partial restraint on one
flange causes SPACE GASS to automatically place a partial restraint (at least) on
the other flange (see also Effective flange restraints). This method would, however
increase the kt factor marginally.
All of the member design data was input graphically, however it could have been
input just as successfully via a datasheet or by importing it from a text data file. For
information about the graphical input procedure for steel member design data, see
also Steel member input methods. For detailed information about the actual
member design data values and settings, see also Steel member design data.
893
Member design results

The AS4100 member design module running in checking mode was then initiated
and the results are shown in the following computer printout.
The rafters are satisfactory with load factors of 1.15 and 1.05. The 530 UB 92.4
columns have also passed with load factors of 1.28 on both sides.
The results of a steel member design or check can be shown graphically as in the
above diagram. The member colors matched to the legend show that the columns
and left rafter have passed with load factors greater than 1.10, while the right rafter
has passed with a load factor greater than 1.00.
In this example, because the approximate sizes of the columns and rafters were
known in advance, it was appropriate to simply run a steel member check rather
than a design. If the steel module had been run in design mode instead, the column
members may have been selected as slightly less than 530 UB 92.4 because of their
load factors being 1.28 and quite a bit greater than 1.00.
Thus, if you know that your initial analysis member sizes are close to the final
design sizes, the recommended procedure is to run a steel member check first
rather than a design. If the check results show that the analysis member sizes are
almost correct then it is a simple matter to manually change some of the analysis
member sizes and then do a final check to verify that they are correct.
Alternatively, if your analysis member sizes have not been chosen carefully, you
should run a steel member design and then choose "Update analysis member sizes"
from the Steel menu (see also Updating analysis member sizes) to update the
894

analysis data and bring it in line with the design data. You should then iterate the
analysis-design procedure until the design member sizes agree with the analysis
member sizes.
895
Steel member design report

AS4100 1998 STEEL MEMBER SYMBOLS NOTATION
-----------------------------------------
This report extract shows all of the steel member design input and output data.
Group
Segment
Load factor
= An actual member in the real structure which consists of

one or more analysis members joined together end-to-end.
= A part of the total member length under consideration
(usually equals the portion between lateral restraints).
= The ratio of the minimum loads which cause failure to
the actual design loads.
= Grade of steel.
= Yield stress of overall section.
= Yield stress of web.
= Ultimate tensile strength.
= Total group length.
= Length of the critical segment in the group.
= Twist restraint effective length factor.
= Load height effective length factor.
= Lateral rotation effective length factor.
= Bending effective length for major axis bending.
= Compression effective length for major axis buckling.
= Compression effective length for minor axis buckling.
= Torsion effective length.
= Slenderness ratio for compression or bending.
= Area of bolt holes removed from flanges.
= Area of bolt holes removed from web.
= Net area of section. (Gross area less Arf and Arw).
= Effective area of section.
= Form factor for compression members.
= Correction factor for eccentric effects in tension
Grade
Fy
Fyw
Fu
Ltot
Lseg
kt
(5.6.3)
kl
(5.6.3)
kr
(5.6.3)
Le
(5.6.3)
Lx
(6.3.2)
Ly
(6.3.2)
Lz
L/r
Arf
Arw
An
Ae
(6.2.2)
Kf
(6.2.2)
Kt
(7.3)
members.
m
(5.6.1.1) = Moment modification factor for bending.
s
(5.6.1.1) = Bending member slenderness reduction factor.
cx (6.3.3)
= Compression member slenderness reduction factor (major).
cy (6.3.3)
= Compression member slenderness reduction factor (minor).
b
(6.3.3)
= Compression member section constant.
me (8.4.4.1) = Ratio of major axis moments at ends of segment.
mx (8.4.2.2) = Ratio of major axis moments at ends of member.
my (8.4.2.2) = Ratio of minor axis moments at ends of segment.
(8.3.4)
= Index.
(3.4)
= Capacity factor.
N*
= Design axial force (+ve=compression).
Vx*
= Design major axis shear force (not considered).
Vy*
= Design minor axis shear force.
Mx*
= Design major axis bending moment.
My*
= Design minor axis bending moment.
Nt (7.2)
= Section capacity in tension.
Ns (6.2)
= Section capacity in compression.
Ncx (6.3.3)
= Major axis member capacity in compression.
Ncy (6.3.3)
= Minor axis member capacity in compression.
Vv (5.11)
= Shear capacity of web.
Mf (5.12.2)
= Moment capacity of flanges.
Msx (5.2)
= Section major axis moment capacity.
Msy (5.2)
= Section minor axis moment capacity.
Mbx (5.6)
= Member major axis moment capacity.
Mox (8.4.4)
= Member out-of-plane major axis moment capacity.
Mrx (8.3.2)
= Section major axis moment capacity reduced by axial force.
Mry (8.3.3)
= Section minor axis moment capacity reduced by axial force.
Mix (8.4.2.2) = Member in-plane major axis moment capacity.
Miy (8.4.2.2) = Member in-plane minor axis moment capacity.
Mtx (8.4.5.2) = Lesser of Mrx and Mox.
Mcx (8.4.5.1) = Lesser of Mix and Mox.
STEEL MEMBER DESIGN DATA (m)

-----------------------Restraint codes are: F => Fixed restraint
P => Partial restraint
R => Fixed and rotational restraint
S => Partial and rotational restraint
L => Lateral restraint
U => Unrestrained
896
C => Continuous lateral restraint
I => Ignore segment
Group: 1 Left column
Member list: 1,2

Portal frame connection design
This worked example considers the AS4100 connection design of the 25m span
haunched portal frame which was analysed in a previous appendix. The design is
based on the non-linear analysis results of the combination load cases 10 - 14.
This appendix considers only the design of the portal frame connections. The
portal frame analysis and member design is covered in Portal frame analysis and
Portal frame member design.
This example bases the member design directly on the forces and moments
obtained from the non-linear analysis. The non-linear analysis results for
combination load cases 10 - 14 are included in the static analysis report (itemised)
of the portal frame analysis worked example.
The portal frame has wall girts spaced at 1200mm and 1700mm, and roof purlins
spaced at 1000mm, 1200mm and 800mm as shown in the following drawing. The
frame is fully symmetrical about its centre.
897
898
Connection design results

The summary results of the steel connections design are as follows. More detailed
reports can also be produced.
Left Baseplate
899
Left Knee
Ridge
900
Right Knee
901
Right Baseplate
STEEL CONNECTION DESIGN DATA

---------------------------CONNECTION 1 - LEFT BASEPLATE
----------------------------Member:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Dimensions (LxWxT):
575x250x20 mm
Plate Strength Grade: Normal
Full Contact:
YES
Fy:
350 MPa
Welds:
Weld Strength Grade:
6 mm
Normal
Weld Category:
Weld Inside Flange:
SP
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Bolts:
Pitch:
Prying Factor:
M24
Include
4
360 mm
0.71
Bolt Procedure:
Bolt Strength Grade:
Embedded Length:
Gauge:
Snug
Normal
195 mm
140 mm
Concrete:
Concrete:
CONCRETE-20
Type:
Rectangular
902

Dimensions (LxWxD):
775x450x395 mm
Grout:
Thickness:
20 mm
Fc:
25 MPa
Strength Grade:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Normal
CONNECTION 3 - LEFT KNEE

-----------------------Connection Type:
Bolted End Plate
Supporting Member:
Supported Member:
2
3
Haunch (D/Bb/Tb/Tw):
Haunch Length:
333.1/171/11.5/7.3 mm
3000 mm
Use Stitch Bolt:
NO
Stiffen web if necessary

Stiffen flange if necessary
Dimensions (LxWxT):
885x195x25 mm
Flange Weld Type:
Butt
Web Weld Type:
Butt
End Plate Stiffened:
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Top Bolts (out/in):
Pitch outside:
Gauge:
Dist to Flange out:
Bolt Head Side:
M20
Include
2/4
0 mm
120 mm
65 mm
Default
Top Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
84x12 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
8 mm
Normal
Full
Bottom Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
84x12 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
8 mm
Normal
Fy:
250 MPa
Bolt Procedure:
Bot Bolts (out/in):
Pitch inside:
Vert Edge Dist:
Dist to Flange in:
Bearing
High
2/4
80 mm
30 mm
65 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
260 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
260 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
903

Weld Length:
Full
Length:
0 mm
Fy:
250 MPa
8 mm
Normal
Weld Category:
GP
6
7
Strength Grade:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Normal
Fy:
250 MPa
Web Welds:
6 mm
Normal
Bolt Procedure:
Bot Bolts (out/in):
Pitch inside:
Vert Edge Dist:
Dist to Flange in:
Bearing
High
2/2
0 mm
30 mm
65 mm
Strength Grade:
Strength Grade:
Normal
Normal
Flange Doubler:
Position:
Both
Dimensions (LxWxT):
361.52x70x16 mm
Welds:
CONNECTION 7 - RIDGE
-------------------Supported Member 1:
Supported Member 2:
Dimensions (LxWxT):
550x200x25 mm
Flange Weld Type:
Butt
Web Weld Type:

Weld Category:
Fillet
SP
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Top Bolts (out/in):
Pitch outside:
Gauge:
Dist to Flange out:
Bolt Head Side:
M20
Include
2/2
0 mm
120 mm
65 mm
Default
CONNECTION 11 - RIGHT KNEE

-------------------------Connection Type:
Bolted End Plate
Supporting Member:
Supported Member:
11
10
Haunch (D/Bb/Tb/Tw):
Haunch Length:
333.1/171/11.5/7.3 mm
3000 mm
Use Stitch Bolt:
NO
Stiffen web if necessary

Stiffen flange if necessary
Dimensions (LxWxT):
885x195x25 mm
Flange Weld Type:
904
Butt
Fy:
250 MPa
Web Weld Type:

Weld Category:
Fillet
SP
Web Welds:
6 mm
Normal
NO
Bolts:
Bolt Threads:
Top Bolts (out/in):
Pitch outside:
Gauge:
Dist to Flange out:
Bolt Head Side:
M20
Include
2/2
0 mm
120 mm
65 mm
Default
Bolt Procedure:
Bot Bolts (out/in):
Pitch inside:
Vert Edge Dist:
Dist to Flange in:
Bearing
High
2/2
0 mm
30 mm
65 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
280 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Length:
Fy:
0 mm
280 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Length:
0 mm
Fy:
260 MPa
Weld Category:
GP
Strength Grade:
Normal
Dimensions (LxWxT):
575x250x20 mm
Full Contact:
YES
Fy:
350 MPa
Welds:
6 mm
Normal
Weld Category:
Weld Inside Flange:
SP
NO
Bolts:
M20
Bolt Procedure:
Snug
Top Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
86x6 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
6 mm
Normal
Full
Bottom Web Stiffener:

Dimensions (WxT):
86x6 mm
Plate Length:
Full
Welds:
Weld Length:
6 mm
Normal
Full
Flange Doubler:
Position:
Both
Dimensions (LxWxT):
275x72x12 mm
Welds:
6 mm
Normal
CONNECTION 13 - RIGHT BASEPLATE

------------------------------Member:
12
905

Bolt Threads:
Bolts:
Pitch:
Prying Factor:
Include
4
360 mm
0.71

Embedded Length:
Gauge:
Normal
195 mm
120 mm
Concrete:
Concrete:
Dimensions (LxWxD):
CONCRETE-20
775x450x395 mm
Type:
Rectangular
Grout:
Thickness:
20 mm
Fc:
25 MPa
AS4100 STEEL CONNECTION DESIGN SUMMARY (*=Failure, #=Warning)

-------------------------------------- ($=Min design action non-compliance)
(D=Design, C=Check)
Plate or
Stress
Conn
Ratio
1 D
Crit
Title/Type
Seat/Cleat
Bolts
Welds
Case
Left baseplate
Base Plate
4M24
6 mm CFW SP
11
575x250x20 mm
4.6N/S
Plate
12M20
Web welds
11
885x195x25 mm
Stiffener Top
84x12 mm
Stiffener Bot
84x12 mm
Flange Doublers
70x16 mm
8.8N/TB FSBW SP
Flange welds
FSBW SP
550x200x25 mm
8M20
0.76
3 D# Left knee
0.92
7 D
Ridge
Web weld
10
0.88
8.8N/TB 6 mm CFW SP
Flange weld
FSBW SP
11 D
0.96
13 D
0.57
906
Right knee
Right baseplate
Plate
8M20
Web welds
885x195x25 mm
Stiffener Top
86x6 mm
Stiffener Bot
86x6 mm
Flange Doublers
72x12 mm
8.8N/TB 6 mm CFW SP
Flange welds
FSBW SP
Base Plate
4M20
6 mm CFW SP
14
10

575x250x20 mm
4.6N/S
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 1 - LEFT BASEPLATE

----------------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
11 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.76
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Base plate
= 575x250x20 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Weld:
= 6 mm CFW SP (Fu = 410 MPa)
Bolt:
= 4M24 4.6N/S
sp = 360 mm
lec = 195 mm
Pass
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
sg = 140 mm
Concrete:
CONCRETE-20
(Length = 775 mm, Width = 450 mm, Depth = 395 mm)
Grout:
Strength = 25 MPa, Thickness = 20 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
Check 8:
=
=
=
=
=
111.21 kN Tension (Not used)

77.73 kN
0 kN
0 kNm (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
Base plate tension yielding

Yield line factor alpha = 8.86 mm
fNtp = 797.77 kN
fNtp > 111.21 kN
Check 9:
Pass
Capacity of weld at column base

fVw = 0.83 kN/mm
Resultant stress = 0.14 kN/mm
fVw > Resultant Stress
Check 10:
Pass
Capacity of anchor bolts in tension

fNtb = 320.81 kN
Nt = 111.21 kN
fNtb > Nt
Pass
907
fNct = 258.05 kN
fNtf = 112.96 kN
fNct > fNtf
Check 7:
Pass
Shear transfered by anchor bolts

nbv = 2
nbt = 4
fVfb = 51.43 kN
fVcex = 29.16 kN
fVcey = 60.8 kN
fVcp = 580.33 kN
Vres = 77.73 kN
Check 11:
fVfb > Vres / nbv
Pass
fVcex > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcey > Vy / nbt
Pass
fVcpx > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcpy > Vy / nbt
Pass
Anchor bolts for horizontal shear and tension

Check 10 must be satisfied:
Check 7 must be satisfied:
(A)^2 + (B)^2 < 1
A = Vres / (nbv x fVfb)
B = Nt / (fNtb)
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 3 - LEFT KNEE

-----------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
11 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.92
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
360 UB 50.7-A
689.1 mm
171 mm
11.5 mm
7.3 mm
11.4 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Angle
= 2.99
End plate
= 885x195x25 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Transverse stiffeners
Top
= 84x12 mm
Bottom
= 84x12 mm
Web welds
908
= FSBW SP (Fu = 410 MPa)
Supporting
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa

Flange welds
Top stfr. welds = 8 mm CFW GP (Fu = 410 MPa)
Bot stfr. welds = 8 mm CFW GP (Fu = 410 MPa)
Bolts
= 12M20 8.8N/TB (Fu = 830 MPa)
sg
sp2
spo
ae
=
=
=
=
120 mm
141.52 mm
65 mm
30 mm
sp1
sp3
spi
= 0 mm
= 80 mm
= 65 mm
Column flange doubler plate

Size
= 70x16 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
kNm)
=
=
=
=
=
71.58 kN Tension
-116.66 kN (Actual = -116.66 kN, Minimum = 40 kN)
0 kN (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
-514.77 kNm (Actual = -514.77 kNm, Minimum = 268.2
Design moment > Member section capacity

Check 1: Detailing requirement
Plate depth
End plate width
bi >= bfb + 20 mm
bi <= bfc + 20 mm
Bolt gauge
sg <= bfb
sg <= bfc - 2.5 * df
sg >= 120 mm
Bolt pitches
sp1, sp2, sp3 >= 70 mm
Edge distance
aev >= 1.5 * df
aev <= 2.5 * df
aeh >= 1.25 * df
Check limits Table 3 - ASI Connection Design Guide 12
Warning
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 2: Flange welds to beam

Full penetration butt weld - No design check neccessary
Check 3: Web welds to beam
Check 4: Bolts at tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMbt > M* + Maxial*
0.88
Tension bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
End plate design moment, M* = -514.77 kNm
Maxial* = 22.22 kNm
Single bolt tension capacity = 162.68 kN
Sum of bolt lever arms = 1884.8 mm
Pass
909
Check 5: Bolts in shear

Design requirement:
ratio
fVfb = 555.77 kN > Vv = -116.66 kN
0.21
Total shear resisted by bolts, Vv* = -116.66 kN
Single bolt shear capacity, fVdf = 92.63 kN
End plate bearing capacity, fVbi = 276.75 kN
No. bolts effective in shear = 6
Check 6: End plate at tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMpt > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.82
End plate yield capacity, fMpt = 679.84 kNm
Bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
Section moment capacity, fMs = 502.87 kNm
Check 7: End plate in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVpe > Nft / nbp
0.48
fVpu > Nft / nbp
0.32
Horizontal shear yielding capacity, fVpe = 548.44 kN
Horizontal shear rupture capacity, fVpu = 835.79 kN
Total design tension force, Nft = 791.46 kN
Total of bolt rows resisting tension force, nbp = 3
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 8: Stiffener for end plate

N/A - No end plate stiffener
Check 9: Design capacity of stiffener welds to end plate
Check 10: Local bending of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMct > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
1.54
Stiffener
Column flange capacity, fMct = 362.3 kNm
Bolt group moment capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
Yield line parameter, Yc = 5513.85 mm
Check 11: Local yielding of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwt > Nft
2.15
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwt = 368.08 kN
Total design tension force, N*ft = 791.46 kN
Top flange to end of column = 97.95 mm
Check 12: Local yielding of column flange at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwy > N*fc
1.75
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwy = 414.94 kN
Total design compression force, N*fc = 725.87 kN
Check 13: Column web cripping at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwc > N*fc
2.35
910
Stiffener

Unstiffened column web crippling capacity, fRwc = 309.22 kN
Check 14: Column web compression buckling
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwb > N*fc
1.03
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web compression buckling capacity, fRwb = 705.48 kN
Check 15: Unstiffened column web panel in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVc > Vc*
0.77
Design capacity of column web in shear, fVc = 939.44 kN
Column web pannel shear force, Vc* = 725.87 kN
Column axial capacity, fNs = 3398.4 kN
Check 16: Local bending of column flange with
flange doubler plates at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMctd > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.82
Column (flange+doubler) capacity, fMctd = 679.9 kNm
Bolt group design capacity, fMbt = 613.24 kNm
Flange doubler plate requirements:
bsd > [bfb - (twc + 2 * rc)] / 2
bsd < [bfc - (twc + 2 * rc) - 2 * fillet rad.] / 2
dsd > tfb + 5.0 * (ti + tfc + td)
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 17: Local yielding of column

web with plates at beam tension flange
N/A - no web with doubler plate at beam tension flange
Check 18: Local yielding of column web
with plates at beam compression flange
N/A - no web with doubler plate at beam compression flange
Check 19: Crippling of column web with
doubler plate at beam compression flange
Check 20: Compression buckling of column web with doubler plates
N/A - no web with doubler plate
Check 21: Column web panel with doubler plates in shear
Check 22: Column with transverse stiffeners
Design requirement:
fMcts > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
fRfts > N*ts
fRftw > N*ts
Geometry check for trans. stiffeners:
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
at tension flange
ratio
0.61
0.9
0.92
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
911

bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fMcts = 908.99 kNm
fMbt = 613.24 kNm, fMs = 502.87 kNm
Nts = 423.38 kN
fRfts = 471.74 kN, fRftw = 460.89 kN
Yield line parameter, Ycs = 7371.78 mm
Design requirement:
Stiffener:
fRfcy > N*cs
fRfcb > N*cs
Welds to stiffeners:
fRfcw > N*cs - fRwy
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fRfcy = 894.54 kN, fRfcb = 1223.95 kN
Ncs = 725.87 kN
fRfcw = 1575.72 kN, fRwy = 414.94 kN
Pass
Pass
Pass
at compression flange
ratio
0.81
0.59
Pass
Pass
0.2
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 24: Column with transverse diagonal shear stiffeners

N/A - no web with transverse plate
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 7 - RIDGE

-------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
10 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.88
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Angle
= 5.99
End plate
= 550x200x25 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Flange welds
Web welds
Bolts
= 8M20 8.8N/TB (Fu = 830 MPa)
912
360 UB 50.7
356 mm
171 mm
11.5 mm
7.3 mm
11.4 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Pass
sg
sp2
spo
ae
=
=
=
=
120 mm
141.52 mm
65 mm
30 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
kNm)
Check 1:
End plate:
Bolt gauge:
Edge dist.:
=
=
=
=
=
sp1
sp3
spi
-40.77 kN Compression
67.36 kN (Actual = -1.24 kN, Minimum = 67.36 kN)
0 kN (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
-118.63 kNm (Actual = -118.63 kNm, Minimum = 114.88
Detailing limitations
bi >= bf + 20
sg <= bf
sg >= 120 mm
sp2 >= 70 mm
ae >= 30 mm
ae <= 2.5 bolt diameter
40 mm <= spo <= 75 mm
Spacing for bolt at haunch is not sufficient
Plate depth
Check 2:
Capacity of welds to beam flanges

Check not required for butt weld
Check 3:
Capacity of welds to beam web

Web axial force, Nw = -15.98 kN
Web bending moment, Mw = -18.77 kNm
Web shear force, Vy = 0.11 kN/mm
Web shear force, Vz = -0.61 kN/mm
Web resultant shear force = 0.62 kN/mm
Weld capacity = 0.83 kN/mm
Weld capacity > Resultant shear force
Check 4:
= 0 mm
= 0 mm
= 65 mm
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Capacity of bolts at tension flange

Number of tension bolts = 4
fMbt = 224.48 kNm
Mdesign = -118.63 kNm
Maxial = -6.77 kNm
fMbt > |MDesign| + Maxial
Check 5:
Capacity of bolts in shear

Total shear resisted (V*) = 67.36 kN
Bolts resisting shear = 4
Bolt capacity (fVdf) = 92.63 kN
Bolt group capacity (fVfb) = 370.51 kN
fVfb > V*
Check 6:
Pass
Pass
Capacity of end plate at tension flange
913
fMpt = 283.57 kNm

fMbt = 224.48 kNm
fMs = 229.75 kNm
fMpt > 1.11 x Min[fMbt, fMs]
Pass
Check 7:
Capacity of end plate in shear

Horiz. shear (Vh*) = 160.89 kN
Horiz. shear yield capacity (fVpe) = 562.5 kN
Horiz. shear rupture capacity (fVpu) = 863.46 kN
Min of [fVpu, fVpe] > Vh*
Pass
Check 8:
Requirement for stiffener to end plate

No stiffener - check not required
Check 9:
Capacity of stiffener welds to end plate

No stiffener - check not required
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 11 - RIGHT KNEE

-------------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
14 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.96
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
360 UB 50.7-A
689.1 mm
171 mm
11.5 mm
7.3 mm
11.4 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Supporting
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Angle
= 2.99
End plate
= 885x195x25 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Transverse stiffeners
Top
= 86x6 mm
Bottom
= 86x6 mm
Web welds
Flange welds
Top stfr. welds
Bot stfr. welds
=
=
=
=
Bolts
= 8M20 8.8N/TB (Fu = 830 MPa)
sg
sp2
spo
ae
=
=
=
=
914
6 mm
FSBW
6 mm
6 mm
CFW SP
SP (Fu
CFW GP
CFW GP
120 mm
141.52 mm
65 mm
30 mm
(Fu =
= 410
(Fu =
(Fu =
410 MPa)
MPa)
410 MPa)
410 MPa)
sp1
sp3
spi
Pass
= 0 mm
= 0 mm
= 65 mm
Column flange doubler plate

Size
= 72x12 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
=
=
=
=
=
-65.33 kN Compression
78.19 kN (Actual = 78.19 kN, Minimum = 40 kN)
0 kN (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
325.84 kNm (Actual = 325.84 kNm, Minimum = 268.2 kNm)
Check 1: Detailing requirement

Plate depth
End plate width
bi >= bfb + 20 mm
bi <= bfc + 20 mm
Bolt gauge
sg <= bfb
sg <= bfc - 2.5 * df
sg >= 120 mm
Bolt pitches
sp1, sp2, sp3 >= 70 mm
Edge distance
aev >= 1.5 * df
aev <= 2.5 * df
aeh >= 1.25 * df
Check limits Table 3 - ASI Connection Design Guide 12
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 2: Flange welds to beam

Check 3: Web welds to beam
Design requirement:
SQRT(vz^2+vy^2) <= fVw
Web shear force, Vv = 78.19 kN/mm
vz = 0.8 kN/mm, vy = 0.06 kN/mm
fVw = 0.83 kN/mm
ratio
0.96
Check 4: Bolts at tension flange

Design requirement:
ratio
fMbt > M* + Maxial*
0.74
Tension bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
End plate design moment, M* = 325.84 kNm
Maxial* = 0 kNm
Check 5: Bolts in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVfb = 370.51 kN > Vv = 78.19 kN
0.21
Total shear resisted by bolts, Vv* = 78.19 kN
Single bolt shear capacity, fVdf = 92.63 kN
End plate bearing capacity, fVbi = 276.75 kN
No. bolts effective in shear = 4
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 6: End plate at tension flange
915

Design requirement:
ratio
fMpt > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.83
End plate yield capacity, fMpt = 589.88 kNm
Bolt moment capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
Check 7: End plate in shear
Design requirement:
ratio
fVpe > Nft / nbp
0.41
fVpu > Nft / nbp
0.27
Horizontal shear yielding capacity, fVpe = 548.44 kN
Horizontal shear rupture capacity, fVpu = 835.79 kN
Total design tension force, Nft = 449.54 kN
Total of bolt rows resisting tension force, nbp = 2
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 8: Stiffener for end plate

Check 9: Design capacity of stiffener welds to end plate
Check 10: Local bending of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMct > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
1.4
Stiffener
Column flange capacity, fMct = 349.93 kNm
Bolt group moment capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
Check 11: Local yielding of column flange at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwt > Nft
1.22
Stiffener
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwt = 368.08 kN
Total design tension force, N*ft = 449.54 kN
Top flange to end of column = 97.95 mm
Check 12: Local yielding of column flange at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwy > N*fc
0.65
Pass
Unstiffened column web yield capacity, fRwy = 787.64 kN
Check 13: Column web cripping at beam compression flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fRwc > N*fc
0.8
Unstiffened column web crippling capacity, fRwc = 638.73 kN
Pass
Check 14: Column web compression buckling

Design requirement:
ratio
fRwb > N*fc
0.72
Pass
Unstiffened column web compression buckling capacity, fRwb = 705.48 kN
Check 15: Unstiffened column web panel in shear
916

Design requirement:
fVc > Vc*
Design capacity of column web in shear, fVc
Column web pannel shear force, Vc* = 510.89
Column axial capacity, fNs = 3398.4 kN
ratio
0.54
= 939.44 kN
kN
Check 16: Local bending of column flange with

flange doubler plates at beam tension flange
Design requirement:
ratio
fMctd > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
0.93
Column (flange+doubler) capacity, fMctd = 529.39 kNm
Bolt group design capacity, fMbt = 441.53 kNm
Flange doubler plate requirements:
bsd > [bfb - (twc + 2 * rc)] / 2
bsd < [bfc - (twc + 2 * rc) - 2 * fillet rad.] / 2
dsd > tfb + 5.0 * (ti + tfc + td)
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 17: Local yielding of column

web with plates at beam tension flange
N/A - no web with doubler plate at beam tension flange
Check 18: Local yielding of column web
with plates at beam compression flange
Check 19: Crippling of column web with
doubler plate at beam compression flange
Check 20: Compression buckling of column web with doubler plates
Check 21: Column web panel with doubler plates in shear
Design requirement:
fMcts > 1.11 * Min [fMbt and fMs]
fRfts > N*ts
fRftw > N*ts
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fMcts = 669.9 kNm
fMbt = 441.53 kNm, fMs = 502.87 kNm
Nts = 81.46 kN
fRfts = 260.06 kN, fRftw = 355.69 kN
Yield line parameter, Ycs = 6739.25 mm
at tension flange
ratio
0.73
0.31
0.23
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 23: Column with transverse stiffeners at compression flange
917

Design requirement:
Stiffener:
fRfcy > N*cs
fRfcb > N*cs
Welds to stiffeners:
fRfcw > N*cs - fRwy
bs >= (bfb-twb) / 2
bs >= (bfb / 3 - twc / 2)
bs <= (bfc-twc) / 2
ds >= 1.8 * bs
ts >= 0.5 * tfb
fRfcy = 1044.81 kN, fRfcb = 1030.39 kN
Ncs = 510.89 kN
fRfcw = 1181.79 kN, fRwy = 787.64 kN
ratio
0.49
0.5
Pass
Pass
-0.23
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
Check 24: Column with transverse diagonal shear stiffeners

N/A - no web with transverse plate
AS4100 CALCULATIONS FOR CONNECTION 13 - RIGHT BASEPLATE

------------------------------------------------------Design/Check:
Design
Critical load case:
10 out of 10-14
Utilization ratio:
0.57
Supported
d
bf
tf
tw
r
fyf
fyw
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
530 UB 92.4
533 mm
209 mm
15.6 mm
10.2 mm
14 mm
300 MPa
320 MPa
Base plate
= 575x250x20 mm (Fy = 250 MPa, Fu = 410 MPa)
Weld:
Bolt:
= 4M20 4.6N/S
sp = 360 mm
lec = 195 mm
sg = 120 mm
Concrete:
CONCRETE-20
(Length = 775 mm, Width = 450 mm, Depth = 395 mm)
Grout:
Strength = 25 MPa, Thickness = 20 mm
Design actions: N*
Vy*
Vz*
My*
Mz*
918
=
=
=
=
=
-77.15 kN Compression (Not used)

40.64 kN
0 kN
0 kNm (Not used)
0 kNm (Not used)
Pass

Check 1:
Capacity for bearing on concrete support

Base plate area = 143750 mm^2
Geometrically similar area A2 = 261141.3 mm^2
fNc = 2092.5 kN >= Nc* = 77.15 kN
Check 2:
Capacity of steel base plate

fNs = 3774.15 kN >= Nc* = 77.15 kN
a1 = 34.33 mm
a2 = 41.4 mm
a4 = 83.44 mm
a5 = 742 mm
kx = 2.271942
X = 0.03850627
lambda = 0.2250999
ao = 41.4 mm
Check 3:
Weld length:
Weld stress:
Pass
Pass
Capacity of weld at column base

Lx = 418 mm
Ly = 947.6 mm
Vx = 0 kN/mm
Vy = 0.04 kN/mm
Plate fully contacts with column
SQRT(Vx^2 + Vy^2) = 0.04 kN/mm
Weld strength: fVw = 0.83 kN/mm

SQRT(Vx^2 + Vy^2) < fVw
Check 4:
Pass
Horizontal shear transfered by fiction

Slip factor = 0.4
Compression force = 77.15 kN
fVcf = 21.6 kN
Vres = 40.64 kN
fVcf > Vres is not satisfied - Anchor bolts check is
required
Check 7:
Shear transfered by anchor bolts

nbv = 2
nbt = 4
fVfb = 35.71 kN
fVcex = 27.1 kN
fVcey = 55.5 kN
fVcp = 548.54 kN
Vres = 40.64 kN
fVfb > Vres / nbv
Pass
fVcex > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcey > Vy / nbt
Pass
fVcpx > Vx / nbt
Pass
fVcpy > Vy / nbt
Pass
919
Cable Analysis
Cable analysis
This worked example demonstrates the input and analysis of a 30m tall, guyed
mast. The catenary cable equations are used to calculate the axial force in a
nominal guy member, which is then compared to the result obtained from SPACE
GASS.
A non-linear analysis is the only type of analysis that can be performed on a

structure containing cable members due to their highly non-linear behaviour.
The guyed mast considered in this example has the following basic properties.
Height:
Number of guys:
Radial guy spacing:
Guy connections at:
Distance from base:
Guys:
Mast:
30m
3 sets of 3
120
15m, 22.5m and 30m
12m
10mm steel cable
406x9.5CHS
Dead load (DL):
Self weight (calculated by SPACE GASS)
The uniformly distributed dead load is not the only load that the structure would be
subject to in real life, however it is the only one considered here. The load cases are
limited in order to simplify the example.
In this example, the only type of load applied is an
UDL. You can apply point loads to cable members, however they must be applied
as node loads rather than member concentrated loads.
921
Elevation of guyed mast
922
Cable Analysis
Method of input
It was not possible to input the guyed mast using the structure wizard due to its
unusual geometric configuration. All of the data input was performed using either
graphical tools or datasheets.
Node restraints and member fixities
After the structural geometry was generated, node restraints of FFFFFF were
applied to nodes 1, 5, 6 and 7 using the graphical restraint input facility. Even
though the guyed members are to be pin connected to the mast and to their base, a
member end fixity of FFFFFF was specified. This is because a member end fixity
code of FFFRRR would yield the same result as a code of FFFFFF for cable
members (ie. cables have no moment capacity).
Loads
Loading due to the self weight of the structure was input using a datasheet.
Cables have no moment capacity. Hence, intermediate nodes on cables must

have all their rotational degrees of freedom restrained (ie. use RRRFFF).
Input check
As a final check before the analysis was initiated, an output report containing the
complete structural data was viewed. Any errors in the data were corrected and the
model was then ready for analysis.
923
Analysis procedure
A non-linear (2nd order) analysis was performed in which both P- and P- effects
were activated, while axial shortening was not.
924
Cable Analysis
Analysis results
In the absence of any lateral loads, the guys simply deflect vertically under self
weight as shown in the following deformed shape diagram.
SPACE GASS model
925
Deformed shape
This report extract shows all of the input data for the model, together with the
intermediate displacements, forces and moments for guy member 12. Following the
report, we compare the SPACE GASS results for member 12 with a theoretical
formular.
ANALYSIS STATUS REPORT

---------------------Job name ...... Guyed Mast
Location ...... C:\Samples\Mixed
926
Cable Analysis
This is a guyed mast analysed for the SPACE GASS worked

example appendices.
Length units .........................
Section property units ...............
Material strength units ..............
Mass density units ...................
Temperature units ....................
Force units ..........................
Moment units .........................
Mass units ...........................
Acceleration units ...................
Translation units ....................
Stress units .........................
m
mm
MPa
kg/m^3
Celsius
kN
kNm
kg
g's
mm
MPa
Nodes ................................
32765)
Members ..............................
32765)
Plates ...............................
32765)
Restrained nodes .....................
32765)
Nodes with spring restraints .........
32765)
Section properties ...................
5000)
Material properties ..................
999)
Constrained nodes ....................
32765)
Member offsets .......................
32765)
12
Node loads ...........................

250000)
Prescribed node displacements ........
250000)
Member concentrated loads ............
250000)
Member distributed forces ............
927
250000)
Member distributed torsions ..........
250000)
Thermal loads ........................
250000)
Member prestress loads ...............
250000)
Plate pressure loads .................
250000)
Self weight load cases ...............
10000)
Combination load cases ...............
10000)
Load cases with titles ...............
10000)
Lumped masses ........................
250000)
Spectral load cases ..................
10000)
Static analysis ......................
Dynamic analysis .....................
Response analysis ....................
Buckling analysis ....................
Ill-conditioned ......................
Non-linear convergence ...............
Frontwidth ...........................
Total degrees of freedom .............
Static load cases ....................
10000)
Mass load cases ......................
10000)
NODE COORDINATES (m)

----------------
Node
X
Coord
Y
Coord
Z
Coord
1
2
0.000
0.000
0.000
15.000
0.000
0.000
928
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
12
18
1
Cable Analysis
3
4
5
6
7
0.000
0.000
-12.000
6.000
6.000
22.500
30.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.392
-10.392
MEMBER DATA (deg,kNm/rad,m)

----------- (F=Fixed, R=Released) (*=Cable length)
Dir
Dir Dir Memb
Node A Node B
Memb
Angle Node Axis Type Node A Node B
Fixity Fixity
Length
1
FFFFFF
2
FFFFFF
3
FFFFFF
4
FFFFFF
5
FFFFFF
6
FFFFFF
7
FFFFFF
8
FFFFFF
9
FFFFFF
10
FFFFFF
11
FFFFFF
12
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
0.00
FFFFFF
Sect Mat
Norm
Norm
Norm
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
Cabl
15.000
7.500
7.500
19.209
25.500
32.311
19.209
25.500
32.311
19.209
25.500
32.311
NODE RESTRAINTS (kN/m,kNm/rad)
929
--------------- (F=Fixed, R=Released, S=Spring,

*=General)
Rest
X Axial
Y Axial
Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation
Node
Code
Stiffness Stiffness
Stiffness Stiffness Stiffness
Z Axial X
Stiffness
1 FFFFFF
5 FFFFFF
6 FFFFFF
7 FFFFFF
SECTION PROPERTIES (mm,mm^2,mm^4,deg)

-----------------Sect Name
Source
1
406.4x9.5 CHS
Aust300
2 Guy
circle
User
Mark
Shape
S1
Circular
S2
Solid
tube
Area of
Torsion
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Princ
Sect
Section
Constant
Area
Shr Area
Angle
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
Mom of In
Mom of In
Shr
1 1.1800E+04 4.6700E+08 2.3300E+08 2.3300E+08

Infinite
Infinite
0.00
2 7.8540E+01 9.8175E+02 4.9087E+02 4.9087E+02
Infinite
Infinite
0.00
Sect Shape
Btw/Bbw
Tt/Tb
1
0.00
930
Trans Mir Rotate
Bt/Bb
406.00
0.00
Tw/Rr
Circular tube
0.00
9.50
No
No
0.00
Cable Analysis
0.00
0.00
2
0.00
0.00
0.00
Solid circle
0.00
0.00
No
No
0.00
10.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (MPa,kg/m^3,strain/degC)

------------------Young's Poisson's
Coeff of
Concrete
Matl Material Name
Modulus
Ratio
Expansion
Strength
1 STEEL
1.170E-05
2.0000E+05
Mass
Density
0.25 7.8500E+03
SELF WEIGHT (g's)

----------Load
Case
X-Axis
Accel'n
Y-Axis
Accel'n
Z-Axis
Accel'n
0.000
-1.000
0.000
INTERMEDIATE DISPLACEMENTS (m,mm)

-------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Memb 12, Case 1 (Non-linear):
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P-, P-, 2 Itns,
99.963% Cnv (Def gov)
Station
Local Y
Location
Transl'n
Global X
Local Z
Transl'n
Transl'n
Global Y
Global Z
Local X
Transl'n
Transl'n
Transl'n
0.000
-0.108
0.000
0.000
-0.291
0.000
0.270
931
3.231
-69.653
6.462
-124.732
9.693
-164.996
12.924
-190.083
16.155
-199.618#
19.387
-193.215
22.618
-170.474
25.849
-130.980
29.080
-74.303
32.311
0.000*
-32.365
0.000
-57.964
0.000
-76.646
0.000
-88.253
0.000
-92.627#
0.000
-89.600
0.000#
-79.003
0.000
-60.659
0.000
-34.387
0.000*
0.000*
0.000
-25.718
56.059
-46.029
100.397
-0.318#
-61.036
132.754
-0.260
-70.545
152.860
-0.053
-74.352#
160.435*
0.233
-72.247
155.192
0.526
-63.998
136.838
0.738
-49.374
105.066
0.786*
-28.130
59.561
0.000*
-0.162
0.576
0.000#
0.000
INTERMEDIATE FORCES AND MOMENTS (m,kN,kNm)

------------------------------- (*=Maximum, #=Minimum)
Memb 12, Case 1 (Non-linear):
Non-linear (Small, Sec, Resid): P-, P-, 2 Itns,
99.963% Cnv (Def gov)
Station
Y-Axis
Location
Moment
Axial
Z-Axis
Force
Moment
0.000
0.000
3.231
0.000
6.462
0.000
9.693
0.000
-1.560#
0.000
-1.542
0.000
-1.524
0.000
-1.506
0.000
932
Y-Axis
Z-Axis
X-Axis
Shear
Shear
Torsion
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Cable Analysis
12.924
0.000
16.155
0.000
19.387
0.000
22.618
0.000
25.849
0.000
29.080
0.000
32.311
0.000
-1.487
0.000
-1.469
0.000
-1.451
0.000
-1.433
0.000
-1.415
0.000
-1.397
0.000
-1.379*
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
The following catenary cable equation from Hibbeler (15) for a single catenary
element can be used to verify the results for member 12 shown above.
As you can see, it was necessary to resolve the UDL to the local axis of the
member (multiplying it by the cosine of the angle between the vertical). From this
point the solution is straightforward, the result varying by only 0.3% (ie. 1.469kN
vs. 1.465kN).
933

See also Members.
934
Converting Old Jobs

Converting old jobs
SPACE GASS automatically converts all version 4.0 and newer jobs into the
correct format at the time they are opened. They are then saved with the usual
<Job>.SG naming convention.
However, pre-version 4.0 jobs use multiple data files for each job, each of which
has a filename extension of "DAT". In order to open the pre-version 4.0 files with
the current version of SPACE GASS they must first be renamed to the new
convention. This can be done automatically with a batch program called
SGName.BAT that is supplied with SPACE GASS.
In order to rename the old data files, you should first open a command (or DOS)
prompt window, go to the folder containing the old data files and then run
SGName from your SPACE GASS program folder. Assuming that the old files are
in a folder called C:\OldData and the SPACE GASS program files are in a folder
called C:\Program Files\SPACE GASS\EXE, the commands necessary to rename
them are:
C:
CD\OldData
C:\Program Files"\SPACE GASS"\EXE\SGName
Once the files have been renamed, you can access them from the current version of
SPACE GASS as normal. Naturally, they still have to be converted to the latest
format, however this is done automatically as each job is opened by SPACE
GASS.
935
Bibliography
Bibliography
1. Harrison H.B. "Computer Methods in Structural Analysis",
pp 248-251, Prentice Hall, 1973.
2. Ghali A. and Neville A.M.

"Structural Analysis A Unified Classical and Matrix Approach",
2nd edition, pp 364-374, Chapman and Hall, London, 1978.
3. AS1250 - 1981 "SAA Steel Structures Code",

Standards Australia, 1 The Crescent, Homebush, NSW, 2140, Australia.
4. AS4100 - 1990 "Steel Structures",

5. SABS0162 - 1984 "Code of Practice for The Structural Use of Steel",

The Council of the South African Bureau of Standards, Private Bag X191,
Pretoria, Republic of South Africa.
6. BS5950 : Part 1 : 1990 "Structural Use of Steelwork in Building",

British Standards Institution, 2 Park Street, London W1A 2BS.
7. NZS3404 - 1992 "Steel Structures Standard",

Standards New Zealand, Wellington Trade Centre,
Victoria Street, Wellington 1, New Zealand.
8. Clarke A.B. and Coverman S.H. "Structural Steelwork: Limit state design",
p 49, Chapman and Hall, London, 1987.
937

9. Woolcock S.T., Kitipornchai S. and Bradford M.A.
"Limit State Design of Portal Frame Buildings", 1st edition, AISC, 1991.
10. Clough R.W. and Penzien J. "Dynamics of Structures",

McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1975.
11. AS3990 - 1993 "Mechanical equipment - Steelwork",

12. Wittrick W.H. and Williams F.W. "Natural Frequencies of Elastic

Structures",
Quarterly Journal of Mechanics and Applied Mathematics, Vol. XXIV, Pt.
3, 1971.
13. AS/NZS4600 - 1996 "Cold-Formed Steel Structures",

14. AS3600 - 1988 "Concrete Structures",

15. Hibbeler R.C. "Engineering Mechanics", 6th edition, Macmillan

Publishing Company, 1992.
16. AISC-ASD "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress

Design", American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), June 1, 1989.
17. AISC-LRFD "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for

Structural Steel Buildings", American Institute of Steel Construction
(AISC), Dec 1, 1993.
18. Eurocode 3 "Design of Steel Structures", European Committee for

Standardization (CEN), DD ENV 1993-1-1 : 1992.
938
Bibliography
19. Tessler, A. and Hughes, T.J.R., "A three-node Mindlin plate element with
improved transverse shear", Computer Methods In Applied Mechanics
And Engineering 50 (1985) pp 71-101
20. Tessler, A. and Hughes, T.J.R., "An improved treatment of transverse

shear in the Mindlin-type four-node quadrilateral element", Computer
Methods In Applied Mechanics And Engineering 39 (1983) pp 311-335
21. Liu,, J, Riggs, H.R. and Tessler, A. , "A four-node, shear-deformable shell
element developed via explicit Kirchoff constraints", International Journal
For Numerical Methods In Engineering, Vol. 2000, 49, pp 1065-1086
22. Batoz, J., "An explicit formulation for an efficient triangular plate-bending
element", International Journal For Numerical Methods In Engineering,
Vol. 18 (1982), pp 1077-1089
23. Batoz, J. and Tahar, M.B., "Evaluation of a new quadrilateral thin plate",
International Journal For Numerical Methods In Engineering, Vol. 18
(1982), pp 1655-1677
24. Hancock Gregory J., "Elastic method of analysis of rigid jointed frames
including second order effects", Steel Construction, Vol. 28, No. 3,
September 1994
939
Index
2
2nd order analysis ........................629
See non-linear analysis ............629
3
3D renderer ..........................340, 562
A
A quick frontwidth calculation
method .....................................639
Absolute coordinates............397, 399
Acceleration .................................224
Access ..........................................103
Align members.............................461
Aligning plate axes ......................469
Alignment ............................196, 382
Amplitude ....................................561
Analysis .......................................617
Buckling analysis.....675, 681, 684
Dynamic frequency analysis ...653,
655
Dynamic response analysis .....664,
666
Static analysis ..................618, 641
Warnings and errors.................692
Angle sections..............175, 192, 713
Animation ....................................567
Annotation ...........................555, 817
Aperture circle ...............39, 369, 392
Arc generation..............................446
Area loads ............................244, 511
Area of section .............................175
Attach...................340, 369, 382, 392
Attachments .................................150
Auto scaling of base shear ...........666
AutoCAD .............101, 103, 106, 122
Axes .............................................130
Global axes .............. 130, 137, 552

Local axes................ 130, 137, 553
Local axes for moments and shears
....................................... 39, 590
Axial force distribution................ 684
Axial forces.................................. 620
Described................................. 620
Diagrams.................................. 561
Sign convention ....................... 137
Axis limits.................................... 590
B
Base shear factor.......................... 666
Bending effective lengths ............ 713
Bending moments ........................ 620
Described................................. 620
Diagrams............................ 39, 561
Sign convention ....................... 137
Bends ........................................... 447
Bentley Structural ........ 101, 103, 106
Biaxial bending............................ 852
Bibliography .............................. 1009
Bill of materials ................... 652, 955
BIM...................................... 101, 103
Bolts............. 815, 817, 835, 885, 897
Boundary conditions.................... 170
See node restraints ................... 170
Bracing................................. 298, 303
BS5950-1 2000 code specific items
................................................. 784
Buckling analysis......................... 617
Analysis ........... 617, 631, 675, 684
Axial force distribution............ 684
Cables ...................................... 681
Effective lengths...................... 678
Load cases ............................... 684
Load factor....... 675, 681, 684, 861
Messages.................................. 641
941

Mode shapes ............569, 675, 684
Node restraints .........................681
Results..............................690, 959
Special considerations..............681
C
Cables...........................................617
Analysis ...................617, 626, 629
Buckling analysis.....................681
Chord length ............................154
Convergence ............................626
Converted to tension-only........154
Damping ..........................626, 641
Fixity................................154, 626
Length ......................................154
Load stepping...................626, 641
Loading ............213, 218, 224, 626
Members ..........................154, 626
Worked example ......................995
CAD .....................................101, 103
CAD interface module .................122
Calculator.......................................34
Cartesian coordinates ...........397, 399
Catenary cables ............................626
See cables.................................626
Centre of gravity ..................652, 955
Changing the appearance of SPACE
GASS ...................................44, 46
Characteristic concrete strength ...194
Check boxes ...................................77
Chord length.................................154
CIMSteel/2 file.............101, 103, 106
CIS/2 file......................................106
See CIMSteel/2 file..101, 103, 106
Clean-up job...................................87
Cleats ...........................815, 817, 835
Click...............................................74
Code check...........................743, 852
Codes ...........................................733
Flange restraint ................713, 733
Master-slave constraint ............196
942
Member fixity .......................... 154

Node restraint .......................... 170
Coefficient of thermal expansion. 194
Colors....................................... 44, 46
Column and beam Tee sections ... 191
Column and beam Tees ............... 742
Combination load cases ............... 226
Described................................. 226
Graphics................................... 499
Managing load cases................ 548
Text.......................................... 274
Combined stress ratio .................. 743
Limit ........................................ 743
Steel member design................ 743
Combo boxes ................................. 77
Command buttons.......................... 77
Command line options................... 65
Compression effective lengths.... 678,
713
Compression-only members154, 624,
641, 655
Concrete column design ..... 851, 852,
864
Assumptions and notes ............ 864
Auto-check mode..................... 852
Biaxial bending........................ 852
Check....................................... 852
Configuration........................... 861
Cover ....................................... 861
Cross section............................ 852
Design...................................... 852
Effective lengths...................... 852
Interaction diagram.................. 852
Load factor....... 851, 852, 861, 864
Loads ....................................... 852
Minimum load compliance...... 852
Moment magnification ............ 852
Output ...................................... 863
Reinforcement ......................... 852
Shapes...................................... 852
Voids........................................ 852
Concrete reinforcement ............... 137
Index
Configuring SPACE GASS .....33, 48
Configuring the renderer................48
Connect ........................................454
Connection design........................815
Connectivity check.......................473
Constraint code ............................196
Context sensitive cursors .............369
Continuous lateral restraint ..........733
Contours.......................................562
Control Panel .................................46
Convergence624, 626, 629, 641, 655,
743, 753, 864, 883
Converting old jobs....................1007
Coordinate systems ......................130
Coordinates ..................................397
Absolute ...........................397, 399
Cartesian ..........................397, 399
Polar.................................397, 399
Relative ............................397, 399
Copying........................................548
Load cases................................548
Member loads ..........................546
Member properties...................429
Node loads ...............................545
Node properties........................428
Nodes, members or plates ........438
Plate loads ................................547
Plate properties ........................430
Steel member properties ..........712
Correction factors...........................43
Cover............................................861
CQC .............................................666
Creating a new job .........................80
Critical flange...............................762
Cross section window ..................852
Crosshair cursor .............39, 389, 391
Crossing window .........................369
CSV file ...............................101, 103
Currents................................247, 516
Curved line resolution....................39
Custom libraries ...........................888
Customizing
Property panels .......................... 57

Toolbars..................................... 53
D
Damping ...................................... 233
Spectral curves......................... 233
Static analysis .................. 626, 641
Dashed lines................................... 39
Data entry ...................................... 77
Datasheet input ............................ 325
Dead loads ................................... 311
Deleting ......................................... 86
Jobs ............................................ 86
Load cases ............................... 548
Parts of the structure ........ 369, 442
Design.......................................... 697
Combined stress ratio
Steel member design.... 697, 773
Convergence ............................ 697
Design groups and intermediate
stations................................. 758
Design segment ...... 697, 759, 760,
765, 766, 768, 773, 777
Lateral rotation factor .............. 768
Load cases ....................... 697, 773
Load factor
Steel member design.... 697, 773
Load height factor.................... 766
Member segment .... 697, 759, 760,
765, 766, 768, 773, 777
Moment magnification ............ 697
Section check........................... 760
Segment .. 697, 759, 760, 765, 766,
768, 773, 777
Design actions...................... 843
Design procedure ................. 843
Minimum design actions..... 817,
835
Steel member design
Assumptions ........................ 777
943

Check mode .........................777
Combined stress ratio...697, 773
Described .............................697
Design mode ........................777
Load factor ...................697, 773
Section check .......................760
Segment ......697, 759, 760, 765,
766, 768, 773, 777
Stress ratio .......................697, 773
Torsional effects ......................697
Twist factor ..............................765
Diagram shading ............................39
Diagrams ..............................561, 562
Dialogue boxes...............................75
Closing .......................................75
Moving.......................................75
Using the keyboard ....................75
Dimensions ..................................603
Direction ......................................154
Angle........................................154
Axis..........................................154
Node.........................................154
Vector ......................................233
Displacements ..............................620
Described .................................620
Diagrams..................................561
Sign convention .......................137
DOC file.......................................103
See MS-Word ..........................103
Dongle............................................14
See Hardware lock ...............14, 31
Doppler effect ..............................516
Double-click...................................74
Drag ...............................................74
Draw.............................................431
DXF file .......................................122
Files..........101, 103, 122, 123, 124
Layer names...............................39
Dynamic frequency analysis .......230,
617, 653, 655
Frequency shift ........................655
Iterations ..................................655
944
Load cases ............................... 655

Mode shapes ... 233, 567, 653, 654,
655, 666
Natural frequencies.................. 655
Results ............................. 663, 956
Self mass.................................. 655
Stiffness matrix........................ 641
Worked example...................... 903
Dynamic response analysis.. 617, 664
Auto scaling of base shear ....... 666
Base shear factor...................... 666
Load cases ............................... 666
Mode combination method...... 666
Results ..................... 671, 672, 957
Sign of the results .................... 666
Site factor................................. 666
Site subsoil category................ 666
Spectral curve multiplier ......... 666
Vertical direction ..................... 666
Worked example...................... 903
E
Eccentric effects .................. 713, 743
Compression members ............ 771
Tension members..................... 772
Edit mode............................. 410, 414
Effective lengths .......................... 713
Bending effective lengths ........ 713
Buckling analysis..................... 678
Compression effective lengths 678,
713
Concrete column effective length
............................................. 852
Steel member effective lengths 713
Eigenvalue ........................... 653, 675
Eigenvector.......................... 653, 675
Elastic critical buckling analysis . 675
See buckling analysis .............. 675
Elastic critical load analysis......... 675
Elastic restraints........................... 170
Index
See node restraints ...................170
Elastic suppprts ............................170
See node restraints ...................170
End fixity .....................................626
See member fixity............154, 626
.................................................770
Enveloping ...................................566
Graphics ...................................566
Reports .....................................867
Errors ...........................................692
Analysis ...................................692
Steel member design................811
Text file....................................282
ETABS.........................................103
Euler buckling capacity.......631, 641,
675, 678
Examples......................................995
Cable analysis ..........................995
Portal frame analysis................903
Portal frame connection design971
Portal frame member design ....961
Excel ............................................103
Exporting
CIMSteel/2 file ................103, 106
CIS/2 file..........................103, 106
CSV file ...................103, 106, 835
DWG file .................................835
DXF file ...................122, 124, 835
IFC file.............................103, 106
MS-Access file.................103, 835
MS-Excel file...................103, 835
MS-Word file...................103, 835
SDNF file.................................103
Step file ............................103, 106
Text file....................103, 251, 835
ZIP file .....................................103
Extend members...........................457
F
Filters .....................................96, 590
Find.............................................. 586
Fixity............................................ 154
See members............................ 154
Flange restraints........... 713, 733, 763
Flexural-torsional buckling.......... 675
Flipping a section................. 175, 190
Floor loading................................ 511
See area loading....................... 511
Floor slab ..................................... 196
Folders ........................................... 34
Fonts ............................................ 867
See output ................................ 867
Forces........................................... 620
Described................................. 620
Diagrams.................................. 561
Sign convention ....................... 137
Frame data ................................... 147
Frame imperfections .................... 743
See Imperfections .................... 743
Frameworks Plus . 101, 103, 106, 122
Frequency .................................... 561
Frequency shift ............................ 655
Frontwidth ................... 632, 638, 639
Full restraint................................. 733
G
Gauge........................................... 817
General colours.............................. 46
General configuration .................... 39
General restraint .......................... 170
Generate arc ................................. 446
Geometry and loads ..................... 905
Girts ............................................. 298
Global axes .................. 130, 137, 552
Graphical input
Colors ........................................ 44
Cursor ...................................... 369
Dimensions ................................ 43
Display area ............................... 68
Editing ............................. 340, 369
Input................................. 340, 369
945

Output ..............................867, 882
Overview..................................369
Text format ................................37
Gravity .........................................224
Grid ......................................340, 386
Gridlines.......................................607
Group code...........................713, 894
H
Hardware lock..........................14, 32
Haunches..............463, 815, 817, 835
Headings ......................................150
Heartbeat ........................................32
Hong Kong CP2011 code specific
items.........................................791
Horizontal angle...........................595
HTML file....................................873
Page setup ................................873
Print preview............................878
I
IFC file .........................101, 103, 106
Ill-conditioning and instabilities ..144
Imperfections ...............................743
Importing .....................................103
ARC file...................................103
CIMSteel/2 file ................103, 106
CIS/2 file..........................103, 106
CSV file ...........................103, 106
DXF file ...........................122, 124
IFC file.............................103, 106
Microstran file..........................103
MS-Access file.................103, 835
MS-Excel file...................103, 835
SDNF file.................................103
Spectral curve text file .............242
Step file ............................103, 106
Text file............................103, 251
ZIP file .....................................103
Incremental displacements...........641
Infotips .........................................401
946
Initiator ........................................ 253

Input methods .............................. 101
Instabilities........................... 144, 675
Installing SPACE GASS................ 32
Interaction diagram...................... 852
Intermediate member stations..... 743,
758
Intermediate nodes....... 458, 459, 460
Moving intermediate nodes ..... 460
Removing crossed member nodes
............................................. 459
Removing intermediate nodes . 458
Intersect ............................... 454, 455
Iterating the analysis-design process
................................................. 753
J
Jobs ................................................ 87
Attachments............................. 150
Clean-up .................................... 87
Delete......................................... 86
Merge......................................... 83
New............................................ 81
Open .......................................... 82
Save ........................................... 85
Status ........................... 71, 95, 883
K
Keyboard ..................................... 397
Input................................. 397, 399
Shortcuts .................................... 96
Kt factor....................................... 743
L
Labelling and annotation ............. 555
Lateral restraint............................ 733
See flange restraints................. 733
Legal notice ..................................... 7
Libraries....................................... 106
Index
Converting section names when
importing or exporting.........106
Creating custom libraries .........888
Standard libraries .....................885
The library editor .....................888
Library scan code.................713, 894
Licence Agreement ..........................7
Lift off..........................................154
Line width ......................................43
Linear analysis .....129, 617, 618, 641
Linking to other programs ...........103
List boxes .......................................77
Lists................................................77
Live loads.....................................311
Load cases.....96, 129, 233, 325, 618,
629, 641, 653, 655, 666, 684, 743,
758, 817, 835, 852
Combining ...............226, 274, 499
Copying....................................548
Deleting....................................548
Load case titles viewer.............558
Manage ....................................548
Renumbering............................548
Scrolling.....................................96
Titles ........................................229
Titles text .................................275
Load factor ...................................675
Buckling analysis....675, 681, 684,
861
Concrete column design..851, 852,
861, 864
Limit ................684, 743, 852, 861
Steel member design........743, 774
Load height factor ........................766
Load height position ....713, 726, 766
Load stepping.......................626, 641
Loading diagrams.........................561
Loads............................................546
Copying member loads ............546
Copying node loads .................545
Copying plate loads .................547
Filtering loads ..........................590
See area loads .......................... 244

See combination load cases ..... 226
See load case titles................... 229
See lumped masses .................. 230
See member concentrated loads
............................................. 211
See member distributed forces 213
See member distributed torsions
............................................. 216
See moving loads..................... 526
See node loads ......................... 207
See plate pressure loads........... 222
See prescribed node displacements
............................................. 209
See prestress loads ................... 218
See sea loads.................... 247, 516
See self weight......................... 224
See spectral loads .................... 233
See thermal loads..................... 218
Local axes .................... 130, 137, 553
Local axes for moments and shears
........................................... 39, 590
Logo....................................... 60, 873
Lumped masses............................ 230
Converting static loads to masses
............................................. 508
Described................................. 230
Dynamic frequency analysis.... 655
Graphics........................... 505, 561
Text.......................................... 276
M
Macros ........................................... 89
Margins........................................ 873
See page setup ......................... 873
Mass density ................................ 194
Masses ......................................... 230
See lumped masses .................. 230
Master node ................................. 196
Master-slave constraints .............. 196
Described................................. 196
947

Graphics ...................................426
Text ..........................................263
Material properties .......................194
Described .................................194
Graphics ...................................425
Library .............................885, 896
Text ..........................................262
MDB file ......................................101
See MS-Access ................101, 103
Measure........................................603
Member alignment ...............196, 205
Member check......................761, 774
Member concentrated loads .........211
Described .................................211
Graphics ...........................480, 561
Text ..........................................267
Member distributed forces ...........213
Described .................................213
Graphics ...........................483, 561
Text ..........................................268
Member distributed torsions ........216
Described .................................216
Graphics ...........................486, 561
Text ..........................................269
Member groups ............................727
Member imperfections .................743
See Imperfections ....................743
Member numbering......470, 638, 640
Member offsets ............................205
Described .................................205
Graphics ...................................427
Text ..........................................264
Member origins............................554
Member prestress loads................492
Described .................................220
Graphics ...........................492, 561
Text ..........................................271
Member schedule .........................122
Members ......................................154
Described .................129, 137, 154
Graphics ...................................414
Text ..........................................256
948
Menu system.................................. 68
Merging jobs.................................. 83
Meshing ....................................... 451
Microsoft ..................................... 101
Access.............................. 101, 103
Excel ................................ 101, 103
Windows.................................... 80
Word ........................................ 103
Microstation......... 101, 103, 106, 122
Microstran............................ 101, 103
Minimum design actions...... 817, 835
Mirror........................................... 441
Mode combination method .......... 666
Mode shapes ................................ 675
Buckling analysis.... 569, 675, 681,
684
Dynamic frequency analysis... 567,
653, 654, 655
Dynamic response analysis..... 233,
664, 666
Viewing mode shapes...... 567, 569
Modelling considerations............. 654
Modulus of subgrade reaction ..... 170
Moment magnification ................ 852
Moment of inertia ........................ 175
Moments ...................................... 620
Described................................. 620
Diagrams.................................. 561
Sign convention ....................... 137
Mouse ............................................ 96
The mousewheel ........................ 96
Using the mouse ........................ 74
Move............................................ 435
Moving intermediate nodes ......... 460
Moving loads ............... 249, 526, 902
MS-Excel ............................. 101, 103
MS-Word ..................................... 103
Multiple viewports....................... 408
Multiplying factor........................ 226
Multi-row editing......................... 327
Index
N
Natural frequencies ......230, 653, 655
New features ..................................15
Node loads ...................................207
Described .................................207
Graphics ...................................474
Text ..........................................265
Node numbering...........470, 638, 640
Node restraints .............129, 170, 423
Described .................................170
Elastic restraint ........................170
Frame data ...............................170
General restraint.......................170
Graphics ...................................423
Restraint code ..........................170
Text ..........................................259
Nodes ...........................................129
Described .........................129, 152
Graphics ...................................410
Text ..........................................255
Non-linear analysis .....129, 617, 618,
622, 623, 626, 629, 641
Normal members..........................154
Normal window ...........................369
Normalize mode shapes ...............655
Notes ............................................600
O
Ocean currents .....................247, 516
Offsets ..........................................205
See member offsets..................205
See plates .................................162
Opening a job.................................80
Operating plane............................395
Optimization617, 632, 638, 639, 640,
641
Ortho ....................................382, 391
Output ..........................................690
Concrete column design...........863
Described................................. 867
Dynamic response analysis...... 672
Fonts .......................................... 37
Page setup................................ 873
Print graphics........................... 882
Print preview ........................... 878
Print text report........................ 881
Printing to a file ............... 873, 878
Scale ................................ 873, 882
Static analysis .......................... 652
Status report............................. 883
Steel connection design ........... 845
Text format ................................ 37
Worked examples .... 903, 961, 995
P
Page setup .................................... 873
Pan ............................................... 582
Paradise solver ............. 641, 655, 684
Partial restraint............................. 733
P-delta effects ...... 622, 623, 629, 641
PDF file................................ 873, 878
Pick ........................................ 74, 369
Picture file.................................... 873
Page setup................................ 873
Print preview ........................... 878
Pitch ............................................. 817
Plane .................................... 340, 395
Plate pressure loads ..................... 222
Described................................. 222
Graphics................... 495, 540, 561
Text.......................................... 272
Plates............................................ 469
Align plate axes ....................... 469
Contours .................................. 562
Datasheet ................................. 327
Described................. 129, 137, 162
Drawing ................................... 431
Graphics........................... 419, 562
949

Library .............................885, 898
Meshing ...................................451
Moments for reinforced concrete
slabs .....................................137
Pressure loads ..........222, 495, 540
Reverse plate direction.............467
Steel connection design ..815, 817,
835, 885, 898
Stress........................................562
Text ..........................................258
Wood-Armer method...............137
Point ...............................................74
Pointer............................................74
Poisson's ratio ..............................194
Polar coordinates..................397, 399
Portal frame builder .....................295
Prescribed node displacements ....209
Described .................................209
Graphics ...........................477, 561
Text ..........................................266
Pressure ........................................222
See area loads...........................511
See plate pressure.....222, 495, 540
Prestress .......................................220
See member prestress loads .....220
Pre-tension ...................................218
Principal angle .............................175
Print preview................................878
See output ................................867
Printing.........................................867
See output ................................867
Problem size limits.........................47
Program Manager...........................32
Property panels.............................402
ProSteel ........................101, 103, 106
Purlins ..........................................298
Q
Query
Analysis results ........................576
Member properties...................414
950
Node properties ....................... 410

R
Radio buttons................................. 77
Rational buckling analysis........... 675
Reactions ..................................... 620
Described................................. 620
Diagrams.................................. 561
Sign convention ....................... 137
Real-time ..................................... 595
Redraw......................................... 579
Region.......................................... 311
Registering SPACE GASS ...... 32, 60
Reinforcement ..... 137, 852, 885, 900
Relative coordinates............. 397, 399
Removing crossed member nodes459
Removing intermediate nodes ..... 458
Renderer... 48, 53, 340, 382, 402, 562
Renumbering ............................... 548
Load cases ............................... 548
Members .................................. 470
Nodes....................................... 470
Repeat last command................... 616
Reports......................................... 867
See output ................................ 867
Residual loading .......................... 641
Restraints ..................................... 170
Results ......................................... 690
Buckling analysis..................... 690
Concrete column design .......... 863
Dynamic response analysis...... 672
Static analysis .......................... 652
Reverse member direction ........... 466
Reverse plate direction ................ 467
Revit Structure..... 101, 103, 106, 118
Right hand orthogonal ................. 130
Index
Right hand screw rule ..................137
Rigid diaphram.............................196
Rigid offset ..................................205
Risa-3D ........................................103
ROBOT ........................................103
Rotate ...........................................437
Rotational inertia..........................230
Rotational restraint.......................733
S
SAP2000 ......................................103
Saving a job ...................................80
Scale.............................................445
Scales ...........................................584
Scissor lift ....................................196
Scripts ............................................91
Scroll bars ......................................77
Scrolling.........................................96
SDNF file .............................101, 103
Sea loads ..............................247, 516
Seats .............................815, 817, 835
Secant matrix ...............................641
Section check ...............................774
Section properties.........129, 154, 424
Angle sections..................175, 192
Area of section .........................175
Described .................................175
Flipping a section.............175, 190
Graphics ...................................424
Library .............................885, 894
Map file....................................106
Moment of inertia ....................175
Principal angle .........................175
Section mark ............................175
Shape builder ...........................180
Shear area.................................175
Source ......................................175
Tee sections..............................191
Text ..........................................260
Torsion constant.......................175
Security ..........................................14
See Hardware lock............... 14, 31

Selecting nodes and members...... 369
Selection window ........................ 369
Self mass.............................. 230, 655
Self weight................................... 224
Described................................. 224
Graphics........................... 498, 561
Text.......................................... 273
Sentinel protection installer ........... 32
Serviceability check..................... 755
SG file............................................ 80
SG.INI............................................ 33
Shading .......................................... 39
Shape builder ............... 175, 180, 414
Shear area .................................... 175
Shear check.................................. 774
Shear forces ................................. 620
Described................................. 620
Diagrams.................................. 561
Sign convention ....................... 137
Shear wall .................................... 196
Shielding...................................... 311
Shortcuts ........................................ 96
Sidesway...................................... 713
Sign conventions.......................... 137
Analysis ................................... 137
Bending moment diagrams........ 39
Concrete column design .......... 852
Sign of the results ........................ 666
Site factor..................................... 666
Site subsoil category .................... 666
Skew angle................................... 154
See direction angle .......... 154, 162
Slave node.................................... 196
Slenderness ratio.......................... 743
SmartPlant4D............................... 103
Snap ..................................... 340, 389
Solvers
Paradise.................... 641, 655, 684
Watcom.................... 641, 655, 684
Wavefront ................ 641, 655, 684
951

Sound .............................................39
Spectral loads ...............................233
Described .................................233
Editor .......................................237
Library .............................885, 901
Spectral curve multiplier..........666
Text ..........................................277
Spring stiffness.............................170
SRSS ............................................666
STAAD ........................................103
Stability analysis ..........................675
See buckling analysis...............675
Stabilizing nodes..................144, 641
Standard shapes............................414
Starting SPACE GASS ..................64
Static analysis...............617, 618, 641
Analysis type............................641
Buckling...................................631
Buckling messages...................641
Compression-only members ....641
Damping ..........................626, 641
Errors .......................................692
Iterations per load step .............641
Load cases................................641
Load stepping...................626, 641
Non-linear effects ....................641
Optimization ............................641
Results......................652, 931, 946
Tension-only members ............641
Worked example ......................903
Static load to mass conversion .....508
Status line.......................................71
Status report ...........................95, 883
Steel connection design................815
Described .................................815
Designing and checking...........835
Drawings..........................817, 835
Exporting .........................817, 835
Importing .................................835
Input.........................................817
Load cases........................817, 835
Minimum design actions..817, 835
952
Preferences .............................. 848

Reports..................................... 845
Steel member design.................... 757
Check mode ............................. 757
Combined stress ratio .............. 743
Described......................... 707, 713
Design mode.................... 743, 757
Effective lengths.............. 678, 713
Errors ....................................... 811
Flange restraints....................... 733
Grouping.................. 713, 727, 758
Input......... 699, 701, 707, 710, 712
Load cases ............................... 743
Load factor............................... 743
Member check ......................... 774
Results ............................. 774, 969
Section check........................... 774
Shear check.............................. 774
Sign convention ....................... 726
Tee sections ............................. 742
Text.......................................... 278
Worked example...................... 961
Step file........................ 101, 103, 106
CIMSteel/2 file ........ 101, 103, 106
IFC file..................... 101, 103, 106
Stiffeners...................... 815, 817, 835
Stiffness matrix... 129, 144, 638, 640,
641, 655
Strength grade.............................. 713
Stress ratio ................................... 743
Stresses ................................ 561, 562
Members .................................. 561
Plates........................................ 562
Stretch.......................................... 443
StruCAD ...................... 101, 103, 106
Structure wizard........................... 291
Sub load number .......... 211, 213, 216
Subdivide ..................................... 449
Subsets ......................................... 590
See filters ................................. 590
Supports ....................................... 170
Index
T
Tangent matrix .............................641
Tapered Members ........................463
Tee sections..................191, 742, 894
Tekla Structures ...........101, 103, 106
Temperature change.....................218
Tension-only and compression-only
effects.......................................624
Tension-only members154, 624, 626,
641, 655
Terminator ...................................281
Terrain category ...........................311
Text boxes......................................77
Text display area ............................68
Text editor....................................251
Text file........................................282
Errors .......................................282
Exporting .................................251
Format................................37, 252
Importing .................................251
Worked example ......................287
Text reports ..................................867
See output ................................867
Textures .......................................611
Thermal loads...............................218
Described .................................218
Graphics ...........................489, 561
Text ..........................................270
Title bar..........................................68
Toolbars .........................................68
Customizing ...............................53
Top flange ....................................707
Topography ..................................311
Torsion constant...........................175
Torsions .......................................620
Described .................................620
Diagrams..................................561
Sign convention .......................137
Translational inertia .....................230
Transparency................................613
Trapezoidal loads .........................213
Triangular loads ........................... 213

U
Units............... 39, 148, 253, 852, 894
Unstable equilibrium ................... 631
Updating frame member sizes ..... 753
................................................. 399
Using the mouse ............................ 74
Utilization ratio............................ 817
V
Varying plate pressure loads........ 540
Vehicle library ..................... 526, 902
Vertical angle............................... 595
Vertical axis........................... 39, 595
Vertical direction ......................... 666
View............................................. 561
Diagrams.................................. 561
Member properties................... 551
Members .................................. 550
Node properties ....................... 551
Nodes....................................... 550
Plate contours .......................... 562
Steel connection drawings ....... 817
View manager.............................. 599
View results ................................. 867
See output ................................ 867
View results in XY or XZ plane .. 560
View selector ............................... 595
Viewpoint .................................... 595
Viewports..................................... 408
Views ..................................... 96, 593
Voids............................................ 852
Von Mises Stress ......................... 137
W
Watcom solver ............. 641, 655, 684
Wave loads .......................... 247, 516
Wavefront optimizer.... 617, 632, 641
953

Analysis method ......................638
Analysis method in more detail640
Calculating the frontwidth .......639
Wavefront solver..........641, 655, 684
Welcome to SPACE GASS .............1
Welds ...........815, 817, 835, 885, 899
Wind loads ...................................311
Windows ........................................80
Wood-Armer Method...................137
Worked examples.........................955
Bill of materials .......................955
Cable analysis ..................995, 999
Centre of gravity ......................955
Dynamic frequency analysis ....956
Dynamic response analysis ......957
Frame analysis graphics...........914
Frame analysis input ................920
Frame analysis output ......931, 946
Portal frame analysis................903
954
Portal frame connection design971

Portal frame member design.... 961
Steel connection drawings ....... 817
Working plane ..................... 340, 395
X
XLS file ....................................... 101
See MS-Excel .................. 101, 103
XSteel .......................... 101, 103, 106
Y
Young's modulus ......................... 194
Z
ZIP file......................................... 103
Zoom............................................ 580

SPACE GASS 12 Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SPACE GASS 12 Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Installation and Configuration

Installation and configuration

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Linking to Other Programs

Linking to other programs

Modelling the Structure

Modelling the structure

Text File Input

Text file input

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Portal Frame Builder

Portal frame builder

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Steel Member Design

Steel member design

Steel Connection Design

Steel connection design

Concrete Column Design

Concrete column design

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Importing and exporting

Importing old libraries

Portal Frame Analysis

Portal frame analysis

Portal Frame Member Design

Portal frame member design

Portal Frame Connection Design

Portal frame connection design

Converting Old Jobs

Converting old jobs

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

How to use this manual

This is an example of the SPACE GASS NOTES style and icon.

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

replace the Product or supply its equivalent;

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

supply the service again; or

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Windows XP/Vista/7/8 (Windows 7 or 8 preferred).

Notification of any program modifications or enhancements as they become

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Hardware locks and insurance

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Static, buckling and dynamic analysis.

A new shape builder with shape dragging, snapping, stacking, alignment

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

On-screen notes that can be positioned anywhere on or near your model or

Dimensions that can be added to your model or to individual members or

An attachment tool that you can use to attach external documents,

A view selector showing the current viewpoint. It can also be dragged

Unlimited undo/redo steps.

More detailed infotips when hovering over a node, member or plate.

A new moving loads generator incorporating animated views of the

buttons throughout SPACE GASS that allow to select from load

A new renumbering tool that offers renumbering in three directions

A taper/haunch tool that now subdivides automatically if required.

SPACE GASS 12 User Manual

Textures such as "brickwork", "steel" and "concrete" that can be added to

Gridlines that can be defined and shown graphically in two directions at

Generation of bends of any radius at member intersections. A very useful

A tool for reversing the direction of members. Options for adjusting